Engineering Design and

Graphics with Autodesk®

Inventor™ 2009

James D. Bethune
Boston University

Upper Saddle River, New Jersey

Columbus, Ohio
Library of Congress Control Number: 2008 921 110

Editor in Chief: Vernon Anthony

Acquisitions Editor: Jill Jones-Renger
Editorial Assistant: Dong Greive
Development Editor: Lisa S. Garboski, bookworks publishing services
Project Manager: Louise N. Sette
AV Project Manager: Janet Portisch
Production Supervision: Lisa S. Garboski, bookworks publishing services
Art Director: Diane Ernsberger
Cover Designer: Jason Moore
Cover Image: Super Stock
Operations Specialist: Deidra M. Schwartz
Director of Marketing: David Gesell
Marketing Coordinator: Alicia Dysert

This book was set by Aptara, Inc. It was printed and bound by Bind-Rite Graphics. The cover was printed
by Coral Graphic Services, Inc.

Certain images and material contained in this text were reproduced with the permission of
Autodesk, Inc. © 2008. All rights reserved. Autodesk, AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor, and Inventor
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the U.S.A. and certain other countries.

Disclaimer:
The publication is designed to provide tutorial information about AutoCAD® and/or other Autodesk
computer programs. Every effort has been made to make this publication complete and as accurate
as possible. The reader is expressly cautioned to use any and all precautions necessary, and to take
appropriate steps to avoid hazards, when engaging in the activities described herein.

Neither the author nor the publisher makes any representations or warranties of any kind, with respect to
the materials set forth in this publication, express or implied, including without limitation any warranties
of fitness for a particular purpose or merchantability. Nor shall the author or the publisher be liable for any
special, consequential, or exemplary damages resulting, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, from the
reader’s use of, or reliance upon, this material or subsequent revisions of this material.

Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 07458.
Pearson Prentice Hall. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. This publication
is protected by Copyright and permission should be obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited
reproduction, storage in a retrieval system, or transmission in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or likewise. For information regarding permission(s),
write to: Rights and Permissions Department

Pearson Prentice Hall™ is a trademark of Pearson Education, Inc.

Pearson® is a registered trademark of Pearson plc.
Prentice Hall® is a registered trademark of Pearson Education, Inc.

Pearson Education Ltd., London Pearson Education Australia Pty. Limited

Pearson Education Singapore Pte. Ltd. Pearson Education North Asia Ltd., Hong Kong
Pearson Education Canada, Inc. Pearson Educación de Mexico, S. A. de C.V.
Pearson Education—Japan Pearson Education Malaysia Pte. Ltd.

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
ISBN-13: 978-0-13-515762-6
ISBN-10: 0-13-515762-5
THE NEW AUTODESK DESIGN INSTITUTE PRESS SERIES
Pearson/Prentice Hall has formed an alliance with Autodesk® to develop textbooks and other
course materials that address the skills, methodology, and learning pedagogy for the industries
that are supported by the Autodesk® Design Institute (ADI) software products. The Autodesk
Design Institute is a comprehensive software program that assists educators in teaching
technological design.

Features of the Autodesk Design Institute Press Series

JOB SKILLS—Coverage of computer-aided drafting job skills, compiled through research of
industry associations, job websites, college course descriptions, and the Occupational Informa-
tion Network database has been integrated throughout the ADI Press books.

PROFESSIONAL and INDUSTRY ASSOCIATIONS INVOLVEMENT—These books are

written in consultation with and reviewed by professional associations to ensure they meet the
needs of industry employers.
 FEATURES OF ENGINEERING DESIGN AND GRAPHICS
WITH AUTODESK® INVENTOR™ 2009
This text presents a modern approach to using Inventor. That is, it addresses advances in technology and software evolution
and introduces commands and procedures that reflect a modern, efficient use of Inventor 2009. Features include:

A “Getting Started” chapter at the beginning of the book allows users

to get up to speed in no time to create and even plot Inventor
drawings. Quick Start topics and concepts are linked to corresponding
Getting Started chapters later in the book, providing a motivational preview and
allowing the user to delve into detailed topics of instruction as they
choose, at their own pace.
Chapter
Objectives
• Learn how to create drawings.
• Understand the different drawing formats.
• Learn how to create a sketch.
• Draw a solid model.
• Draw holes.
• Draw angular shapes.

Chapter Chapter Objectives, a bulleted list of learning

Objectives objectives for each chapter, provide users with a
• Introduce the 2D sketch commands.
• Show how to combine 2D sketch commands to form shapes.
road map of important concepts and practices
• Show how to edit 2D shapes.
that will be introduced in the chapter.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter introduces most of the commands found in the options of the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
These commands are used to create two-dimensional (2D) sketches. Inventor models are usually

Key Terms are bold and italic within the running text and defined in
the margin to help students understand and use the language of the
een should change and look like the screen shown in Figure 1-4. The Inven-
cludes a set of pull-down menus, the Standard toolbar, and the Command pull-down menu: A menu
computer-aided drafting world.
he screen. The browser area is at the lower left of the screen and contains a that is displayed by picking a
he drawing was created. The browser area information is used to edit models name on the menu bar.
ation and after they are created.

A New to Inventor 2009 icon flags features that

A new feature added to Inventor 2009 is the Viewcube. The Viewcube is located
NEW
to Inventor
per right corner of the screen. It is used to change the view orientation of the drawing are new to the 2009 version of the Inventor
2009 standard orthographic views (2D views) to isometric views (3D views).
The panel bar contains command tools used to create drawings. The tool listing w software, creating a quick “study guide” for
according to the operating mode selected.
instructors who need to familiarize themselves
Exercise 1-1: Sketching a 30 × 40 Rectangle
1. Select the Line tool on the 2D Sketch Panel bar. with the newest features of the software to
I d d li d h i di
prepare for teaching the course. Additional
details about these new features can be found in
the Online Instructor’s Manual.

iv
 TIP, NOTE, and FOR MORE DETAILS boxes highlight additional
Notice how the lines move when the dimension values are entered. helpful information for the student.
TIP
FOR MORE The section on constraints in Chapter 2 shows how to constrain a 2D shape during
D E T A I L S construction.

4 Cli k th i ht f th Vi b

Exercise 1-10: Saving the Drawing

Exercises throughout the chapters provide step-
1 Click the File heading at the top left corner of the screen.
by-step walk-through activities for the student,
2 Select the Save Copy As . . . option. allowing immediate practice and reinforcement
3 Enter the file name; click Save.
See Figure 1-34.
of newly learned skills.
New view
orientation

18 Chapter 1 Getting Started

End-of-Chapter material, easily located by shading on page edges,
SUMMARY provides:
This chapter introduced the Inventor drawing screen and its how to access and use the features of d
components, including the Standard toolbar, pull-down strating how to set up, create, and save • Summaries
menus, the panel bar, and the browser area. It also explained create a solid model.
• Chapter Test Questions
• Chapter Projects
CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS
Multiple Choice to help students check their own understanding of important chapter
1. Which of the following formats is used to create Inventor
sketches?
4. Which of the following methods i
metric view?
concepts.
a. Weldment.iam a. Use the Viewcube
b. Standard.ipt b. Right-click the mouse and

v
 INSTRUCTOR’S RESOURCES

An Online Instructor’s Manual is available to qualified instructors for downloading. To access

supplementary materials online, instructors need to request an instructor access code. Go to
www.preasonhighered.com/irc, where you can register for an instructor access code. Within
48 hours after registering, you will receive a confirming e-mail including an instructor access
code. Once you have received your code, go to the site and log on for full instructions on down-
loading the materials you wish to use.

vi
Preface

This book introduces Autodesk® Inventor™ 2009 and shows how to use Autodesk Inventor to cre-
ate and document drawings and designs. The book puts heavy emphasis on engineering drawings
and on drawing components used in engineering drawings such as springs, bearings, cams, and
gears. It shows how to create drawings using many different formats such as .ipt, .iam, ipn, and
.idw for both English and metric units. It explains how to create drawings using Design Acceler-
ator and how to extract parts from the Content Center.
All topics are presented using a step-by-step format so that the reader can work directly from
the text to the screen. There are many easy-to-understand labeled illustrations. The book contains
many sample problems that demonstrate the subject being discussed. Each chapter contains a va-
riety of projects that serve to reinforce the material just presented and allow the reader to practice
the techniques described.
Chapters 1 and 2 present 2D sketching commands and the Extrude command. These chap-
ters serve as an introduction to the program.
Chapter 3 demonstrates the commands needed to create 3D models, including Shell, Rib,
Split, Loft, Sweep, and Coil. Work points, work axes, and work planes are explained and demon-
strated.
Chapter 4 shows how to create orthographic views from 3D models. The creation of isomet-
ric views, sectional views, and auxiliary views is also covered.
Chapter 5 shows how to create assembly drawings using both the bottom-up and the top-
down process. The chapter includes presentation drawings and exploded isometric drawings with
title blocks, parts lists, revision blocks, and tolerances blocks. There is an extensive step-by-step
example that shows how to create an animated assembly, that is, a drawing that moves on the
screen.
Chapter 6 covers threads and fasteners. Drawing conventions and callouts are defined for
both inch and metric threads. The chapter shows how to calculate thread lengths and how to
choose the appropriate fastener from Inventor’s Content Center. The Content Center also in-
cludes an extensive listing of nuts, setscrews, washers, and rivets.
Chapter 7 shows how to apply dimensions to drawings. Both ANSI and ISO standards are
demonstrated. Different styles of dimensioning, including ordinate, baseline, and Inventor’s Hole
Table, are presented. Applying dimension to a drawing is considered an important skill, so many
examples and sample problems are included.
Chapter 8 is an extensive discussion of tolerancing, including geometric tolerances. The
chapter first shows how to use Inventor to apply tolerances to a drawing. The chapter then shows
how to calculate tolerances in various design situations. Positional tolerances for both linear and
geometric applications are included. The chapter introduces the Limits and Fits options of the
Design Accelerator tool. The information contained in this option eliminates the need for an ap-
pendix that includes fit tables.
Chapter 9 shows how to draw springs using the Standard.ipt format and the Coil command.
It also shows how to draw springs using the Design Accelerator. Compression, extension, tor-
sion, and Belleville springs are included.
Chapter 10 shows how to draw shafts using Design Accelerator. Chamfers, retaining rings,
retaining ring grooves, keys and keyways, splines, pins, O-rings, and O-ring grooves are covered.
The chapter contains many exercise problems.
Chapter 11 shows how to match bearings to specific shafts using the Content Center. Plain,
ball, and thrust bearings are presented. An explanation of tolerances between a shaft and bearing
bore and between the bearing’s outside diameter and the assembly housing is given. Both ANSI
and ISO standards are presented.
Chapter 12 emphasizes how to draw gears and how to mount them into assembly drawings.
Spur, bevel, and worm gears are introduced. The chapter shows how to create gear hubs with
setscrews, and keyways with keys, and how to draw assembly drawings that include gears. There
are two new extensive assembly exercise problems.

vii
viii Preface

Chapter 13 shows how to draw basic sheet metal parts including features such as tabs, reliefs,
flanges, cuts, holes, and hole patterns.
Chapter 14 shows how to create and draw weldments. Only fillet and groove welds are cov-
ered.
Chapter 15 shows how to design and draw cams. Displacement diagrams and different types
of followers are discussed.

Acknowledgments
I would like to thank the following individuals who reviewed this title: J. C. Malitzke, Moraine
Valley Community College; Rebecca Rosenbauer, Lafayette College; Antigone Sharris, Triton
College; Nancy E. Study, Virginia State University; and Marsha Walton, Finger Lakes Commu-
nity College.
Thanks to the editor, Jill Jones-Renger. Also thanks to Lisa Garboski, project manager.
Thanks to my family: David, Maria, Randy, Lisa, Hannah, Wil, Madison, Jack, and Luke, and
now Sam and Ben.
A special thanks to Cheryl.
James D. Bethune
Boston University
STYLE CONVENTIONS IN ENGINEERING DESIGN AND GRAPHICS WITH AUTODESK®
INVENTOR™ 2009

Text Element Example

Key terms—Bold and italic on first men- Views are created by placing viewport ob-
tion (first letter lowercase) in the body of jects in the paper space layout.
the text. Brief glossary definition in
margin following first mention.
Inventor commands—Bold and upper- Start the LINE command.
case.
Toolbar names, menu items and dialog The Layer Manager dialog box The
box names—Bold and follow capitaliza-
File pull-down menu
tion convention in Inventor toolbar or
pull-down menu (generally first letter
capitalized).
Toolbar buttons and dialog box Choose the Line tool from the Draw toolbar.
controls/buttons/input items—Bold and
Choose the Symbols and Arrows tab in the
follow capitalization convention of the
Modify Dimension Style dialog box.
name of the item or the name shown in the
Inventor tooltip. Choose the New Layer button in the Layer
Properties Manager dialog box.
In the Line and Arrows tab, set the Arrow
size: to .125.

ix
This page intentionally left blank
Contents

Chapter 1 Getting Started Chamfer 75

Face Draft 77
Chapter Objectives 1 Split 78
Introduction 1 Mirror 81
Creating a First Sketch 2 Rectangular Pattern 81
Creating a Solid Model 6 Circular Pattern 82
Sample Problem SP1-1 12 Sketch Planes 83
Drawing Angular Shapes 16 Editing a 3D Model 86
Summary 18 Default Planes and Axes 89
Chapter Test Questions 18 Work Planes 90
Chapter Project 19 Work Plane Help 90
Sample Problem SP3-1 91
Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching Hiding Work Planes 93
Restoring a Work Plane 93
Chapter Objectives 21 Angled Work Planes 93
Introduction 21 Offset Work Planes 94
2D Sketch Panel 21 Work Points 95
Line 21 Work Axes 97
Spline 25 Ribs (Webs) 98
Circle 26 Loft 99
Ellipse 27 Sweep 100
Arc 29 Coil 102
Rectangle 30 Model Material 103
Fillet 32 Summary 103
Chamfer 32 Chapter Test Questions 103
Polygon 35 Chapter Projects 105
Mirror 37
Rectangular Pattern 38
Circular Pattern 40 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views
Offset 41
Extend 41 Chapter Objectives 117
Trim 42 Introduction 117
Move 42 Fundamentals of Orthographic Views 117
Rotate 45 Normal Surfaces 117
Constraints 46 Hidden Lines 118
Show Constraints 48 Precedence of Lines 120
Editing a Sketch 49 Slanted Surfaces 120
Text 51 Compound Lines 121
Sample Problem SP2-1 52 Oblique Surfaces 121
Summary 55 Rounded Surfaces 122
Chapter Test Questions 55 Orthographic Views with Inventor 123
Chapter Project 57 Isometric Views 128
Section Views 128
Offset Section Views 130
Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models Aligned Section Views 131
Chapter Objectives 65 Detail Views 132
Introduction 65 Break Views 133
Extrude 66 Multiple Section Views 134
Revolve 68 Auxiliary Views 134
Holes 69 Summary 136
Shell 71 Chapter Test Questions 138
Fillet 73 Chapter Projects 138
xi
xii Contents

Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings Counterbores 259

Determining the Counterbore Depth 259
Chapter Objectives 159 Determining the Thread Length 259
Introduction 159 Determining the Depth of the Hole 259
Bottom-Up and Top-Down Assemblies 159 Determining the Counterbore’s Diameter 260
Starting an Assembly Drawing 159 Drawing Fasteners Not Included in the Content Center 261
Degrees of Freedom 161 Sample Problem SP6-1 000
Moving Components and Rotating Components 163 Determining the Minimum Thread
Constraint 163 Length Required 263
Sample Assembly Problem SP5-1 169 Washers 266
Presentation Drawings 171 Inserting Washers onto a Fastener 266
Animation 174 Setscrews 269
Isometric Drawings 175 Rivets 272
Assembly Numbers 177 Sample Problem SP6-1 273
Parts List 179 Summary 285
Naming Parts 180 Chapter Test Questions 285
Title Block 182 Chapter Projects 286
Subassemblies 183
Drawing Sheets 188
Other Types of Drawing Blocks 190 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing
Release Blocks 190 Chapter Objectives 309
Revision Blocks 191 Introduction 309
ECOs 193 Terminology and Conventions—ANSI 310
Drawing Notes 193 Some Common Terms 310
Top-Down Assemblies 194 Some Dimensioning Conventions 310
Aligning the Assembly 207 Some Common Errors to Avoid 311
Presentations 208 Creating Drawing Dimensions 312
Editing a Part within an Assembly Drawing 209 Adding Centerlines to Holes 313
Patterning Components 213 Overall Dimensions 315
Mirroring Components 214 Vertical Dimensions 315
Copying Components 216 Positioning Dimension Text 316
Summary 217 Dimensioning Holes 316
Chapter Test Questions 217 Drawing Scale 318
Chapter Projects 218 Units 319
Aligned Dimensions 320
Radius and Diameter Dimensions 322
Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners
Dimensioning Holes 324
Chapter Objectives 237 Dimensioning Individual Holes 324
Introduction 237 Sample Problem SP7-1 325
Thread Terminology 238 Dimensioning Hole Patterns 325
Thread Callouts—Metric Units 238 Using Symbols with Dimensions 326
Thread Callouts—ANSI Unified Screw Dimensioning Counterbored, Countersunk
Threads 239 Holes 328
Thread Representations 240 Angular Dimensions 330
Internal Threads 241 Avoiding Overdimensioning 330
Threaded Blind Holes 242 Ordinate Dimensions 331
Drawing a Threaded Blind Hole—Metric 243 Baseline Dimensions 334
Drawing a Blind Hole—ANSI Hole Tables 335
Threads 244 Locating Dimensions 337
Creating Threaded Holes Using the Hole Fillets and Rounds 338
Command 244 Rounded Shapes—Internal 338
Standard Fasteners 246 Rounded Shapes—External 339
Sizing a Threaded Hole to Accept a Screw 247 Irregular Surfaces 339
Screws and Nuts 251 Polar Dimensions 340
Calculating the Screw Thread Length 252 Chamfers 341
Types of Threaded Fasteners 255 Knurling 341
Flat Head Screws—Countersunk Holes 256 Keys and Keyseats 342
 Contents xiii

Symbols and Abbreviations 343 Straightness 400

Symmetrical and Centerline Symbols 343 Straightness (RFS and MMC) 401
Dimensioning to a Point 344 Circularity 403
Dimensioning Sectional Views 344 Cylindricity 403
Dimensioning Orthographic Views 345 Geometric Tolerances Using Inventor 404
Dimensions Using Centerlines 345 Positional Tolerance 407
3D Dimensions 346 Creating More Complex Geometric Tolerance
Sample Problem SP7-2 346 Drawing Callouts 409
Sample Problem SP7-3 349 Tolerances of Orientation 410
Summary 351 Datums 410
Chapter Test Questions 351 Perpendicularity 411
Chapter Projects 353 Parallelism 413
Angularity 413
Profiles 414
Chapter 8 Tolerancing
Runouts 415
Chapter Objectives 367 Positional Tolerances 416
Introduction 367 Virtual Condition 418
Direct Tolerance Methods 367 Calculating the Virtual Condition for a Shaft 418
Tolerance Expressions 368 Calculating the Virtual Condition for a Hole 418
Understanding Plus and Minus Tolerances 369 Floating Fasteners 418
Creating Plus and Minus Tolerances 369 Sample Problem SP8-4 419
Limit Tolerances 372 Sample Problem SP8-5 420
Angular Tolerances 374 Fixed Fasteners 420
Standard Tolerances 376 Sample Problem SP8-6 421
Double Dimensioning 376 Design Problems 422
Chain Dimensions and Baseline Dimensions 377 Summary 424
Baseline Dimensions Created Using Inventor 378 Chapter Test Questions 425
Tolerance Studies 379 Chapter Projects 426
Calculating the Maximum Length of A 379
Calculating the Minimum Length of A 380
Rectangular Dimensions 380
Chapter 9 Springs
Hole Locations 380 Chapter Objectives 459
Choosing a Shaft for a Toleranced Hole 381 Introduction 459
For Linear Dimensions and Tolerances 382 Compression Springs 459
Sample Problem SP8-1 382 Coil Ends 461
Sample Problem SP8-2 383 Extension Springs 466
Nominal Sizes 384 Torsion Springs 473
Standard Fits (Metric Sizes) 384 Belleville Springs 477
Clearance Fits 384 Springs in Assembly Drawings 479
Transitional Fits 384 Summary 483
Interference Fits 384 Chapter Test Questions 483
Using Inventor’s Design Accelerator 385 Chapter Projects 484
Hole and Shaft Basis 385
Visual Presentations of the Hole and Shaft
Tolerances 387
Chapter 10 Shafts
Standard Fits (Inch Values) 388 Chapter Objectives 497
Preferred and Standard Sizes 388 Introduction 497
Surface Finishes 389 Uniform Shafts and Chamfers 497
Surface Control Symbols 389 Shafts and Retaining Rings 501
Available Lay Symbols 394 Shafts and Keys 507
Design Problems 394 Square Keys 507
Floating Condition 396 Pratt and Whitney Keys 513
Fixed Condition 397 Woodruff Keys 579
Designing a Hole Given a Fastener Size 398 Shafts with Splines 522
Geometric Tolerances 398 Collars 528
Tolerances of Form 399 Adding Collars to a Shaft Assembly—Pins 530
Flatness 399 O-Rings 533
xiv Contents

Drawing Shafts and Pins Using Design Accelerator 537 Reliefs 631
Summary 540 Holes 632
Chapter Test Questions 540 Corners 632
Chapter Projects 541 Cuts 632
Cuts Through Normal Surfaces 634
Hole Patterns 635
Chapter 11 Bearings Flat Patterns 636
Chapter Objectives 555 Punch Tool 636
Introduction 555 Summary 643
Plain Bearings 555 Chapter Test Questions 643
Nomenclature 556 Chapter Projects 644
Shaft Tolerances 556
Shaft/Bearing Interface 558
Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings
The Hole in the U-Bracket 558
Ball Bearings 560 Chapter Objectives 653
Thrust Bearings 564 Introduction 653
Summary 567 Fillet Welds 653
Chapter Test Questions 567 Intermittent Fillet Welds 658
Chapter Projects 568 Weld Symbols 659
All Around 661
Weldments—Groove Welds 663
Chapter 12 Gears
Sample Problem SP14-1 664
Chapter Objectives 577 Summary 665
Introduction 577 Chapter Test Questions 666
Gear Terminology 578 Chapter Project 666
Gear Formulas 579
Drawing Gears Using Design Accelerator 579
Chapter 15 Cams
Gear Hubs 581
Gear Ratios 586 Chapter Objectives 671
Gear Trains 587 Introduction 671
Gear Direction 588 Displacement Diagrams 671
Gears with Keyways 588 Drawing a Cam Using Inventor 672
Gear Assemblies 591 Sample Problem SP15-1 676
Bevel Gears 597 Animating Cams and Followers 677
Supports for Bevel Gears 603 Summary 683
Worm Gears 605 Chapter Test Questions 683
Supports for Worm Gears 607 Chapter Projects 684
Summary 608
Chapter Test Questions 608 Appendix 691
Chapter Projects 609
Index 701
Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings
Chapter Objectives 625
Introduction 625
Sheet Metal Drawings 625
Bend Radii 629
Flanges 629
Tabs 631
Getting Started 1
Chapter
Objectives
• Learn how to create drawings.
• Understand the different drawing formats.
• Learn how to create a sketch.
• Draw a solid model.
• Draw holes.
• Draw angular shapes.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter presents a step-by-step introduction to Inventor 2009. When the program is first ac-
cessed, the Open dialog box will appear. See Figure 1-1. The Open dialog box appears, so that if dialog box: A temporary
you want to return to a project you are working on, you can access it directly. Click the X box in window that appears for
the upper right corner to close the Open dialog box so that you can start a new drawing. entering user input.
There are seven options for creating drawings using four different types of files. The files are
categorized using four different extensions. The extensions are defined as follows.

Figure 1-1
2 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Click here to change

the background color.

Click here to start

a new drawing.

Click here.

Figure 1-2

.ipt: part files for either 3D model drawings or sheet-metal drawings. These files are for
individual parts.
.iam: assembly drawings and weldments. Assembly drawings are formed by combining
.ipt files.
.ipn: presentation files. These files are used to create exploded assembly drawings.
.idw: drawing layout files. These files are used to create orthographic views from already
created assembly and presentation files.
The first screen to appear will have a blue background, and lines will appear in green. The
background color was changed to white and the line color to black to help make the illustrations
easier to read.
To change the background color:
1. Click the Tools heading at the top of the screen and select Application Options.
2. Select the Presentation color scheme, click Apply, click Close.
3. Click the New tool to start a new drawing. Figure 1-3 shows the New File dialog box.
There are several different drawing standards listed. This book uses the ANSI (American Na-
tional Standards Institute) and ISO (International Standards Organization) standards. These
drawing standards will be covered in detail in the chapters on dimensions and tolerances. The
Standard (mm).ipt format will be used to create the first drawing.

CREATING A FIRST SKETCH

This section shows how to set up, create, and save a first drawing. The intent is to walk through a
simple drawing in order to start to understand how Inventor functions.
1. Select the Metric tab from the New File dialog box.
2. Select the Standard (mm).ipt tool, then OK.
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 3

New drawing

Click here.

Figure 1-3

The drawing screen should change and look like the screen shown in Figure 1-4. The Inven-
tor drawing screen includes a set of pull-down menus, the Standard toolbar, and the Command pull-down menu: A menu
toolbar at the top of the screen. The browser area is at the lower left of the screen and contains a that is displayed by picking a
running list of how the drawing was created. The browser area information is used to edit models name on the menu bar.
both during their creation and after they are created.

Pull-down menus

Standard toolbar

Viewcube
Commands

Drawing
area
Panel bar

Browser area

Figure 1-4
4 Chapter 1 Getting Started

A new feature added to Inventor 2009 is the Viewcube. The Viewcube is located in the up-
NEW
per right corner of the screen. It is used to change the view orientation of the drawing from the
to Inventor
2009 standard orthographic views (2D views) to isometric views (3D views).
The panel bar contains command tools used to create drawings. The tool listing will change
according to the operating mode selected.

Exercise 1-1: Sketching a 30 × 40 Rectangle

1. Select the Line tool on the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
Inventor does not use command line prompts, and there is no coordinate value input
or axis reference. All work is done on the drawing screen. Each model generates its own
set of reference values.
Lines are first sketched, that is, drawn without dimensions, and then modified to the
required size. See Figure 1-5.

Indicates a vertical line.

Indicates line is
perpendicular to first line.

A dotted line will appear

Figure 1-5 when the two points are aligned.

2. Sketch a vertical line anywhere on the screen. Start from the bottom and sketch upward.
As the line is drawn, if it is vertical, a small symbol will appear next to the line indi-
cating that the line is vertical.
3. Left-click the mouse and continue, sketching a horizontal line.
As the line is sketched a perpendicular symbol will appear if the horizontal line is
perpendicular to the vertical line.
4. Left-click the mouse and continue, sketching a second vertical line.
As the second vertical line is sketched two parallel symbols will appear, one next to
the line being sketched and the second next to the first vertical line, indicating that the
lines are parallel.
5. Sketch the second vertical line equal in length to the first vertical line.
6. Sketch a second horizontal line and locate its endpoint on the starting point of the first
vertical line.
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 5

When the two points are aligned the cursor dot will change its color, and a small
arclike symbol will appear. See Figure 1-6.

Indicates lines meet at

the same point.

Figure 1-6

7. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Exercise 1-2: Deleting Lines

Lines and other objects may be deleted from a sketch.
1. Select the line to be deleted.
2. Right-click the mouse.
A dialog box will appear on the screen. See Figure 1-7.

Select here.

Figure 1-7

3. Select the Delete option.

The line will disappear.

Exercise 1-3: Undoing a Command

The UNDO command will undo the last command entered.
1. Click on the Undo tool located at the top of the screen on the Standard toolbar.
The line will reappear.

Exercise 1-4: Sizing the Rectangle

1. Select the General Dimension tool from the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
NEW
2. Select the left vertical line, then move the created dimension to the left of the object and to Inventor
2009
double-click the left mouse button.
A small dialog box will appear containing the distance on the sketched line. See
Figure 1-8.
6 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Rectangular
sketch

Enter the desired 30 value. The vertical sides of the rectangle will change to 30 mm.
Figure 1-8

3. Press the <Del> key to remove the value, or start to type the new value. Type 30, the re-
NEW quired length.
to Inventor
2009 4. Click on the check mark on the dialog box.
The line will change length.
5. Repeat the procedure for one of the horizontal lines, changing the sketched value to 40.
6. Right-click the mouse button and select the Done option.
Figure 1-9 shows the resulting 30 × 40 rectangle.

Figure 1-9

CREATING A SOLID MODEL

The 30  40 rectangle sketched in the previous section will now be used to create a 3D solid
model.

Exercise 1-5: Changing to an Isometric View

1. Move the cursor to the Viewcube.
A series of icons will appear.
2. Click the icon that looks like a house.
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 7

Viewcube

Figure 1-10

The screen will rotate into an isometric view orientation. Use the center mouse button to
zoom the sketch to an acceptable size on the screen. See Figure 1-11.

An isometric view Click

of the rectangle here.

Click here to
rotate view 90˚.

Figure 1-11

Rotate the mouse wheel to zoom the drawing in and out. Hold the mouse wheel down to

TIP move the drawing around the screen.

Exercise 1-6: Creating a Solid Model

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. See Figure 1-12.
The panel bar will change to a listing of Part Features tools. See Figure 1-13.
2. Select the Extrude tool from the panel bar.
8 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Right-click to access the

part features panel.

Click here.

Figure 1-12

A new set of commands will appear.

The grid will disappear.

Figure 1-13

The Extrude dialog box will appear. See Figure 1-14.

Enter value here.

15
Figure 1-14
3. Change the Extents value to 15, then select OK.
Figure 1-14 shows the results.

Exercise 1-7: Locating the Center of a Hole

This section explains how to locate a Ø15 hole in the center of the top surface of the model.
1. Right-click on the top surface of the solid model.
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 9

The surface will change color, confirming that it has been selected. The top surface
is a new sketch plane.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the New Sketch command.
See Figure 1-15.

Right-click
here. Select here.

Figure 1-15

The panel bar will change to 2D Sketch tools, and the screen grid will be aligned
with the top surface of the model.
3. Select the Point, Center Point tool from the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
4. Locate the point near the center of the top surface, then right-click the mouse and select
the Done option.

As the cursor is moved across the top surface, dotted lines will appear when the cursor is

TIP aligned with the midpoints of the edge lines.

5. Select the General Dimension tool from the panel bar.

6. Select the left edge line, then the hole’s center point, and change the dimension value to 20.
See Figure 1-16.

Hole center
point

Figure 1-16
10 Chapter 1 Getting Started

7. Repeat the procedure for the required vertical distance of 15.

8. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
See Figures 1-17 and 1-18.

Figure 1-17

Right-click the mouse.

Select here.

Figure 1-18

Exercise 1-8: Drawing a Ø15 Hole

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. See Figure 1-19.

Right-click.

Click here.

Figure 1-19
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 11

The panel bar will change to Part Features tools.

2. Click the Hole tool.
The Hole dialog box will appear. See Figure 1-20.
Enter the hole's diameter value here.

Select Through All. Figure 1-20

3. Locate the cursor between the hole’s diameter value and the mm symbol shown in the pre-
view box on the Hole dialog box, backspace out the value, and type in 15.
4. Set the Termination for Through All, then click the OK box.
Figure 1-21 shows the resulting model..

Figure 1-21
Exercise 1-9: Saving the Model
1. Click on the File pull-down menu, then select the Save Copy As . . . option.
See Figure 1-22.

Figure 1-22
12 Chapter 1 Getting Started

The Save Copy As dialog box will appear. See Figure 1-23.

Enter file name here.

Figure 1-23

2. Select a directory and file name and save the model.

In this example the model was saved in a directory called Inventor using the file
name BLOCK, TEST.

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP1-1

This section shows how to draw the problem presented in Figure P1-2 in the Chapter Project. The
problem’s dimensions are in inches.
1. Start a new drawing, click the English tab, then select the Standard (in).ipt format.
See Figure 1-24.

Select this tab.

Click here.

Figure 1-24
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 13

2. Sketch the approximate required shape.

See Figure 1-25. Use the parallel and perpendicular screen symbols to make the shape as
accurate as possible.

Sketch the
approximate
shape required.

Figure 1-25

3. Use the General Dimension tool to size the shape.

See Figure 1-26.

Click here.

Use the General

Dimension tool
to size the shape.
Figure 1-26

Notice how the lines move when the dimension values are entered.

TIP
FOR MORE The section on constraints in Chapter 2 shows how to constrain a 2D shape during
D E T A I L S construction.

4. Click the upper right corner of the Viewcube.

The drawing’s orientation will change. See Figure 1-27.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
7. Click the Extrude option and enter a thickness value of 0.500.
See Figure 1-28.
14 Chapter 1 Getting Started

New view
orientation

Figure 1-27
Enter the thickness here.

0.500

Figure 1-28
8. Click OK.
Figure 1-29 shows the resulting shape.

Create a new
sketch plane
on this surface.

Resulting shape
Figure 1-29 Figure 1-30

9. Right-click the mouse and select the New Sketch option.

10. Create a new sketch plane on the front surface of the part. See Figure 1-30.
11. Use the Point, Center Point tool to add hole center points to the part.
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 15

12. Use the General Dimension tool to locate the center points according to the given
dimensions.
13. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
14. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
See Figure 1-31.

Use the Point, Center Point

tool to add hole center points
to the part.
Figure 1-31

15. Select the Hole tool in the Part Features panel.

The Hole dialog box will appear. See Figure 1-32.

Figure 1-32

16. Set the hole’s diameter to 0.500 and the termination to Through All, then click OK.
Figure 1-33 shows the finished drawing.

The finished drawing

Figure 1-33
16 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Exercise 1-10: Saving the Drawing

1 Click the File heading at the top left corner of the screen.
2 Select the Save Copy As . . . option.
3 Enter the file name; click Save.
See Figure 1-34.

New view
orientation

Click here.

Enter file
name here.

Figure 1-34

DRAWING ANGULAR SHAPES

Figure 1-35 shows a shape that includes angles. The General Dimension tool is used to define
angular values.

A shape that includes angles

Figure 1-35

1. Start a new drawing using the Metric Standard (mm).ipt format.

2. Draw an approximate sketch of the shape.
See Figure 1-36.
3. Use the General Dimension tool to start to size the shape.
See Figure 1-37.
4. Use the General Dimension tool to size the angle. Click the horizontal line and the angu-
lar line, then move the cursor away from the lines.
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 17

Use the General Dimension

Sketch the shape. tool to size the shape.

Figure 1-36 Figure 1-37

An angular dimension will appear. See Figure 1-38.

5. Click the angular dimension and enter the required value.
6. Size the second angular side of the shape.
See Figure 1-39.

Click two lines to define the angle. Click two lines to

define the angle.

Enter 30.

Use the General Dimension tool to define the angle.

Figure 1-38 Figure 1-39

7. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

8. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
9. Select Extrude and extrude the shape 10 mm.
See Figure 1-40.

The shape extruded 10 mm.

Figure 1-40
18 Chapter 1 Getting Started

SUMMARY
This chapter introduced the Inventor drawing screen and its how to access and use the features of dialog boxes in demon-
components, including the Standard toolbar, pull-down strating how to set up, create, and save a drawing, and how to
menus, the panel bar, and the browser area. It also explained create a solid model.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which of the following formats is used to create Inventor 4. Which of the following methods is used to create an iso-
sketches? metric view?
a. Weldment.iam a. Use the Viewcube
b. Standard.ipt b. Right-click the mouse and select the Isometric
c. Standard.ipn option
d. ISO.dwg c. Click the View heading on the pull-down menus and
2. The General Dimension tool is used to perform which of select the Orbit option
the following? 5. Where is the Extrude tool located?
a. Add dimensions to a finished drawing a. 2D Sketch Panel
b. Create isometric views b. Part Features panel
c. Revise sketched dimensions to true value dimensions c. Tools pull-down menu
3. Which of the following steps is used to change from the
2D Sketch Panel to the Part Features panel?
a. Right-click the mouse and select the Isometric option
b. Right-click the mouse and select the Constraints
Options
c. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch
option

Matching
Column A Column B
a. Save A 1. The format used to start a new drawing
b. Viewcube 2. Used to change a drawing’s view orientation
c. Standard.ipt 3. Tool used to add thickness to a sketch
d. Extrude 4. Tool used to define the location of hole centers
e. Point, Center Point 5. Tool used to define the name of a drawing

True or False
1. True or False: Sketches are created using the ANSI 4. True or False: The General Dimension tool can be used
(mm).idw format. to define angular dimensions.
2. True or False: The Viewcube is used to change a draw- 5. True or False: During sketching, a small icon will appear
ing’s view orientation. indicating lines are parallel or perpendicular.
3. True or False: Holes are created using the Center Point
Circle tool.
 Chapter 1 Getting Started 19

CHAPTER
PROJECT

THICKNESS = 1.00
Figure P1-1 INCHES

THICKNESS = 1.125
Figure P1-4 INCHES

Note:
This exerc
ise is pres
Sample P en
roblem SP ted in
1-1.

THICKNESS = 0.500
Figure P1-2 INCHES

THICKNESS = 0.750
Figure P1-3 INCHES
THICKNESS = 10
Figure P1-5 MILLIMETERS
20 Chapter 1 Getting Started

THICKNESS = 15
Figure P1-6 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = 2
Figure P1-9 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = 5
Figure P1-7 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = 8.25
Figure P1-10 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = 12
Figure P1-8 MILLIMETERS
Two-Dimensional Sketching 2
Chapter
Objectives
• Introduce the 2D sketch commands.
• Show how to combine 2D sketch commands to form shapes.
• Show how to edit 2D shapes.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter introduces most of the commands found in the options of the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
These commands are used to create two-dimensional (2D) sketches. Inventor models are usually
based on an initial 2D sketch that is first extruded then manipulated using additional planes to de-
velop the final model shape.

2D SKETCH PANEL
To access the 2D Sketch Panel:
1. Click the New tool.
The New File dialog box will appear.
2. Click the Metric tab.
3. Click the Standard (mm).ipt tool.
The 2D Sketch Panel will appear on the left side of the screen.
Figure 2-1 shows the sketch options available on the 2D Sketch Panel bar.

LINE
1. Click the Line tool on the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
2. Click any point on the screen.
3. Move the cursor around the screen.
As the cursor is moved a bar symbol will appear when the line is either horizontal or verti-
cal. See Figure 2-2.
4. Click the line when an appropriate endpoint has been located.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
22 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

Figure 2-1

Indicates
the line is
vertical.

Enter value here. Resulting line

Figure 2-2

Exercise 2-1: Sizing Lines

Figure 2-2 shows a vertical line that was sketched using the LINE command.
1. Click the General Dimension tool on the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
2. Click the vertical line, move the cursor away from the line, and then double-click the left
mouse button.
A dimension indicating the length of the line will be created.
3. Change the value to 25 and click the check mark on the dialog box.
The line’s length will change to the indicated distance.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 23

Exercise 2-2: Drawing Continuous Lines

Given the line created in Figure 2-2, draw a horizontal and a vertical line starting at the top end-
point of the existing line.
1. Click the Line tool and move the cursor to the top end of the 25-mm vertical line.
As the cursor is moved across the screen a yellow dot will appear with the cursor. When the
cursor is aligned with the line’s endpoint the dot will turn green. See Figure 2-3.

A green dot indicates Horizontal line Second vertical line

the start of the new line
is aligned with the end
of the existing line.

After all lines are

drawn, right-click the
mouse and select Done.

Figure 2-3

2. When the cursor is aligned with the top end of the 25-mm line, click the mouse and drag
the cursor to the right, creating a horizontal line.
Note that the perpendicular symbol will appear when the line is horizontal and perpendicu-
lar to the vertical 25-mm line.
3. When the horizontal line is long enough left-click the mouse and drag the cursor down-
ward, creating a second vertical line.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
5. Click the Line tool again and draw a line between the endpoints of the two vertical lines.
See Figure 2-3.
6. Use the General Dimension tool and create an angular dimension for the slanted line.
24 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

To erase a shape:
1. Window the object by clicking and holding down the left mouse button while dragging the
cursor across the object.
2. When all lines of the object are included in the window, release the mouse button.
3. Right-click the mouse and click the Delete option.
The object will disappear.

The Undo tool can be used to delete lines in the reverse order of their entry.

TIP
Exercise 2-3: Drawing Lines at an Angle
1. Sketch two lines at an angle to each other.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
See Figure 2-4.

A dotted line indicates

that the lines' endpoints
are aligned.

Figure 2-4
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 25

3. Click the General Dimension tool.

4. Click each line.
An angular dimension will appear as the cursor is moved. Move the cursor around to verify
that other angular values are available.
5. Locate the angular dimension away from the lines and press the left mouse button twice.
A dialog box will appear defining the existing angle between the lines.
6. Change the value to 50 and click the check mark on the dialog box.
The angle between the lines will change to the entered value.
7. Sketch another line 60° to the lower angled line.

SPLINE
flyout: A command whose
The Spline tool is a flyout from the Line tool. To access the Spline tool, click the arrowhead to icon is under a related
the right of the Line tool heading and select the Spline tool. An open spline is a curved line. A command.
closed spline is an enclosed curved line on which the start and endpoints are the same point.
open spline: A curved line
Exercise 2-4: Showing an Open Spline whose ends do not meet.
1. Click on the Spline tool on the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
closed spline: An enclosed
2. Select four random points, then press the right mouse button. curved line on which the start
A dialog box will appear. and endpoints are the same
point.
3. Select the Create option.
See Figure 2-5.

An open spline
An arrowhead indicates
flyouts are available.

Figure 2-5

Exercise 2-5: Drawing a Closed Spline

1. Click the Spline tool on the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
2. Select three random points, then a fourth point aligned with the first point.
3. Click the fourth point
See Figure 2-6.
26 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

A closed spline

Figure 2-6

Exercise 2-6: Editing a Spline

A spline may be edited with the General Dimension tool.
1. Click the General Dimension tool and select any two points of the spline.
See Figure 2-7.
2. Change the dimension value to 15 and click the check mark.
The distance will change. The vertical distance between points may also be edited.

Figure 2-7

CIRCLE
There are two ways to sketch a circle using Inventor: select a center point, then define a diame-
ter; and define three tangent points.

Exercise 2-7: Using the Center Point Option

1. Select the Center Point Circle tool from the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
2. Select a point on the screen.
3. Move the cursor away from the center point and left-click when an approximate diameter
is created.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
See Figure 2-8.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 27

Sketch a circle. Enter diameter value here.

Figure 2-8

5. Select the General Dimension tool and use it to enter the desired diameter.
6. Click the check mark on the Edit Dimension box.
The circle will change to the defined diameter value.

Exercise 2-8: Using the Tangent Circle Option

The Tangent circle option requires that some entities already exist on the screen. This option is
a flyout from the Center Point Circle tool. In this example a triangle was drawn using the Line
tool. See Figure 2-9.
1. Select the Tangent circle option from the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
2. Select each of the three lines of the triangle.
A circle will appear tangent to the three lines.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Select each of the A circle sketched

three lines. tangent to a triangle.

Figure 2-9

ELLIPSE
The Ellipse tool is a flyout from the Center Point Circle tool.
1. Click the Ellipse tool on the 2D Sketch Panel bar.
2. Select a point on the screen.
This point will become the center point of the ellipse.
3. Move the cursor away from the point horizontally and to the left and select a point.
A centerline (a line with a pattern of long and short dashes) will extend from the selected
point through the first point and equidistant to the other side of the point. See Figure 2-10.
28 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

4. Move the cursor above the line to define the elliptical shape.
5. Select a point, then right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

A centerline used to
define the first axis
of the ellipse.

Figure 2-10

Exercise 2-9: Sizing the Ellipse

1. Click the General Dimension tool.
2. Select the left edge of the ellipse, then move the cursor to a location below the existing
ellipse.
3. Locate the dimension and then click the dimension.
4. Enter the desired distance value.
See Figure 2-11.
5. Click the check mark on the dialog box.

Figure 2-11
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 29

The ellipse will change shape.

6. Click the General Dimension tool again and define the vertical elliptical value.

An ellipse is defined in this example by specifying its major and minor axis values.

TIP
7. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

ARC
There are three ways to draw arcs using Inventor: select three points, define a tangent, and select
a center point.

Exercise 2-10: Sketching a Three-Point Arc

1. Click the Three Point Arc tool.
2. Select a point on the screen, then move the cursor and select a second point.
See Figure 2-12.
3. Select a third point.
4. Click the right mouse button and select the Done option.

Third point

First point Second point

Figure 2-12

Exercise 2-11: Editing an Arc

1. Click the General Dimension tool.
Select one of the endpoints of the arc, then the center point.
2. Enter the appropriate dimensional value.

Exercise 2-12: Sketching a Tangent Arc

The Tangent arc command requires existing entities. The Tangent arc tool is a flyout from the
Center Point Circle tool. In this example, two parallel lines were drawn. See Figure 2-13.
30 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

1. Click the Tangent arc tool.

2. Select the endpoint of one of the lines, then select the endpoint of the other line.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
The arc may be edited using the General Dimension tool.

Figure 2-13

Exercise 2-13: Sketching a Center Point Arc

The Center point arc tool is a flyout from the Center Point Circle tool.
1. Click the Center point arc tool.
2. Select a point on the screen.
This point will be the center point of the arc. See Figure 2-14.
3. Select a second point.
The distance between the first and second points will define the radius of the arc. This point
will also define the starting point of the arc.
4. Select a third point.
This point will define the endpoint of the arc.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
The arc may be edited using the General Dimension tool.

RECTANGLE
There are two ways to sketch a rectangle using Inventor: by selecting two points and by selecting
three points.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 31

Second point

First point

Third point

Figure 2-14

Exercise 2-14: Sketching a Two-Point Rectangle

1. Click the Two Point Rectangle tool.
2. Select a point on the screen.
3. Select a second point on the screen.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
The rectangle may be edited using the General Dimension tool. See Figure 2-15.

Second point

Two-point rectangle

First point
Figure 2-15
32 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

Exercise 2-15: Sketching a Three-Point Rectangle

The Three Point Rectangle tool is a flyout from the Two Point Rectangle tool.
1. Click the Three Point Rectangle tool.
2. Select a point on the screen.
3. Select a second point on the screen.
The distance between the two points will define one side of the rectangle. See Figure 2-16.
4. Select a third point.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
The rectangle may be edited using the General Dimension tool.

First point Second point

Third point

Figure 2-16

Fillets can also be applied in 3D.

TIP

FILLET
fillet: A rounded edge or A fillet is a rounded edge or corner that is added to an existing entity. In this example a rectangle
corner on an entity. has already been drawn on the screen.
1. Click the Fillet tool.
The 2D Fillet dialog box will appear. See Figure 2-17.
2. Enter the radius value for the fillet.
3. Select two lines on the rectangle.
The fillet will be added to the sketch.
4. Create as many fillets as needed, then right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

CHAMFER

chamfer: An angled edge or A chamfer is an angled edge or corner that is added to an existing entity. The Chamfer tool is a
corner on an entity. flyout from the Fillet tool.
Chamfers may be defined in one of three ways: with two equal distances, with two distances
not equal, or with a distance and an angle.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 33

An existing rectangle

Enter radius
value here.

Figure 2-17

Chamfers can also be applied in 3D.

TIP
Exercise 2-16: Defining a Chamfer with Two Equal Distances
1. Click the Chamfer tool.
The 2D Chamfer dialog box will appear. See Figure 2-18.
2. Select the Equal distances box.
3. Enter the chamfer distance. In this example a distance of 5 mm was selected.
4. Select two lines on the rectangle, then click the Done box.
34 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

Chamfer with equal distances

Click here to
define a chamfer
using equal
distances.

Figure 2-18

Exercise 2-17: Defining a Chamfer with Unequal Distances

1. Click the Chamfer tool.
2. Click the Unequal distances box, then click the Done box.
3. Define Distance1 as 5 mm and Distance2 as 8 mm.
The 2D Chamfer dialog box will change to allow the entry of two distances. See Figure 2-19.
4. Select two lines on the rectangle, then click the Done box.

Click here to
define a chamfer
using unequal
distances.

A chamfer with
unequal distances
Figure 2-19

Click here to
define a chamfer
using a distance
and an angle.

Figure 2-20
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 35

Exercise 2-18: Defining a Chamfer Using a Distance and an Angle

1. Click the Chamfer tool.
2. Click the Distance and angle button.
The dialog box will change to allow entry of a distance and an angle value. See Figure 2-20. In
this example a Distance of 5 mm and an Angle of 15° were defined.
3. Select two lines on the rectangle, then click the Done box.

POLYGON
The POLYGON command can be used to sketch either an inscribed or a circumscribed polygon.
An inscribed polygon is one that will fit inside a circle, so that all the corner points of the poly-
gon touch the circle. A circumscribed polygon is one the fits around a circle, so that the circle is
tangent to the inside surfaces of the polygon.

Exercise 2-19: Creating an Inscribed Polygon

1. Select the Polygon tool.
The Polygon dialog box will appear. See Figure 2-21.

Specify the number of sides here.

Click here to
create an Click here to create
inscribed a circumscribed
polygon. polygon.

Figure 2-21

2. Select the Inscribe box and specify the number of sides for the polygon.
3. Select a point on the screen, then move the cursor away from the point, sketching the polygon.
4. When the sketch’s size and orientation are acceptable, left-click the mouse.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
6. Click the General Dimension tool and enter the appropriate dimension for the polygon.
Polygons can be measured in one of two ways: across the flats and across the corners. See
Figure 2-22.
36 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

Distance across the corners

Distance across the flats

Figure 2-22

Exercise 2-20: Creating a Circumscribed Polygon

1. Select the Polygon tool.
The Polygon dialog box will appear. See Figure 2-23.
2. Select the Circumscribe box and specify the number of sides for the polygon.
3. Select a point on the screen, then move the cursor away from the point, sketching the polygon.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
5. Click the General Dimension tool and enter the appropriate dimension for the polygon.

Click here to create a circumscribed polygon.

Figure 2-23
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 37

Mirror can also be applied in 3D drawings and assembly drawings.

TIP

MIRROR
The MIRROR command creates a reverse copy (mirror image) of an existing sketch. MIRROR
is very helpful for drawing symmetrical images.
Figure 2-24 shows a hexagon and a vertical line.
1. Click the Mirror tool.
The Mirror dialog box will appear. The MIRROR command will automatically be in the
Select mode.
2. Select the hexagon either by selecting the six individual lines or by windowing the entire
object.
The hexagon will change color, indicating that it has been selected. The MIRROR
command will automatically switch to Mirror line.
3. Select the vertical line as the mirror line.
The line will change color, indicating that it has been selected.
4. Click Apply in the Mirror dialog box.

Click here to
select Mirror line.

Click here to select

object to be mirrored.

Figure 2-24
38 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

Figure 2-25 shows an object that is to be mirrored. The mirror line is one of the lines of the
object. Any line in the object could be used as a mirror line. The object was then mirrored again
using the right vertical line as the mirror line.

Mirror line

Mirror line

Resulting object
Figure 2-25

Rectangular patterns can also be created in 3D.

TIP
RECTANGULAR PATTERN
The RECTANGULAR PATTERN command is used to create rectangular arrays of rows and
columns. Figure 2-26 shows a rectangular shape. The shape will be used to create a 3 × 4 pattern.
1. Click the Rectangular Pattern tool on the 2D Sketch Panel.
The Rectangular Pattern dialog box will appear.
2. Click the Geometry box.
3. Window the rectangular shape.
The lines will change colors when they are selected.
4. Click the Direction 1 arrow box, then select the lower horizontal line of the shape. This
will define Direction 1. If the directional arrow points in the wrong direction, click the
Flip box next to the Arrow box.
The default values for Direction 1 are 2 items located 10 mm apart. These values will be
applied to the shape. As the required values are added, the pattern will adjust.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 39

Direction 1

Window the shape.

Figure 2-26

5. Enter a value of 4 items, then a distance apart of 25 mm.

6. Click the arrow box for Direction 2 and click the left vertical line of the shape.
Point the Direction 2 arrow downward. If needed, use the Flip box to point the arrow
downward.
7. Enter a number of items value of 3 and a distance apart value of 15 mm.
Figure 2-26 shows the resulting pattern.
40 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

CIRCULAR PATTERN
The Circular Pattern tool is used to array an object around a common center point. Figure 2-27
shows a round object that contains a circle. The final circular pattern is to contain eight circles.
1. Click the Circular Pattern tool on the 2D Sketch Panel.
The Circular Pattern dialog box will appear. See Figure 2-27.
2. Click the Geometry box and then click the Ø10 circle.
3. Click the arrow box to the left of the word Axis, then click the center point of the round
object.

Click here Click here

Click here.

Click here.

Finished hole pattern

Enter a new value here.

This command changes the

direction of the pattern.

Figure 2-27
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 41

The default value for a circular pattern is 6 at 360°. Six circles will appear on the screen. The
Flip box next to the word Axis is used to change the direction from counterclockwise to
clockwise.
4. Change the number of items from 6 to 8 and click OK.
Eight circles will appear.

OFFSET
The OFFSET command is used to create lines parallel to existing lines at a specified distance.
Circles and curves may also be offset. Figure 2-28 shows a line. Create a second line parallel to
the existing line 10 mm away.
1. Click the Offset tool.
2. Select the line.
3. Move the cursor away from the line and select a new location for the second line, then
right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
4. Click the General Dimension tool, then select the two lines.
5. Enter a dimensional value of 10 and click the check mark on the dialog box.

Figure 2-28

EXTEND
The EXTEND command is used to lengthen an existing line. Figure 2-29 shows two lines. The
horizontal line is to be extended to the vertical line. The vertical line will serve as a boundary to
the extension. The vertical line will be erased after the extension is complete.
1. Click the Extend tool.
2. Select the horizontal line.
42 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

Boundary line

Extension

Extend this line.

Click this line.

Delete boundary line if necessary.

Figure 2-29

3. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

4. Click the vertical line, then right-click the mouse and select the Delete option.
5. Delete the boundary line if necessary.

TRIM
The TRIM command is used to shorten an existing line. Figure 2-30 shows two lines. The hori-
zontal line will be shortened using the vertical line as a cutting line.
1. Click the Trim tool.
2. Move the cursor onto the horizontal line to the right of the vertical line.
The right portion of the horizontal line will change its color and line pattern.
3. Click the line.
4. Delete the vertical line if necessary.

There are Move tools in both 3D and assembly drawings.

TIP
MOVE
The MOVE command is used to reposition an existing sketch or to copy an existing sketch.
Figure 2-31 shows two rectangles. The lower rectangle is to be moved so that it is aligned with the
upper rectangle.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 43

Trim this line.

Trim this end
of the line.

Cutting line

Delete this line if necessary.

Click here.

Figure 2-30

Click here.

First select here.

Move the cursor.

Figure 2-31

Exercise 2-21: Moving a Sketch

1. Click the Move tool on the 2D Sketch Panel.
The Move dialog box will appear. The MOVE command is automatically in the Select mode.
2. Window the lower rectangle, press the right mouse button, and select the Continue option.
44 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

3. The Move command will automatically ask for the definition of the base point. If it does
not, click the arrow in the box to the left of the Base Point heading. When activated, the
box will change color.
4. Window the lower box to identify it as the entity to be moved.
5. Click the Base Point box on the Move dialog box.
6. Click the upper left corner of the lower box.
7. Move the cursor to a new point. The lower box will move with the cursor.
8. Align the base point with the lower left corner of the other box and click the mouse.
9. Click the Done box.

Exercise 2-22: Copying a Sketch

Figure 2-32 shows a rectangle. This section shows how to make a copy of the rectangle using the
Copy command.
1. Click the Copy command on the 2D Sketch Panel.
Note:
Copies ca
The Select option will be activated automatically. na
the Copy lso be made using
op
2. Window the rectangle. command tion on the Move
dialog box
This defines the rectangle as the entity to be copied. the Move . Access
co
3. Click the Base Point box on the Copy Copy box mmand, click the
, an
outlined n d proceed as
dialog box. ext.
4. Click the lower left corner of the rectangle.
5. Move the cursor away from the existing
rectangle.
6. Select a location for the copy and click
the mouse.

The Select option will activate automatically.

Click here.
Window the rectangle.

Click here to select a base point.

Determine a location
for the copy
Move the and click
cursor. the mouse.

Figure 2-32
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 45

There are Copy tools in both 3D and assembly drawings.

TIP

ROTATE
The ROTATE command is used to rotate a sketch about a point. Figure 2-33 shows a rectangle.
It is to be rotated 30° about its lower left corner.
1. Click the Rotate tool on the 2D Sketch Panel.
The Rotate dialog box will appear.
2. Window the rectangle.
3. Click the Center Point box.
4. Click the lower left corner of the rectangle.
A warning box will appear.
5. Click the Yes box.
6. Rotate the rectangle by moving the cursor.
7. Enter a value of 30 in the Angle box.
8. Click Done.

The Select option will

activate automatically. Click here to define the center point of rotation.

Window the rectangle.

Click here to define the center point of the rotation.

Enter a value of 30. The rectangle will rotate

as the cursor is moved.

Click here.

Figure 2-33
46 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

CONSTRAINTS
The Contraints tool contains 12 tools that can be used to change and define the shape of a
sketch. The constraint tools are accessed by using the flyouts located above the Show Con-
straints tool. The 12 constraints are Perpendicular, Parallel, Tangent, Smooth, Coincident,
Concentric, Colinear, Horizontal, Vertical, Equal, Fix, and Symmetric.

Exercise 2-23: Using Horizontal, Vertical, Perpendicular, and Parallel Constraints

Figure 2-34 shows a random sketch that is to be changed into a rectangle. None of the lines in the
shape is horizontal or vertical.
1. Click the Vertical constraint, then click the right line of the sketch.
The line will become vertical.
2. Click the Perpendicular constraint, then click the top line of the sketch, then the vertical
line.
The top line will be made perpendicular to the vertical line.
3. Click the Parallel constraint, then click the top horizontal line, then the lower line.
The lower line will become horizontal or parallel to the top line.
4. Click the Perpendicular constraint, click the top horizontal line, then the left slanted line.

Constraints
Apply the Vertical
constraint to this line.

Given a random
shape

Apply the Perpendicular constraint

to this line.

Apply the Parallel

constraint to this line.

Figure 2-34
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 47

Exercise 2-24: Making Two Circles Concentric

Figure 2-35 shows two circles. They are not concentric.
1. Click the Concentric constraint tool, then each of the circles.
The circles will become concentric.

The Concentric
constraint
applied to the
two circles

Figure 2-35

Exercise 2-25: Fixing a Point

Figure 2-36 shows the same sketch presented in Figure 2-34. When the Parallel constraint was
applied to the lower line in Figure 2-34 the top horizontal line became shortened. This horizontal
line can be fixed so that it will remain the same length.
1. Click the Fix constraint.
2. Click the endpoints of the top horizontal line, then right-click the mouse and select the
Done option.
The points will be fixed in their current location.
3. Click the Perpendicular constraint, then the left slanted line, then the fixed horizontal
line.
Note the difference between the sketches in Figures 2-34 and 2-36.

Resulting shape

The Fix
constraint
applied to
this line

Figure 2-36

Exercise 2-26: Making a Circle Tangent to a Line

Figure 2-37 shows a line and a circle. The circle will be made tangent to the line.
1. Click the Tangent constraint.
2. Click the line first, then click the circle.
The circle will move to a point tangent to the line.
48 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

The Tangent
constraint applied

Figure 2-37

SHOW CONSTRAINTS
The SHOW CONSTRAINTS command will show
the constraints that have been applied to a sketch.
This command is helpful when unknown constraints
Note:
interfere with the sketching process. This option
hid
constraints es the
Figure 2-38 shows two circles that were icons on th
screen; it e drawing
constrained to be concentric and the rectangular doe
constraints s not remove the
shape created for Figure 2-34. .
1. Click the Show Constraints tool on the
2D Sketch Panel.
To remove constraints icons:
1. Right-click the mouse and select the Hide
All Constraints option.

Constraints

Figure 2-38
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 49

EDITING A SKETCH
Figure 2-39 shows a finished sketch. Any of the features may be changed by editing the dimensions.

An existing completed sketch

Figure 2-39

Exercise 2-27: Editing a Feature

Suppose the 5  15 cutout in the top right corner of the object is to be changed to a 5  20 cutout.
1. Right-click the word Sketch in the browser box.
See Figure 2-40.
2. Select the Edit Sketch option.
The drawing will return to the 2D Sketch Panel.
3. Double-click the dimension, then change the dimension value to 20. See Figure 2-41.
4. Click the check mark.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
The cutout dimension and the cutout itself will change to 20 mm. Any of the object’s features
may be edited in a similar manner. See Figure 2-42.

Click
here.

Right-click here. Figure 2-40

50 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

Change value here

Figure 2-41

Edited cutout

Figure 2-42

Exercise 2-28: Moving the Hole

Say the Ø10 hole is to be moved 10 to the left.
1. Right-click Sketch in the browser box and select the Edit Sketch option.
2. Double-click the 20 dimension that defines the hole location, and enter a new value of 30.
3. Right-click the mouse and click the Done option.
As sketches are edited, changes do not always happen as expected. For example, when the
value of the hole’s locating dimension was changed from 20 to 30, the vertical end line might
have moved to the right rather than the hole moving to the left. If this happens, apply the Fix
constraint to the vertical line, holding it in place and forcing the hole to move to the left. See
Figure 2-43.

Fix line constraint

Fix, if necessary.

Delete 20 dimension
Figure 2-43
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 51

The Fix constraint can removed after the editing is complete.

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Remove Fix Constraints option. See Figure 2-44.

Enter new dimension. Figure 2-44

TEXT
The TEXT command, located on the 2D Sketch Panel toolbox, is used to add text to a sketch.

Exercise 2-29: Creating Text

1. Select the Text tool.
2. Click the drawing screen.
The Format Text dialog box will appear. See Figure 2-45.
3. Specify the font style and text height.

Specify font and text height.

Type text here.

Figure 2-45
52 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

In this example a Tahoma font at a height of 3.5 mm was specified.

4. Type in the text.
5. Click OK.
The text will appear on the screen. See Figure 2-46.

Figure 2-46

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP2-1

Most shapes can be drawn using several different combinations of Inventor commands. Take, for
example, the shape shown in Figure 2-47. This section will show three different ways to draw the
shape. When creating shapes consider all the possible ways it can be created and strive for the
sequence that is both efficient and accurate.

Figure 2-47

Method 1
See Figure 2-48.
1. Use the General Dimension tool to create a
100 ⴛ 140 rectangle. Note:
2. Use the Center Point Circle tool and draw a The Cente
r
circle at each end of the rectangle. mand will Point Circle com
automatic -
the vertic all
3. Use the Trim tool and remove the inside portions al line’s m y select
of the circles, that is, the portions of the circles idpoints.
that do not define the outside profile of the shape.
4. Right-click the two vertical end lines of the
rectangle and select the Delete option.
5. Use the Center Point Circle tool and draw two
Ø40 circles with center points aligned with the
circles drawn to create the shape’s rounded ends.
6. Use the Line tool to draw lines tangent to the two Ø40 circles.
7. Use the Trim tool to remove the inside portions of the circles.
8. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
9. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 53

Circle

Tangent lines Delete line.

Trim circle.
Rectangle

Trim circle.

Figure 2-48

Method 2
See Figure 2-49.

Rectangle

Offset
line

Center point

Center Point Arc

Three Point Arc

Figure 2-49
54 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

1. Use the General Dimension tool to create a 100 ⴛ 140 rectangle.

2. Use the Center Point Arc tool and draw a circle at each end of the rectangle.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
4. Right-click the two vertical end lines of the rectangle and select the Delete option.
5. Draw a line between the two arc center points.
6. Use the Offset and General Dimension tools to create two lines offset 20 from the line
between the center points.
7. Delete the line between the arc center points.
8. Use the Three Point Arc tool and draw arcs between the two offset lines.
9. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
10. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.

Method 3
See Figure 2-50
1. Use the General Dimension tool to create a 100 ⴛ 240 rectangle.
2. Draw a second rectangle offset from the first as shown.
The offset values are based on the given dimensions. The difference between the outer pro-
file and inner profile is 30.
3. Use the Fillet tool, set the radius for 50, and add fillets to the ends of the large rectangle
as shown.
4. Use the Fillet tool, set the radius for 20, and add fillets to the ends of the small rectangle
as shown.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.

Two rectangles

Fillet

Figure 2-50
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 55

Fillet

Figure 2-50 (continued)

SUMMARY
This chapter introduced most of the commands found in the eral different options. Fillets and three different types of
2D Sketch Panel bar and demonstrated their use in creating chamfers were added to existing entities.
2D sketches. The LINE command was used to draw lines and The MOVE and ROTATE commands and the
draw them at angles, and lines were offset, extended, and Constraints tool were used to manipulate and change the
trimmed. Open and closed splines were introduced. Circles, shape of existing sketches, and other editing tools were intro-
ellipses, arcs, rectangles, and polygons were drawn using sev- duced. Finally, text was added to a sketch.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Once a line has been sketched, which tool is used to add a b. Second
dimensional value? c. Minor
a. Sketch 4. A chamfer is defined by which of the following?
b. Line a. Two distances
c. General Dimension b. An angle and two distances
d. Auto Dimension c. Two angles and a distance
2. What is a curved line with multiple shape changes called? 5. Which of the following shapes is not a polygon?
a. Polynomial a. Triangle
b. Spline b. Hexagon
c. Ogee curve c. Rectangle
3. An ellipse is defined by its major axis and which other axis? d. Square
a. Lesser
56 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

6. Which tool is used to remove an unwanted portion of c. Copy

a line? d. Extend
a. Erase 8. The symbol Ø is used to define which of the following?
b. Trim a. Radius
c. Offset b. Diameter
d. Move c. Runout
7. Which tool is used to increase the length of an existing line? d. Extension
a. Scale
b. Offset

Matching
Column A Column B
a. Defines a location and size for an entity 1. Perpendicular
b. Aligns two entities 2. Parallel
c. Defines two entities as 90° apart 3. Colinear
d. Defines a line in the X direction. 4. Fix
e. Defines an entity equidistant from another entity 5. Horizontal

True or False
1. True or False: The General Dimension tool is used to 6. True or False: A chamfer is a straight line across a corner.
add dimensional values to sketches. 7. True or False: A polygon can have any number of sides.
2. True or False: A closed spline is a curved line that starts 8. True or False: A mirror image is the same as a copied
and ends at a common point. image.
3. True or False: Splines cannot be edited once drawn. 9. True or False: A line offset from an original line has a dif-
4. True or False: The Tangent Arc and Center Point Arc ferent length than the original line.
tools are flyouts from the Three Point Arc tool. 10. True or False: Many different font styles are available for
5. True or False: A fillet is a straight line across a corner. Inventor text.
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 57

CHAPTER PROJECT
Project 2-1:
Redraw the following objects using the given dimensions. Create solid models of the objects us-
ing the specified thicknesses.

THICKNESS = 1.00 THICKNESS = 2

Figure P2-1 INCHES Figure P2-4 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = .625
Figure P2-2 INCHES

THICKNESS = 12
Figure P2-3 MILLIMETERS
58 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

THICKNESS = 1.25
Figure P2-5 INCHES

THICKNESS = 12
Figure P2-6 MILLIMETERS
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 59

THICKNESS = 1.25 THICKNESS = 16

Figure P2-7 INCHES Figure P2-10 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = 8 THICKNESS = 6
Figure P2-8 MILLIMETERS Figure P2-11 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = .375 THICKNESS = 10

Figure P2-9 INCHES Figure P2-12 MILLIMETERS
60 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

THICKNESS = .75
Figure P2-13 INCHES

THICKNESS = 7.5
Figure P2-14 MILLIMETERS

ALL FILLETS AND ROUNDS = R5.

THICKNESS = 5
Figure P2-15 MILLIMETERS
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 61

THICKNESS = 6; central area is 4 thick THICKNESS = 6

Figure P2-16 MILLIMETERS Figure P2-18 MILLIMETERS

NOTE: Object is symmetrical

about its horizontal centerline.

THICKNESS = .875 THICKNESS = .250

Figure P2-17 INCHES Figure P2-19 INCHES

THICKNESS = 6.5
Figure P2-20 MILLIMETERS
62 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

THICKNESS = 16
Figure P2-21 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = .50
Figure P2-22 INCHES

THICKNESS = 12
Figure P2-23 MILLIMETERS
 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching 63

THICKNESS = .1875
Figure P2-24 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = 7.25
Figure P2-25 MILLIMETERS

THICKNESS = .25
Figure P2-26 INCHES
64 Chapter 2 Two-Dimensional Sketching

THICKNESS = 5
Figure P2-27 MILLIMETERS

Thickness = 16
Figure P2-28 MILLIMETERS
Three-Dimensional Models 3
Chapter
Objectives
• Show how to draw 3D models.
• Show how to use the Part Features tools.
• Show how to edit 3D models.
• Show how to create and use work planes.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter introduces and demonstrates how to create 3D models using the commands in the
Part Features panel bar. These commands are used to convert 2D sketches into 3D solid models
and to modify existing models.
The first part of the chapter demonstrates some feature-modifying commands. The second
part of the chapter introduces sketch and work planes and shows how they are used to alter and
refine 3D models.
Figure 3-1 shows the Part Features panel. The tools are used to create 3D models.

Figure 3-1
66 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

EXTRUDE
The EXTRUDE command is used to convert 2D sketches into solid models.
Figure 3-2 shows a 12 mm × 30 mm rectangle created using the Standard.ipt format and the
2D Sketch Panel Two Point Rectangle tool. After the sketch is completed, right-click the mouse
and select the Done option. Also, create an isometric view of the sketch.
1. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option, then click the Extrude tool on
the Part Features panel bar.
The Extrude dialog box will appear. See Figure 3-2.
2. Change the Extents Distance to 20, then click OK.
Figure 3-2 shows the extruded rectangle.

Sketch a 12 mm x 30 mm rectangle.
Resulting solid

Height of extrusion

20

Figure 3-2

Exercise 3-1: Creating a Taper

Start again with a 12  30 rectangle.
1. Click the Extrude tool.
2. Click the More tab on the Extrude dialog box, then set the Taper angle for 15.
3. Click OK.
Figure 3-3 shows the resulting tapered shape.

Exercise 3-2: Controlling the Direction of the Taper

Start again with a 12 × 30 rectangle.
1. Click the Extrude tool.
2. Set the Taper for 15.
3. Click the Shape tab and click the middle button in the Extents area as shown.
4. Click OK.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 67

Figure 3-4 shows the resulting tapered shape.

Sketch

Resulting tapered model

Select here.

Define taper angle here. Figure 3-3

Click here to change

the direction of the taper.

Resulting tapered model

Figure 3-4
68 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

REVOLVE
Figure 3-5 shows a 2D profile and a straight line. The sketch will be revolved about the straight
line to create a model.
1. Access the Part Features panel bar by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Finish
Sketch option. Then click the Revolve tool.
The Revolve dialog box will appear. The REVOLVE command will automatically select the 2D
shape as the profile to be extruded. If it does not, click the Profile box and window the 2D profile.
2. Click the Axis box.
3. Select the straight line as the axis.
4. Click OK.
Figure 3-5 shows the resulting revolved model.

Axis of revolution Full will perform a The revolved profile

360˚ revolution.

Profile
Figure 3-5

Exercise 3-3: Revolving through Less than 360°

Shapes may be revolved through any number of degrees. Figure 3-6 shows an object that has been
revolved through 180°.
1. Access the Revolve tool.
2. On the Revolve dialog box, click the scroll arrow to the right of the Full box.
3. Select Angle.
The Angle dialog box will appear.
4. Type in the required angle value, then click OK.

Specify angle of revolution. The profile revolved 180

Figure 3-6
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 69

Exercise 3-4: Creating a Sphere

See Figure 3-7.
1. Draw a line and a circle. Use the General Dimension tool to size the circle.
2. Trim half the circle.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
5. Select the Revolve tool from the Part Features panel.
6. Select the semicircle as the profile and the line as the axis.
A preview will appear.
7. Click OK.

Circle
Axis Profile

Line
Trim circle

Sphere

Figure 3-7

HOLES
Holes may be added to a 3D solid model by first defining a sketch plane for the hole and then lo-
cating the hole’s center point. Figure 3-8 shows a 20 × 40 rectangular model that has been ex-
truded 16. Two small holes will be located in the top surface, and a large hole will be located in
the front surface.
1. Click on the top surface of the model, right-click the mouse, and select the New Sketch
option.
A grid will appear aligned with the top surface. The top surface is now the current sketch plane.
2. Click the Point, Center Point tool.

The different types of holes are discussed in Chapter 7.

TIP
70 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Click top surface Locate the first hole, then touch the center point with
Click here to create the cursor and move it to the second hole location. A
a new sketch plane. dotted line will indicate that the second center point
is aligned with the first.

Point, Center Point

New sketch plane
aligned with top surface

Diameter value

Second hole

Select Through All.

Preview Finished holes

Figure 3-8
Note:
The seco
nd
located f hole’s center poin
rom the f t may be
Click the irs
3. Locate one of the hole center points on the top Point, C t hole location .
en
h the curs ter Point tool,
then touc
surface, then right-click the mouse and select center po or
the Done option. int. Move to the first hole’s
second h the curso
4. Click the General Dimension tool and ole r to
dotted lin ’s approximate loc the
locate the first hole. e will app ation . A
center po ea
5. Use the General Dimension tool to locate int locatio r from the first
location is n when th
a e second
the second hole’s center point, then right- mension ligned to it. Only
click the mouse and select the Done op- is now ne one di-
second h ede
tion, then right-click the mouse again and ole’s cente d to locate the
r point.
select the Finish Sketch option.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 71

The Part Features panel bar will reappear.

6. Select the Hole tool from the Part Features panel.

The Hole dialog box will appear. See Figure 3-8.

7. Set the Termination for Through All and set the holes’ diameter for 5 mm, then click OK.
The holes will appear.

Exercise 3-5: Locating a Hole in the Front Plane

1. Click the front surface, right-click the mouse, and select the New Sketch option.
2. Click the Sketch heading on the Command toolbar.
The 2D Sketch Panel bar will appear. See Figure 3-9.
3. Use the Point, Center Point and General Dimension tools and locate a center point in
the center of the surface.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
5. Click the Hole tool and add a Ø8 hole through the model.
6. Click OK.

Create a new sketch

plane here.
Resulting model
Use the Point, Center Point tool
to define the hole's center point.

Hole diameter
Preview

Figure 3-9

SHELL
The SHELL command is used to create thin-walled objects from existing models. Figure 3-10
shows a 12  30  20 model.
1. Click the Shell tool on the Part Features panel bar.
The Shell dialog box will appear. There are three different ways to define a shell, which are
accessed by the three boxes on the right side of the Shell dialog box. The options are as follows:
72 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Resulting shell

Outside
Inside
Both

Shell's thickness

Click this surface.

Figure 3-10

Inside: The external wall of the existing model will become the external wall of the shell.

TIP Outside: The external wall of the existing model will become the internal wall of the shell.
Both Sides: The existing outside wall will become the center of the shell; half the thick-
ness will be added to the outside and half to the inside.

2. Click on the front surface of the model, then click OK.

Shells may be created from any shaped model. Figure 3-11 shows a cone that has been used
to create a hollow thin-walled cone.

Figure 3-11

Exercise 3-6: Removing More Than One Surface

1. Click the Shell tool.
2. Click the surfaces to be removed.
3. Select the Inside option.
4. Click OK.
See Figure 3-12.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 73

Click two surfaces. Resulting shelled model

Figure 3-12

FILLET
The FILLET command is used to create rounded edges. Figure 3-13 shows a finished 12  30
 20 3D model.
1. Click the Fillet tool on the Part Features panel bar.
The Fillet dialog box will appear.
2. Change the Radius value to 3.
3. Click the Edges option and select the edges to be filleted.
A preview of the fillet will appear.
4. Click OK.
A fillet may be added to an internal edge such as shown in Figure 3-14. External fillets are
called rounds. round: An external fillet

Define the radius of the fillet. Select the edges to be filleted. Resulting filleted edges
Figure 3-13

Fillets may be created Resulting fillet

on internal edges.
Figure 3-14
74 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Exercise 3-7: Using the Full Round Tool

Figure 3-15 shows an L-bracket.
1. Select the Fillet tool from the Part Features panel.
2. Click the Round option.
The Full Round dialog box will appear.
3. Click the Side Face Set 1 box. Select the lower horizontal surface of the L-bracket.
4. Click the Center Face Set box. Select the top horizontal surface.
5. Use the Rotate tool and access the back surface.
6. Click the Side Face Set 2 box. Select the back surface.
A preview will appear.
7. Click Apply and return the view to the Isometric view.

Side Face
Set 1

Select here. Select here.

Center Face Set Use Rotate to expose the Isometric view Finished round
back surface.

Side Face Set 2

Figure 3-15

Exercise 3-8: Creating a Face Fillet

See Figure 3-16.
1. Select the Fillet tool from the Part Features panel bar.
2. Click the Face fillet option.
3. Click the Face Set 1 option and select a face.
In this example the right slanted surface was selected.
4. Click Face Set 2 and select a second surface.
In this example the left slanted surface was selected.
5. Click Apply.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 75

Select here.

First select here.

Preview Finished face fillet

Select this surface.

Figure 3-16
The face fillet will appear.

Exercise 3-9: Creating a Variable Fillet

See Figure 3-17.
1. Select the Fillet tool from the Part Features panel bar.
2. Click the Variable tab.
3. Select the edge for the fillet.
4. Define the Start radius.
In this example a value of 1 mm was selected.
5. Click the word End and define a value.
In this example a value of 3 mm was selected.
6. Click OK.

Fillets and chamfers can be created in 2D sketches.

TIP
CHAMFER
The CHAMFER command is used to create beveled edges. See Figure 3-18. Chamfers are de-
fined by specifying linear setback distances or by specifying a setback distance and an angle.
Most chamfers have equal setback distances or an angle of 45°.
76 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Select this edge.

Revise default settings.

Preview

Finished fillet

Enter new values.

Figure 3-17

1. Click the Chamfer tool.

The Chamfer dialog box will appear. The first option box on the left side of the Chamfer
dialog box is used to create chamfers with equal distances.
2. Set the distance for 1.
3. Select the edges to be chamfered.
4. Click OK.
The chamfers drawn in Figure 3-18 were defined using two equal distances creating a 45°
chamfer. Chamfers may also be defined using a distance and an angle. Figure 3-19 shows a
2  60° chamfer. Chamfers may also be defined using two unequal distances. Figure 3-20 shows
a 1  4 chamfer.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 77

Define the chamfer distances.

In this example both distances
are equal.

Select the edges to Resulting chamfers

be chamfered.
Figure 3-18

A chamfer defined by a distance and an angle

Figure 3-19

A chamfer defined by two unequal distances

Figure 3-20

FACE DRAFT
The Face Draft tool is used to create angled surfaces. See Figure 3-21.
1. Click the Face Draft tool.
The Face Draft dialog box will appear.
2. Click the right front surface of the object.
3. Click the top edge line of the right front surface.
4. Enter a Draft Angle value of 15 deg.
5. Click OK.
6. Use the Undo tool to return the object to its rectangular shape.
7. Click the Face Draft tool and again click the right front surface of the object.
8. This time click the back top edge line of the top surface.
9. Click OK.
78 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Note the difference in the resulting face drafts.

Several surfaces can be drafted at the same time. See Figure 3-22.

Click here. Enter angle value here. Select this face. Symbol indicates
the direction of the slant.
Select this face.

Resulting slanted surface Undo the face draft and

use the Face Draft tool again as shown.
Resulting slanted surface
Select here.
Note the difference in the symbol.

First select
this face.

Note the differences

in the two face drafts.
Figure 3-21

More than one face

may be drafted.

Several face drafts

applied to the same object Figure 3-22

SPLIT
The SPLIT command is used to trim away a portion of a model. See Figure 3-23. A sketch line
is used to define the location and angle of the split.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 79

12 x 30 x 20

A line drawn on the front

surface of the model

Figure 3-23

Exercise 3-10: Defining the Split Line

1. Click the left front surface of the 12  30  20 model.
The surface will change color.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the New Sketch option.
A grid will appear on the screen oriented to the selected face.
3. Click the Line tool and sketch a line across the front left surface.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
5. Use the General Dimension tool to locate the line as needed.

Exercise 3-11: Splitting the Model

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
2. Click the Split tool on the Part Features panel.
The Split dialog box will appear. See Figure 3-24.
3. Click the Split Tool box.
4. Click the sketch line.
5. Select the Split Part box under Method in the Split dialog box.
6. Use the Remove option to define which side of the model is to be removed.
7. Click OK.

Click here to define which

side is to be removed. Resulting shape

Click here.

Figure 3-24
80 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Figure 3-25 shows a split that was created using a sketched circle. The arrow that appears on
the top surface indicates the direction of removal.

Create a new sketch

plane and draw a circle.

Arrow indicates
direction of removal.

Resulting split

Figure 3-25
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 81

MIRROR
The MIRROR command is used to create mirror images of an existing model. See Figure 3-26.
1. Click the Mirror tool.
The Mirror dialog box will appear.

Select a surface as a mirror plane.

Resulting mirrored model

Figure 3-26

2. Click the model.

3. Click the Mirror Plane box.
4. Select one of the model’s surfaces as a mirror plane.
5. Click OK.

RECTANGULAR PATTERN
The RECTANGULAR PATTERN command is used to create a rectangular array of an exist-
ing model feature. Figure 3-27 shows a 30  40  5 plate with a Ø5 hole located 5 mm from
each edge.
1. Click the Rectangular Pattern tool located on the Part Features panel bar.

The Rectangular Pattern dialog box will appear. The Features box will automatically be active.
2. Click the hole.

The hole is the feature.

3. Click the Direction 1 box, then click the back left edge of the model to define direction 1.

Use the Direction 1 box to reverse the direction if necessary.

4. Set the count value for 3 and the Spacing value for 10.
5. Click the Direction 2 box, then click the front left edge of the model to define direction 2.
6. Set the count value for 4 and the Spacing for 10.
7. Click OK.
82 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Direction 1

Feature

Enter value here.

Direction 2

Enter value.

Resulting rectangular pattern

Figure 3-27

CIRCULAR PATTERN
The CIRCULAR PATTERN command is used to create a polar array of an existing model fea-
ture. Figure 3-28 shows a Ø40 cylinder 5 mm high with two Ø5 holes. One hole is located in the
center of the model; the second is located 15 mm from the center.
1. Click the Circular Pattern tool located on the Part Features panel bar.
The Circular Pattern dialog box will appear. The Features box will automatically be active.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 83

Set the number of holes

required and the degrees
of rotation for the pattern.

Use this hole to create

the circular pattern.
Use this hole as
the rotation axis. A circular hole pattern

Figure 3-28

2. Click the hole to be used to create the circular pattern.

3. Click the Rotation Axis button, then click the center hole.
4. Set the count value for 8 and the angle value for 360.
5. Click OK.

SKETCH PLANES
Sketches are created on sketch planes. Any surface on a model may become a sketch plane. As sketch plane: A 2D plane
models become more complex they require the use of additional sketch planes. drawn on any surface or work
Figure 3-29 shows a model that was created using several different sketch planes. The model plane on a model used for
is a composite of basic geometric shapes added to one another. sketching.

A model created using several

different sketch planes

Figure 3-29
84 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Exercise 3-12: Creating the Base

1. Start a new drawing using the metric Standard (mm).ipt settings.
2. Click the Two Point Rectangle tool and sketch a 10 ⴛ 20 rectangle.
See Figure 3-30. The object will automatically be drawn on a sketch plane aligned with the
program’s XY plane.
3. Click the right mouse button and select the Isometric View option.
Use the mouse wheel to zoom the rectangle as necessary.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. Then, click the Extrude tool.
The Extrude dialog box will appear.
5. Set the extrusion height for 2 mm and click OK.

Sketch a 10 x 20 rectangle.

Extrude the rectangle

Figure 3-30 to a height of 2 mm. Finished base

Exercise 3-13: Creating the Vertical Portion

The rectangular vertical back portion of the model will be created by first defining a new sketch
plane on the top surface of the base, then sketching and extruding a rectangle that will be joined
to the existing base. See Figure 3-31.

Click the top surface. Sketch plane on the top surface

Right-click the mouse and select the

New Sketch option. This will create a
Figure 3-31 new sketch plane on the top surface.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 85

1. Click the top surface of the base.

The surface will change color, indicating that it has been selected.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the New Sketch option.
A new grid pattern will appear aligned with the top surface of the base. This is a new sketch plane.
3. Click the Two Point Rectangle tool and sketch a 2 ⴛ 20 rectangle on the top surface so
that it is aligned with the back edge of the base.
Note that the cursor changes from yellow to green when it is aligned with the plane’s corner point.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option and then the Finish Sketch option.
Click the Extrude tool.
5. Select the 2  20 rectangle and set the extrusion height for 8, then click OK.
Note that the surfaces are unioned together to form one object. See Figure 3-32.

Extrude the 2 x 20 rectangle to a

height of 8, then create a new sketch
plane on the vertical surface. Use the
Point, Center Point tool and define
the holes' center point locations.

New sketch plane

Holes added to the vertical surface

Use the Hole tool to create the holes.

Figure 3-32
86 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Exercise 3-14: Adding Holes to the Vertical Surface

1. Click the front edge of the vertical surface.
The surface will change color, indicating that it has been selected.
2. Press the right mouse button and select the New Sketch option.
A grid will appear on the surface. This is a new sketch plane. The holes are located 4 mm
from the top edge and from each of the side edges. See Figure 3-32.
3. Use the Point, Center Point and the General Dimension tools to locate the center points
for the two holes.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. Click the Hole tool.
The Hole dialog box will appear.
6. Set the Termination for Through All and the diameter value for 5.
7. Click OK.

Exercise 3-15: Creating the Cutout

1. Create a new sketch plane on the top surface of the base.
The cutout is 3 deep with edges 5 from each end of the model.
2. Use the Two Point Rectangle and General Dimension tools to define the cutout’s size.
3. Then click the Extrude tool.
The Extrude dialog box will appear. See Figure 3-33.
4. Select the cutout rectangle and set the extrusion distance for 2, the direction arrow for a
direction into the model, and select the Cut option.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.

Use the Cut option to remove the

extruded rectangle.

Figure 3-33

EDITING A 3D MODEL
3D models may be edited; that is, dimensions and features may be changed at any time. For ex-
ample, suppose the 3D model drawn in the last section and shown in Figures 3-29 and 3-33 re-
quires some changes. The 20-mm length is to be changed to 25, the holes are to be changed from
Ø5 to Ø3, and fillets are to be added on the front corners.
There are two types of edits: edit sketch and edit features. The Edit Sketch command applies
to shapes created using the 2D Sketch Panel commands, for example, Line, Rectangle and
Circle. The Edit Features command applies to shapes created using the Part Features panel bar
commands, for example, Extrusion, Hole, and Split.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 87

Exercise 3-16: Changing the Model’s Length

1. Move the cursor into the browser box and click the plus sign (+) to the left of Extrusion 1.
See Figure 3-34. The plus sign will change to a minus sign (-), and Sketch 1 will appear.

Click here. Click here.

First click the plus sign, then Right-click here.

right-click Sketch 1, then select
the Edit Sketch option. Figure 3-34
2. Right-click Sketch 1, then select the Edit Sketch option.
See Figure 3-35.
3. Double-click the 20-mm dimension and enter a value of 24.
4. Click the check mark.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then right-click again and select the
Finish Sketch option.

The Edit Sketch option will change the screen. The original Double-click the 2D dimension and enter a value of 25 in the
10 x 20 2D rectangle will appear. Edit Dimension box. Click the check mark.

The revised 2D sketch. Right-click the mouse and select the

Done option. Then right-click and select the Finish Sketch Lengthened model
option.
Figure 3-35
88 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Enter new value here.

Click here.

Right-click here.

Revised hole diameters

Figure 3-36

Holes are features. The rectangle face used to create the object is a sketch.

TIP
Exercise 3-17: Changing the Hole’s Diameters
See Figure 3-36.
1. Right-click Hole 1 in the browser box and select the Edit Feature option.
The Hole: Hole 1 dialog box will appear.
2. Change the hole’s diameter to 3 mm.
3. Click OK.

Exercise 3-18: Adding a Fillet

Fillets and other features may be added to an existing 3D model using the commands on the Part
Features panel bar. See Figure 3-37.
1. Click the Fillet tool on the Part Features panel bar.
2. Set the radius value to 2 mm.
3. Click the Edge box.
4. Click the four edges shown in Figure 3-37. Click OK.

The default planes are listed in the browser box under the Origin heading.

TIP
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 89

Add fillets using the Fillet tool.

Figure 3-37

DEFAULT PLANES AND AXES

Inventor includes three default planes and three default axes. The three default planes are YZ, default axes: In Inventor, the
XZ, and XY, and the three axes are X, Y, and Z. The default planes and axes tools are accessed X, Y, and Z axes.
through the browser. See Figure 3-38.
default planes: In Inventor,
1. Click the ⴙ to the left of the Origin heading. the YZ, XZ, and XY planes.

The default plane and axis headings will cascade down.

The browser

Click here to
access the plane
and axis tools.

Figure 3-38

Exercise 3-19: Displaying the Default Planes and Axes

Figure 3-39 shows a Ø30 × 16 cylinder that was drawn with its center point on the 0,0,0 origin.
The base of the cylinder is on the XY plane. Inventor sketches are automatically created on the
default XY axis.

The cylinder was drawn with its center The XZ plane A work axis
point on the 0,0,0 origin.
Figure 3-39
90 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

1. Click the ⴙ next to Origin in the browser box.

2. Move the cursor onto the XY Plane tool.
A plane outline will appear on the screen.
3. Click the XY Plane tool.
The plane will be filled with color.
4. Move the cursor to the XZ Plane tool.
The XZ plane will be outlined.
5. Move the cursor to the Z Axis tool.
The Z axis will appear.
6. Move the cursor through all the tools and note the planes and axes that appear.

WORK PLANES
work planes: A plane used for Work planes are planes used for sketching, but unlike sketch planes, work planes are not created
sketching that is created inde- using the surfaces of models. Work planes are created independent of the model. Work planes
pendent of the model. may be created outside or within the body of a model. Work planes are used when no sketch plane
is available.
Work planes may be defined using the following parameters:
Angle to a plane
Edge and face normal
Point and face normal
Point and face parallel
Sketch geometry
Tangent and face parallel
3-point
2-edge or 2-axis
Through point perpendicular
Tangent to face through

Work Plane Help

If you are not sure how to create a work plane, Inventor includes a help feature.
1. Click the Work Plane tool, then move the cursor to the browser box and right-click the
YZ plane tool.
A dialog box will appear. See Figure 3-40.
2. Click the How to . . . option.
An Autodesk Inventor Help screen will appear for Work planes. See Figure 3-40.
3. Click the Quick Reference tab.
4. Scroll down the Quick Reference screen.
A listing of specific instruction for creating work planes will appear. See Figure 3-41.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 91

Click here to access the

animated Show Me dialog
box.

Figure 3-40

Figure 3-41

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP3-1

Figure 3-42 shows a Ø20 × 10 cylinder that was sketched but not aligned with the system’s origin.
The sketch was created on the default XY plane.
92 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Locate a O4 hole here. Figure 3-42

Create a Ø4 hole through the cylinder so that its centerline is parallel to the XY plane and 5
above the plane.
The sides of the cylinder cannot be used as a sketch plane, so a work plane is needed. Either
the YZ or XZ plane could be used.

Exercise 3-20: Creating a Tangent Work Plane

1. Click the Work Plane tool.
2. Click the YZ Plane tool in the browser area.
A YZ plane will appear on the screen. See Figure 3-43.
3. Move the cursor and click the lower outside edge of the cylinder and click the mouse.
A work plane will be created tangent to the cylinder.
4. Right-click one of the corners of the work plane (yellow circles will appear) and select the
New Sketch option.
5. Move the cursor to one of the work plane’s corner points.
A small circle will appear.
6. Click the circle.
A grid will appear. The grid will include intersecting horizontal and vertical lines that are
darker than the other grid lines. The horizontal line is aligned with the XY plane, and the vertical
line is parallel to the YZ plane tangent to the edge of the cylinder.

Use its look at tool to create a 2D view of the sketch plane.

TIP
Exercise 3-21: Creating the Hole through the Cylinder
1. Click the Circle tool.
2. Sketch a hole with its center point located on the darker vertical line.
3. Use the General Dimension tool to create a Ø4 circle with a center point located 5 from
the top surface of the cylinder.
4. Click the arrow to the right of the 2D sketch heading and select the Part Features option.
Click the Extrude tool.
The Extrude dialog box will appear.
5. Set the extrusion distance for 22 in a direction that passes through the cylinder, and select
the Cut option.
6. Click OK.
The Point, Center Point and Hole tools could be use to create the hole.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 93

Click
here
Right-click the corner,
then select the New
Sketch option.

A work plane tangent to

the edge of the cylinder

Create a sketch plane on the tangent work plane and The finished model
sketch a hole.
Figure 3-43

Hiding Work Planes

Work planes may be hidden by right-clicking one of the corners of the work plane and selecting
the Visibility option.

Restoring a Work Plane

To restore a hidden work plane, right-click the work plane’s reference in the browser box and se-
lect the Visibility option.

ANGLED WORK PLANES

Work planes may be created at an angle to a model. For example, suppose a hole must be drilled
through the 30 × 50 × 10 block shown in Figure 3-44 at a 45° angle. Only extrusions perpendicu-
lar to a plane can be created, so a 45° plane is needed.

Exercise 3-22: Creating an Angled Work Plane

1. Select the Work Axis tool and create a work axis on the edge of the block as shown.
See Figure 3-44. (To create a work axis, click the Work Axis tool, then click the edge loca-
tion for the axis.)
2. Select the Work Plane tool, then click the work axis, then the front right vertical surface
of the block.
3. Enter an angle value, then click the check mark.
94 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

30 x 50 x 10 Work axis
block

Specify angle value.

Select this surface.

Select this edge for the work axis.

Create a new sketch plane.

Create and locate
a Point, Center Finished hole
Point.

Figure 3-44

In this example, a value of 45° was entered.

4. Right-click one of the work plane’s corner points and select the New Sketch Plane option.
5. Use the Point, Center Point and General Dimension tools to create and locate a hole’s
center point.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then right-click again and select the
Finish Sketch option.
7. Select the Hole tool and specify the hole’s diameter and length.
In this example a diameter of 10 mm and a depth of Through All were used.
8. Click OK.
9. Hide the work plane.

OFFSET WORK PLANES

Figure 3-45 shows an object in which a small cylinder passes through a larger cylinder. An offset
work plane was used to create the object.

Figure 3-45
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 95

A O 50 x 30 cylinder

Specify offset
distance.

Construction line

Figure 3-46

Exercise 3-23: Creating an Offset Work Plane

See Figure 3-46.
1. Draw a Ø50 30 cylinder.
2. Select the Work Plane tool and YZ plane and create a work plane through the center of
the cylinder.
3. Click on one of the work plane’s corner points, and holding the left mouse button down,
drag the work plane away from the cylinder.
4. Specify the offset distance.
In this example a value of 50 mm was used.
5. Right-click one of the work plane’s corner points and select the New Sketch Plane option.
6. Draw a line along the thick centerline on the grid.
The thick grid line is aligned to the bottom surface of the large cylinder.
7. Use the Point, Center Point tool and the General Dimension tool to create a Ø15 hole as
shown.
8. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then right-click again and select the
Finish Sketch option.
9. Select the Extrude tool, then select the circle as the profile and extrude it 100 mm
through the large cylinder.
10. Click OK.

WORK POINTS work point: A defined point

on a model used to help locate
Work points are defined points on a model. They are used to help locate work planes and work axes. work planes and work axes.
96 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Exercise 3-24: Defining a Work Point

1. Click the Work Point tool.
2. Select the location for the work points and click the mouse.
In the example shown in Figure 3-47 the midpoint of the left edge was selected along with
the lower front corner. The work points created will be listed in the browser box.

20 x 30 x 24 block

Work points Figure 3-47

Exercise 3-25: Creating an Oblique Work Plane Using Work Points

An oblique work plane may be created using work points. Figure 3-48 shows a 20 × 30 × 24 rec-
tangular block.

Work
Work point points

A work plane created using three work points A sketch plane created on the work plane, and a rectangle
sketched on the sketch plane

Extrude the rectangle, then use the An oblique surface

Figure 3-48 Cut option to trim the model.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 97

1. Create three work points on the prism, two on the midpoints of the vertical edges, and one
at the lower corner as shown in Figure 3-48.
2. Click on the Work Plane tool, then click the three work points.
3. Left-click one of the work plane’s corner points, right-click the mouse, and select the New
Sketch Plane option.
4. Click the Two Point Rectangle tool and draw a very large rectangle on the new sketch
plane.
The rectangle may be any size that exceeds the size of the prism.
5. Access the Extrude tool and cut out the top portion of the prism.

WORK AXES
A work axis is a defined line. Work axes are used to help define work planes and to help define
the geometric relationship between assembled models.

Exercise 3-26: Creating a Work Axis

1. Click the Work Axis tool. work axis: A defined line on a
2. Click the edge line that is to be defined as a work axis. model.

Figure 3-49 shows a model with two defined work axes.

Exercise 3-27: Drawing a Work Axis at the Center of a Cylinder

Figure 3-50 shows a cylinder.
1. Click the Work Axis tool.
2. Click the lower edge of the cylinder.
The words Work Axis 1 will appear in the browser.

Work axis

Work axis

Figure 3-49

Figure 3-50

The relationships among work points, work axis, and work planes will be discussed further

TIP in Chapter 5, Assembly Drawings

98 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

RIBS (WEBS)
rib: An element added to a A rib is used to add strength to a model. Ribs or webs are typically used with cast or molded parts.
model to give it strength. Figure 3-51 shows an L-bracket. Ribs 5 mm thick are to be added to each end of the bracket.

Enter thickness here. Define the type of rib here.

Draw a line as shown.

Preview of rib
Use these tools to position
rib relative to the profile line.
Align rib preview
with the right end
surface of the
L-bracket

Rib preview

Use this Direction tool to Finished ribs

define the direction of the rib.
Green arrow
direction
Figure 3-51

1. Click the right end surface of the bracket, click the right mouse button, and select the New
Sketch option.
2. Use the Line tool and draw a line across the corner edge points as shown in Figure 3-51.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
4. Click the Rib tool.
The Rib dialog box will appear. See Figure 3-51.
5. Define the line as the Profile by clicking the line.
6. Enter a Thickness value of 5.
7. Click the left box in the Extents box.
8. Click the middle box in the Thickness box to locate the rib.
The right side of the rib preview should be aligned with the right end surface of the L-bracket.
9. Click the Direction box in the Shape box.
Move the cursor into the rib preview area. A large green arrowhead will appear. As you move
the cursor around, the arrow will shift to different positions, and different profiles will appear.
See Figure 3-51.
10. Move the cursor until the arrow points to the right and slightly downward.
11. Click OK.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 99

The rib will appear on the bracket.

12. Use the Rotate tool and rotate the bracket so that the other end of the bracket is visible.
13. Draw a line between the corners as was done for the first rib.
14. Specify the thickness and the Extents.
15. Click the Direction tool and define the direction for the rib.
After the Direction box is clicked, move the cursor into the rib area. Move the cursor around
and note how the directional arrow changes.
16. When the directional arrow is pointing downward click OK.

LOFT
The LOFT command is used to create a solid between two or more sketches. Figure 3-52 shows
a loft surface created between a circle and a rectangle. Both the circle and the rectangle are first
drawn on the same XY plane. This allows the General Dimension tool to be used to ensure the
alignment between the two sketches. The rectangle is then projected onto another work plane. The
Loft tool is then used to create a surface between the two planes.

Use the Project Geometry tool to move

Work plane offset the square to the offset work plane.
25 mm from XY axis

Construction lines

Sketch a Ø20 circle and an 8 x 8 square

aligned to a common center point. Work plane aligned
with XY axis

When sections are selected,

they change colors.

Click here to define sections.

Resulting lofted surface with work
planes hidden
Figure 3-52
100 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Exercise 3-28: Sketching the Circle and the Square

1. Sketch a Ø20 circle and an 8 ⴛ 8 square aligned to a common center point, right-click the
mouse, and click the Finish Sketch option.
2. Create a work plane aligned with the XY plane, that is, 0 offset.

Use the Fix constraint and construction lines if necessary.

TIP
Exercise 3-29: Creating an Offset Work Plane
1. Click the Work Plane tool again, then click the XY Plane tool in the browser area.
A new plane will appear aligned with the existing XY work plane.
2. Click one of the corner points of the new plane and move the cursor upward.
An Offset dialog box will appear.
3. Set the offset distance for 25 and click the check mark on the dialog box.
Check the browser area to verify that two work planes have been created.

Exercise 3-30: Projecting the Square

1. Click one of the corner points of the offset work plane, right-click the mouse, and select
the New Sketch Plane option.
2. Select the Project Geometry tool on the 2D Sketch Panel.
3. Select the 8 ⴛ 8 square.
Select the square line by line. The square will be projected into the offset work plane.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Exercise 3-31: Creating a Loft

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option, then select the Loft option.
The Loft dialog box will appear.
2. Click in the Sections area of the Loft dialog box, then click the square.
3. Click the Sections area of the Loft dialog box again and click the circle.
4. Click Sketch 1 in the Loft dialog box.
5. Click OK.
Hide the work planes if desired.

SWEEP
The Sweep tool is used to project a sketch along a defined path. In this example a shape is cre-
ated in the XZ plane and then projected along a path drawn in the YZ plane. See Figure 3-53.
For this example two work planes will be created. Unlike in previous examples the example
will not start on a 2D sketching screen but will go directly to the Part Features panel.

Exercise 3-32: Creating the Sketch

1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).ipt format.
The drawing will go to the 2D Sketch tools.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
The screen should be clear.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 101

Create an
XZ plane.

Create a YZ
plane and
sketch the
path of the
sweep.
Sketch a shape.

The path on the YZ plane

Sweep dialog box

The profile on the

XZ plane

Figure 3-53

3. Use the Viewcube and set the view for Isometric, then click the Work Plane tool, then
the XZ Plane tool in the browser area.
A plane will appear.
4. Click one of the plane’s corners and offset the work plane 0.000, then click the check mark
on the Offset dialog box.
5. Right-click one of the plane’s corner points and select the New Sketch option.
6. Sketch a Ø10 circle with a 4 ⴛ 3 keyway as shown.
7. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.

Exercise 3-33: Creating the Path

1. Click the Work Plane tool, then the YZ Plane tool in the browser.
2. Click one of the plane’s corner points and create a second work plane offset 0.000 mm.
3. Right-click one of the YZ work plane’s corner points and select the New Sketch option.
4. Click the Spline tool and sketch a spline starting at the hole’s center point. Click the right
mouse button and select the Create option, then right-click the mouse again and select the
Done option.
In this example a random spline was used.

Exercise 3-34: Creating the Sweep

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option, then click the Sweep tool.
The Sweep dialog box will appear. The circular sketch will automatically be selected as the
profile.
2. Click the spline to define it as the path.
3. Click OK.
102 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

COIL
A coil is similar to a sweep, but the path is a helix. A sketch is drawn, then projected along a
helical-shaped path.

Exercise 3-35: Creating the Sketch

1. Sketch the shape shown in Figure 3-54 on the XY plane.
2. Sketch a line below the shape as shown.
This line will serve as the axis of rotation.
3. Right-click the mouse, and click the Finish Sketch option.

Define the axis of

Sketch a
revolution.
shape.

Define the Profile

and Axis.

Line to be used as axis drawn

5 from the end of the shape

Resulting coil

Enter values.

Figure 3-54

Exercise 3-36: Creating the Coil

1. Click the Coil tool on the Part Features panel bar.
The Coil dialog box will appear. The sketched profile Note:
will be selected automatically. How to
dra
2. Select the sketch line as the axis. is cover w springs usin
ed in C
3. Click the Coil Size tab. hapter g Coil
9.
The dialog box will change.
4. Set the Type for Pitch and Revolution, the Pitch for 20, and the Revolution for 3.
5. Click OK.
See Figure 3-54.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 103

MODEL MATERIAL
A material designation may be assigned to a model. The material designation becomes part of the
model’s file and will be included on any assembly’s parts list that includes the model.

Exercise 3-37: Defining a Model’s Material

1. Right-click on the model’s name in the browser box and select the Properties option.
See Figure 3-55. The Properties dialog box will appear.
2. Select the Physical tab and then the scroll arrow on the right side of the Material box.
See Figure 3-56.
3. Select a material.
In this example, mild steel was selected.

Click here.

Select material.
Click here.

Figure 3-55 Figure 3-56

SUMMARY
The first part of the chapter demonstrated how to convert 2D chamfers, and holes in both rectangular and circular arrange-
sketches into 3D models and then modify features using some ments were also added to models.
of the commands in the Part Features panel bar. Exercises in- The second part of the chapter introduced sketch and
cluded extruding, revolving, lofting, and mirroring models as work planes and work axes and demonstrated how to use them
well as trimming away portions, and creating shells. Fillets, to refine 3D models.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which of the following is not used to define a chamfer? 2. Which command is used to draw a spring?
a. Angle and a distance a. Coil
b. Distance and distance b. Loft
c. Two angles and a distance c. Sweep
 104 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

3. The Edit Sketch tool can be applied to shapes created 7. Which of the following is a material not listed under the
with which of the following tools? Physical tab of the Properties dialog box?
a. Extrude a. Mild Steel
b. Rectangle b. Aluminum Bronze
c. Revolved c. Glass
d. Hole 8. Sketched shapes can be projected between work planes
4. The Edit Features tool can be applied to shapes created using which tool?
with which of the following tools? a. Sweep
a. Circle b. Boundary Patch
b. Line c. Move Face
c. Point, Center Point d. Project Geometry
d. Extrude 9. Which of the following will happen if a work plane is
5. Which of the following parameters cannot be used to deleted?
draw a work plane? a. The work plane will disappear from the screen and all
a. Angle to a plane entities will be deleted.
b. Point and a tangent b. The work plane will disappear from the screen and all
c. 3-Points entities will remain in place.
d. Tangent to a face through 10. Why are ribs used on molded parts?
6. Which of the following is a type of end for a coil? a. To increases the part’s flexibility
a. Flat b. To balance the part
b. Rounded c. To increase the part’s strength
c. Tapered

Matching
Column A Column B
a. Face Draft 1. The command used to draw springs
b. Fillet 2. The command used to draw a square pattern of holes
c. Coil 3. The command used to add a slanted surface to an object
d. Shell 4. The command used to hollow out an object
e. Work Plane 5. The command used to add rounded edges to an object
f. Rectangular Pattern 6. The command used to remove material from an object
g. Extrude, Cut 7. The command used to define planes not located on any surface of an object

True or False
1. True or False: A fillet must always be of constant radius. 6. True or False: The Fillet command can be applied only to
2. True or False: A chamfer can be defined using a distance external edges.
and an angle. 7. True or False: A sketch plane can be created only on an
3. True or False: The Face Draft tool is used to create existing surface.
slanted surfaces. 8. True or False: Work planes can be drawn at an angle to an
4. True or False: Every Inventor drawing includes three de- existing object.
fault planes and three default axes. 9. True or False: A work plane can be created using a work
5. True or False: The Shell command can be applied to any point and a face parallel.
solid shape. 10. True or False: An object cannot be assigned a material
specification of Phenolic.
 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 105

CHAPTER PROJECT
Project 3-1:
Redraw the following objects as solid models based on the given dimensions. Make all models
from mild steel.

Figure P3-1 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-4 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-2 INCHES

Figure P3-3 MILLIMETERS

106 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Figure P3-5 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-6 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-7 INCHES

 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 107

Figure P3-11 INCHES

Figure P3-8 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-12 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-9 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-10 MILLIMETERS

 108 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Figure P3-13 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-14 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-15 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 109

Figure P3-18 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-16 INCHES

Figure P3-19 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-17 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-20 MILLIMETERS

 110 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Figure P3-23 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-21 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-22 INCHES

Figure P3-24 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 111

Figure P3-25 INCHES (SCALE: 4=1)

Figure P3-28 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-29 INCHES (SCALE: 4=1)

Figure P3-26 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-30 MILLIMETERS (SCALE: 2=1)

Figure P3-27 MILLIMETERS
 112 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Figure P3-31 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-34 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-32 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-33 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 113

Figure P3-35 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-38 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-36 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-39 MILLIMETERS (CONSIDER A SHELL)

Figure P3-37 MILLIMETERS

 114 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models

Figure P3-42 INCHES

Figure P3-40 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-43 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-41 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-44 INCHES

 Chapter 3 Three-Dimensional Models 115

Figure P3-45 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-46 MILLIMETERS

Figure P3-47 MILLIMETERS

This page intentionally left blank
Orthographic Views 4
Chapter
Objectives
• Introduce orthographic views.
• Introduce ANSI standards and conventions.
• Show how to draw sectional and auxiliary views.

INTRODUCTION
Orthographic views may be created directly from 3D Inventor models. Orthographic views are orthographic view: A two-di-
two-dimensional views used to define a three-dimensional model. Unless the model is of uniform mensional view used to define
thickness, more than one orthographic view is necessary to define the model’s shape. Standard a three-dimensional model.
practice calls for three orthographic views: a front, top, and right-side view, although more or
fewer views may be used as needed.
Modern machines can work directly from the information generated when a solid 3D model
is created, so the need for orthographic views—blueprints—is not as critical as it once was; how-
ever, there are still many drawings in existence that are used for production and reference. The
ability to create and read orthographic views remains an important engineering skill.
This chapter presents orthographic views using third-angle projection in accordance with
ANSI standards. ISO first-angle projections are also presented.

FUNDAMENTALS OF ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS

Figure 4-1 shows an object with its front, top, and right-side orthographic views projected from
the object. The views are two-dimensional, so they show no depth. Note that in the projected right
plane there are three rectangles. There is no way to determine which of the three is closest and
which is farthest away if only the right-side view is considered. All views must be studied to an-
alyze the shape of the object.
Figure 4-2 shows three orthographic views of a book. After the views are projected they are
positioned as shown. The positioning of views relative to one another is critical. The views must
be aligned and positioned as shown.

Normal Surfaces
Normal surfaces are surfaces that are at 90° to each other. Figures 4-3, 4-4, and 4-5 show objects normal surfaces: Surfaces
that include only normal surfaces and their orthographic views. that are 90° to each other.
118 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2

Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4

Figure 4-5

Hidden Lines
Hidden lines are used to show surfaces that are not directly visible. All surfaces must be shown
in all views. If an edge or surface is blocked from view by another feature, it is drawn using a hid-
den line. Figures 4-6 and 4-7 show objects that require hidden lines in their orthographic views.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 119

Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7

Figure 4-8 shows an object that contains an edge line, A-B. In the top view, line A-B is par-
tially hidden and partially visible. The hidden portion of the line is drawn using a hidden-line pat-
tern, and the visible portion of the line is drawn using a solid line.

Figure 4-8

Figures 4-9 and 4-10 show objects that require hidden lines in their orthographic views.

Figure 4-9 Figure 4-10

120 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Precedence of Lines
It is not unusual for one type of line to be drawn over another type of line. Figure 4-11 shows two
examples of overlap by different types of lines. Lines are shown on the views in a prescribed or-
der of precedence. A solid line (object or continuous) takes precedence over a hidden line, and a
hidden line takes precedence over a centerline.

Figure 4-11

Slanted Surfaces
slanted surfaces: Surfaces Slanted surfaces are surfaces drawn at an angle to each other. Figure 4-12 shows an object that
that are at an angle to each contains two slanted surfaces. Surface ABCD appears as a rectangle in both the top and front
other.

Figure 4-12
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 121

views. Neither rectangle represents the true shape of the surface. Each is smaller that the actual
surface. Also, none of the views show enough of the object to enable the viewer to accurately de-
fine the shape of the object. The views must be used together for a correct understanding of the
object’s shape.
Figures 4-13 and 4-14 show objects that include slanted surfaces. Projection lines have been
included to emphasize the importance of correct view location. Information is projected between
the front and top views using vertical lines and between the front and side views using horizon-
tal lines.

Figure 4-13 Figure 4-14

Compound Lines
A compound line is formed when two slanted surfaces intersect. Figure 4-15 shows an object that compound line: A line that is
includes a compound line. neither perpendicular nor par-
allel to the X, Y, or Z axis.

Figure 4-15

Oblique Surfaces
oblique surface: A surface
An oblique surface is a surface that is slanted in two different directions. Figures 4-16 and 4-17 that is slanted in two different
show objects that include oblique surfaces. directions.
122 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure 4-16 Figure 4-17

Rounded Surfaces
Figure 4-18 shows an object with two rounded surfaces. Note that as with slanted surfaces, an in-
dividual view is insufficient to define the shape of a surface. More than one view is needed to ac-
curately define the surface’s shape.
Convention calls for a smooth transition between rounded and flat surfaces; that is, no lines
are drawn to indicate the tangency. Inventor includes a line to indicate tangencies between sur-
faces in the isometric drawings created using the multiview options but does not include them in
the orthographic views. Tangency lines are also not included when models are rendered.
Figure 4-19 shows the drawing conventions for including lines for rounded surfaces. If a sur-
face includes no vertical portions or no tangency, no line is included.

Figure 4-18 Figure 4-19

Figure 4-20 shows an object that includes two tangencies. Each is represented by a line. Note
in Figure 4-20 that Inventor will add tangent lines to the 3D model. These lines will not appear in
the orthographic views.
Figure 4-21 shows two objects with similar configurations; however, the boxlike portion
of the lower object blends into the rounded portion exactly on its widest point, so no line is
required.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 123

Tangent line

Figure 4-20 Figure 4-21

ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS WITH INVENTOR

Inventor will create orthographic views directly from models. Figure 4-22 shows a completed
three-dimensional model. See Figure P4-7 for the model’s dimensions. It was created using an
existing file, BLOCK, 3-HOLES. It will be used throughout this chapter to demonstrate
orthographic presentation views.

Click here to create orthographic views.

Figure 4-22 Figure 4-23

Exercise 4-1: Creating an Orthographic View

1. Start a new drawing, click the Metric tab, and select the ANSI (mm).idw option.
See Figure 4-23.
124 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

2. Click OK.
The drawing management screen will appear. See Figure 4-24.

The ANSI (mm). idw screen

Figure 4-24

3. Click the Base View... tool in the Drawing Views Panel bar.
The Drawing View dialog box will appear. See Figure 4-25.

Select here.

Click here.

Figure 4-25
4. Click the Open an existing file button.
The Open dialog box will appear. See Figure 4-26.
5. Select the desired model. In this example the model’s file name is P4-7.
6. Click the Open box.
The Drawing View dialog box will appear. See Figure 4-27.
7. Select the Bottom option, locate the view on the drawing screen, and click the location.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 125

Select this
orientation.
Click the part file name.

Preview

Figure 4-26 Figure 4-27

Resulting orthographic view Figure 4-28

Figure 4-28 shows the resulting orthographic view.

The screen will include a border and a title block. The lettering in the title block may appear
illegible. This is normal. The text will be legible when printed. The section on title blocks will ex-
plain how to work with title blocks.

Exercise 4-2: Creating Other Orthographic Views

1. Click the Projected View tool on the Drawing Views Panel bar.
2. Click the view already on the drawing screen.
3. Move the cursor upward from the view.
A second view will appear.
4. Select a location, click the left mouse button to place the view, then click the right mouse
button and select the Create option.
Figure 4-29 shows the resulting two orthographic views. The initial view was created using
the Bottom option. This is a relative term based on the way the model was drawn. The initial view

Orthographic views projected

from the created view Figure 4-29
126 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

can be defined as the front view, and the second view created from that front view is also, by def-
inition, the top view.

Exercise 4-3: Adding Centerlines

Convention calls for all holes to be defined using centerlines. The views in Figure 4-29 do not in-
clude centerlines.
1. Move the cursor into the panel bar area and right-click the mouse.
A small dialog box will appear.
2. Select the Drawing Annotation Panel option.
The Drawing Annotation Panel bar will appear. See Figure 4-30.
3. Click the Center Mark tool.
4. Move the cursor into the drawing screen and click the edges of the holes in the top view.
See Figure 4-31.
5. Click the Centerline Bisector tool.
The Centerline Bisector tool is a flyout from the Center Mark tool.
6. Click each side of the hole projections in the front view.
Vertical centerlines will appear. See Figure 4-32.

Click the two hidden

lines to add a vertical
centerline.
Click here.

Click the edge of the hole

to add a center mark.

Figure 4-30 Figure 4-31 Figure 4-32

Exercise 4-4: Editing the Size of a Centerline

If the centerline patterns are too small or too big for the given feature, they may be edited to cre-
ate a more pleasing visual picture.
1. Select the Format heading at the top of the screen, select the Styles and Standard
Editor option, click the + sign to the left of the Center Mark heading, then select the
Center Mark (ANSI) option. See Figure 4-33.
2. Change the center mark values as needed.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 127

Click here.

Change
values
Click here. here.

Figure 4-33a Figure 4-33b

Exercise 4-5: Changing the Background Color of the Drawing Screen

1. Click the Format heading at the top of the screen.
Select the Active Standards option.
The Document Settings dialog box will appear. See Figure 4-34.

Click here.

Click here.

Click here.

Click here.
Click here.

Figure 4-34

3. Click the Sheet tab, then the heading Sheet in the Colors box.
If the centerlines are too large or too small, edit their size.
The Color dialog box will appear.
4. Click the desired color, then OK.
The Document Settings dialog box will appear.
128 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

5. Click the Apply box, then OK.

The sheet’s background color will be changed.

ISOMETRIC VIEWS
An isometric view may be created from any view on the screen. The resulting orientation will
vary according to the view selected. In this example the front view is selected.
1. Click the Projected View tool.
2. Click the Front view.
3. Move the cursor to the right of the front view and select a location for the isometric view.
4. Move the cursor slightly and click the right mouse button.
5. Select the Create option.
Figure 4-35 shows the resulting isometric view.

Views with
centerlines added

Resulting isometric view

Figure 4-35

SECTION VIEWS
Some objects have internal surfaces that are not directly visible in normal orthographic views.
section view: A view used to Section views are used to expose these surfaces. Section views do not include hidden lines.
expose an internal surface of a Any material cut when a section view is defined is hatched using section lines. There are
model. many different styles of hatching, but the general style is evenly spaced 45° lines. This style is de-
fined as ANSI 31 and will be applied automatically by Inventor.
Figure 4-36 shows a three-dimensional view of an object. The object is cut by a cutting plane.
cutting plane: A plane used Cutting planes are used to define the location of the section view. Material to one side of the cut-
to define the location of a sec- ting plane is removed, exposing the section view.
tion view. Figure 4-37 shows the same object presented using two dimensions. The cutting plane is rep-
resented by a cutting plane line. The cutting plane line is defined as A-A, and the section view is
defined as view A-A.

Section line

Figure 4-36 Cutting plane

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 129

Figure 4-37

All surfaces directly visible must be shown in a section view. In Figure 4-38 the back portion
of the object is not affected by the section view and is directly visible from the cutting plane. The
section view must include these surfaces. Note how the rectangular section blocks out part of the
large hole. No hidden lines are used to show the hidden portion of the large hole.

SECTION A-A
Figure 4-38

Exercise 4-6: Drawing a Section View Using Inventor

Figure 4-39 shows the front and top views of the object defined in Figure P3-10. A section view
will be created by first defining the cutting plane line in the top view, then projecting the section
view below the front view.
Define the cutting plane line.

Figure 4-39
130 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

1. Click the Section View tool in the Drawing Views Panel bar, then click the top view.
The cursor will change to a +-like shape.
2. Define the cutting plane by defining two points on the top view.
See Figure 4-39. Note that if you touch the cursor to the endpoint of one of the hole’s center-
lines, a dotted line will follow the cursor, assuring that the cutting plane line is aligned with the
hole’s centerlines.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Continue option.
The Section View dialog box will appear. See Figure 4-40.
4. Set the Label letter for A and the Scale for 1.
5. Move the cursor so as to position the section view below the front view.
6. Click the section view location.
7. Add the appropriate centerlines using the Centerline Bisector tool.
Figure 4-41 shows the resulting section view. Notice that the section view is defined as A-A,
and the scale is specified. The arrows of the cutting plane line are directed away from the section
view. The section view is located behind the arrows.

Figure 4-40 Figure 4-41

OFFSET SECTION VIEWS

Cutting plane lines need not pass directly across an object but may be offset to include several
features. Figure 4-42 shows an object that has been cut using an offset cutting plane line.

Exercise 4-7: Creating an Offset Cutting Plane

Figure 4-43 shows the front and top views of an object. The views were created using the Create
View, Project View, and Centerline tools.
1. Click the Section View tool, then click the top view.
2. Draw a cutting plane across the top view through the centers of each of the three holes.
3. Locate the section view below the front view.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 131

Figure 4-42

An offset cutting plane

Note: Inventor includes a line

whenever a cutting plane changes
direction. These lines may be
deleted.

Figure 4-43

ALIGNED SECTION VIEWS

Figure 4-44 shows an example of an aligned section view. Aligned section views are most often
used on circular objects and use an angled cutting plane line to include more features in the sec-
tion view, like an offset cutting plane line.

Figure 4-44
132 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

An aligned section view is drawn as if the cutting plane line runs straight across the object.
The cutting plane line is rotated into a straight position, and the section view is projected.
Figure 4-45 shows an aligned section view created using Inventor.

An aligned cutting plane

Figure 4-45

DETAIL VIEWS
detail view: An enlarged view Detail views are used to enlarge portions of an existing drawing. The enlargements are usually
of a portion of a model. made of areas that could be confusing because of many crossing or hidden lines.

Exercise 4-8: Creating a Detail View

1. Click the Detail View tool on the Drawing Views Panel bar, then click the view to be
enlarged.
The Detail View dialog box will appear. See Figure 4-46.

Define the label letter and scale.

Figure 4-46

2. Set the Label letter to D and the Scale to 2, then pick a point on the view.
3. Move the cursor, creating a circle.
The circle will be used to define the area of the detail view.
4. When the circle is of appropriate diameter click the left mouse button and move the cur-
sor away from the view.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 133

5. Locate the detail view and click the location.

Note that the shape of the detail view may be changed.

BREAK VIEWS
It is often convenient to break long continuous shapes so that they take up less drawing space.
Figure 4-47 shows a long L-bracket that has a continuous shape; that is, its shape is constant
throughout its length. Figure 4-48 shows an orthographic view of the same L-bracket.

Figure 4-47

The original view

Define the break gap here.

The resulting broken view

Figure 4-48

Exercise 4-9: Create a Broken View

1. Click the Break tool on the Drawing Views Panel bar, then the orthographic view.
The Break dialog box will appear.
2. Select the orientation of the break and the gap distance between the two portions of the L-bracket.
In this example the gap distance is 1.00. Do not click the OK box. Define the break with the
Break dialog box on the drawing screen.
3. Click a point near the left end of the L-bracket, then move the cursor to the right and click
a second point near the right end of the L-bracket.
Figure 4-48 shows the resulting broken view.
134 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Multiple Section Views

It is acceptable to take more than one section view of the same object in order to present a more com-
plete picture of the object. Figures 4-49 and 4-50 show objects that use more than one section view.

Figure 4-49 Figure 4-50

AUXILIARY VIEWS
auxiliary view: An Auxiliary views are orthographic views used to present true-shaped views of slanted surfaces.
orthographic view used to Figure 4-51 shows an object with a slanted surface that includes a hole drilled perpendicular to
present the true shape of a the slanted surface. Note how the right-side view shows the hole as an ellipse and that the surface
slanted surface. A-B-C-D is foreshortened; that is, it is not shown at its true size. Surface A-B-C-D does appear
at its true shape and size in the auxiliary view. The auxiliary view was projected at 90° from the
slanted surface so as to generate a true-shaped view.
Figure 4-52 shows an object that includes a slanted surface and hole.

An object with a slanted surface created

using Inventor

Figure 4-51 Figure 4-52

Exercise 4-10: Drawing an Auxiliary View

1. Create a drawing using the ANSI (mm).ipt format. Click the Base View and Projected
View tools on the Drawing Views Panel bar and create a front and a right-side view as
shown in Figure 4-53.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 135

The hole cuts the back A front and a right side orthographic view
surface, generating an of the object shown in Figure 4-52.
elliptical shape.

Enter values.

Select this line.

Select a location for the auxiliary view.

Drag the cursor away from

the selected line.

Auxiliary view

A true view of the

slanted surface
Note how the hole cuts through
the back surface.

Figure 4-53

Click the Auxiliary View tool, then the front view.

2. The Auxiliary View dialog box will appear.
3. Enter the appropriate settings, then click the slanted edge line in the front view.
In this example, a scale of 2:1 was used.
4. Move the cursor away from the front view and select a location for the auxiliary view.
5. Click the left mouse button and create the auxiliary view.
 136 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

SUMMARY
This chapter introduced orthographic drawings using presentation views. Isometric views can also be created
third-angle projection in accordance with ANSI stan- from models.
dards. Conventions were demonstrated for objects with Section views are used to expose internal surfaces that are
normal surfaces, hidden lines, slanted surfaces, compound not directly visible in normal orthographic views. Cutting
lines, oblique surfaces, and rounded surfaces. planes were used to define the location of section views.
Inventor creates orthographic views directly from mod- Offset and aligned section views were also created.
els. The Drawing Views Panel and the Drawing Annota- Techniques for creating detail views, broken views, and
tion Panel were introduced for managing orthographic auxiliary views were demonstrated as well.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which of the following in not one of the three views 3. Which of the following is used to define a section view?
generally taken of an object? a. A cutting plane
a. Front b. A section line
b. Top c. A centerline
c. Left 4. Section lines are used to define which of the following on
d. Right a section view?
2. In the precedence of lines, a hidden line covers a(n) a. The outside edges of the section cut
line b. The location of the section view
a. Continuous c. The areas where the section views passes through
b. Center solid material
c. Compound
d. Oblique

Figure MC4-1

5. Given the model shown in Figure MC4-1 which is the correct top view?
a. b. c.
6. Given the model shown in Figure MC4-1 which is the correct front view?
a. b. c.
7. Given the model shown in Figure MC4-1 which is the correct right-side view?
a. b. c.
 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 137

Figure MC4-2

8. Given the model shown in Figure MC4-2 which is the correct right-side view?
a. b. c.
9. Given the model shown in Figure MC4-2 which is the correct top view?
a. b. c.
10 Given the model shown in Figure MC4-2 which is the correct front view?
a. b. c.

Matching
Given the drawing shown in MC4-3 identify the types of lines used to create the drawing.
Column A Column B
a. 1. Centerlines
b. 2. Cutting plane line
c. 3. Continuous line
d. 4. Section line
e. 5. Hidden line

True or False
1. True or False: Orthographic views are two-dimensional 6. True or False: Center points cannot be edited; they can be
views used to define three-dimensional models. used only as they appear on the drawing screen.
2. True or False: Normal surfaces are surfaces located 90° 7. True or False: A section view can be taken only across an
to each other. object’s centerline.
3. True or False: Hidden lines are not used in orthographic 8. True or False: Aligned section views are most often used
views. on circular objects.
4. True or False: A compound line is formed when two 9. True or False: A detail view is used to enlarge portions of
slanted surfaces intersect. an existing drawing.
5. True or False: An oblique surface is a surface that is 10. True or False: Break views are used to shorten long con-
slanted in two different directions. tinuous shapes so they can fit within the drawing screen.
138 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure MC4-3

CHAPTER PROJECT
Project 4-1:
Draw a front, a top, and a right-side orthographic view of each of the objects in Figures P4-1
through P4-24. Make all objects from mild steel.

Figure P4-1 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-2 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 139

Figure P4-3 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-4 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-5 INCHES Figure P4-6 INCHES

Figure P4-7 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-8 MILLIMETERS

140 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure P4-10 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-9 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-12 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-11 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-13 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-14 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 141

Figure P4-15 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-16 INCHES

Figure P4-17 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-18 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-19 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-20 MILLIMETERS

142 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure P4-21 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-22 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 143

Figure P4-23 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-24 MILLIMETERS

144 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Project 4-2:
Draw at least two orthographic views and one auxiliary view of each of the objects in Figures P4-25 through P4-36.

Figure P4-25 MILLIMET- Figure P4-26 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-27 INCHES Figure P4-28 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 145

Figure P4-29 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-30 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-31 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-32 MILLIMETERS

146 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure P4-33 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-34 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-35 INCHES

Figure P4-36 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 147

Project 4-3:
Define the true shape of the oblique surfaces in each of the objects in Figures P4-37 through
P4-40.

Figure P4-37 INCHES

Figure P4-38 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-39 INCHES

148 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure P4-40 MILLIMETERS

Project 4-4:
Draw each of the objects shown in Figures P4-41 through P4-44 as a model, then draw a front
view and an appropriate sectional view of each.

Figure P4-41 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 149

Figure P4-42 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-43 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-44 INCHES

150 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Project 4-5:
Draw at least one orthographic view and the indicated sectional view for each object in Figures
P4-45 through P4-50.

Figure P4-45 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-46 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-47 INCHES

Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 151

Figure P4-48 INCHES

Figure P4-49 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-50 MILLIMETERS

152 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Project 4-6:
Given the orthographic views in Figures P4-51 and P4-52, draw a model of each, then draw the
given orthographic views and the appropriate sectional views.

Figure P4-51 INCHES

Figure P4-52 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 153

Project 4-7:
Draw a 3D model and a set of multiviews for each object shown in Figures P4-53 through P4-60.

Figure P4-53 INCHES

Figure P4-54 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-55 MILLIMETERS

154 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure P4-56 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-57 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-58 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-59 MILLIMETERS Figure P4-60 INCHES

 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 155

Project 4-7:
Figures P4-61 through P4-66 are orthographic views. Draw 3D models from the given views. The
hole pattern defined in Figure P4-61 also applies to Figure P4-62.

Figure P4-61 MILLIMETERS

Figure P4-62 MILLIMETERS

156 Chapter 4 Orthographic Views

Figure P4-63 INCHES

Figure P4-64 INCHES

Chapter 4 Orthographic Views 157

Figure P4-65 MILLIMETERS

158 Unit 4 Orthographic Views

Figure P4-66 INCHES

Assembly Drawings 5
Chapter
Objectives
• Show how to create assembly drawings.
• Show how to create a family of drawings.
• Show how to animate assembly drawings.
• Show how to edit assembly drawings.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains how to create assembly drawings. It uses a group of relatively simple parts
to demonstrate the techniques required. The idea is to learn how to create assembly drawings and
then gradually apply the knowledge to more difficult assemblies. For example, the next chapter
introduces threads and fasteners and includes several exercise problems that require the use of
fasteners when creating assembly drawings. Assembly drawings will be included throughout the
remainder of the book.
This chapter also shows how to create bills of materials, isometric assembly drawings, title
blocks, and other blocks associated with assembly drawings. The chapter also shows how to ani-
mate assembly drawings.

BOTTOM-UP AND TOP-DOWN ASSEMBLIES

There are three ways to create assembly drawings: bottom up, top down, or a combination of the bottom-up approach:
two. A bottom-up approach uses drawings that already exist. Model drawings are pulled from Creating an assembly drawing
files and compiled to create an assembly. The top-down approach creates model drawings from by compiling files from exist-
the assembly drawing. It is also possible to pull drawings from a file and then create more draw- ing drawings.
ings as needed to complete the assembly. top-down approach:
Creating an assembly drawing
by creating model drawings on
STARTING AN ASSEMBLY DRAWING the assembly drawing.

Assembly drawings are created using the .iam format. In this example the bottom-up approach
will be used. A model called SQBLOCK already exists. The SQBLOCK figure was created from
a 30 mm × 30 mm × 30 mm cube with a 15 mm × 15 mm × 30 mm cutout.

Exercise 5-1: Starting an Assembly Drawing

1. Click on the New tool (the New File dialog box appears), select the Metric tab, then
Standard (mm).iam.
See Figure 5-1. The Assembly Panel bar will appear. See Figure 5-2.
 160 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

2. Click the Place Component tool.

Note:
The Open dialog box will appear.
Be sure to
See Figure 5-3. s
where th elect the drive an
e compon d file
ent is loc
ated

Click here to start an assembly drawing.

Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2

Click here.

Preview

Figure 5-3
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 161

3. Click the desired file name, then OK.

Note:
In this example the SQBLOCK file was selected. The selected model
The mous
(component) will appear on the screen. e wheel is
drawing. u
Moving th sed to zoom the
4. Zoom the component to an appropriate size, then left-click the mouse to the whee e mouse
l down wil wh
locate the component. l move th ile holding
e drawing
.
A second copy of the component will automatically appear.
5. Move the second component away from the first. Left-click the mouse to locate the sec-
ond component, then right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
See Figure 5-4.

Components located
on the screen

Figure 5-4

DEGREES OF FREEDOM
Components are either free to move or they are grounded. Grounded components will not move grounded component: A
when assembly tools are applied. The first component will automatically be grounded. Grounded component of a drawing that
components are identified by a pushpin icon in the browser box. See Figure 5-5. will not move when assembly
tools are applied.

The pushpin indicates that the

component is grounded. Figure 5-5

Exercise 5-2: Displaying the Degrees of Freedom

Components that are not grounded will have degrees of freedom. The available degrees of free-
dom for a component may be seen by using the Degrees of Freedom option.
1. Click the View heading at the top of the screen.
2. Click the Degrees of Freedom option.
See Figure 5-6. The available degrees of freedom will appear on the components. See Figure 5-7.
Note that in Figure 5-7 the first component does not have any degrees of freedom; it is grounded.
162 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Activate degrees of No degrees of

freedom here. freedom appear
because the
component is
grounded.

Click here
Click here.

Degrees of
freedom
available

Figure 5-6 Figure 5-7

Exercise 5-3: Ungrounding a Component

1. Right-click on the component’s heading in the browser box.
A dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-8.
2. Click the Grounded option.
3. Use the Undo command and return the drawing to its original configuration: one block
grounded, one block not grounded.

Click here to unground

a component.

Figure 5-8
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 163

MOVING COMPONENTS AND ROTATING COMPONENTS

The Move Component and Rotate Component tools found on the Assembly
Panel bar are used, as their names imply, to move and rotate individual compo- Note:
nents. Use the Rotate tool to rotate the entire assembly.
If the Mo
ve
assembly tool is used, the e
Exercise 5-4: Moving a Component componen
will rotate nti
, not an in re
t. dividual
1. Click the Move Component tool, then click the component to be moved.
2. Hold the left mouse button down and move the component about the screen.
3. When the desired location is reached, release the left button.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Exercise 5-5: Rotating a Component

1. Click the Rotate Component tool, then click the component to rotate.
A circle will appear around the component. See Figure 5-9.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button outside the circle and move the cursor.
The component will rotate. It is suggested that various points outside the circle be tried to see
how the component can be rotated.
3. When the desired orientation is achieved, press the right mouse button and select the
Done option.

The circle indicates

that the component
can be rotated.

Figure 5-9

CONSTRAINT
The Constraint tool is used to locate components relative to one another. Components may be
constrained using the Mate, Flush, Angle, Tangent, or Insert options.

Exercise 5-6: Using the Mate Option

1. Click the Constraint tool.
The Place Constraint dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-10. The Mate option will
automatically be selected.
2. Click the front face of the left SQBLOCK as shown.
3. Click the front face of the right SQBLOCK as shown.
4. Click the Apply box on the Place Constraint dialog box or right-click the mouse and se-
lect the Apply option.
See Figure 5-11. The blocks will be joined at the selected surfaces. The blocks may not be
perfectly aligned when assembled. This situation may be corrected using the Flush option.
The Mate option may also be used to align centerlines of holes, shafts, and fasteners and the
edges of models. See Figure 5-12.
164 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Select
surfaces.

Resulting
mate
Mate Flush
Figure 5-10 Figure 5-11

Click edge.
Use the Mate constraint on edges.

Click edge.

Components are
constrained along
their edges.

Figure 5-12

Exercise 5-7: Using the Flush Option

1. Move and rotate the components approximately into the position shown in Figure 5-13.
2. Click on the Flush button on the Place Constraint dialog box.
3. Click the top surface of each block as shown.
4. Click the Apply button.
5. Make other surfaces flush as needed to align the two blocks.

Exercise 5-8: Using the Offset Option

Figure 5-14 shows two SQBLOCKs.
1. Click the Constraint tool and select the Mate option.
2. Use the Mate tool and mate the components’ edges as shown.
3. Enter a value of 10 into the Offset box.
The two mated edges will move apart 10 mm.

Offset values may be negative. Negative values create an offset in the direction opposite

TIP that of positive values.

 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 165

Move and rotate components

into this position.

Use the Flush option to align

the assemblies' surfaces.

Figure 5-13

Use the Mate constraint.

Click here.

Click here.

Resulting offset
Edges will align.

Enter an Offset value.

Figure 5-14

Exercise 5-9: Positioning Objects

Sometimes components are not oriented so they can be joined as desired. In these cases first ro-
tate or move one of the components as needed, then use the Constraint commands. See Figure 5-15.
The left component has been rotated using the Rotate Component tool.
1. Click the Constraint tool in the Assembly Panel bar.
2. Click the edge lines of the two components as shown.
3. Click the Apply box.
See Figure 5-16.
166 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

4. Use the Flush option to align the components.

5. Click the Apply button.

Components cannot be moved or rotated if they are grounded.

TIP
Rotate the component so
that the appropriate edge
may be accessed.

Identify other edge.

Edges will mate.

Use the Flush option to

align the surfaces.

Component has been

rotated using the Rotate
Component option.

Final assembly

Figure 5-15 Figure 5-16

Exercise 5-10: Using the Angle Option

1. Click the Constraint tool on the Assembly Panel bar.
The Place Constraint dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-17.

The Angle assembly option

Specify the angle. Figure 5-17
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 167

2. Use the Mate constraint and align the edges of the SQBLOCKs shown in Figure 5-18.
3. Access the Angle constraint, set the angle for -20.00, and click the two front surfaces of
the SQBLOCKs as shown.
4. Click the Apply box.
5. Click the Flush constraint and align the two surfaces as shown.

Two SQBLOCKs

Click here.

Use the Mate tool.

Edges will align.

Click here.

Use the Angle constraint set to –20.00°.

–20.00˚

Click here.

Click here.

Use the Flush constraint.

Click here.

Surfaces are flush.

Click here.

Figure 5-18
168 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Exercise 5-11: Using the Tangent Option

Figure 5-19 shows two cylinders. The smaller cylinder has dimensions of Ø10 × 20, and the larger
cylinder has dimensions of Ø20 × 20 with a Ø10 centered longitudinal hole.
1. Click the Constraint tool.
The Place Constraint dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-20.
2. Click the Tangent box under the Type heading.
The Outside option will be selected automatically.
3. Select the outside edge of the large cylinder, then the outside edge of the smaller cylinder.
Figure 5-21 shows the resulting tangent constraint for the cylinders.

O10 x 20

O20 x 20 with O10 hole through The Tangent option The Outside option The resulting tangent cylinders
Figure 5-19 Figure 5-20 Figure 5-21

Exercise 5-12: Using the Insert Option

1. Click the Constraint tool.
The Place Constraint dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-22.

The Insert option Figure 5-22

 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 169

2. Click the Insert box under the Type heading, then click the Aligned box under the
Solution heading.
Note that the aligned box is the right-hand box.
3. Click the top surface of each cylinder as shown.
See Figure 5-23.
4. Click the Apply button.
Figure 5-23 also shows the result of using the Opposed option under the Solution heading.

Identify the surfaces. The Aligned option 10 mm offset The Opposed option

Figure 5-23

SAMPLE ASSEMBLY PROBLEM SP5-1

Figure 5-24 shows three models that will be used to create an assembly drawing. The dimensions
for the models are given in the figure.

Block, Bottom Block, Top Post, O10 x 20

Figure 5-24

1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.

2. Use the Place Component tool and place the Block, Bottom; Block, Top; and Post Ø10
 20 on the drawing screen.
This will be a bottom-up assembly.

3. Click the Constraint tool and use the Mate option to align the two edges as shown.
4. Use the Flush constraint to align the front surfaces of the two blocks.
5. Use the Insert tool to locate the Post in the holes in the blocks. See Figure 5-25.
6. Save the assembly.
170 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Post, O10 x 20 Block, Top Use the Mate constraint.

Click here.

Click here.

Block, Bottom

Use the Flush constraint. Ends are flush. Use the Insert constraint,
Opposed option.

Click here.
Click here.

Edges mated

Use the Insert option to locate the post into holes.

Insert

Figure 5-25

Exercise 5-13: Saving an Assembly

1. Create the assembly, then click the Save Copy As... heading under the File pull-down
menu.
The file will be saved as an .iam file.
2. Save the assembly using the file name BLOCK, Assembly; click Save.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 171

PRESENTATION DRAWINGS
Presentation drawings are used to create exploded assembly drawings that can then be animated presentation drawing: An
to show how the assembly is to be created from its components. exploded assembly drawing
that can be animated to show
Exercise 5-14: Creating a Presentation Drawing how the assembly is to be
created.
1. Click on the New tool.
The New File dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-26.
2. Click the Standard (mm).ipn tool, then OK.
The Presentation Panel bar will appear. See Figure 5-27.
3. Click the Create View tool in the Presentation Panel bar.
The Select Assembly dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-28.

Click here to start a presentation

drawing.

Figure 5-26

Click here to access

assembly drawings. Click here to access files.

Figure 5-27 Figure 5-28

172 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

4. Click the Explore Directories box.

The Open dialog box will appear, listing all the existing assembly drawings. See Figure 5-29.
5. Select the appropriate assembly drawing, then click Open.
The Select Assembly dialog box will reappear listing the selected assembly under the File
heading. See Figure 5-30.
6. Click OK.
The assembly will appear. See Figure 5-31.

Click here.

Preview

Figure 5-29

A presentation drawing
ready for tweaking

The assembly drawing

to be opened

Figure 5-30 Figure 5-31

 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 173

Click here.

Define the direction of the tweak.

Figure 5-32

Exercise 5-15: Creating an Exploded Assembly Drawing

1. Click the Tweak Components tool in the Presentation Panel bar.
The Tweak Component dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-32. The Direction option will
automatically be selected.
2. Select the direction of the tweak by selecting one of the assembly’s vertical edge lines.
The Tweak Component dialog box will switch to the Components option. In this example
the Z axis was selected.
3. Select the peg (the peg will change to the color blue when selected), then hold the left
mouse button down and drag the peg to a position above the assembly.
See Figure 5-33.

The Tweak Component

option applied to the peg

Figure 5-33
174 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Do not click the Clear or Close boxes on the Tweak Component dialog box. If you do
and then select the top block, the block will move independently of the post and bottom

TIP block. In the next step both the top block and the post will move.

4. Select the top block and drag it to a position above the bottom block.
See Figure 5-34.
5. Click the Clear box on the Tweak Component dialog box, then click the Close box.

The Tweak Component option applied to the top block

To hide this trail

right-click the trail
and select the
Visibility option.

Figure 5-34

Exercise 5-16: Saving the Presentation Drawing

1. Click the Save Copy As . . . heading on the File pull-down menu.
The Save Copy As dialog box will appear.
2. Enter the file name and click the Save box.
The drawing will be saved as an .ipn drawing. In this example the assembly drawing file
name BLOCK, Assembly was used. The same name can be used because the file is saved using
a different extension.

Exercise 5-17: Hiding a Trail

1. Right-click the trail.
2. Select the Visibility option.

Note that if you delete a trail, the tweaking will also be deleted, and the models will return

TIP to their original assembled positions.

ANIMATION
Presentation drawings can be animated using the Animate tool.

Exercise 5-18: Animating a Presentation Drawing

1. Click on the Animate tool on the Presentation Panel bar.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 175

The Animation dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-35. The control buttons on the
Animation dialog box are similar to those found on CD players.

Click here to play the animation.

Figure 5-35

2. Click the Play forward button.

The assembly will be slowly reassembled in the reverse of the order used to tweak the
components.
3. Click the Reset button to re-create the original presentation drawing.

ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS
Isometric drawings can be created directly from presentation drawings. Assembly numbers
(balloons) can be added to the isometric drawings and a parts list will automatically be created.

Exercise 5-19: Creating an Isometric Drawing

1. Click on the New tool, then the Metric tab.

The New File dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-36.
2. Select the ANSI (mm).idw tool, then click OK.
The Drawing Management tools will appear in the panel bar. See Chapter 4 for a further
explanation of the Drawing Management tools.
3. Click the Base View tool.
The Drawing View dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-36.
4. Click the Explore Directories button.
The Open dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-37.

Click here to create an

exploded isometric drawing.

Click here to access files.

Figure 5-36
176 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Click here.

Preview

Assure that all files are listed.

Figure 5-37

Set the Files of type box for Inventor Files (*.ipt, *.iam, *.ipn) to assure that all files are

TIP available.

Assure that all files are listed.

5. Select the appropriate presentation drawing (file type is .ipn), then click Open.
The Drawing View dialog box will reappear. See Figure 5-38.
6. Select the Iso Top Right orientation and set the Scale as needed. Select the Hidden Lines
Removed option under the Style heading.
7. Select a location for the exploded isometric drawing and click the mouse.

Select view here.

Set scale here. Resulting exploded

isometric drawing

Select here to
remove hidden
lines.

Figure 5-38
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 177

Iso top right drawing Shaded option

Figure 5-39 Figure 5-40

Figure 5-39 shows the resulting isometric view. Figure 5-40 shows the isometric drawing
created using the Shaded option.

ASSEMBLY NUMBERS
Assembly numbers are added to an isometric drawing using the Balloon tool.

Exercise 5-20: Adding Balloons

1. Locate the cursor in the panel bar area and right-click the mouse.
2. Click the Drawing Annotation option.
The Drawing Annotation Panel bar will appear. See Figure 5-41.
3. Click the Balloon option.
The BOM Properties dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-42.
4. Click the topmost edge line of the bottom block.
5. Click OK, then drag the cursor away from the selected edge line.
6. Locate a position away from the component and click the left mouse button. Note:
Move the cursor in a horizontal direction and click the left mouse button Balloon
nu
again. bers) ar mbers (assemb
e also re ly num-
7. Right-click the mouse and select the Continue option. bubble n fe
8. Add balloons to the other components. umbers rred to as
identify and are
pa use
9. Move the cursor to the center of the screen and click the right mouse but- Assemb rts within an a d to
ly numb ssembly
ton, then select the Done option. from pa ers .
rt numb are different
ers.

Click here to
create balloons.

Figure 5-41 Figure 5-42

178 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Assembly numbers
Click here

Figure 5-43

See Figure 5-43. The balloon numbers will be in the order the parts were added to the drawing.

Making the balloon leaders lines the same angle will give the drawing a well-organized

TIP appearance.

Exercise 5-21: Editing Balloons

In general, the biggest parts have the lowest numbers. The assigned numbers can be edited.
1. Right-click the balloon to be edited and select the Edit Balloon option. See Figure 5-44.
The Edit Balloon dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-45.
2. Make any needed changes in the Edit Balloon dialog box and click OK.

Change balloon numbers here.

Figure 5-44 Figure 5-45

 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 179

The terms parts list and BOM are interchangeable.

TIP

PARTS LIST
A parts list can be created from an isometric drawing after the balloons have been assigned using
the Parts List tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
The Drawing Annotation Panel bar is accessed by moving the cursor into the panel bar area,
then right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Drawing Annotation option.

Exercise 5-22: Creating a Parts List

1. Click the Parts List tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
The Parts List dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-46.

Figure 5-46

2. Move the cursor into the area around the isometric drawing.
A broken red line will appear when the cursor is in the area.
3. Click the left mouse button, then click the OK button on the Parts List dialog box. Move
the cursor away from the isometric drawing area.
An outline of the parts list will appear and move with the cursor.
4. Select a location for the parts list and left-click the mouse.
Figure 5-47 shows the resulting drawing. The parts list was generated using information
from the original model drawings and the presentation drawings.
180 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Parts list

Figure 5-47

Exercise 5-23: Editing a Parts List

1. Move the cursor onto the parts list and right-click the mouse.
2. Click the Edit Parts List option.
The Edit Parts List dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-48. Click on a cell and either delete
or add text. Figure 5-49 shows an edited parts list.

The original parts

Edit these columns.

Figure 5-48

The Column Chooser

The PART NUMBER and DESCRIPTION columns have been edited.

Figure 5-49

Naming Parts
Each company or organization has its own system for naming parts. In the example in this book
the noun, modifier format was used.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 181

Exercise 5-24: Adding a New Column

Say two additional columns were required for the parts list shown in Figure 5-49: Material and
Notes.
1. Click the Column Chooser button at the top of the Edit Parts List dialog box.
The Parts List Column Chooser dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-50.

Heading is added here.

Click here. Click here. Click here to create a new heading. Headings can be moved using
Move Down and Move Up.
Figure 5-50

2. Scroll down the Available Properties listing to see if the new colum headings are listed.
3. Material is listed, so click on the listing, then click the Add box in the middle of the
screen.
The heading Material will appear in the Selected Properties area. Use the Move Down and Create new heading here.
Move Up boxes to sequence the column headings.
The heading Notes is not listed, so it must be defined.
4. Click on the New Property box.
The Define New Property dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-51.
5. Type in the name of the new column, then click OK.
In this example a NOTES column was added. Figure 5-51

Note that only uppercase letters are used to define column headings.
6. Click OK on the Parts List Column Chooser dialog box.
Figure 5-52 shows the revised column in the parts list. If no material is defined, the word
Default will appear. The material for a model will be assigned to the model drawing and brought
forward into the parts list. The Material column can be edited like the other columns.
Figure 5-53 shows the edited parts list on the drawing.

Material was added here. Figure 5-52

The material specifications were entered as the objects were created. See Chapter 3. If no material is
defined, the word "Default" will appear.
Figure 5-53
182 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

TITLE BLOCK
All drawings include a title block, usually located in the lower right corner of the drawing sheet,
as Figure 5-54 shows. Text may be added to a title block under existing headings, or new head-
ings may be added.

Figure 5-54

Exercise 5-25: Adding Text to a Title Block

1. Right-click the drawing name in the Model browser box, then click the Properties
option.
See Figure 5-55. The drawing’s Properties dialog box will appear. Text can be typed into the
Properties dialog box and will appear on the title block. Figure 5-56 shows the Summary input.
2. Click the Summary tab on the Properties dialog box and enter the appropriate
information.
In this example, the Title, Author, and Company were added.

Figure 5-55 Figure 5-56

 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 183

Figure 5-57

3. Click the Project tab and add the Part Number. See Figure 5-57. In this example the
number ENG-312 was added. This is an assembly drawing number. Each individual part
has its own number.
4. Click Apply and Close.
See Figure 5-57. Figure 5-58 shows the completed title block.
The title block included with Inventor is only one possible format. Each company and organ-
ization will have its own specifications.

Revised title block

Figure 5-58

SUBASSEMBLIES
Figure 5-59 shows a slightly more complicated assembly than the BLOCK assembly used in the
previous sections. It is called a PIVOT assembly. Figure 5-60 shows the components needed to
create the assembly. This will be a bottom-up assembly.
184 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

PIVOT ASSEMBLY

BALL

POST,SMALL

HANDLE

PIVOT

LINK

POST,LARGE

Figure 5-59 Figure 5-60

An incorrect application
of an assembly
constraint

Figure 5-61

It is sometimes difficult to control the assembly constraints. The parts seem to move ran-
domly about the screen when constraints are added. Figure 5-61 shows an example of an incor-
rect application of an assembly constraint. If this occurs, undo the incorrect application and con-
sider temporarily fixing some constraints. The constraints can be deleted when no longer needed.
The assembly sequence presented here is one of many different ones that could be used.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 185

The PIVOT is grounded because it was the first component entered on the screen.
1. Right-click HANDLE in the browser box and ground the handle.
More than one component many be grounded at one time. See Figure 5-62.
2. Use the Insert constraint and insert the POST,LARGE into the top hole of the HANDLE.
Use the Offset option to center the post.
3. Use Insert and position the POST,SMALL into the HANDLE.
See Figure 5-63.

Ground the HANDLE.

Already grounded

Use Insert to position the POST,LARGE into the HANDLE.

Figure 5-62

Use Insert to position the POST,SMALL.

Figure 5-63
186 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Save this setup as a

subassembly.

Unground the HANDLE.

Use Insert to position the LINK.

Figure 5-64

4. Use Insert and position the LINK onto the POST,SMALL.

See Figure 5-64.
5. Unground the HANDLE.
6. Save the assembly drawing as PIVOT ASSEMBLY.
7. Use Insert to position the subassembly into the PIVOT.
See Figure 5-65.

Use Insert to
position the
subassembly.

Offset value
Figure 5-65
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 187

Use Angle to position

the HANDLE relative
to the LINK.

Offset value
Figure 5-66

8. Use the Angle constraint to position the HANDLE relative to the LINK.
In this example, an angle of 100° was used. See Figure 5-66.
9. Use Insert to position the BALL on top of the HANDLE.
See Figure 5-59.
Figure 5-67 shows a presentation drawing of the PIVOT ASSEMBLY, and Figure 5-68 shows
an exploded isometric drawing of the assembly and a parts list.

Presentation drawing of
PIVOT ASSEMBLY

Figure 5-67
188 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Figure 5-68

DRAWING SHEETS
Some assemblies are so large they require larger paper sheet sizes. Drawings are prepared on pre-
defined standard-size sheets of paper. Each standard size has been assigned a letter value.
Figure 5-69 shows the letter values and the sheet size assigned to each. All these sizes and more
are available within Inventor.

Standard Drawing Sheet Sizes Standard Drawing Sheet Sizes

Inches Millimeters
A  8.5  11 A4  210  297
B  11  17 A3  297  420
C  17  22 A2  420  594
D  22  34 A1  594  841
E  34  44 A0  841  1189

Figure 5-69

Figure 5-70 shows a drawing done on a C-size drawing sheet. Note the letter C in the title
block. The drawing is crowded on the sheet, so a larger sheet size is needed.

Exercise 5-26: Changing a Sheet Size

1. Locate the cursor on the Sheet:1 heading in the browser box and right-click the mouse.
2. Select the Edit Sheet option.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 189

A C-Size
Sheet is
17" x 22".

A drawing done on a
C-size drawing sheet

Figure 5-70

The Edit Sheet dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-71.
3. Select the D option and click OK.
See Figure 5-72. Note that the letter C has been replaced with the letter D.

Sheet size

Figure 5-71

The same drawing presented in

Figure 5-56 moved to a D-size
drawing sheet. A D-Size
drawing
sheet is
22" x 34".

Figure 5-72
190 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Exercise 5-27: Adding More Sheets to a Drawing

Sometimes assembly drawings are so large they require more than one sheet.
1. Click the Insert heading at the top of the screen.
2. Click the Sheet option.
See Figure 5-73. The New Sheet dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-74.
3. Click the arrow on the right side of the Size box.
A listing of sheet sizes will cascade down.
4. Select the desired sheet size and click OK.
A new sheet will appear on the screen, and Sheet 2:2 will be listed in the browser box. To
work on a specific sheet click that sheet’s name in the browser box.

Select sheet size here.

Click here to add
a new sheet to a A second sheet has been added to the drawing.
drawing.
Figure 5-73 Figure 5-74

OTHER TYPES OF DRAWING BLOCKS

Release Blocks
Figure 5-75 shows an enlarged view of the title block. The area on the left side of the block is
release block: The area in a title called a release block. After a drawing is completed it is first checked. If the drawing is accept-
block where required approval able, the checker will initial the drawing and forward it to the next approval person. Which per-
signatures are entered. son(s) and which department approve new drawings varies, but until a drawing is “signed off,”
that is, all required signatures have been entered, it is not considered a finished drawing.

The release block area

Figure 5-75
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 191

Revision Blocks
Figure 5-76 shows a sample revision block. It was created using the Revision Table tool located revision block: The area in a
on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar. Drawings used in industry are constantly being changed. drawing where changes are
Products are improved or corrected, and drawings must reflect and document these changes. listed by number with a brief
Drawing changes are listed in the revision block by number. Revision blocks are usually lo- description of the change.
cated in the upper right corner of the drawing.

Click here to create

a revision block.

Revision tag
Figure 5-76

Exercise 5-28: Creating a Revision Block

1. Click the Revision Table tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
A Revision Table dialog box will appear on the screen. See Figure 5-77. Revisions are usu-
ally numbered starting with 1. The default Start Value shown in the Revision Table dialog box
is 1. The numbers shown in the Revision tag should correspond to numbers listed under the REV
heading in the revision block.
2. Click OK.
The revision block will appear on the screen. Revision block are usually located in the upper
right corner of the drawing.
Each drawing revision is listed by number in the revision block. A brief description of the
change is also included. It is important that the description be as accurate and complete as possi-
ble. The zone on the drawing where the revision is located is also specified.

Numbers for revisions

Figure 5-77
192 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

The revision number is added to the field of the drawing in the area where the change was
made. The revision letter is located within a “flag” to distinguish it from dimensions and drawing
notes. The flag is created using the Revision Tag tool located on the Drawing Annotation Panel
bar. See Figure 5-76. The Revision Tag tool is a flyout from the Revision Table tool.
To change the number within a revision tag, right-click the tag and select the Edit Tag op-
tion. A text dialog box will appear, and the tag number may be changed. See Figure 5-78.

Revision tag

Select here
to edit
the revision
tag.

Enter new numbers here.

Figure 5-78

Exercise 5-29: Editing the Revision Block

1. Move the cursor onto the revision block.
Filled green circles will appear around the revision block. See Figure 5-79
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Edit option.

Select here.

Figure 5-79
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 193

The Edit Revision Table dialog box will appear. The block’s headings may be edited or
rearranged as needed. See Figure 5-80.

Click here to edit the block's format.

Click here to create new columns.
Figure 5-80

ECOs
Most companies have systems in place that allow engineers and designers to make quick changes
to drawings. These change orders are called engineering change orders (ECOs), engineering or-
ders (EOs), or change orders (COs), depending on the company’s preference. Change orders are
documented on special drawing sheets that are usually stapled to a print of the drawing. Figure 5-81
shows a sample change order attached to a drawing.

Figure 5-81

After a number of change orders have accumulated, they are incorporated into the drawing.
This process is called a drawing revision, which is different from a revision to the drawing. drawing revision: A version of
Drawing revisions are usually identified by a letter located somewhere in the title block. The re- a drawing into which change
vision letters may be included as part of the drawing number or in a separate box in the title block. orders have been incorporated.
Whenever you are working on a drawing make sure you have the latest revision and all appropri-
ate change orders. Companies have recording and referencing systems for listing all drawing re-
visions and drawing changes.

Drawing Notes
Drawing notes are used to provide manufacturing information that is not visual, for example, fin-
ishing instructions, torque requirements for bolts, and shipping instructions.
Drawing notes are usually listed on the right side of the drawing above the title block. Draw-
ing notes are listed by number. If a note applies to a specific part of the drawing, the note number
194 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Notes

Figure 5-82

in enclosed in a triangle. The note numbers enclosed in triangles are also drawn next to the corre-
sponding areas of the drawing. See Figure 5-82.

TOP-DOWN ASSEMBLIES
A top-down assembly is an assembly that creates new parts as the assembly is created. Figure 5-83
shows a ROTATOR ASSEMBLY that was created using the top-down method. This section will
explain how the assembly was created.

ROTATOR
ASSEMBLY

Figure 5-83

Exercise 5-30: Starting an Assembly

When creating a top-down assembly, start by saving the assembly drawing. Individual compo-
nents can then be added to the assembly drawing.
1. Click on the New tool.
2. Click the Metric tab, then select Standard (mm).iam.
The Assembly Panel bar will appear.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 195

3. Left-click on the heading Assembly1 in the browser box.

See Figure 5-84.

Enter the assembly name.

Figure 5-84

4. Click on the File heading at the top left of the screen and select the Save All tool from the
cascading menu.
The Save As dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-84.
5. Name the assembly, then click Save.
In this example the assembly was named ROTATOR ASSEMBLY.

Exercise 5-31: Changing the Sketch Plane

The parts created for this assembly were created on the XZ plane. This gives the assembly a more
realistic orientation.
1. Click the Tools heading at the top of the screen and select Application Options.
2. Click the Part tab.
3. Select the Sketch on x-z plane button, then Apply and Close.
See Figure 5-85.

Click here.

Figure 5-85
196 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Exercise 5-32: Creating a Part

1. Click the Create Component tool on the Assembly Panel bar.
The Create In-Place Component dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-86.
2. Change the file name to PLATE. Select a file location.
3. Click the Browse Templates box located to the right of the Template box.
4. Click the Metric tab, then select the Standard (mm).ipt option, then OK.
5. The Create In-Place Component dialog box will appear. Type in the New Component
Name, PLATE, then click OK.
A cursor will appear with a 3D box next to it.
6. Left-click the mouse.
7. Move the cursor into the Viewcube area and click the icon that looks like a house. A grid
will appear on the screen, and the 2D Sketch Panel bar will appear.
The 2D Sketch Panel will appear in the panel box area.
8. Use the Two point rectangle, Line, and General Dimension tools to create the PLATE
shown in Figure 5-87.

Click here - Browse Templates.

Enter name here.

Click here.

Figure 5-86

Central Line

PLATE

Figure 5-87
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 197

Exercise 5-33: Adding Work Points and a Work Axis

1. Right-click the mouse and select Done, then the Finish Sketch option.
The Part Features panel will reappear.

Do not select the Finish Edit option.

TIP
2. Click the Work Point option and locate work points at both ends of the central line.
3. Click the Work Axis tool and add a work axis between the two work points.
The work points and work axis will be listed in the browser area.
4. Click on Origin under PLATE in the browser area.
5. Select the Work Axis tool, then click the XZ Plane in the browser area and add a work
axis through both work points.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the same Finish Edit options.
See Figure 5-88.
7. Save the drawing.

The work axis perpendicular to the XZ plane must appear on both sides of the PLATE.

TIP
Work axis between
work points Work axis created
perpendicular to the
XZ plane

Work point

The perpendicular work

axis should pass through
the work points and extend Work point
out both sides of the
PLATE.

Figure 5-88

Exercise 5-34: Creating LINK-L

1. Click on the Look At tool on the Standard toolbar, then click one of the lines on the
PLATE.
The drawing will return to a two-dimensional view.
2. Click on the Create Component tool and create a new component named LINK-L.
198 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

LINK-L

PLATE

Figure 5-89

The Create In-Place Component dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-86. Click the Browse
Templates box, then click the Metric tab in the Open Template dialog box that will appear. Create
the new component using the Standard (mm).ipt format. Define the new component’s file name.
3. Click the drawing screen to access the 2D Sketch Panel. The drawing grid will reappear.
4. Use the Circle and Line tools to create LINK-L as shown in Figure 5-89.
5. Use the Viewcube to change to an isometric view.

When the isometric view is created the drawing will reverse. The LINK-L will appear on the

TIP right. See Figure 5-90.

6. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.

7. Use the Work Point tool and create work points at the center of both circles. Use the
Work Axis tool to create a work axis between the two hole centers.
8. Use the Work Axis tool and the XZ Plane option listed under Origin under LINK-L in
the browser area to create two work axes through the two work points, perpendicular to
the XZ plane.
See Figure 5-90.

Work axis

Work points
Work axis perpendicular
to the XZ plane through
the work points

Figure 5-90
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 199

9. Right-click the mouse and select Finish Edit.

10. Click the Look At tool, then click one of the lines on the PLATE.

Exercise 5-35: Copying a Component

Figure 5-91 shows the drawing screen with the PLATE and LINK-L components. The LINK-L
component will be copied and its name changed to LINK-R.
1. Click the Copy Component tool on the Assembly Panel bar.
The Copy Components: Status dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-92.
2. Click the LINK-L heading in the browser box.
The LINK-L heading will appear in the dialog box.

Copied component

Copy this component.

LINK-L

PLATE

Figure 5-91

Component to be copied

Figure 5-92
200 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

3. Click Next.
The Copy Components: File Names dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-93.
4. Change the name LINK-L to LINK-R, then click OK.
5. Position LINK-R to the right of the PLATE. See Figure 5-94.

Change component name.

Figure 5-93

Copied component

LINK-R
LINK-L

Figure 5-94

Exercise 5-36: Creating the CROSSLINK

1. Use the Create Component tool to create the CROSSLINK using the dimensions pre-
sented in Figure 5-95.
The Create In-Place Component dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-86. Click the Browse
Templates box, then click the Metric tab in the Open Template dialog box that will appear. Cre-
ate the new component using the Standard (mm).ipt format. Define the new component’s file
name.
2. Use the Viewcube to create an isometric view.
The drawing screen should look like Figure 5-96.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 201

CROSSLINK

LINK-L LINK-R

PLATE

Figure 5-96

Work points and work axes

assigned to each part

Figure 5-95

Exercise 5-37: Assembling the Parts

1. Double-click the word ROTATOR ASSEMBLY in the browser area to return to the
Assembly Panel bar.
2. Click the Constraint tool.
The Place Constraint dialog box will appear.
3. Select the Mate option.
The Mate option may automatically be selected.
202 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

4. Select the work axes as shown in Figure 5-97.

5. Click Apply.
6. Assure that the Mate tool is still active and mate the work axes shown in Figure 5-98.

Selection 1

Mate option

Selection 2
Select the work axes that are perpendicular to the
XZ plane. Do not select the work points. Make the
selections on the perpendicular work axis away
from the work points.

Figure 5-97

These parts are mated.

Selection 1

Selection 2

Figure 5-98
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 203

7. Assure that the Mate tool is still active and mate the work axes shown in Figures 5-99 and
5-100.
8. Use the Look At tool to create a two-dimensional view of the assembly.

Select the work axes that are perpendicular to the XZ plane. Do not select the work points.

TIP Make the selections on the perpendicular work axis away from the work points.

Selection 1

Selection 2

These parts
are mated.

Figure 5-99

Selection 2

Selection 1
Figure 5-100
204 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Figure 5-101 shows the resulting assembly drawing.

Exercise 5-38: Animating the LINKs

1. Double-click the word ROTATOR ASSEMBLY in the browser area to access the
Assembly Panel bar.
2. Access the PLATE and create a work axis on the edge of the PLATE as shown in Figure 5-101.
3. Click the Constraint tool.
The Place Constraint dialog box will appear.
4. Select the Angle option.
The default angle setting is 0.00 deg.
5. Select the vertical work axes on the PLATE in step 2, then select the vertical axis of
LINK-R as shown in Figure 5-102.
6. Apply the constraints.

All the assembly parts are constrained.

Create a work
axis along this
vertical edge.
Figure 5-101

The Angle constraint Selection 1 Selection 2

Figure 5-102
Exercise 5-39: Setting the Assembly in Motion
1. Right-click the Angle:1 (0.00 deg) constraint in the browser area.
See Figure 5-103. The Drive Constraint dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-104.
2. Set the End angle for 720.00 deg
3. Click the Forward button.
The assembly should rotate freely. If the rotation is not correct, check the constraints.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 205

Set the End value for 360 to

create one full revolution.

Right-click the Angle constraint,

then select the Drive Constraint option. The Forward button
Figure 5-103 Figure 5-104

Exercise 5-40: Controlling the Speed of the Rotation

1. Click the << button on the Drive Constraint dialog box.
The box will expand. See Figure 5-105
2. Set the Increment value to 5.00 deg.
3. Click the Forward button.
The higher the Increment value, the faster the assembly will rotate. The Repetitions setting
is used to control the number of revolutions generated.

Click here to access the increment settings.

Set increment value here.

Figure 5-105
206 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Exercise 5-41: Completing the PLATE

1. Right-click the heading PLATE in the browser box.
2. Select the Open option.
3. Select the Extrude tool and set the Extents Distance to 15 mm.
See Figure 5-106.

Extrude the PLATE 15 mm.

Figure 5-106

4. Click OK.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the New Sketch option.
6. Click the Hole tool.
7. Apply Point, Center Point to the two work points, right-click the mouse, and select the
Done option.
8. Click the Return tool, then create two Ø10 holes as shown in Figure 5-107.
9. Save the PLATE changes.

Add two O10 holes.

Figure 5-107
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 207

Exercise 5-42: Completing LINK-L and LINK-R

1. Right-click LINK-L in the browser area and select the Open option.
2. Right-click the word Sketch under the LINK-L heading and select the Edit Sketch option.
3. Draw two tangent lines and two Ø10 circles as shown in Figure 5-108.
4. Click the Return tool and extrude LINK-L 5 mm.
5. Extrude the top circle 10 forward, and extrude the lower circle 20 through and back as shown.
6. Edit LINK-R to the same dimensions and features.
7. Save the LINKs.

The completed LINKs

These posts
extend 10 mm.

These posts extend

20 mm from the
front surface.

Figure 5-108

Exercise 5-43: Completing the CROSSLINK

1. Right-click CROSSLINK in the browser area and select the Open option.
2. Add two tangent lines and extrude the CROSSLINK 10 mm.
See Figure 5-109.
3. Create a New Sketch and add two Ø10 holes as shown.
Save the CROSSLINK.

CROSSLINK

Figure 5-109

Aligning the Assembly

Now that the components have thickness, they may not be aligned correctly; that is, they interfere
with each other. The alignment could have been created as the components were constrained in
the last section by defining offset values. Rotate the assembly and see if there is any interference
or if the components are too far apart. See Figure 5-110. Use the Flush constraint and define a
1-mm clearance between the components. The finished assembly should look like Figure 5-111.
208 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Figure 5-110

The ROTATOR assembly with the

work axes and work points hidden
Figure 5-111

Presentations
Figure 5-112 shows a presentation drawing of the ROTATOR, and Figure 5-113 shows an ex-
ploded isometric drawing created using the .idw format.

A presentation drawing

Figure 5-112
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 209

An exploded isometric drawing

created from the presentation
drawing using the .idw format.

Figure 5-113

EDITING A PART WITHIN AN ASSEMBLY DRAWING

Figure 5-114 shows an assembly drawing. The assembly is called 114-ASSEMBLY and is made
from three components: 114-PLATE, 114-BRACKET, and 114-POST.

114-BRACKET

114-POST

114-ASSEMBLY

114-PLATE

Figure 5-114

Exercise 5-44: Editing a Feature

It has been determined that the Ø10-mm holes in the bracket are too small. They are to be in-
creased to Ø11 mm. The holes are features.
1. Right-click the 114-bracket heading in the browser box.
See Figure 5-115. A list of options will appear. See Figure 5-116.
2. Click the OPEN option.
The browser box display will change.
210 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Click here.

Click here.

Right-click here. Right-click here.

Figure 5-115 Figure 5-116

3. Right-click the Hole1 heading and select the Edit Feature option.
See Figure 5-116. The Hole dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-117.
4. Change the hole’s diameter value from 10 to 11. Click OK.

Change hole value.

The components not

being edited will fade.

Figure 5-117
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 211

The hole’s location dimensions could also be edited at this time.

TIP
The bracket will appear on the screen. Click the Close button (the X in the upper right cor-
ner of the bracket’s screen). A warning box will appear. See Figure 5-118.

Figure 5-118

5. Click the Yes box.

The assembly will appear.
6. Click the bracket.
Figure 5-119 shows the edited bracket. Note that the holes appear larger than they did in
Figure 5-114.

Click the BRACKET. The hole diameter

has been increased.

Figure 5-119

Exercise 5-45: Editing a Sketch

It has been determined that the length of the plate is to be increased from 90 mm to 100 mm. This
change is a change to the initial sketch.
1. Right-click the 114-PLATE heading in the browser box.
A list of options will appear. See Figure 5-120.
2. Select the Open option.
The browser box will change.
212 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Click here.
Click here.

Right-click here. Right-click here.

Figure 5-120 Figure 5-121

3. Click the Extrusion heading in the browser box, then right-click the Edit Sketch heading.
See Figure 5-121. The original rectangular sketch will appear. See Figure 5-122.
4. Use the Fix constraint and fix the back line. See Figure 5-123.
This constraint will assure that the dimensional expansion occurs at the front of the plate and
will not affect the assembly between the plate and the bracket.

Original Sketch

Figure 5-122

Fix this line to control the

direction of the expansion.

Change value
of dimension.

Figure 5-123
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 213

5. Double-click the 90 dimension value and enter a new value of 100; click the check mark
on the Edit Dimension box.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
The plate will appear on the screen.
7. Click the Close box in the upper right corner of the plate’s screen.
A warning box will appear. See Figure 5-124.
8. Click the Yes box.
The assembly will appear on the screen. See Figure 5-125.
9. Click the plate.
Note the increase in the plate’s length.

Figure 5-124

Increased length

Figure 5-125

PATTERNING COMPONENTS
Figure 5-126 shows an assembly where a post is inserted into a plate. Posts are to be inserted into
all 16 holes in the plate.

Exercise 5-46: Creating a Pattern of Components

1. Select the Pattern Component tool.
The Pattern Component dialog box will appear. See Figure 5-126.
2. Select the Post as the component.
3. Select the Rectangular box tab.
4. Define the Column direction, the number of components, and the distance between com-
ponents value.
In this example the holes in the plate are 30 mm apart.
5. Define the Row values.
6. Click OK.
214 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Assembly
Post

Plate

Pattern Component dialog box.

Column
Direction

Define the direction.

Enter values. Row

Direction

Finished
Assembly
Figure 5-126

MIRRORING COMPONENTS
Components within an assembly may be mirrored and added to the assembly. See Figure 5-127.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 215

Selected components

Mirror plane

If necessary, change
component name here.

Mirrored assembly

Figure 5-127

Exercise 5-47: Mirroring an Assembly

1. Click the Mirror Component tool.
The Mirror Components: Status dialog box will appear.

The assembly shown in Figure 5-128 is the 114-Assembly used on page 209. Note how the

TIP dimension change from 90 mm to 100 mm affects the material under the copied bracket.
216 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

2. Click the components to be mirrored.

In this example all the components were selected. A listing of the selected components will
appear in the Mirror Components: Status dialog box.
3. Click the Mirror Plane box.
4. Select the right front vertical plane as the mirror plane.
5. Click Next.
The Mirror Components: File Names dialog box will appear. This is a listing of all com-
ponents that are mirrored and have been added to the assembly. The box may be edited as needed.
In this example no changes were made.
6. Click OK.

COPYING COMPONENTS
Components already on an assembly may be copied and added to the assembly. See Figure 5-128.
In this example the bracket and posts will be copied.

Assembly

Component to be copied

If necessary, change component names here.

Figure 5-128
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 217

Copied
components

Figure 5-128 (Continued)

Exercise 5-48: Copying a Component

1. Click the Copy Component tool.
The Copy Components: Status dialog box will appear.
2. Select the bracket and two posts.
3. Select OK.
The Copy Components: File Names dialog box will appear. This is a listing of all compo-
nents that have been copied and added to the assembly.
4. Move the copied component away from the assembly.
5. Use the Constraint tool to position the copied component into the assembly.

SUMMARY
This chapter explained how to create assembly drawings from animated. Assembly numbers were added and edited to iso-
individual parts. The tools in the Assembly Panel bar were in- metric views of the presentation drawing.
troduced and used in a bottom-up approach to create the first The other elements of a presentation drawing—the parts
assembly drawing from an existing model. The method for list or bill of materials, the title block, release blocks, and re-
grounding components was demonstrated. The Move and vision blocks were also demonstrated.
Rotate tools as well as all the options of the Constraint tool The top-down approach to creating an assembly drawing
were used to manipulate components of the drawing. was also illustrated, and various techniques for editing assem-
The tools in the Presentation Panel bar were used to ex- bly drawings were explained, including patterning, mirroring,
plode an assembly drawing to show how the assembly is cre- and copying components.
ated from its components. The presentation drawing was then

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which of the following is not an assembly constraint tool? 3. Why is the Tweak tool used in presentation drawings?
a. Flush a. To pull components apart
b. Insert b. To edit components
c. Bisect c. To rotate components
d. Angle 4. What is the function of the Column Chooser option of
2. Which tool is used to locate a shaft into a hole? the Edit Parts List dialog box?
a. Flush a. To change the size of the columns
b. Insert b. To arrange the columns in numerical order
c. Bisect c. To add, subtract, and edit columns
d. Angle
218 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

5. What is a subassembly? 8. Why are drawing notes added to a drawing?

a. Another name for an assembly drawing a. To explain the functions of the drawing’s parts
b. A group of parts assembled together and then inserted b. To list the drawing’s engineer’s comments
as a group into an assembly c. To define manufacturing information that cannot be
c. An assembly that is located below other assemblies shown visually
6. What are the dimensions of a C-size drawing sheet? 9. Which tool is used to animate an assembly drawing?
a. 8.5 × 11 a. Drive Constraint
b. 11 × 17 b. Increment Constraint
c. 17 × 22 c. Repetition Constraint
7. What is the purpose of drawing revisions? 10. Which tool may be used to change the dimensions of an
a. To document recent changes to a drawing individual part?
b. To indicate future changes to a drawing a. Change Drawing
c. To specify the drawing’s tolerances b. Edit Component
c. Modify Entity

Matching
Column A Column B
a. A4 1. 8.5  11
b. C 2. 11  17
c. A 3. 17  22
d. A1 4. 22  34
e. A2 5. 210mm  297mm
f. B 6. 297mm  420mm
g. A3 7. 420mm  594mm
h. D 8. 594mm  841mm

True or False
1. True or False: A bottom-up assembly drawing is 6. True or False: An isometric assembly drawing is
created from existing drawings. created using the ANSI.idw format.
2. True or False: A top-down assembly drawing is 7. True or False: Assembly numbers are the same as
created from existing drawings. part numbers.
3. True or False: A grounded component has no degrees 8. True or False: Assembly numbers are added to an
of freedom. assembly drawing using the Balloon tool.
4. True or False: A presentation drawing is used to pull 9. True or False: A BOM is the same as a parts list.
assembled components apart. 10. True or False: ECOs are used to make quick changes
5. True or False: A presentation drawing can be to an existing drawing.
animated.

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 5-1:
A dimensioned block is shown in Figure P5-1. Redraw this block and
save it as SQBLOCK. See page 159. Use the SQBLOCK to create as-
semblies as shown.
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 219

SQBLOCKs
Figure P5-1A MILLIMETERS

Figure P5-1B

20° angle between the two SQBLOCKs

Figure P5-1C Figure P5-1D

 220 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

10 mm offset

Figure P5-1E Figure P5-1F Figure P5-1G

Pages 220 through 223 show a group of parts. These parts are used to create the assemblies pre-
sented as problems in this section. Use the given descriptions, part numbers, and materials when
creating BOMs for the assemblies.

Project 5-2:
Redraw the following models and save them as Standard (mm).ipn files. All dimensions are in
millimeters.

SPACER
P/N AM311-1
MATL: SAE 1020 Steel

Figure P5-2A
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 221

SPACER DOUBLE
P/N AM311-2
MATL: SAE 1020 Steel

Figure P5-2B

SPACER, TRIPLE
P/N AM311-3
MATL: SAE 1020 Steel

Figure P5-2C

PEGS
MATL: Steel

Figure P5-2D
222 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

L-BRACKET
P/N BK20-1
MATL: SAE 1040 Steel

Figure P5-2E

Z-BRACKET
P/N BK20-2
MATL: SAE 1040 Steel

Figure P5-2F

C-BRACKET
P/N BK20-3
SAE 1040 Steel

Figure P5-2G
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 223

PLATE, BASE
SAE 1020 Steel

Figure P5-2H

Project 5-3:
Draw an exploded isometric assembly drawing of Assembly 1. Create
a BOM.

Figure P5-3A MILLIMETERS

224 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

ASSEMBLY 1

PEG, SHORT
MATL: SAE1020
4 REQD

C-BRACKET
MATL: SAE1020
2 REQD

SPACER, QUAD
MATL: SAE 1020
2 REQD

Figure P5-3B

Project 5-4:
Draw an exploded isometric assembly drawing of Assembly 2. Create
a BOM.

Figure P5-4A MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 225

ASSEMBLY 2

PEG20
6064-T4 AL
4 REQD

L-BRACKET
6064-T4 AL
2 REQD

PL100-6
6064-T4 AL
2 REQD

Figure P5-4B

Project 5-5:
Draw an exploded isometric assembly drawing of Assembly 3. Create
a BOM.

Figure P5-5A MILLIMETERS

226 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

ASSEMBLY 3

SPACER, QUAD
STEEL
PEG20 3 REQD
4 REQD
STEEL

PEG30
STEEL Z-BRACKET
2 REQD STEEL
2 REQD

PL80-4
STEEL
2 REQD

Figure P5-5B

Project 5-6:
Draw an exploded isometric assembly drawing of Assembly 4. Create
a BOM.

Figure P5-6A MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 227

ASSEMBLY 4

PEG20
MATL: CRS
4 REQD

L-BRACKET
MATL: CRS
PEG30 2 REQD
MATL: CRS
2 REQD
PL100-6
MATL: CRS
2 REQD

C-BRACKET
MATL: CRS
4 REQD

Figure P5-6B

Project 5-7:
Draw an exploded isometric assembly drawing of Assembly 5. Create
a BOM.

Figure P5-7A MILLIMETERS

228 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

ASSEMBLY 5

L-BRACKET
MATL: ANSI-SAE 4024 Steel
1 REQD

PEG20
MATL: Steel
4 REQD

Z-BRACKET
MATL: ANSI-SAE 4024 Steel
2 REQD

SPACER, QUAD
MATL: ANSI-SAE 4024 Steel
2 REQD

Figure P5-7B

Project 5-8:
Draw an exploded isometric assembly drawing of Assembly 6. Create
a BOM.

Figure P5-8A
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 229

ASSEMBLY 6

Z-BRACKET
MATL: PTFE
2 REQD

PEG20
MATL: NYLON
8 REQD SPACER, QUAD
MATL: PTFE

L-BRACKET PL110-16
MATL: PTFE MATL: PTFE
2 REQD 2 REQD
Figure P5-8B

Project 5-9:
Create an original assembly based on the parts shown on pages
220–223. Include a scene, an exploded isometric drawing with as-
sembly numbers, and a BOM. Use at least 12 parts.

Project 5-10:
Draw the ROTATOR ASSEMBLY shown. Include the following:
A. An assembly drawing
B. An exploded presentation drawing
C. An isometric drawing with assembly numbers
D. A parts list
E. An animated assembly drawing; the LINKs should rotate rela-
tive to the PLATE. The LINKs should carry the CROSSLINK.
The CROSSLINK should remain parallel during the rotation.
 230 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

LINK-L and LINK-R

P/N AM311-1
SAE 1020

ROTATOR ASSEMBLY

CROSSLINK
AM311-2
SAE 1020

Note:
PLATE This asse
AM311-1 mbly was
section on used in th
SAE 1020 top-down e-
See page assemblie
194. s

Figure P5-10
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 231

Project 5-11:
Draw the FLY ASSEMBLY shown. Include the following:
A. An assembly drawing
B. An exploded presentation drawing
C. An isometric drawing with assembly numbers
D. A parts list
E. An animated assembly drawing; the FLYLINK should rotate
around the SUPPORT base.

FLY ASSEMBLY

PEGØ5
BU-200C
SAE1040
FLYLINK
BU200A
SAE 1040

PLATE,SUPPORT
BU200B
SAE 1040 R2.0 FOR ALL FILLETS AND ROUNDS

Figure P5-11
 232 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Project 5-12:
Draw the ROCKER ASSEMBLY shown. Include the following:
A. An assembly drawing
B. An exploded presentation ROCKER ASSEMBLY
drawing
DRIVELINK
C. An isometric drawing with O 10 x 10 PEG
assembly numbers
D. A parts list PLATE,WEB CENTERLINK
E. An animated assembly
drawing

O 10 x 15 PEG

O10 x 15PEG
DRIVELINK
AM312-2
SAE 1040 ROCKERLINK
5 mm THK
ROCKERLINK
AM312-4
SAE 1040
5 mm THK
PLATE,WEB AM312-1 SAE1040 10 mm THK

O 10 x 10 PEG
AM312-5
SAE 1020
CENTERLINK
AM312-3
SAE1040
5 mm THK O 10 x 15 PEG
AM312-6
SAE 1020

Figure P5-12
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 233

Project 5-13:
Draw the LINK ASSEMBLY shown. Include the following:
A. An assembly drawing
B. An exploded presentation drawing
C. An isometric drawing with assembly numbers
D. A parts list
E. An animated assembly drawing; the HOLDER ARM should
rotate between -30° and +30°.

HOLDER ARM LINK ASSEMBLY

AM-311-A3
7075-T6 AL BASE,HOLDER
5 mm THK

BUSHING-A
O 5 x 11 PEG

Offset all mating

surfaces 1.00 mm.

CROSSLINK
AM-311-A4
7075-T6 AL
5 mm THK

SIDELINK

BUSHING
AM-311-A5 CROSSLINK
TEFLON O 5 x 11 PEG
4 REQD

BASE,HOLDER
AM-311-A1
6061-T6 AL

LINK
AM-311-A2
7075-T6 AL
5 mm THK
2 REQD

Figure P5-13
234 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Project 5-14:
Draw the PIVOT ASSEMBLY shown using the dimensioned compo-
nents given. Include the following:
A. A presentation drawing
B. A 3D exploded isometric drawing
C. A parts list

This assembly was used in the section on subassemblies. See page 184.

TIP

PIVOT ASSEMBLY

Figure P5-14A Millimeters

BOX,PIVOT
P/N: ENG-A43
MATL: SAE 1020 STEEL

Figure P5-14B
 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings 235

POST,HANDLE
P/N: ENG-A44
MATL: SAE 1020 STEEL

Figure P5-14C

LINK
P/N: ENG-A45
MATL: SAE 1020 STEEL

Figure P5-14D

HANDLE
P/N: AM300-1
MATL: STEEL

Figure P5-14E
236 Chapter 5 Assembly Drawings

Presentation drawing

Figure P5-14F

Figure P5-14G
Threads and Fasteners 6
Chapter
Objectives
• Explain thread terminology and conventions.
• Show how to draw threads.
• Show how to size both internal and external threads.
• Show how to use standard-sized threads.
• Show how to use and size washers, nuts, and setscrews.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains how to draw threads and washers. It also explains how to select fasteners
and how to design using fasteners, washers, and keys.
Threads are created in Inventor using either the Hole or the Thread tool located on the Part
Features panel bar. See Figure 6-1. Predrawn fasteners may be accessed using the Content
Center tool. The Content Center library is explained later in the chapter.

Figure 6-1
238 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Figure 6-2

THREAD TERMINOLOGY
crest: The peak of a thread. Figure 6-2 shows a thread. The peak of a thread is called the crest, and the valley portion is called
root: The valley of a thread. the root. The major diameter of a thread is the distance across the thread from crest to crest. The
major diameter: The distance minor diameter is the distance across the thread from root to root.
across a thread from crest to The pitch of a thread is the linear distance along the thread from crest to crest. Thread pitch
crest. is usually referred to in terms of a unit of length such as 20 threads per inch or 1.6 mm per thread.
minor diameter: The distance
across a thread from root to
root.
pitch: The linear distance
THREAD CALLOUTS—METRIC UNITS
along a thread from crest to
Threads are specified on a drawing using drawing callouts. See Figure 6-3. The M at the begin-
crest.
ning of a drawing callout specifies that the callout is for a metric thread. Holes that are not
threaded use the Ø symbol.
The number following the M is the major diameter of the thread. An M10 thread has a
major diameter of 10 mm. The pitch of a metric thread is assumed to be a coarse thread unless
otherwise stated. The callout M10 × 30 assumes a coarse thread, or a thread length of 1.5 mm per
thread. The number 30 is the thread length in millimeters. The “×” is read as “by,” so the thread
is called a “ten by thirty.”
The callout M10 × 1.25 × 30 specifies a pitch of 1.25 mm per thread. This is not a standard
coarse thread size, so the pitch must be specified.
Figure 6-4 shows a listing of standard metric thread sizes. Other sizes may be located by
scrolling through the given Nominal Sizes. Inventor lists metric threads according to ANSI
(American National Standards Institute) Metric M Profile standards.

Figure 6-3
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 239

A listing of
standard sizes

Figure 6-4

Whenever possible use preferred thread sizes for designing. Preferred thread sizes are read-
ily available and are usually cheaper than nonstandard sizes. In addition, tooling such as
wrenches is also readily available for preferred sizes.

THREAD CALLOUTS—ANSI UNIFIED SCREW THREADS

ANSI Unified Screw Threads (English units) always include a thread form specification. Thread
form specifications are designated by capital letters, as shown in Figure 6-6, and are defined as
follows.
UNC—Unified National Coarse
UNF—Unified National Fine
UNEF—Unified National Extra Fine
UN—Unified National, or constant-pitch threads
An ANSI (English units) thread callout starts by defining the major diameter of the thread
followed by the pitch specification. The callout .500-13 UNC means a thread whose major diam-
eter is .500 in. with 13 threads per inch. The thread is manufactured to the UNC standards.
There are three possible classes of fit for a thread: 1, 2, and 3. The different class specifica-
tions specify a set of manufacturing tolerances. A class 1 thread is the loosest and a class 3 the
most exact. A class 2 fit is the most common.
The letter A designates an external thread, B an internal thread. The symbol × means “by” as
in 2 × 4, “two by four.” The thread length (3.00) may be followed by the word LONG to prevent
confusion about which value represents the length.
Drawing callouts for ANSI (English unit) threads are sometimes shortened, such as in
Figure 6-5. The callout .500-13 UNC-2A × 3.00 LONG is shortened to .500-13 × 3.00. Only a
coarse thread has 13 threads per inch, and it should be obvious whether a thread is internal or ex-
ternal, so these specifications may be dropped. Most threads are class 2, so it is tacitly accepted
that all threads are class 2 unless otherwise specified. The shortened callout form is not univer-
sally accepted. When in doubt, use a complete thread callout.
A listing of standard ANSI (English unit) threads, as presented in Inventor, is shown in
Figure 6-6. Some of the drill sizes listed use numbers and letters. The decimal equivalents to the
numbers are listed in Figure 6-6.
240 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Detailed representation

Figure 6-5

The decimal equivalents for

threads specifed by numbers

#1 O .073
#2 O .086
#3 O .090
#4 O .112
#5 O .126
#6 O .138
#8 O .164
#10 O .190
#12 O .216

A listing of standard sizes

Figure 6-6

THREAD REPRESENTATIONS
There are three ways to graphically represent threads on a technical drawing: detailed, schematic,
and simplified. Figure 6-5 shows an external detailed representation, and Figure 6-7 shows both
the external and internal simplified and schematic representations.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 241

Drawing thread representations

Inventor thread representations

External Internal Internal thread

Simplified

External thread
Schematic
Figure 6-7 Figure 6-8

Figure 6-8 shows an internal and an external thread created using Inventor. The threads will
automatically be sized to the existing hole. Threads may be created only around existing holes
and cylinders.

INTERNAL THREADS
Figure 6-9 shows a 20 × 30 × 10 box with a Ø6.0 hole drilled through its center.

An existing hole

Figure 6-9

Exercise 6-1: Adding Threads to an Existing Hole

1. Click on the Thread tool on the Part Features panel bar.
The Thread dialog box will appear. See Figures 6-4, 6-6, and 6-9.
2. Click on the existing hole.
The threads will automatically be created to match the hole’s diameter. Because the hole’s
diameter is 6.0, an M6 × 1 thread is created.
3. Click OK.
Figure 6-10 shows the resulting threaded hole.
242 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

A thread added to
the existing hole

Thread listed in
browser box

Figure 6-10 Figure 6-11

When a thread is added to an existing hole, a thread listing will be included in the browser box.
See Figure 6-11. The listing will confirm that a thread has been added, but it will not define the
Right-click the mouse and
size or type of thread.
select the Show
Dimensions option. Exercise 6-2: Determining the Thread Size
1. Right-click on the Hole listing in the browser box.
A dialog box will appear. See Figure 6-12.
2. Select the Show Dimensions option.
Figure 6-13 shows the resulting dimensions. The dimensions define the hole’s diameter, and
because Inventor will match the thread size to the existing hole diameter, the thread is an M6.
Click here.
Thread diameter

Figure 6-13
Figure 6-12

THREADED BLIND HOLES

The internally threaded holes presented in the last section passed completely through the mate-
rial. This section shows how to draw holes that do not pass completely through the object but have
a defined depth.
Figure 6-14 shows a tapped hole. It is drawn using the simplified representation. Note that there
are three separate portions to the hole representation: the threaded portion, the unthreaded portion, and
the 120° conical point. Only the threaded portion of the tapped hole is used to define the hole’s depth.
The unthreaded portion and the conical point are shown but are not included in the depth calculation.
A tapped hole is manufactured by first drilling a pilot hole that is slightly smaller than the
major diameter of the threads. The threads are then cut into the side of the pilot hole using a tapping
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 243

The threaded portion of

the hole. This defines
the depth of the hole.

Unthreaded portion of the

hole. It is not included in
the defined length of the
hole. The length of the
unthreaded portion equals
at least 2P

120˚ conical point - not

included in the depth value. Figure 6-14

bit. The tapping bit has no cutting edges on its bottom surface, so if it strikes the bottom of the hole,
the bit can be damaged. Convention calls for the unthreaded portion of the pilot hole to extend
about the equivalent of two thread pitches (2P) beyond the end of the threaded portion. The coni-
cal portion is added to the bottom surface of the pilot hole.

Drawing a Threaded Blind Hole—Metric

Figure 6-15 shows a 20 × 30 × 30 box with an existing Ø8 × 16 deep hole. The Thread tool will
automatically apply an M8 thread to the Ø8 hole.
A distance equal to two pitches (2P) is recommended between the bottom of the hole and the
end of the threads. One pitch equals 1.25 mm, so 2P = 2.50 mm. The existing hole is 16 mm, so
the thread depth is 13.5 mm.
1. Click on the Thread tool on the Part Features panel bar. Note:
The Thread dialog box will appear. See Figure 6-16. Inventor will
au
coarse thre tomatically create a
The Face tool will automatically activate. ad with a p
There are itch of 1.25
othe .
2. Select Face by clicking the hole. able: M8  r pitch sizes avail-
.75, and M M8  0.8, M8 
1,
3. Remove the check mark from the Full Length box. 8  0.5. T
4. Enter a length value of 13.5. sizes are a hese pitch
cce
5. Click the Specification tab and set the Designa- on the righ ssed using the arro
t side of th w
tion box on eD
tion for M8 ⴛ 1.25. the Spec esigna-
of the Thre ification
6. Click OK. ad dialog tab
box.

O 8 x 16 HOLE

Figure 6-15
244 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Click here for

other pitch
sizes.

Figure 6-16

Figure 6-17 shows a sectional view of the threaded blind hole. Note how hidden lines are
used to represent threads in both the top and the section views.

A sectional view of a blind hole

created using Inventor

Unthreaded portion of hole Figure 6-17

Drawing a Blind Hole—ANSI Threads

Pitch for ANSI threads is defined as threads per inch. A 1⁄4-20 UNC thread has a pitch of 20 threads
per inch. The length in inches of one thread is 1⁄20 or 0.05 in. Therefore, 2P = 2(0.05) = 0.10 in.
If a block includes a hole 1.50 deep, then the appropriate thread length is 1.50 - 0.10 = 1.40 in.

CREATING THREADED HOLES USING THE HOLE COMMAND

Threaded holes may be created directly using the Hole command. Figure 6-18 shows a 40 ×
40 × 30 mm block with a hole center defined using the Point, Center Point command in the cen-
ter of the top surface.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 245

Click here to access threads.

Figure 6-18

Exercise 6-3: Creating a Threaded Through Hole

1. Click on the Hole command on the Part Features panel bar.
The Hole dialog box will appear. See Figure 6-18.
2. Click the Termination box and select the Through All option.
3. Click the Tapped Hole button.
4. Click on Thread Type. Select the ANSI Metric M Profile option.
See Figure 6-19.

Select thread type.

Figure 6-19
246 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Define thread depth.

Select pitch size. Click here -

remove checkmark.

Figure 6-20 Figure 6-21

5. Set the thread Size for 10. Select the M10 × 1.5 pitch in the Designation box.
More than one pitch size is available. In addition to the 1.50 pitch a 1.25 or 0.75 option is also
available. These are Fine and Extra Fine designations. See Figure 6-20.
6. Click OK.

Exercise 6-4: Creating a Blind Threaded Hole

Create a 40 × 40 × 30 mm block with hole center defined in the center of the top surface.
1. Click on the Hole command.
The Hole dialog box will appear. See Figure 6-21.
2. Set the Termination for Distance, and click the Tapped Hole button.
3. Set the Size for 10 and the Designation for M10 ⴛ 1.5.
4. Click the Full Depth box so that no check appears.
5. Set the thread depth for 8 and the hole depth for 10.
The hole depth should, with rare exceptions, be greater than the thread depth.
6. Click OK.

STANDARD FASTENERS
Fasteners, such as screws and bolts, and their associated hardware, such as nuts and washers, are
manufactured to standard specifications. Using standard-sized fasteners in designs saves produc-
tion costs and helps assure interchangeability.
Inventor includes a library of standard parts that may be accessed using the Place from
Content Center tool on the Assembly Panel. Clicking on the Place from Content Center tool
accesses the Content Center dialog box. The Content Center may also be accessed by right-
clicking the mouse and selecting the Place from Content Center option. See Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-23 shows the Place from Content Center dialog box. Click the plus sign to the left of
the Fasteners heading under Category View. Click Fasteners, Bolts, Hex Head, and select the AS
1111-Metric shoulder bolt. A listing of available diameters and lengths will appear. See Figure 6-24.
Click the Table View tab to access a table of sizes and dimensions that apply to the selected bolt. See
Figure 6-25.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 247

Two ways to access the Content Center

Click here.

Right-click the mouse.

Figure 6-22 Figure 6-23

Click here.

Figure 6-24 Figure 6-25

SIZING A THREADED HOLE TO ACCEPT A SCREW

Say we wish to determine the length of thread and the depth of hole needed to accept an M10 × 25
hex head screw and to create a drawing of the screw in the threaded hole. The length of the threaded
hole must extended two pitches (2P) beyond the end of the screw, and the untapped portion of the
hole must extend two pitches (2P) beyond the threaded portion of the hole. This requirement en-
sures that all the fastener threads will be in contact with hole’s threads and that fasteners will not
bottom out. In this example the thread pitch equals 1.50 mm. Therefore, 2P = 2(1.50) = 3.0 mm.
This is the minimum distance and can be increased but never decreased. See Figure 6-26.
The two-pitch length requirement for the distance between the end of the screw and the end
of the threaded portion of the hole determines that the thread depth should be 25.0 + 3.0 = 28.0 mm.
The two-pitch length requirement between the end of the threaded portion of the hole and the bot-
tom of the hole requires that the hole must have a depth of 28.0 + 3.0, or 31.0 mm.
248 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

The unthreaded portion of The threaded portion of

the hole extends beyond the hole extends beyond
Figure 6-26 the threaded portion the length of the screw.

It is important that complete hole depths be specified, as they will serve to show any inter-
ference with other holes or surfaces.

Exercise 6-5: Drawing a Blind Threaded Hole

1. Create a new Standard (mm).ipt drawing and create a 40 × 40 × 60 block.
2. Use the Point, Center Point and the Hole commands to create an M10 × 28 deep thread
and a 31 deep hole.
See Figure 6-27.
3. Save the threaded block as ThreadedBlock.

Define threaded hole.

Define thread.

Figure 6-27

Exercise 6-6: Accessing an M10 × 25 Hex Head Bolt

1. Create a new Standard (mm).iam drawing called M10ASSEMBLY.
2. Use the Place Component command and locate one copy of the ThreadedBlock block
on the drawing screen.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 249

3. Click the Place from Content Center tool.

The Place from Content Center dialog box will appear. See Figure 6-28.
4. Click the plus sign to the left of the Fasteners option.
See Figure 6-29.
5. Click the Bolts option, then click the Hex Head option.
6. Scroll through the options and select the AS 1110-Metric option.
A picture of the AS 1110-Metric fastener will appear in the dialog box along with a listing of
available thread sizes and lengths. See Figure 6-30.

Click here.

Figure 6-28

Click here. Click here. Click here.

Figure 6-29

Click here.

Click here.

Select
length.

Select diameter.

Verify pitch.

Figure 6-30
250 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

M10 x 1.5 x 28 thread

AS-1110
M10 x 1.5 x 25 thread

Figure 6-31

7. Set the nominal diameter for 10, the pitch for 1.5, and the nominal length for 25.
8. Set the Thread description to M10 and the Nominal Length to 25.
9. Click the Apply box.
The M10 bolt will appear on the drawing screen with the ThreadedBlock:1. See Figure 6-31.
If the bolt interferes with the ThreadedBlock:1, use the Move Component option to position the
bolt away from the block. See Figure 6-31.

Exercise 6-7: Inserting the M10 Bolt

1. Click the Constraint tool on the panel bar.
The Place Constraint dialog box will appear. See Figure 6-32.
2. Click the Insert option
3. Click the bottom surface of the bolt’s hex head, then click the threaded hole in the
ThreadedBlock:1.
Figure 6-33 shows the resulting assembly.
4. Save the assembly.
Figure 6-34 shows a top view and a sectional view of the M10ASSEMBLY created using the
ISO.idw option. Note the open area between the bottom of the M10 bolt and the bottom of the hole.

Use the Insert constraint.

Figure 6-32
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 251

Figure 6-33

A section view of the bolt inserted into the threaded

hole created using Inventor
Figure 6-34

SCREWS AND NUTS

Screws often pass through an object or group of objects and are secured using nuts. The threads
of a nut must match the threads of the screw.
Nuts are manufactured at a variety of heights depending on their intended application. Nuts
made for heavy loads are thicker than those intended for light loads. In general, nut thickness can
be estimated as 0.88 of the major diameter of the thread. For example, if the nut has an M10
thread, the thickness will be about 0.88(10) = 8.8 mm.
It is good practice to specify a screw length that allows for at least two threads beyond the
nut. This will ensure that all threads of the nut are in contact with the screw threads. Strength cal-
culations for screw threads are based on 100% contact with the nut. See Figure 6-35.

Screw length

Nut height

Two thread lengths Figure 6-35

252 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

A 40 x 40 x 30 box
with a O 11 hole

Figure 6-36

Calculating the Screw Thread Length

In the following example an M10 bolt will pass through a box that has a height of 30 mm and be
held in place using an M10 hex nut. The required length of the screw is calculated by adding the
height of the box to the height of the nut, then adding at least two thread lengths (2P).
For an M10 coarse thread 2P = 1.60 mm. The height of the nut = 0.88(10) = 8.80 mm, and
the height of the box = 30 mm:
30.00 + 8.80 + 1.60 = 40.4 mm
Refer to Figure 6-30 and find the nearest M10 standard thread length that is greater than
40.4. The table shows the next available standard length that is greater than 40.4 is 45 mm.

Exercise 6-8: Adding an M10 × 45 Hex Head Screw to a Drawing

1. Draw a 40 × 40 × 30 box.
2. Locate a Ø11 hole in the center of the top surface of the box.
The hole does not have threads. It is a clearance hole and so should be slightly larger than the
M10 thread. See Figure 6-36.
3. Save the block as Ø11BLOCK.

Exercise 6-9: Adding a Bolt and Nut to the Drawing

1. Start a new assembly drawing called M10NUT. Use the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Use the Place Component tool and place a copy of the Ø11BLOCK on the drawing
screen.
3. Use the Save All command on the File pull-down menu to save and name the new assembly.
4. Click the Place from Content Center tool.
5. Click the Fasteners option, the Bolts option, the Hex Head option, and the AS 1110-Met-
ric bolt.
6. Set the Thread description for M10 and the Nominal Length for 45.
7. Click the Apply box.
8. Locate the bolt, press the left mouse button, then press the right mouse button. Select the
Done option.
See Figure 6-37.
9. Click the Place from Content Center tool, click the Nuts heading in the Category View
listing, click the Hex option, then select the AS1112(4)-Metric nut. Select the M10
Thread description.
See Figure 6-38.
10. Click the Apply box.
See Figure 6-39.
 AS1110 Bolt
M10 x 45 Hex Head

Figure 6-37

Click here.

Click
here.
Click
here.

Select
here.

Figure 6-38

M10 Hex Nut

Figure 6-39
253
254 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Rotate the assembly so that the

bottom surface is visible.

Figure 6-40

Exercise 6-10: Assembling the Components

1. Click the Constraint tool.
2. Insert the bolt into the hole as described previously.
The nut is to be located on the bottom surface of the block, which is presently not visible.
3. Click the Rotate command on the Standard toolbar and rotate the block so that the bot-
tom surface is visible.
See Figure 6-40.
4. Click the Constraint tool and select the Insert option.
5. Click the bottom of the nut and the edge line of the Ø11 hole.
See Figure 6-41.

Click here.

Click here.
Figure 6-41

6. Apply the constraints.

Figure 6-42 shows the resulting assembly.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 255

Resulting
assembly

Figure 6-42

TYPES OF THREADED FASTENERS

There are many different types of screws generally classified by their head types. Figure 6-43
shows six of the most commonly used types.
The choice of head type depends on the screw’s application and design function. A product
design for home use would probably use screws that had slotted heads, as most homes possess a
blade screwdriver. Hex head screws can be torqued to higher levels than slotted pan heads but

Note:
The dimensions listed are for
reference only. See manufacturer's
specifications for the actual sizes.
Figure 6-43
256 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Different types of fasteners available

Figure 6-44

require socket wrenches. Flat head screws are used when the screw is located in a surface that
must be flat and flush.
Sometimes a screw’s head shape is selected to prevent access. For example, the head of the
screw used to open most fire hydrants is pentagon-shaped and requires a special wrench to open
it. This is to prevent unauthorized access that could affect a district’s water pressure.
Screw connections for oxygen lines in hospitals have left-handed threads. They are the only
lines that have left-handed threads, to ensure that no patient needing oxygen is connected to any-
thing but oxygen.
Inventor’s Content Center lists many different types of fasteners. See Figure 6-44. There are
many subfiles to each of the fastener headings.

FLAT HEAD SCREWS—COUNTERSUNK HOLES

Flat head screws are inserted into countersunk holes. The procedure is first to create a counter-
sunk hole on a component, then to create an assembly using the component along with the appro-
priate screw listed in the Content Center.
The following example uses an M8 × 50 hexagon socket flat head screw.
The hole in the block must be sized to accept the M8 × 50 screw. This information is avail-
able from the Table View option of the Place from Content Center dialog box. See Figure 6-45.
For example, the table defines the screw’s head diameter. This values will be used to size the
countersunk hole in the 40 × 40 × 80 block.

Exercise 6-11: Creating a Countersunk Hole

1. Create a 40 × 40 × 80 block.
2. Locate a hole’s center point in the center (20 × 20) of the top surface of the block using
the Point, Center Point command.
3. Go to the Part Features panel bar and click the Hole tool.
4. Click the Countersink and Tapped boxes.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 257

Click here.

Click here.

Find head diameter

value here.

Figure 6-45

A countersunk hole

Figure 6-46 Figure 6-47

See Figure 6-46.

The pitch length of an M8 thread is 1.25, so two thread lengths (2P) equals 2.50.
The hole’s threads must be at least 50.00 + 2.50 = 52.50, and the pilot hole must be at least
52.50 + 2.50 = 55.00 deep.
5. Click the Full Depth box (remove check mark) and set the Thread Type option for ANSI
Metric M Profile, the thread depth for 52.5, the hole depth for 55, and the head diameter
for 15.65.
The value 15.65 came from the Table View portion of the Place from Content Center dia-
log box. Figure 6-47 shows the countersunk hole located in the 40 × 40 × 80 block.
6. Save the block.

Exercise 6-12: Creating and Inserting a Flat Head Screw

1. Create an assembly drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Use the Place Component tool and locate one copy of the block on the drawing screen.
3. Use the Save all command to save and name the assembly.
258 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Figure 6-48

4. Click the Place from Content Center tool.

5. Select the Fasteners option, then Countersunk.
6. Select the Broached Hexagon Socket Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screw—Metric
and set the Thread description for M8 and the Nominal Length for 50.
See Figure 6-48.
7. Click the Insert box.
8. Click the Constraint tool, then select the Insert option on the Place Constraint dialog
box.
9. Insert the screw into the block.
Figure 6-49 shows the resulting assembly. Figure 6-50 shows a top and a section view of
the countersunk screw inserted into the block. Note that the portion of the hole below the
bottom of the M8  50 screw is clear; that is, it does not show the unused threads. This is a

Clear portion of
the assembly

Figure 6-49 Figure 6-50

 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 259

drawing convention that is intended to add clarity to the drawing. Inventor will automatically
omit the unused threads.

COUNTERBORES
A counterbored hole is created by first drilling a hole, then drilling a second larger hole aligned
with the first. Counterbored holes are often used to recess the heads of fasteners.
Say we wish to fit a 3⁄8-16 UNC × 1.50 LONG hex head screw into a block that includes a
counterbored hole, and that after assembly the head of the screw is to be below the surface of the
block.

Determining the Counterbore Depth

Figure 6-51 shows the Table View portion of the Place from Content Center dialog box. It lists
the head height and distance across the flats for a 3⁄8-16 UNC (AS 2465) hex head screw. Other
values can be obtained from manufacturers’ catalogs, many of which are posted on the Web, or
by using the approximations presented in Figure 6-43.
In this example the head height is .243 in. (See Figure 6-51.) The counterbore must have a
depth greater than the head height. A distance of .313 (5/16) was selected.

Determining the Thread Length

The screw is 1.50 in. long and has a pitch of 16 threads per inch. Each thread is therefore 1⁄16 or
.0625 in. It is recommended that there be at least two threads beyond the end of the screw. Two
thread pitches would be 2(.0625) = .125 in.
The thread depth is 1.50 + .125 or 1.625 in. minimum; however, the thread is created below
the counterbore, so for Inventor the value must include the depth of the counterbore. The thread
depth is 1.625 + .313 = 1.938 in.

Determining the Depth of the Hole

The hole should extend at least two pitch lengths beyond the threaded portion of the hole, plus the
depth of the counterbore, so 1.938 + .125 = 2.063 in.

Head height values

Figure 6-51
260 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Figure 6-52

Determining the Counterbore’s Diameter

The distance across the corners of the screw is listed in the Table View portion of the Place from
Content Center dialog box as .650 in. The counterbored hole must be at least this large plus an
allowance for the tool (socket wrench) needed to assemble and disassemble the screw. In general,
the diameter is increased 0.125 in. or 1⁄8 in. [3.2 mm] all around to allow for tooling needs.
If space is a concern, then designers will change the head type of a screw so that the tooling
will not add to the required diameter. For example, a socket head type screw may be used if de-
sign requirements permit.
The minimum counterbore diameter is .650 + .125 = .775. For this example 0.8125 or 13⁄16 in.
was selected.

Exercise 6-13: Drawing a Counterbored Hole

1. Draw a 3.00 × 3.00 × 5.00 block.
2. Locate a hole’s center point in the center of the 3.00 × 3.00 surface.
3. Access the Part Features menu and click the Hole tool.
The Hole dialog box will appear.
4. Click the Counterbore, Tapped, and Full Depth (turned off) bolt.
5. Set the hole depth for 2.063, the thread depth for 1.938, the counterbore diameter for
.8125, and the counterbore depth for .313.
6. Select 3/8-16 UNC threads.
See Figure 6-52.
7. Click OK, then save the block.

Exercise 6-14: Assembling the Screw

1. Create an assembly drawing using the Standard (in).iam format.
2. Use the Place Component tool to place a copy of the counterbored block on the screen.
3. Use the Save All command to save and name the assembly.
4. Click the Place from Content Center tool and select a 3/8-16 UNC × 1.50 hex head bolt
and insert it onto the drawing.
See Figure 6-53.
5. Use the Place Constraint tool to insert the bolt into the hole.
Figure 6-54 shows the bolt inserted into the counterbored hole. Note the tooling clearance
around the hex head and the clearance between the top of the bolt and the top surface of the block.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 261

Figure 6-53

The block with a counterbored hole and a screw

inserted shown at different orientations

Figure 6-54

DRAWING FASTENERS NOT INCLUDED IN THE CONTENT CENTER

The Content Center contains a partial listing of fasteners. There are many other sizes and styles
available. Inventor can be used to draw specific fasteners that can then be saved and used on as-
semblies.
Say we wish to draw an M8 × 25 hex head screw and that this size is not available in the
Content Center.

Exercise 6-15: Drawing an M8 × 25 Hex Head Screw

1. Create a Standard (mm).ipt drawing.
2. Draw a Ø8 × 25 cylinder. Draw the cylinder with its top surface on the XY plane so that
it extends in the negative Z direction.
262 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

A 1.25 x 1.25 chamfer

Figure 6-55 Figure 6-56

See Figure 6-55.

3. Add a 1.25 × 1.25 chamfer to the bottom of the cylinder.
See Figure 6-56. In general, the chamfer will approximately equal one pitch length.
4. Create a new sketch plane on the top surface of the cylinder.
5. Use the Polygon command and draw a hexagon centered on the top surface of the cylin-
der. Make the hexagon 12 mm across the flats (see Chapter 2) and extrude it to a height
of 5.4 mm above the XY plane.
See Figure 6-57.
The head height and distance across the flats were determined using the general values de-
fined in Figure 6-43. Specific values may be obtained from manufacturers, many of whom list
their products on the Web, or from reference books such as Machinery’s Handbook.
6. Add threads to the cylinder, using the Thread command. Click the cylinder, and Inventor
will automatically create threads to match the cylinder’s diameter.
See Figure 6-58. Check the thread specification to assure that correct threads were created. Note
that the coarse pitch of 1.25 was automatically selected, but other pitch values are also available.
7. Save the drawing as M8 × 1.25 × 25 Hex Head Screw.

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP6-1

Nuts are used with externally threaded objects to hold parts together. There are many different
styles of nuts. The Content Center library includes listings for hex, slotted hex, and wing nuts,
among others. Figure 6-59 shows the Table View portion of the Content Center dialog box that
includes nut heights.
The threads of a nut must be exactly the same as the external threads inserted into them. For
example, if a screw with an M8 × 1.25 thread is selected, an M8 × 1.25 nut thread must be selected.

Add the hex head shape

using the Polygon tool
from the Sketch Panel bar.

Figure 6-57 Figure 6-58

 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 263

Head height for an MB hex head bolt

Figure 6-59

The head height of the nut must be considered when determining the length of a bolt. It is
good practice to have at least two threads extend beyond the nut to help assure that the nut is fully
secured. Strength calculations are based on all nut threads’ being engaged, so having threads
extend beyond a nut is critical.
Figure 6-60 shows two blocks, each 25 mm thick with a center hole of Ø9.00 mm. The holes
are clearance holes and do not include threads. The blocks are to be held together using an M8
hex head screw and a compatible nut.

Determining the Minimum Thread Length Required

Each block is 25 mm thick, for a total of 50 mm. The nut height, from Figure 6-59, for an M8 hex
nut is 6.80, so the minimum thread length that will pass through both parts and the nut is 56.80
mm. Two threads must extend beyond the nut to assure that is fully secured. From Figure 6-59 the
length of an M8 thread is given as 1.25 mm, so two threads equal 2.50 mm. Therefore, the mini-
mum thread length must be 50.00 + 6.80 + 2.50 = 59.3 mm.
Bolts are manufactured in standard lengths, some of which are listed in the Content Center
library. If the required thread length was not available from the library, manufacturers’ catalogs
would have to be searched and a new screw drawing created.

Exercise 6-16: Selecting a Screw

1. Click the Place from Content Center tool.
2. Select the Fasteners option, then Bolts, then Hex Head. Select AS 1110-Metric screw.

Two blocks
each 25 mm
thick with
O 9 holes

Figure 6-60
264 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Figure 6-61

See Figure 6-61. The standard thread length that is closest to, but still greater than, 59.3 is
60 mm. The 60 mm length is selected and applied to the drawing.
3. Define the values for an M8 × 60 hex head screw and insert it into the drawing.
See Figure 6-62.
4. Insert the screw into the two assembled parts.
See Figure 6-63. Note that the screw extends beyond the bottom of the two assembled parts.

Exercise 6-17: Selecting a Nut

1. Click the Place from Content Center and select the Fasteners option, then Nuts, then
Hex, then the Hex Nut Metric listing.
See Figure 6-64.

An M8 x 60 Hex
Head Screw

Figure 6-62
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 265

The M8 x 60 screw inserted

into the two blocks

Figure 6-63

2. Insert a copy of the nut into the drawing area.

Figure 6-65 shows the nut added to the drawing screen.
3. Use the Place Constraint tool and insert the nut onto the screw so that it is flush with the
bottom surface of the blocks.
Figure 6-66 shows the nut inserted onto the screw.

Click here.

Select here.

Figure 6-64

Figure 6-65 Figure 6-66

266 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

The nuts listed in the Content Center library represent only a partial listing of the sizes and
styles of nuts available. If a design calls for a nut size or type not listed in the Content Center li-
brary, refer to manufacturers’ specifications, then draw the nut and save it as an individual draw-
ing. It can then be added to the design drawings as needed.

WASHERS
washer: A flat thin ring used Washers are used to increase the bearing area under fasteners or as spacers. Washers are identi-
to increase the bearing area fied by their inside diameter, outside diameter, and thickness. In addition, washers can be desig-
under a fastener or as a spacer. nated N, R, or W for narrow, regular, and wide, respectively. These designations apply only to the
outside diameters; the inside diameter is the same.
Inventor lists washers by their nominal diameter. The nominal diameters differ from the ac-
tual inside diameter by a predetermined clearance allowance. For example, a washer with a nom-
inal diameter of 8 has an actual inside diameter of 8.40, or 0.40 mm greater than the 8 nominal
diameter. This means that washer sizes can easily be matched to thread sizes using nominal sizes.
A washer with a nominal diameter designation of 8 will fit over a thread designated M8.
There are different types of washers including, among others, plain and tapered. The Place
from Content Center dialog box includes a listing of both plain and tapered washers. Figure 6-67
shows the Table View portion of the Place from Content Center dialog box for a plain washer
ISO 7089.

Inserting Washers onto a Fastener

We again start with the two blocks shown in Figure 6-60. Each has a height of 25 mm. We know
from the previous section that the nut height is 6.80 mm and that the requirement that at least two
threads extend beyond the end of the nut adds 2.50 mm, yielding a total thread length requirement
of 59.3. We now have to add the thickness of the two washers and recalculate the minimum re-
quired bolt length.
Say we selected a plain regular washer number ISO 7089 with a nominal size of 8. From
Figure 6-67 the thickness is found to be 1.6 mm or a total of 3.20 mm for the two washers. This

Click here.

Click here.

Figure 6-67
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 267

Inside diameter Height

Figure 6-67 (Continued)

extends the minimum bolt length requirement to 59.3 + 3.20 = 62.5. The nearest standard thread
bolt length listed in the Place from Content Center dialog box that is greater than the 62.5 re-
quirement is 65.

Exercise 6-18: Adding Washers to an Assembly

1. Use the Place Component tool and locate two copies of the block on the drawing, then
align the blocks.
2. Use the Save All command to save and name the assembly.
3. Click the Place from Content Center tool and select an M8 × 65 Hex Head screw and
an M8 Hex Nut and insert them into the drawing.
See Figure 6-68.
4. Access the Place from Content Center dialog box and select the Washers option, then
Plain, then an ISO 7089 washer.
See Figure 6-69. Figure 6-67 shows the Table View values for the washer.
5. Insert two copies into the drawing.
See Figure 6-70.

Figure 6-68
268 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Figure 6-69

6. Use the Place Constraint Insert option tool and align the washers with the holes in the
blocks.
See Figure 6-71.
7. Use the Place Constraint tool and insert the M8 × 65 screw and the nut.
Figure 6-72 shows the resulting assembly.

Figure 6-70
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 269

Resulting assembly

Figure 6-71

Figure 6-72

The washers listed in the Content Center dialog box library represent only a partial listing
of the washers available. If a design calls for a washer size or type not listed in the library, refer
to manufacturers’ specifications, then draw the washer and save it as an individual drawing. It can
then be added to the design drawings as needed.

SETSCREWS
Setscrews are fasteners used to hold parts like gears and pulleys to rotating shafts or other mov- setscrew: A fastener used to
ing objects to prevent slippage between the two objects. See Figure 6-73. hold parts to rotating shafts or
Most setscrews have recessed heads to help prevent interference with other parts. other moving objects to pre-
Many different head styles and point styles are available. See Figure 6-74. The dimensions vent slippage between the two
shown in Figure 6-74 are general sizes for use in this book. For actual sizes, see the manufac- objects.
turer’s specifications.
Figure 6-75 shows a collar with two 10(.19)-32UNF threaded holes.

Figure 6-73
270 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Note:
The dimensions listed are
for reference only. See
manufacturer's specifications
for the actual sizes.
Figure 6-74

A collar with two #10(.19)-32UNF Exercise 6-19: Adding a Setscrew

threaded holes
1. Create an assembly drawing using the Standard (in).iam format.
2. Use the Place Component tool and place one copy of the collar on the drawing.
3. Use the Save All tool to save and name the assembly.
4. Access the Place from Content Center dialog box and select the Fasteners option, then
Bolts, then Set Screws.
5. Select the Hexagon Socket Unbrako Dog Point - Inch option and set the (nominal di-
ameter) Thread description for #10, the Nominal Length for .32, and the Thread Type
for UNF.
See Figure 6-76.
Collar I.D. = .750
D.O. = 1.000
LENGTH = .750
Figure 6-75

Click here.

Click here.

Figure 6-76 (Continued)

 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 271

Figure 6-76

6. Insert a copy of the setscrew on the drawing.

See Figure 6-77.
7. Use the Place Constraint tool and insert the setscrew into one of the threaded holes.
Figure 6-78 shows the resulting assembly.

Figure 6-77 Figure 6-78

272 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

RIVETS
rivet: A metal fastener with a Rivets are fasteners that hold together adjoining or overlapping objects. A rivet starts with a head
head and a straight shaft for at one end and a straight shaft at the other end. The rivet is then inserted into the object, and the
holding together overlapping headless end is “bucked” or otherwise forced into place. A force is applied to the headless end
and adjoining objects. that changes its shape so that another head is formed holding the objects together.
There are many different shapes and styles of rivets. Figure 6-79 shows five common head
shapes for rivets. Hollow rivets are used on aircraft because they are very lightweight. A design
advantage of rivets is that they can be drilled out and removed without damage to the objects they
hold together.
Rivet types are represented on technical drawings using a coding system. See Figure 6-80.
Since rivets are sometimes so small and the material they hold together so thin that it is difficult

Note:
The dimensions listed are for reference only.
See manufacturer’s specifications for the actual sizes.

Figure 6-79

Figure 6-80
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 273

Figure 6-81

to clearly draw the rivets, some companies draw only the rivet’s centerline in the side view and
identify the rivets using a drawing callout.
Figure 6-81 shows the Place from Content Center dialog box for a BS 4620 Cold Forged
Snap Head Rivet - (Metric).

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP6-1

Figure 6-82 shows an assembly drawing. The assembly is to held together using M8 hex head
screws. It was created as follows.
1. Use the Standard (mm).ipt format and create the Top Bracket and the Solid Base.
This assembly was created using the bottom-up approach. It could also have been created us-
ing the top-down approach. Figure 6-83 shows dimensioned drawings of the Top Bracket and
Solid Base.

Add assembly numbers.

Figure 6-82
274 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Top Bracket

Solid
Base

Figure 6-83

2. Assemble two brackets and one base as shown.

See Figure 6-84.
3. Access the Place from Content Center dialog box.
4. Click the Washers heading and select the AS 1971 (M - 5) Plain Washer.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 275

Assembly
Drawing

Top Bracket
= 2 Required

Click here.

Solid Base

Figure 6-84 Figure 6-85

See Figure 6-85.

5. Select a Nominal Diameter of 10.

See Figure 6-86.

6. Click the Table View tab on the AS 1971 (M - 5) dialog box.

Click here.

Select here.

Figure 6-86
276 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Note this value.

Figure 6-87

See Figure 6-87.

7. Note that the height of the washer is 2.15, the inside diameter is 9.09, and the outside di-
ameter is 21. The washer specification is 10  21  2.15. The inside nominal diameter is
used in the washer specification.
8. Click OK.
9. Add two washers to the assembly drawing.
10. Use the Insert constraint to locate the washers around the holes on the two Top
Brackets.
See Figure 6-88.
11. Access the Place from Content Center dialog box.
12. Click the Hex heading under Nuts and select the AS 1474 - Metric hex nut option.
See Figure 6-89.
13. Select the M8 thread option.
See Figure 6-90.
14. Click the Table View tab on the AS 1474 - Metric dialog box.

Locate the washers.

Figure 6-88
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 277

Click here.

Figure 6-89

Click here.

Select here.

Figure 6-90

See Figure 6-91.

15. Note that the height of the nut is 4.24. Scroll the screen to the right and note and that the
pitch is 1.25.
16. Click OK.
17. Add three nuts to the assembly drawing.
18. Use the Insert constraint and locate the nuts aligned with the matching holes in the Top
Brackets and with the holes between the Top Brackets and the Solid Base as shown.
278 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Note this value.

Figure 6-91

Nut

Nut

Nut
Figure 6-92

See Figure 6-92.

19. Calculate the required screw length for the screw that mounts between the back-to-back
Top Brackets.
The flanges on the two Top Brackets are 10 each, the washers are 2.15 thick, and the nut is
4.24 thick. Therefore the minimum screw length is equal to
10 + 10 + 2.15 + 2.15 + 4.24 = 28.54
This length value does not include the required two pitches that must extend beyond the nut.
20. Access the Place from Content Center and click the Fasteners heading.
21. Select the Hex Head option.
See Figure 6-93.
22. Select the AS 1111 - Metric option.
See Figure 6-94.
23. Click the Table View tab on the AS 1111 - Metric dialog box and note that the pitch of
the M8 thread is 1.25.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 279

Click
here.
Click here.

Figure 6-93

Must match nut’s pitch

Figure 6-94

24. Click the Select tab on the AS 1111 - Metric dialog box.
The value for 2P (two pitches) equals 2(1.25) = 2.50. Add this value to the 28.54 length re-
quirement calculated previously:
28.54 + 2.50 = 31.04
The next standard length value is 35. See Figure 6-95.
25. Select the 35 nominal length; click OK.
26. Use the Insert constraint tool and insert the screw into the assembly.
280 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Click here.

Select here.

Figure 6-95

See Figure 6-96.

27. Calculate the minimum thread length for the two screws inserted between the Top
Bracket and the Solid Base.
From the dimensioned drawings shown in Figure 6-83, the depth of the counterbore on the Top
Bracket is 8.00. The total height of the flange is 24.00, so the threaded portion of each screw must
pass through a difference of 16.00. The counterbore on the Solid Base is 8.00 deep, and the flange
is 20 thick, so the thread must pass through 12.00.
If the same nut as selected previously is used, the nut height is 4.24. The thread pitch for an
M8 screw is 1.25 (2P = 2.50). Therefore, the minimum required thread length is as follows:
16.00 + 12.00 + 4.24 + 2.50 = 34.74

Insert screw.

Figure 6-96
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 281

Figure 6-97

This value indicates that the same M8 × 35 screw selected previously may also be used here.
28. Use the Insert constraint and position the screws.
See Figure 6-97.
29. Save the assembly drawing as Bracket Assembly.
30. Close the assembly drawing
31. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).ipn format.
32. Click the Create View tool and access the Bracket Assembly.
33. Use the Tweak Components tool and create an exploded isometric drawing showing all
the parts of the assembly.
See Figure 6-98.
35. Save the exploded assembly drawing as Bracket Assembly.

A drawing created using

the .ipn format

Figure 6-98
282 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

An exploded isometric drawing

created using the ANSI (mm).idw format

Figure 6-99

Try the animation options.

TIP
35. Close the assembly drawing.
36. Start a new drawing using the ANSI (mm).idw format.
37. Create an Iso Top Left exploded assembly drawing based on the .ipn Bracket Assembly
drawing.
See Figure 6-99.
38. Add assembly numbers (balloon numbers) to the assembly drawing.
Start the assembly numbers with the biggest parts. The Solid Base should be part 1, the Top
Bracket part 2, and so on.
See Figure 6-100.

Add assembly numbers.

Figure 6-100
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 283

39. Click the Parts List tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel and locate the parts list on
the assembly drawing.
See Figure 6-101. The part numbers that are displayed on the parts list are the file numbers
for the parts. These numbers may be edited as needed.
The initial parts list

Figure 6-101

The parts list may be located on a separate sheet if needed.

TIP
40. Right-click the parts list and select the Edit Parts List option.
41. Click the Column Chooser option.

See Figure 6-102.

Click here.

Figure 6-102

42. Scroll down the Available Properties options and add Material to the parts list.
See Figure 6-103.

Click here.
Click here to add a Material heading
to the parts list.

Figure 6-103
284 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

43. Use the Move Down option on the Parts List Column Chooser dialog box and move
the QTY heading to the bottom of the list.
44. Click OK.
See Figure 6-104.
45. Add the description and material requirements for the Solid Base and Top Block.

Revised parts list New column

Moved heading

Figure 6-104

See Figure 6-105.

46. Click OK.
Figure 6-106 shows the finished isometric exploded assembly drawing.
Add description and material.

Figure 6-105

Exploded finished isometric

assembly drawing

Figure 6-106
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 285

SUMMARY
This chapter explained how to draw threads and washers as through holes, internal threads, and blind threaded holes.
well as how to select fasteners and how to design using fasten- ANSI standards and conventions were followed.
ers, washers, and keys. The Place from Content Center tool was used to specify
Thread terminology was explained and illustrated, and different types of fasteners in drawings, including bolts and
the different thread form specifications and ways of graphi- screws coupled with nuts. Countersunk screws and counter-
cally representing threads were described, including threaded bored holes were described and illustrated.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which of the following is not a type of point for a 6. If a 1⁄2-13 UNC fastener must pass through two parts—a
setscrew? washer and a nut—whose total thickness is 2.50, what is
a. Half dog c. Cylinder the minimum possible length for the fastener?
b. Cone d. Flat a. 2.50 c. 2.75
2. A flat head fastener is used with which of the following b. 2.65 d. 2.88
hole shapes? 7. The major diameter of a thread is measured from
a. Counterbore c. Spotface a. Crest to crest c. Two times the pitch
b. Countersink b. Root to root
3. What is the pitch of a thread designated 1⁄4- 20 UNC? 8. Which tool is used to edit an existing threaded hole?
a. 0.05 c. 0.025 a. Edit Sketch c. Edit Text
b. 0.10 d. 0.20 b. Edit Feature
4. What is the pitch of a thread designated M10  1.25  20 ? 9. If an M8  1  16 fastener is to be inserted into a
a. 1.00 c. 1.25 threaded hole, the thread depth must be at least
b. 2.00 d. 1.50 a. 16 c. 18
5. Which of the following thread forms has the most threads b. 17 d. 19
per inch? 10. Which type of thread advances when turned in the clock-
a. UNC c. UNEF wise direction?
b. UNF d. UN a. Right-hand c. Center-thread
b. Left-hand
Matching
Given the following thread callout, identify the meaning of each term.
1
⁄4 - 20 UNC -2A  1.625
Column A Column B
a. 20__________ 1. Length
b. UNC__________ 2. Class of fit
c. 1⁄4__________ 3. External
d. 1.625__________ 4. Major diameter
e. A__________ 5. Pitch
f. 2__________ 6. Thread form
Given the following thread callout, identify the meaning of each term.
M10  1.25  30
Column A Column B
g. M10__________ 7. Length
h. 1.25__________ 8. Thread designation
i. 30__________ 9. Pitch
 286 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

True or False
1. True or False: The notation Ø10 designates either a hole or 6. True or False: UNC, UNF, UNEF, and UN are all standard
a cylindrical-shaped object, whereas the notation M10 thread forms.
designates either an internal or external thread. 7. True or False: Threads can be drawn in Inventor using the
2. True or False: The pitch of a thread is the linear distance Hole tool on the Part Features panel bar.
along the thread from crest to crest. 8. True or False: The threaded portion of an internal hole
3. True or False: The thread designation M10  1.25  30 must extend at least two pitches beyond the end of the fas-
indicates that the thread’s pitch is 30. tener inserted into the hole.
4. True or False: A coarse thread pitch is not included in a 9. True or False: The Inventor Content Center includes a
metric thread callout. listing of standard threaded fasteners.
5. True or False: The thread designation .500 13 UNC  10. True or False: A washer is defined using the inside
3.00 LONG indicates that the thread’s pitch is 13. diameter  outside diameter  thickness.

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 6-1: Millimeters
Figure P6-1 shows three blocks. Assume that the blocks are each 30  30  10 and
that the hole is Ø9. Assemble the three blocks so that their holes are aligned and they
are held together by a hex head bolt secured by an appropriate hex nut. Locate a
washer between the bolt head and the top block and between the nut and the bottom
block. Create all drawings using either an A4 or A3 drawing sheet, as needed. Include
a title block on all drawing sheets.
A. Define the bolt.
B. Define the nut.
C. Define the washers.

Three blocks, each 30 x 30 x 30

with a centered O 9 hole.
P/N AM311-10M

Assemble the three blocks

using a hex head nut, a hex
nut, and two plain, narrow
washers

Figure P6-1
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 287

D. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.

E. Create a BOM for the assembly.
F. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
G. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
H. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Project 6-2: Millimeters

Figure P6-2 shows three blocks, one 30  30  50 with a centered M8
threaded hole, and two 30  30  10 blocks with centered Ø9 holes.
Join the two 30  30  10 blocks to the 30  30  50 block using an
M8 hex head bolt. Locate a regular plain washer under the bolt head.
A. Define the bolt.
B. Define the thread depth.
C. Define the hole depth.
D. Define the washer.
E. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
F. Create a BOM for the assembly.
G. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
H. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
I. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

O9

30 x 30 x 10
Block-2 REQD
P/N AM-311-10M

M8

30 x 30 x 50
Block-2 REQD
P/N AM-311-10M

Figure P6-2

Project 6-3: Inches

Figure P6-3 shows three blocks. Assume that each block is 1.00 
1.00  .375 and that the hole is Ø.375. Assemble the three blocks so
that their holes are aligned and that they are held together by a 5⁄16-18
UNC indented regular hex head bolt secured by an appropriate hex
nut. Locate a washer between the bolt head and the top block and be-
tween the nut and the bottom block. Create all drawings using either
an A4 or A3 drawing sheet, as needed. Include a title block on all
drawing sheets.
A. Define the bolt.
B. Define the nut.
C. Define the washers.
D. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
E. Create a BOM for the assembly.
F. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
G. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
H. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.
288 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

5
16 -18 UNC indented regular hex head bolt

O.375

1.00 x 1.00 x 0.375 Block

3 REQD
P/N AM311-10
Figure P6-3

Project 6-4: Inches

Figure P6-4 shows three blocks, one 1.00  1.00  2.00 with a cen-
tered threaded hole, and two 1.00  1.00  .375 blocks with centered
Ø.375 holes. Join the two 1.00  1.00  .375 blocks to the 1.00 
1.00  2.00 block using a 5⁄16-18 UNC hex head bolt. Locate a regular
plain washer under the bolt head.
A. Define the bolt.
B. Define the thread depth.
C. Define the hole depth.
D. Define the washer.

1.00 x 1.00 x 0.375 Block

2 REQD
P/N AM311-10

O.375 Centered Hole

º5 16-18 UNC

1.00 x 1.00 x 2.00 Block

P/N AM312-2 Figure P6-4
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 289

E. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.

F. Create a BOM for the assembly.
G. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
H. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
I. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Project 6-5: Inches or Millimeters

Figure P6-5 shows a centering block. Create an assembly drawing of
the block and insert three setscrews into the three threaded holes so
that they extend at least .25 in. or 6 mm into the center hole.
A. Use the inch dimensions.
B. Use the millimeter dimensions.
C. Define the setscrews.
D. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
E. Create a BOM for the assembly.
F. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
G. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
H. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Centering Block
P/N BU2004-5
SAE 1020 Steel

Figure P6-5

Project 6-6: Millimeters

Figure P6-6 shows two parts: a head cylinder and a base cylinder. The
head cylinder has outside dimensions of Ø40 × 20, and the base cylin-
der has outside dimensions of Ø40 × 50. The holes in both parts are
located on a Ø24 bolt circle. Assemble the two parts using hex head
bolts.
290 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

A. Define the bolt.

B. Define the holes in the head cylinder, the counterbore
diameter and depth, and the clearance hole diameter.
C. Define the thread depth in the base cylinder.
D. Define the hole depth in the base cylinder.
E. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
F. Create a BOM for the assembly.
G. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
H. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
I. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Cylinder Head
P/N EK130-1
SAE 1040 Steel
Counterbored holes
on a O24 bolt circle

Cylinder Base
P/N EK130-2
SAE 1040 Steel

Figure P6-6
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 291

Project 6-7: Millimeters

Figure P6-7 shows a pressure cylinder assembly.
A. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
B. Create a BOM for the assembly.
C. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
D. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
E. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Figure P6-7

Project 6-8: Millimeters

Figure P6-7 shows a pressure cylinder assembly.
A. Revise the assembly so that it uses M10 × 35 hex head bolts.
B. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
C. Create a BOM for the assembly.
D. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
E. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
F. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.
292 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Figure P6-9

Project 6-9: Inches and Millimeters

Figure P6-9 shows a C-block assembly.
Use one of the following fasteners assigned by your instructor.
1. M12 hex head
2. M10 square head
3. 1⁄4-20 UNC hex head
4. 3⁄8-16 UNC square head
5. M10 socket head
6. M8 slotted head
7. 1⁄4-20 UNC slotted head
8. 3⁄8-16 UNC socket head
A. Define the bolts.
B. Define the nuts.
C. Define the washers.
D. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
E. Create a BOM for the assembly.
F. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
G. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
H. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Project 6-10: Millimeters

Figure P6-10 shows an exploded assembly drawing. There are no
standard parts, so each part must be drawn individually.
A. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
B. Create a BOM for the assembly.
C. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 293

Figure P6-10

Figure P6-11
294 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

D. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.

E. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Project 6-11: Millimeters

Figure P6-11 shows an exploded assembly drawing.
A. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
B. Create a BOM for the assembly.
C. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
D. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
E. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Project 6-12: Inches or Millimeters

Figure P6-12 shows an exploded assembly drawing. No dimensions
are given. If parts 3 and 5 have either M10 or 3⁄8-16 UNC threads,
size parts 1 and 2. Based on these values estimate and create the re-
maining sizes and dimensions.
A. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
B. Create a BOM for the assembly.
C. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
D. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
E. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Figure P6-12
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 295

Figure P6-13
296 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Project 6-13: Inches

Figure P6-13 shows an assembly drawing and detail drawings of a
surface gauge.
A. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
B. Create a BOM for the assembly.
C. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
D. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
E. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.

Project 6-14: Millimeters

Figure P6-14 shows an assembly made from parts defined on pages
220 through 223. Assemble the parts using M10 threaded fasteners.
A. Define the bolt.
B. Define the nut.
C. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
D. Create a BOM for the assembly.
E. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
F. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
G. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.
H. Consider possible interference between the nuts and ends of
the fasteners both during and after assembly. Recommend an
assembly sequence.

Project 6-15: Millimeters

Figure P6-15 shows an assembly made from parts defined on pages
220 through 223. Assemble the parts using M10 threaded fasteners.
A. Define the bolt.
B. Define the nut.
C. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
D. Create a BOM for the assembly.
E. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
F. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
G. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.
H. Consider possible interference between the nuts and ends of
the fasteners both during and after assembly. Recommend an
assembly sequence.

Spacer Quad L-Bracket

P/N AM311-4 P/N BK20-1
2 REQD 2 REQD

C-Bracket Plate
P/N BK20-3 PL100-6
2 REQD 2 REQD
Figure P6-14 Figure P6-15
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 297

Project 6-16: Millimeters

Figure P6-16 shows an assembly made from parts defined on pages
228 through 229. Assemble the parts using M10 threaded fasteners.
A. Define the bolt.
B. Define the nut.
C. Draw an assembly drawing including all components.
D. Create a BOM for the assembly.
E. Create a presentation drawing of the assembly.
F. Create an isometric exploded drawing of the assembly.
G. Create an animation drawing of the assembly.
H. Consider possible interference between the nuts and ends of
the fasteners both during and after assembly. Recommend an
assembly sequence.

Project 6-17: Access Controller

Design an access controller based on the information given in Figure
P6-17. The controller works by moving an internal cylinder up and
down within the base so the cylinder aligns with output holes A and B.
Liquids will enter the internal cylinder from the top, then exit the base
through holes A and B. Include as many holes in the internal cylinder
as necessary to create the following liquid exit combinations.
1. A open, B closed
2. A open, B open
3. A closed, B open
The internal cylinder is to be held in place by an alignment key and
a stop button. The stop button is to be spring-loaded so that it will al-
ways be held in place. The internal cylinder will be moved by
pulling out the stop button, repositioning the cylinder, then reinsert-
ing the stop button.

Figure P6-16
 298 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

INTERNAL CYLINDER

ALIGNMENT M20 - 16 DEEP

SLOT

O40

AS MANY HOLES
AS NEEDED - O8
AS
NEEDED

SLOTS FOR
SPRING-LOADED
STOP BUTTON AS
NEEDED

O40 NOMINAL

60 SQUARE
ALIGNMENT
GUIDE
STOP BUTTON
ASSEMBLY 40 NOMINAL
May be
increased as
AS needed
NEEDED

BRACKET STOP BUTTON

Redesign as necessary for
attachment to the base.
Add holes to the base and
M10
specify fasteners

SPRING located
here
KNURLED
HANDLE MATCH TO
SPACER STOP BUTTON

BASE
Figure P6-17
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 299

Prepare the following drawings.

A. Draw an assembly drawing.
B. Draw detail drawings of each nonstandard part. Include
positional tolerances for all holes.
C. Prepare a parts list.

Project 6-18: Grinding Wheel

Design a hand-operated grinding wheel as shown in Figure P6-18
specifically for sharpening a chisel. The chisel is to be located on an
adjustable rest while it is being sharpened. The mechanism should
be able to be clamped to a table during operation using two thumb-
screws. A standard grinding wheel is Ø6.000⬙ and 1/2⬙ thick, and has
an internal mounting hole with a 50.00±.03 bore.
Prepare the following drawings.
A. Draw an assembly drawing.
B. Draw detail drawings of each nonstandard part. Include
positional tolerances for all holes.
C. Prepare a parts list.

Project 6-19: Millimeters

Given the assembly shown in Figure P6-19 on page 301, add the fol-
lowing fasteners.
1. Create an assembly drawing.
2. Create a parts list including assembly numbers.
3. Create a dimensioned drawing of the support block and
specify a dimension for each hole including the thread size
and the depth required.
Fasteners:
A.
1. M10 ⫻ 35 HEX HEAD BOLT
2. M10 ⫻ 35 HEX HEAD BOLT
3. M10 ⫻ 30 HEX HEAD BOLT
4. M10 ⫻ 25 HEX HEAD BOLT
B.
1. M10 ⫻ 1.5 ⫻ 35 HEX HEAD BOLT
2. M8 ⫻ 35 ROUND HEAD BOLT
3. M10 ⫻ 30 HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
4. M6 ⫻ 30 SQUARE BOLT

Project 6-20: Inches

1. Create an assembly drawing.
2. Create a parts list including assembly numbers.
3. Create a dimensioned drawing of the Base and specify a
dimension for each hole including the thread size and the
depth required.
Fasteners:
A.
1. 3/8-16 UNC ⫻ 2.50 HEX HEAD SCREW
2. 1/4-20 UNC ⫻ 2.00 HEX HEAD SCREW
3. 7/16-14 UNC ⫻ 1.75 HEX HEAD SCREW
4. 5/16-18 UNC ⫻ 2.25 HEX HEAD SCREW
 300 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

30 x to the bottom
surface
CHISEL

GRINDING WHEEL

ADJUSTABLE REST
The pictured triangular
shape is only a suggestion; HOLDING SCREW
any shape rest can be More than one may
specified. be used.

SUPPORT
GRINDING WHEEL
This support may be 1/2" Thick, O6",
designed as a casting. 50.00±.03 Bore

SHAFT

At least 1"
opening
Insert HANDLE
here. LINK
Locate BEARING
here, if specified.
THUMBSCREWS

Metal threaded end

SUPPORT GRINDING WHEEL

BEARING
HANDLE ASSEMBLY SPACER
wooden, metal threaded end SPACER
NUT

This is a nominal setup. It may be

improved. Consider how the SHAFT
SPACERs rub against the stationary NUT
SUPPORT, and consider double NUTs
at each end of the shaft. SPACER

LINK
SPACER
Figure P6-18
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 301

BLOCK, TOP
Assembly
Material: Mild Steel
All Parts Base

Gasket

BLOCK, TOP

1
2 Threaded
holes
3
4 Clearance
holes

GASKET

BASE

Figure P6-19

B.
1. 1/4-28 UNF  2.00 HEX HEAD SCREW
2. #8 (.164)-32 UNC  2.00 INDENTED LARGE HEX
HEAD SCREW
3. 3/8-16 UNC  1.75 CROSS RECESSED PAN HEAD
MACHINE SCREW
4. 5/16-18 UNC  1.75 HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP
SCREW
302 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Project 6-21: Millimeters

Given the collar shown in Figure P6-21, add the following setscrews.
1. Create an assembly drawing.
2. Create a parts list.
3. Create a dimensioned drawing of the collar. Specify a thread
specification for each hole as required by the designated set
screw.
Holes:
A.
1. M4  6-AS1421 DOG POINT-METRIC
2. M3  3 BROACHED HEXAGON SOCKET SET SCREW -
FLAT POINT - METRIC
3. M2.5  4 BS4168: PART 3 HEXAGON SOCKET SET
SCREW - CONE POINT - METRIC
4. M4  5 FORGED HEXAGON SOCKET SET SCREW -
HALF DOG POINT - METRIC
B.
1. M2  4 JIS B 1117 TRUNCATED CONE POINT - METRIC
2. M3  6 JIS B 1117 LONG DOG POINT - METRIC
3. M4  5 SS-ISO 4766 SLOTTED HEADLESS SET
SCREW
4. M1.6  4 JIS B 1117 FLAT POINT HEXAGON SOCKET
SET SCREW

Collar: Mild steel

Figure P6-21

Project 6-22: Inches

Given the collar shown in Figure P6-22, add the following setscrews.
1. Create an assembly drawing.
2. Create a parts list.
3. Create a dimensioned drawing of the collar. Specify a thread
specification for each hole as required by the designated
setscrew.
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 303

Figure P6-22

Holes:
A.
1. #10 (0.190) ⫻ .375 SQUARE HEAD SET SCREW - DOG
POINT - INCH
2. #6 (0.138) ⫻ .125 SLOTTED HEADLESS SET SCREW -
FLAT POINT - INCH
3. #8 (0.164) ⫻ .375 TYPE C - SPLINE SOCKET SET
SCREW - CUP POINT - INCH
4. #5 (0.126) ⫻ .45 HEXAGON SOCKET SET SCREW -
UNBRAKO CONE POINT - INCH
B.
1. #6 (0.138) ⫻ .25 TYPE D - SPLINE SOCKET SET
SCREW - CUP POINT - INCH
2. #8 (0.164) ⫻ .1875 SLOTTED HEADLESS SET SCREW -
DOG POINT - INCH
3. #10 (0.190) ⫻ .58 HEXAGON SOCKET SET SCREW -
FLAT POINT - INCH
4. #6 (0.138) ⫻ .3125 SPLINE SOCKET SET SCREW -
HALF DOG POINT - INCH

Project 6-23: Millimeters

Given the components shown in Figure P6-23:
1. Create an assembly drawing.
2. Create a presentation drawing.
3. Animate the presentation drawing.
4. Create an exploded isometric drawing.
5. Create a parts list.

Project 6-24: Inches

Given the assembly drawing shown in Figure P6-24:
1. Create an assembly drawing.
2. Create a presentation drawing.
3. Animate the presentation drawing.
4. Create an exploded isometric drawing.
5. Create a parts list.
304 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Figure P6-23
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 305

Figure P6-23 (Continued)

306 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners

Adjustable Assembly

From Place from Content Center

Figure P6-24
 Chapter 6 Threads and Fasteners 307

Figure 6-24 (Continued)

This page intentionally left blank
Dimensioning a Drawing 7
Chapter
Objectives
• Teach how to dimension objects.
• Present ANSI standards and conventions.
• Show how to dimension different shapes and features.
• Introduce 3D dimensioning.

INTRODUCTION
Inventor uses two types of dimensions: model and drawing. Model dimensions are created as the model dimension: A dimen-
model is being constructed and may be edited to change the shape of a model. Drawing dimen- sion created as a model is
sions can be edited, but the changes will not change the shape of the model. If the shape of a being constructed; it may be
model is changed, the drawing dimensions associated with the revised surfaces will change to edited to change the shape of
reflect the new values. a model.
Dimensions are usually applied to a drawing using either American National Standards In- drawing dimension: A dimen-
stitute (ANSI) or International Organization for Standardization (ISO) standards. If English units sion attached to a specified
are selected when a new drawing is started, the ANSI inch standards (ANSI (in).idw) will be in- distance on a drawing that can
be edited without changing
voked. If metric units are selected, the ISO standards (ISO.idw) may be invoked. This book uses
the shape of the model.
ANSI standards for both inch and metric units.
Figure 7-1 shows a drawing that includes only the drawing dimensions. The Metric option
was selected before the model was drawn. The model dimensions were created automatically as
the model was created. The General Dimension tool was used to edit the sketch dimensions.

The General Dimension tool was

used to edit the sketch dimensions.

Figure 7-1
310 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS—ANSI

Some Common Terms
Figure 7-2 shows both ANSI and ISO style dimensions. The terms apply to both styles.
Dimension Lines: In mechanical drawings, lines between extension lines that end with an
arrowhead and include a numerical dimensional value located within the line.
Extension Lines: Lines that extend away from an object and allow dimensions to be located
off the surface of an object.
Leader Lines: Lines drawn at an angle, not horizontal or vertical, that are used to dimension
specific shapes such as holes. The start point of a leader line includes an arrowhead. Nu-
merical values are drawn at the end opposite the arrowhead.
Linear Dimensions: Dimensions that define the straight-line distance between two points.
Angular Dimensions: Dimensions that define the angular value, measured in degrees, be-
tween two straight lines.

No gap Leader line

Extension line

ANSI style dimensions

Dimension line

Gap required
Dimension line

Extension line

ISO style dimesions

Leader line
Figure 7-2

Some Dimensioning Conventions

See Figure 7-3.
1. Dimension lines should be drawn evenly spaced; that is, the distance between dimension
lines should be uniform. A general rule of thumb is to locate dimension lines about 1⁄2 in.
or 15 mm apart.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 311

Space dimension lines evenly.

Noticeable
gap

Align dimension
lines. Leader lines should
point toward the
Centerlines used as center of the hole
extension lines they dimension. Figure 7-3

2. There should a noticeable gap between the edge of a part and the beginning of an exten-
sion line. This serves as a visual break between the object and the extension line. The
visual difference between the line types can be enhanced by using different colors for the
two types of lines.
3. Leader lines are used to define the size of holes and should be positioned so that the
arrowhead points toward the center of the hole.
4. Centerlines may be used as extension lines. No gap is used when a centerline is extended
beyond the edge lines of an object.
5. Align dimension lines whenever possible to give the drawing a neat, organized appearance.

Some Common Errors to Avoid

See Figure 7-4.

Avoid crossing
extension lines.
Some common errors
Locate dimensions
away from the
surface of an object.

Avoid long
extension Do not locate dimension lines
lines. too close to the object. Figure 7-4
312 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

1. Avoid crossing extension lines. Place longer dimensions farther away from the object than
shorter dimensions.
2. Do not locate dimensions within cutouts; always use extension lines.
3. Do not locate any dimension close to the object. Dimension lines should be at least 1⁄2 in.
or 15 mm from the edge of the object.
4. Avoid long extension lines. Locate dimensions in the same general area as the feature
being defined.

CREATING DRAWING DIMENSIONS

Drawing dimensions are added to a drawing using the General Dimension tool. The General
Dimension tool is located on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
This section will add drawing dimensions to the model view shown in Figure 7-5. The
dimensions will be in compliance with ANSI standards. The model was drawn using the Standard
(mm).ipt format. All values are in millimeters.
A dimensioned view of the model used in this example is available in Figure 7-11. Use the
Standard (mm).ipt format and create a solid model. Extrude the model to a thickness of 10. Save
the model as BLOCK, 2 HOLES.

Click here to
access drawing files.

See Figure 7-11

for a dimensioned
view of this model.
Figure 7-5

Drawing dimensions are different from model dimensions. Model dimensions are created as
the model is created and can be used to edit (change the shape of) the model. Drawing dimensions
are attached to a specified distance. Changing a drawing dimension will not change the shape of
the model.

Changing the scale of a drawing will change the size of the drawing. The size of the

TIP dimension text will not change.

Exercise 7-1: Creating an Orthographic View for Dimensioning

1. Click on the New tool, then the Metric tab. Select the ANSI (mm).idw format and click OK.
2. Select the Base View tool from the Drawing Views Panel.
The Drawing View dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-5.
3. Select the Open an existing file box, select the BLOCK, 2 HOLES file, click Open,
locate the view on the drawing screen, and click the mouse.
4. If needed, change the scale of the drawing.
5. Click OK.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 313

Exercise 7-2: Accessing the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar

1. Move the cursor into the panel bar area, and right-click the mouse.
A small dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-6.
2. Select the Drawing Annotation Panel option.
The panel bar will change to the Drawing Annotation Panel bar shown in Figure 7-7. The
General Dimension tool is the first tool listed.
File name
A model created using the Standard
(mm).ipt format. All dimensions
are in millimeters. See Figure 7-11.

Click here.
Right-click here.

Figure 7-6

Click here to create dimensions.

Click here to create

center marks.

Click here to access

the Centerline tool.

Figure 7-7

Adding Centerlines to Holes

Figure 7-8 shows a front orthographic view of the model to be dimensioned.

Click the circles.

Click here.

Center marks Figure 7-8

314 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Centerlines were added to the model using the Center Mark tool located on the Drawing
Annotation Panel bar.
1. Click the Center Mark tool.
2. Click the edge of the circles.
3. Use the Centerline option to draw a centerline between the holes. See Figure 7-9.
4. Click the Centerline tool.
The Centerline tool is a flyout from the Center Mark tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel.
5. Click the right edge of the left hole’s horizontal centerline, click the left edge of the right
hole’s horizontal centerline, right-click the mouse, and select the Create option.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Created using the Centerline tool

Centerline tool
Click
here.

Click here.
Center mark

Figure 7-9

Exercise 7-3: Adding Horizontal Dimensions

1. Click the General Dimension tool.
2. Move the cursor into the drawing area and first click the upper left corner of the model.
A green circle will appear on the corner, indicating that it has been selected.
3. Click the top end of the left hole’s vertical centerline.
4. Move the cursor, locating the dimension, then press the left mouse button.
Locate the dimension away from the edge of the model and position the text in the approxi-
mate center between the two extension lines.
5. Still using the General Dimension tool, click the top end of the two vertical centerlines
and locate a second horizontal dimension between the two vertical hole centerlines.
See Figure 7-10.

Overall horizontal dimension

Figure 7-10
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 315

Overall Dimensions
Overall dimensions define the outside sizes of a model, the maximum length, width, and height. overall dimensions: Dimen-
It is important that overall dimensions be easy to find and read, as they are often used to deter- sions that define the outside
mine the stock sizes needed to produce the model. sizes of a model: the maximum
Convention calls for overall dimensions to be located farther away from the model than any length, width, and height.
other dimensions. In Figure 7-10 the 50 overall dimension was located above the other two horizontal
dimensions, that is, farther away from the model. The dimension could also have been located
below the model.
Note that the spacing between the model’s edge and the two horizontal dimensions is approx-
imately equal to the distance between the overall dimension and the two horizontal dimensions.

Vertical Dimensions
ANSI standards call for the text of vertical dimensions to be written unidirectionally. This means
that the text should be written horizontally and be read from left to right. Figure 7-11 shows two
vertical dimensions added to the model. Both use unidirectional text. Note also that the overall
height dimension is located the farthest away from the model’s edge.

Equal spacing Text written

unidirectionally
per ANSI
standards

Overall
dimension

Figure 7-11

Exercise 7-4: Creating Unidirectional Text

1. Click the Format heading at the top of the screen, then select the Style Editor option.
The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will appear.
2. Click the + sign to the left of the Dimension listing.
3. Select the Default - mm (ANSI) option.
The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will change. See Figure 7-12.
4. Select the Text tab.
5. Go to the Orientation box and select the Inline - Horizontal option as shown.
6. Click the Save box, then click Done.
All vertical dimensions will now be written using unidirectional text.
316 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Click here.
Click here.

Click here.

Click here.
Figure 7-12

Positioning Dimension Text

You can control the location of dimension text by the sequence used to define the distance to be
dimensioned. See Figure 7-13. The text will appear on the side of the first selected edge or point.
For example, the text appears on the left when the left vertical line is selected first and on the right
when the right vertical line is selected first.

First click Second click Second click First click

Figure 7-13

Dimensioning Holes
There are two Ø10 holes in the BLOCK, 2 HOLES model. Two hole dimensions could be applied,
or one dimension could be used with the additional note Ø10 - 2 HOLES. In general, it is desir-
able to use as few dimensions as possible to clearly and completely define the model’s size. This
helps prevent a cluttered and confusing drawing.
1. Click the Hole / Thread Notes tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel, then the edge of
one of the holes.
2. Drag the dimension away from the model.
3. Locate the hole dimension and left-click the mouse.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
See Figure 7-14.

A hole dimension
Figure 7-14
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 317

Exercise 7-5: Adding Text to the Hole Dimension

1. Move the cursor onto the hole dimension and right-click the mouse.
See Figure 7-15.
2. Click the Text option.

Click here.

Add text.

Right-click text.
Figure 7-15 Figure 7-16

The Format Text dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-16. The << >> symbol represents the
existing text.
3. Locate the cursor to the right of the << >> symbol and type - 2 HOLES.
4. Click the OK box.
Figure 7-17 shows the resulting dimension.

Drawing convention calls for all drawing text to use uppercase letters.

TIP

Text added to existing text

Figure 7-17

Exercise 7-6: Editing a Hole Dimension

The hole dimension shown in Figure 7-17 includes the word THRU after the dimension value.
Including the word THRU after a hole dimension is an optional practice, and not all companies
include it. The word may be removed using the Edit Hole Note option.
1. Move the cursor to the hole dimension and right-click the mouse.
2. Select the Edit Hole Note option.
318 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

The Edit Hole Note dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-18.
3. Backspace out the word THRU.
4. Click the Save box.
Figure 7-19 shows the resulting hole dimension. If the 2 HOLES note is not added using the
Text option, it can be added using the Edit Hole Note option.

Backspace out THRU.

Figure 7-18 Figure 7-19

DRAWING SCALE
Drawings are often drawn “to scale” because the actual part is either too big to fit on a sheet of
drawing paper or too small to be seen. For example, a microchip circuit must be drawn at several
thousand times its actual size to be seen.
Drawing scales are written using the following formats:
SCALE: 1  1
SCALE: FULL
SCALE: 1000  1
SCALE: .25  1
In each example the value on the left indicates the scale factor. A value greater than 1 indi-
cates that the drawing is larger than actual size. A value smaller than 1 indicates that the drawing
is smaller than actual size.
Regardless of the drawing scale selected the dimension values must be true size. Figure 7-20
shows the same rectangle drawn at two different scales. The top rectangle is drawn at a scale of 1  1,
or its true size. The bottom rectangle is drawn at a scale of 2  1, or twice its true size. In both
examples the 3.00 dimension remains the same.

SCALE: FULL

SCALE: 2=1

Figure 7-20
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 319

UNITS
It is important to understand that dimensional values are not the same as mathematical units.
Dimensional values are manufacturing instructions and always include a tolerance, even if the
tolerance value is not stated. Manufacturers use a predefined set of standard dimensions that are
applied to any dimensional value that does not include a written tolerance. Standard tolerance
values differ from organization to organization. Figure 7-21 shows a chart of standard tolerances.
In Figure 7-22 a distance is dimensioned twice: once as 5.50 and a second time as 5.5000.
Mathematically these two values are equal, but they are not the same manufacturing instruction.
The 5.50 value could, for example, have a standard tolerance of .01, whereas the 5.5000 value
could have a standard tolerance of .0005. A tolerance of .0005 is more difficult and, there-
fore, more expensive to manufacture than a tolerance of .01.
Figure 7-23 shows examples of units expressed in millimeters and in decimal inches. A zero
is not required to the left of the decimal point for decimal inch values less than one. Whole-
number millimeter values do not require zeros to the right of the decimal point unless needed to
specify a tolerance. Millimeter and decimal inch values never include symbols; the units will be
defined in the title block of the drawing.

These dimensions are not the same. They

TOLERANCES UNLESS have different tolerance requirements.

OTHERWISE STATED
X ±1
.X ± .1
.xx ± .01
.XXX ± .005
Xº ± 1º
.Xº ± .1º

Figure 7-21 Figure 7-22

Millimeters
0.25 0.5 0.033
32 14.5 3 Zero required

Inches No zero required

.25 .05 .033

32.00 14.50 3.000
Figure 7-23

Exercise 7-7: Preventing a 0 from Appearing to the Left of the Decimal Point
1. Click on the Format heading at the top of the screen, then select the Style and Standard
Editor option.
The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-24.
2. Click the + sign to the left of Dimension, and select Default - mm (ANSI).
3. Select the Units tab.
4. Remove the check mark from the Leading Zero box in the Display area.
This procedure creates a new dimension style that suppresses all leading zeros.
320 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Click here.

Click here. Remove check mark.

Figure 7-24
Exercise 7-8: Changing the Number of Decimal Places in a Dimension Value
1. Click on the Format heading at the top of the screen, then select the Style and Standard
Editor option.
The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-25.
2. Click the + sign to the left of Dimension, and select Default - mm (ANSI).
3. Select the Units tab.
4. Click the scroll arrow on the right side of the Precision box.
A listing of available precision settings will cascade down.
5. Select the desired precision value.
6. Click Save then Done.

Select new Precision.

Click Save then Done.

Figure 7-25

ALIGNED DIMENSIONS
aligned dimension: A dimen- Aligned dimensions are dimensions that are parallel to a slanted edge or surface. They are not hor-
sion that is parallel to a slanted izontal or vertical. The unit values for aligned dimensions should be horizontal or unidirectional.
edge or surface.
Exercise 7-9: Creating an Aligned Dimension
Figure 7-26 shows an orthographic view of a model that includes a slanted surface. The model
was created using the Standard (mm).ipt format, and the orthographic view was created using
the ANSI (mm).idw format. The General Dimension tool was used to add the aligned dimension.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 321

A unidirectional aligned dimension

Click the edge to be dimsensioned.

If an aligned dimension
is not created, right-click
the mouse and select
Dimension Type, Aligned.

Figure 7-26

1. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar by moving the cursor into the panel bar area
and right-clicking the mouse, then select the Drawing Annotation option.
2. Click the General Dimension tool, then move the cursor onto the slanted edge to be di-
mensioned.
The edge will change color, indicating that it has been selected.
3. Left-click the mouse.
4. Move the mouse as necessary to locate the aligned dimension.
See Figure 7-26.

If an aligned dimension is not created, right-click the mouse and select Dimension Type,

TIP Aligned before locating the dimension.

Exercise 7-10: Creating a Unidirectional Aligned Dimension

Aligned dimensions can be made unidirectional by using the Orientation option on the Style
and Standard Editor dialog box.
1. Click on the Format heading at the top of the screen, then select the Style and Standard
Editor tool.
The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-27.

Click here.

Click here.

Click here.

Figure 7-27
322 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

2. Click the + sign to the left of the Dimension listing.

3. Select Default - mm (ANSI).
The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will change.
4. Select the Text tab.
5. Go to the Orientation box and select the Align Dimension: Inline - Horizontal option
as shown.
6. Click the Save box, then click Done.
The aligned text will become unidirectional.

RADIUS AND DIAMETER DIMENSIONS

Figure 7-28 shows an object that includes both fillets and circles. The general rule is to dimen-
sion arcs using a radius dimension, and circles using diameter dimensions. This convention is
consistent with the tooling required to produce the feature shape. Any arc greater than 170° is
considered a circle and is dimensioned using a diameter.

Fillet

Figure 7-28

Exercise 7-11: Creating a Radius Dimension

1. Click the Leader Text tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
2. Click one of the filleted corners and move the cursor away from the corner.
3. Create a short horizontal segment on the leader line.
See Figure 7-29.
Create a short horizontal line segment.

Figure 7-29
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 323

4. Right-click the mouse and select the Continue option.

The Format Text dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-30.
5. Enter R10.00, then click OK.
6. Right-click the mouse and click the Done option.
Figure 7-31 shows the resulting dimension. There are four equal arcs on the object, and they
all must be dimensioned. It would be better to add the words 4 CORNERS to the radius dimen-
sion than to include four radius dimensions.

Enter leader text.

Figure 7-30 Figure 7-31

Exercise 7-12: Adding Text to an Existing Drawing Dimension

1. Move the cursor to the fillet dimension.
Filled colored circles will appear, indicating that the dimension has been selected.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Edit Leader Text option.
The Format Text dialog box will appear with the existing text. See Figure 7-32.
3. Type 4 CORNERS under the existing text and click the OK box.
Figure 7-33 shows the resulting dimension.

New text

Enter new text.

Figure 7-32 Figure 7-33

324 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

DIMENSIONING HOLES
Holes are dimensioned by stating their diameter and depth, if any. Holes that go completely
through an object are defined using only a diameter dimension. See Figure 7-34. The word
THRU may be added if desired.

Figure 7-34

Exercise 7-13: Dimensioning a Through Hole

1. Click the Hole / Thread Notes tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
2. Click the edge of the hole and move the cursor away from the hole, off the surface of the
part.
3. Locate and enter the dimension by checking the left mouse button.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
5. Move the cursor over the hole dimension, right-click the mouse, and select the Edit Hole
Note option.
6. Backspace out the word THRU, then click OK.

The General Dimension tool may also be used.

TIP
Dimensioning Individual Holes
Figure 7-35 shows three different methods that can be used to dimension a hole that does not go
completely through an object. Depth values may be added using the Power Dimensioning dialog
box, or the Edit Text or Edit Format options.
Figure 7-36 shows three methods of dimensioning holes in sectional views. The single line
note version is the preferred method.

Dimensions for holes with depth

Sectional view of holes with depth

Symbol
for depth

Optional

Figure 7-35 Figure 7-36

 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 325

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP7-1

Figure 7-37 shows orthographic views of a model that includes two holes that do not pass through
the model. The dimensions other than the dimensions for the holes are applied using the General
Dimension tool located on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
To dimension the holes:

1. Click the Hole/Thread Notes tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
2. Click the edge of the left hole and move the cursor away from the hole.
3. Locate a position for the hole’s dimension and click the left mouse button.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
5. Repeat the same procedure for the right hole.
Remember that a hole’s depth dimension does not include the conical point at the bottom of
the hole.
See Figure 7-38. Note that the depth symbol is used automatically. The symbol can be edited
if desired.

Symbol for depth

Access the Hole/Thread Notes

tool and click here.

Holes do not pass

completely through.

Figure 7-37 Figure 7-38

Dimensioning Hole Patterns

Figure 7-39 shows two different hole patterns dimensioned. The circular pattern includes the note
Ø10 - 4 HOLES. This note serves to define all four holes within the object.
Figure 7-39 also shows a rectangular object that contains five holes of equal diameter,
equally spaced from one another. The notation 5 × Ø10 specifies 5 holes of 10 diameter. The no-
tation 4 × 20 (=80) means 4 equal spaces of 20. The notation (=80) is a reference dimension and
is included for convenience. Reference dimensions are explained in Chapter 9.
Figure 7-40 shows two additional methods for dimensioning repeating hole patterns. Figure
7-41 shows a circular hole pattern that includes two different hole diameters. The hole diameters
are not noticeably different and could be confused. One group is defined by indicating letter (A);
the other is dimensioned in a normal manner.
326 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Dimensions for
hole patterns

Figure 7-39

Figure 7-40

Figure 7-41

Using Symbols with Dimensions

In an attempt to eliminate language restrictions from drawings, ANSI standards permit the use of
certain symbols for dimensions. Like musical notation that can be universally read by people who
speak different languages, symbolic dimensions can be read by different people regardless of
which language they speak. For example, the symbol Ø replaces the notation DIA.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 327

Figure 7-42 shows a Ø10 hole that has a depth of 15. Inventor will automatically apply sym-
bolic dimensions. The shown dimension is created as follows.
1. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar and click the Hole / Thread Notes tool.
2. Click the edge of the circular view of the hole.
3. Move the cursor away from the hole’s edge and locate the dimension.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Add a depth
Right-click requirement
the dimension. to this dimension.

This is the Click here.

symbol for
depth.

Figure 7-42 Figure 7-43

Exercise 7-14: Adding Symbols to Existing Dimension Text

Figure 7-43 shows an object with a Ø20.00 dimension. Add a depth requirement of 5.00.
1. Right-click the dimension and select the Edit Hole Note option.
The Edit Hole Note dialog box will appear. See Figure 7-44.
2. Click the Insert Symbol box and click the depth symbol.
The depth symbol will appear next to the existing dimension in the Note Format box.
3. Type 5.00, then click OK.
Figure 7-45 shows the resulting dimension.
4. Select a symbol.
5. Click the Save box, then click Done.

Resulting dimension

Insert Symbol box

Click here for symbols

Figure 7-44 Figure 7-45

328 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Drawing symbols can also be accessed using the Style and Standard Editor option.
Click Format at the top of the screen, click the Style and Standard Editor option, click
Dimension, click Default - mm (ANSI), click the Text tab, and click the Insert Symbol

TIP box in the lower right corner of the dialog box. See Figure 7-46.

Click here.
Click here.

Click here.

Click here.
Figure 7-46

DIMENSIONING COUNTERBORED, COUNTERSUNK HOLES

Chapter 6 explained how to draw counterbored and countersunk holes. This section shows how to
dimension countersunk and counterbored holes.
Figure 7-47 shows a 70 × 30 × 20 block that includes both a counterbored and a countersunk
hole. The sizes for the holes were determined based on the fastener information given in Chapter 6.
The Hole dialog boxes used to create the holes are also shown.
The information used to create the holes will automatically be used to create the hole’s di-
mension. Prefixes and suffixes may be added to the dimensions, and the dimension value may be
changed using the Edit Hole Note option. Hole dimension values may also be changed by edit-
ing the hole’s feature value on the original model.

Exercise 7-15: Dimensioning a Counterbored Hole

The counterbored hole has a clear hole that goes completely through the block.
1. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar and click the Hole / Thread Notes tool.
2. Click the edge of the circular view of the hole.
3. Move the cursor away from the hole’s edge and locate the dimension.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
Note how the dimensions match exactly the values used to create the hole. See Figures 7-47
and 7-48.

Exercise 7-16: Dimensioning a Countersunk Hole

The countersunk hole has M8 threads and a thread depth of 10 mm.
1. Create an orthographic view of the model using the ANSI (mm).idw format.
2. Add centerlines.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 329

Enter values.
Click here.

Click here.
Enter values.

Click here. Click here.

Select thread designations.

Figure 7-47

The symbol for depth

The symbol for The symbol for

counterbore countersink

The extra hidden circle

The symbol for represents the thread.
depth of the
counterbore

Figure 7-48

3. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar and click the Hole / Thread Notes tool.
4. Click the edge of the circular view of the hole.
5. Move the cursor away from the hole’s edge and locate the dimension.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
Note how the dimensions match exactly the values used to create the hole.
330 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

ANGULAR DIMENSIONS
Figure 7-49 shows a model that includes a slanted surface. The dimension value is located beyond
the model between two extension lines. Locating dimensions between extension lines is preferred
to locating the value between an extension line and the edge of the model.

Locate the
dimension beyond
the edges of the
model between two
extension lines. Click the slanted line.

Click the short vertical line.

Figure 7-49

Exercise 7-17: Creating an Angular Dimension

1. Create an orthographic view of the model using the ANSI (mm).idw format.
2. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar and click the General Dimension tool.
3. Click the slanted line, then click the short vertical line on the right side of the model.
4. Move the cursor away from the hole’s edge and locate the dimension.
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Avoiding Overdimensioning
Figure 7-50 shows a shape dimensioned using an angular dimension. The shape is completely de-
fined. Any additional dimension would be an error. It is tempting, in an effort to make sure a
shape is completely defined, to add more dimensions, such as a horizontal dimension for the
short horizontal edge at the top of the shape. This dimension is not needed and is considered
double dimensioning.

No dimension here

Figure 7-50
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 331

Figure 7-51 also shows the same front view dimensioned using only linear dimensions. The
choice of whether to use angular or linear dimensions depends on the function of the model and
which distances are more critical.
Figure 7-52 shows an object dimensioned two different ways. The dimensions used in the top
example do not include a dimension for the width of the slot. This dimension is allowed to float,
that is, allowed to accept any tolerance buildup. The dimensions used in the bottom example di-
mension the width of the slot but not the upper right edge. In this example the upper right edge is
allowed to float or accept any tolerance buildup. The choice of which edge to float depends on the
function of the part. If the slot were to interface with a tab on another part, then it would be im-
perative that it be dimensioned and toleranced to match the interfacing part.

Tolerances float here.

There are different ways to

dimension the same model.
Do not include more dimensions Tolerances float here.
than are needed.

No dimension here

Figure 7-51 Figure 7-52

ORDINATE DIMENSIONS
Ordinate dimensions are dimensions based on an X,Y coordinate system. Ordinate dimensions ordinate dimension: A
do not include extension lines, dimension lines, or arrowheads, but simply horizontal and vertical dimension based on an X, Y
leader lines drawn directly from the features of the object. Ordinate dimensions are particularly coordinate system that consists
useful when dimensioning an object that includes many small holes. simply of horizontal and vertical
Figure 7-53 shows a model that is to be dimensioned using ordinate dimensions. Ordinate leader lines.
dimensions values are calculated from the X,Y origin, which, in this example, is the lower left
corner of the front view of the model.

Figure 7-53
332 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Exercise 7-18: Creating Ordinate Dimensions

1. Create an orthographic view of the model using the ANSI (mm).idw format.
2. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar, then click on the Ordinate Dimension Set tool.
See Figure 7-54.
3. Move the cursor into the drawing area and click the lower left corner of the view.
4. Move the cursor away from the corner, right-click the mouse, and select the Continue option.
The number 0.00 will appear. If the number is not unidirectional, use the Style and Standard
Editor command to reorient the dimension. See Figure 7-55.

Start the ordinate

dimensions from
this corner.

Click here to
create ordinate
dimensions.

Figure 7-54 Figure 7-55

5. Right-click the mouse again and select the Make Origin option.
6. Locate the number and left-click the mouse.
7. Click the lower end of the vertical centerline of the first hole and position the dimension
so that it is in line with the first dimension.
See Figure 7-56.
Note how the extension line from the first hole’s centerline curves so that the dimension
value may be located in line with the first dimension. Inventor will automatically align ordinate
dimensions.

Define the horizontal

dimensions.

Figure 7-56
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 333

Define the
vertical
dimensions.

Figure 7-57

8. Add all the vertical dimensions by clicking the vertical centerlines.

Again start with the lower left corner of the model, then click the appropriate horizontal cen-
terlines. See Figure 7-57.

Exercise 7-19: Adding Hole Dimensions

1. Click the Hole / Thread Notes option on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
2. Add the appropriate hole dimensions.
See Figure 7-58.

Add the hole

dimensions.

Figure 7-58
334 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

BASELINE DIMENSIONS
baseline dimensions: A series Baseline dimensions are a series of dimensions that originate from a common baseline or
of dimensions that originate datum line. Baseline dimensions are very useful because they help eliminate the tolerance
from a common baseline or buildup that is associated with chain-type dimensions. The Baseline Dimension tool is a
datum line. flyout of the General Dimension tool located on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar. See
Figure 7-59.

Figure 7-59

Exercise 7-20: Using the Baseline Dimension Tool

See Figure 7-60.
1. Click the Baseline Dimension tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
2. Click the left vertical edge of the model.
3. Click the lower end on each vertical centerline and the right edge vertical line.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Continue option.
5. Move the cursor away from the surface of the part and left-click the mouse to locate the
dimensions.
6. Left-click the mouse again, then right-click the mouse and select the Create option.

If the dimension line spacing is not acceptable, left-click and drag the dimension value to a

TIP new location.

7. Click the Baseline Dimension tool again.

8. Click the bottom horizontal edge line then the left end of the horizontal centerlines.
9. Click the left end of the hole’s horizontal centerline.
10. Move the cursor away from the surface of the part and left-click the mouse to locate the
dimensions.
11. Left-click the mouse again, then right-click the mouse and select the Create option.
12. Add the appropriate centerline.
13. Add the hole diameter dimensions using the Hole / Thread Notes tool.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 335

Click
here

Click the left vertical edge, the lower end of each

vertical centerline, and the right vertical edge.

Press the right mouse button, select the Continue

option, locate the dimensions, left-click the mouse,
right-click again and select the Create option.

Add the vertical

dimensions.

Click here.

Add the hole

dimensions.

Figure 7-60

HOLE TABLES
Inventor will generate hole tables that list holes’ diameters and locations. There are two options:
list all the holes, or list selected holes.
336 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Exercise 7-21: Listing All Holes in a Table

1. Click the Hole Table - Selection tool on the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
2. Select the View option.
See Figure 7-61.

Figure 7-61

3. Move the mouse into the part area and left-click the mouse.
A -shaped cursor will appear.
4. Click on the lower left corner of the model.
This will define the origin for the table’s X and Y values.
5. Move the cursor away from the part area.
A rectangular shape will appear. This rectangular shape represents the size of the dimension
table that will be created.
6. Locate the table and left-click the mouse.
See Figure 7-62.

Inventor automatically assigns different letters

to holes with different diameters.

Origin

Figure 7-62
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 337

LOCATING DIMENSIONS
There are eight general rules concerning the location of dimensions. See Figure 7-63.
1. Locate dimensions near the features they are defining.
2. Do not locate dimensions on the surface of the object.

Locate shorter dimensions closer

to the object than longer ones.

Locate dimensions
near the features they
are defining.

Use the Explode, Erase, and Move

commands to reconstruct and relocate DO NOT LOCATE DIMENSIONS ON
inappropriate dimensions. THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECT.

Align groups of
dimensions.

Locate overall dimensions the

farthest away from the object.
Figure 7-63
338 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

3. Align and group dimensions so that they are neat and easy to understand.
4. Avoid crossing extension lines.
Sometimes it is impossible not to cross extension lines because of the complex shape of the
object, but whenever possible, avoid crossing extension lines.
5. Do not cross dimension lines.
6. Locate shorter dimensions closer to the object than longer ones.
7. Always locate overall dimensions the farthest away from the object.
8. Do not dimension the same distance twice. This is called double dimensioning and will be
discussed in Chapter 8.

FILLETS AND ROUNDS

Fillets and rounds may be dimensioned individually or by a note. In many design situations all the
fillets and rounds are the same size, so a note as shown in Figure 7-64 is used. Any fillets or
rounds that have a different radius from that specified by the note are dimensioned individually.

Figure 7-64

ROUNDED SHAPES—INTERNAL
slot: An internal rounded Internal rounded shapes are called slots. Figure 7-65 shows three different methods for dimen-
shape. sioning slots. The end radii are indicated by the note R - 2 PLACES, but no numerical value is
given. The width of the slot is dimensioned, and it is assumed that the radius of the rounded ends
is exactly half of the stated width.

Figure 7-65
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 339

ROUNDED SHAPES—EXTERNAL
Figure 7-66 shows two shapes with external rounded ends. As with internal rounded shapes, the
end radii are indicated but no value is given. The width of the object is given, and the radius of
the rounded end is assumed to be exactly half of the stated width.

Figure 7-66

The second example shown in Figure 7-66 shows an object dimensioned using the object’s
centerline. This type of dimensioning is done when the distance between the holes is more impor-
tant than the overall length of the object; that is, the tolerance for the distance between the holes
is more exact than the tolerance for the overall length of the object.
The overall length of the object is given as a reference dimension (100). This means the
object will be manufactured based on the other dimensions, and the 100 value will be used only
for reference.
Objects with partially rounded edges should be dimensioned as shown in Figure 7-66. The
radii of the end features are dimensioned. The centerpoint of the radii is implied to be on the
object centerline. The overall dimension is given; it is not referenced unless specific radii values
are included.

IRREGULAR SURFACES
There are three different methods for dimensioning irregular surfaces: tabular, baseline, and
baseline with oblique extension lines. Figure 7-67 shows an irregular surface dimensioned using
the tabular method. An XY axis is defined using the edges of the object. Points are then defined
relative to the XY axis. The points are assigned reference numbers, and the reference numbers
and XY coordinate values are listed in chart form as shown.
Figure 7-68 shows an irregular curve dimensioned using baseline dimensions. The baseline
method references all dimensions to specified baselines. Usually there are two baselines, one
horizontal and one vertical.
340 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Figure 7-67

Figure 7-68

It is considered poor practice to use a centerline as a baseline. Centerlines are imaginary

lines that do not exist on the object and would make it more difficult to manufacture and inspect
the finished objects.
Baseline dimensioning is very common because it helps eliminate tolerance buildup and is
easily adaptable to many manufacturing processes. Inventor has a special Baseline Dimension
command for use in creating baseline dimensions.

POLAR DIMENSIONS
polar dimension: A dimension Polar dimensions are similar to polar coordinates. A location is defined by a radius (distance)
defined by a radius and an and an angle. Figure 7-69 shows an object that includes polar dimensions. The holes are
angle. located on a circular centerline, and their positions from the vertical centerline are specified
using angles.
Figure 7-70 shows an example of a hole pattern dimensioned using polar dimensions.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 341

Figure 7-69 Figure 7-70

CHAMFERS
Chamfers are angular cuts made on the edges of objects. They are usually used to make it easier chamfer: An angular cut made
to fit two parts together. They are most often made at 45° angles but may be made at any angle. on the edge of an object.
Figure 7-71 shows two objects with chamfers between surfaces 90° apart and two examples
between surfaces that are not 90° apart. Either of the two types of dimensions shown for the
45° dimension may be used. If an angle other than 45° is used, the angle and setback distance
must be specified.
Figure 7-72 shows two examples of internal chamfers. Both define the chamfer using an an-
gle and diameter. Internal chamfers are very similar to countersunk holes.

Figure 7-71 Figure 7-72

knurl: A series of small ridges

on a metal surface used to
KNURLING make it easier to grip a shaft,
or to roughen a surface before
There are two types of knurls: diamond and straight. Knurls are used to make it easier to grip a it is used in a press fit; may be
shaft, or to roughen a surface before it is used in a press fit. diamond or straight.
342 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Knurls are defined by their pitch and diameter. See Figure 7-73. The pitch of a knurl is the
ratio of the number of grooves on the circumference to the diameter. Standard knurling tools
sized to a variety of pitch sizes are used to manufacture knurls for both English and metric units.
Diamond knurls may be represented by a double hatched pattern or by an open area with notes.
The Hatch command is used to draw the double hatched lines. Straight knurls may be represented by
straight lines in the pattern shown or by an open area with notes. The straight-line pattern is created
by projecting lines from a construction circle. The construction points are evenly spaced on the circle.

Figure 7-73

KEYS AND KEYSEATS

key: A small piece of material Keys are small pieces of material used to transmit power. For example, Figure 7-74 shows how a
used to transmit power, such key can be fitted between a shaft and a gear so that the rotary motion of the shaft can be transmit-
as rotary motion from a shaft ted to the gear.
to a gear. There are many different styles of keys. See the keys listed on the Content Center under
keyseat: A groove into which a Shaft Parts. The key shown in Figure 7-74 has a rectangular cross section and is called a square
key fits; also called keyway. key. Keys fit into grooves called keyseats or keyways.
Keyways are dimensioned from the bottom of the shaft or hole as shown.

Figure 7-74
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 343

SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Symbols are used in dimensioning to help accurately display the meaning of the dimension. Sym-
bols also help eliminate language barriers when reading drawings. Figure 7-75 shows a list of di-
mensioning symbols available on the Style and Standard Editor dialog box under the Notes
and Leaders tab. How to apply symbols to dimensions was explained earlier in the chapter.
Abbreviations should be used very carefully on drawings. Whenever possible, write out the
full word including correct punctuation. Figure 7-76 shows several standard abbreviations used
on technical drawings.

AL = Aluminum
C'BORE = Counterbore
CRS = Cold Rolled Steel
CSK = Countersink
DIA = Diameter
EQ = Equal
HEX = Hexagon
MAT'L = Material
R= Radius
SAE = Society of Automotive
Engineers
SFACE = Spotface
ST = Steel
SQ = Square
Available REQD = Required
symbols

Figure 7-75 Figure 7-76

SYMMETRICAL AND CENTERLINE SYMBOLS

An object is symmetrical about an axis when one side is an exact mirror image of the other.
Figure 7-77 shows a symmetrical object. The two short parallel lines symbol or the note OBJECT
IS SYMMETRICAL ABOUT THIS AXIS (centerline) may be used to designate symmetry.

Figure 7-77
344 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

If an object is symmetrical, only half the object need be dimensioned. The other dimensions
are implied by the symmetry note or symbol.
Centerlines are slightly different from the axis of symmetry. An object may or may not be
symmetrical about its centerline. See Figure 7-77. Centerlines are used to define the center of
both individual features and entire objects. Use the centerline symbol when a line is a centerline,
but do not use it in place of the symmetry symbol.

DIMENSIONING TO A POINT
Curved surfaces can be dimensioned using theoretical points. See Figure 7-78. There should be a
small gap between the surface of the object and the lines used to define the theoretical point. The
point should be defined by the intersection of at least two lines.
There should also be a small gap between the extension lines and the theoretical point used
to locate the point.

Figure 7-78

DIMENSIONING SECTIONAL VIEWS

Sectional views are dimensioned, as are orthographic views. See Figure 7-79. The sectional lines
should be drawn at an angle that allows the viewer to clearly distinguish between the sectional
lines and the extension lines.

Figure 7-79
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 345

DIMENSIONING ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS

Dimensions should be added to orthographic views where the features appear in contour. Holes
should be dimensioned in their circular views. Figure 7-80 shows three views of an object that has
been dimensioned.

Figure 7-80

The hole dimensions are added to the top view, where the hole appears circular. The slot is
also dimensioned in the top view because it appears in contour. The slanted surface is dimen-
sioned in the front view.
The height of surface A is given in the side view rather than run along extension lines across the
front view. The length of surface A is given in the front view. This is a contour view of the surface.
It is considered good practice to keep dimensions in groups. This makes it easier for the
viewer to find dimensions.
Be careful not to double-dimension a distance. A distance should be dimensioned only once.
If a 30 dimension were added above the 25 dimension on the right-side view, it would be an er-
ror. The distance would be double-dimensioned: once with the 25 + 30 dimension and again with
the 55 overall dimension. The 25 + 30 dimensions are mathematically equal to the 55 overall di-
mension, but there is a distinct difference in how they affect the manufacturing tolerances. Dou-
ble dimensions are explained more fully in Chapter 8.

Dimensions Using Centerlines

Figure 7-81 shows an object dimensioned from its centerline. This type of dimensioning is used
when the distance between the holes relative to each other is critical.

Figure 7-81
346 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

3D DIMENSIONS
Inventor 2009 can be used to create dimensions on a three-dimensional object. Figure 7-82 shows
an object drawn using the ANSI (mm).idw format. The drawing shows a front orthographic view
of the object and an isometric view project from the front view. Figure 7-83 shows the isometric
view dimensioned. The General Dimension tool was used to create the 3D dimensions. The pro-
cedure for creating 3D dimensions is the same as for 2D dimensioning.

Isometric
view

Front orthographic view

Figure 7-82

Reference dimension

A dimensional
isometric view

Figure 7-83

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP7-2

Figure 7-84 shows a shape that is to be dimensioned. All dimensions are in inches. The object
is .50 thick.
The general procedure for applying dimensions is to start from the center of the shape and
work out.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 347

Shape to be dimensioned

Dimension the internal

shapes first.

Keep dimension
line aligned.

Use the Leader Text tool.

Figure 7-84
348 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Locate the overall dimension

the farthest from the part.

Use the Chamfer

Note tool.

Use the Hole / Thread Notes tool.

Figure 7-84 (Continued)

For example, in this example the hole and cutout are dimensioned first. The leader line for
the hole is placed last, as it can located in many different positions to avoid existing extension and
dimension lines.
1. Dimension the rectangular cutout.
Click the left edge line first to assure that the .50 dimension is on the outside left of the
extension lines.
2. Dimension the hole’s location.

Every hole requires three dimensions: two for location and one for diameter.

TIP
3. Dimension the circular cutout.
Use the Leader Text tool.
4. Add the overall dimensions.
Locate the overall dimensions so that there is an open area for the chamfer note and the hole’s
diameter.
5. Use the Chamfer Note tool and dimension the chamfers.
6. Edit the chamfer note to include 2 PLACES.
7. Use the Hole / Thread Notes tool to dimension the hole’s diameter.
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 349

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP7-3

Figure 7-85 shows a shape to be dimensioned. All dimensions are in millimeters. The object is
10 thick.
The shape is unusual in that one end is rounded. It is difficult to create an overall dimen-
sion to a rounded surface. There are tolerances in both the shape of the circular end (how
round it is) and in the location of the arc’s center point. It this example a reference dimension
will be used.
Note that the shape is symmetrical about its horizontal centerline. A symmetrical shape is
one that is exactly the same on both sides of a centerline.
1. Define the object as symmetrical about its horizontal centerline by adding the symbol for
symmetry.
The symbol for symmetry is created using the Text tool.
2. Use the Baseline Dimension tool and dimension the cutouts along the top edge of
the part.

Dimension this shape.

Indicates symmetry

Use the Baseline

Dimension tool.

Figure 7-85
350 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Dimension the
internal slot.

Indicates a reference dimension

Add fillet note.

Figure 7-85 (Continued)

 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 351

Note that the 5.00 depth was located along the bottom edge of the part. This was done to allow
space for the internal slot’s dimensions.
3. Dimension the internal slot.
Position the dimension values so that they do not interfere with other dimensions.
4. Use the Hole / Thread Notes tool and dimension the hole.
5. Use the Leader tool and add the radius for the rounded end.
The R30 dimension defines the width of the part, so no other dimension is needed.
6. Add overall reference dimensions for the length and width.
Reference dimensions are indicated by parentheses. Reference dimensions are not to be used
for manufacture or inspection. There are included on a drawing for convenience.
7. Use the Text tool and add a note defining the fillet size for the internal slot.
There are several different ways to dimension the shape shown in Figure 7-85. Consider
chain dimensions or ordinate dimensions as other two possible methods.

SUMMARY
This chapter explained how to dimension object with different were discussed, including the use of leading zeros with deci-
shapes and features. It presented the ANSI standards and con- mal notation and the appropriate use of numbers of decimal
ventions and showed how to dimension different shapes and places in a dimensional value. Dimensioning of sectional and
features, including various types of holes, slanted surfaces, orthographic views was also illustrated.
fillets and rounds. Drawing scales and dimensional values

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. When dimensions are drawn, lines that have gaps for 5. Which of the following is not a type of knurl?
numerical values that end with arrowheads are called a. Crosshatch
a. Centerlines b. Diamond
b. Extension lines c. Straight
c. Dimension lines d. Raised diamond
d. Leader lines 6. A drawing scale designation of 2  1 indicates that the
2. When dimensions are drawn, lines that project away from shape on the drawing is related how to the actual part?
the surface of the part are called a. The shape is twice as big
a. Centerlines b. The shape is the same size
b. Extension lines c. The shape is half the size
c. Dimension lines 7. To edit a center mark’s size
d. Leader lines
a. Use the Feature Control frame option on the Style
3. When dimensions are drawn, lines used to define hole and Standard Editor dialog box
diameters are called b. Use the Dimension option on the Style and Standard
a. Centerlines Editor dialog box
b. Extension lines c. Use the Center Mark option on the Style and Stan-
c. Dimension lines dard Editor dialog box
d. Leader lines 8. Dimensions created using the ANSI standards have deci-
4. Polar dimensions are created using mal points (5.25). Dimensions created using the ISO
a. Two linear dimensions standards use
b. A linear and an angular dimension a. Decimal points
c. Two angular dimensions b. Commas
c. Semicolons
d. En dashes
 352 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

9. Dimensions that define straight distances are called 10. The rule for crossing extension lines states that it
a. Linear dimensions a. Is recommended
b. Angular dimensions b. Should be avoided
c. Horizontal dimensions c. Is never allowed

Matching
Figure 7-86 shows a dimensioned object. Match the numbers with the type of dimension.

Column A Column B
a. The symbol for countersink
b. Indicates that the hole goes completely through the part
c. The inclusive angle for the countersink
d. An overall dimension
e. Indicates the number of Ø9 holes on the part
f. A chain dimension

True or False
1. True or False: Dimensions are located on a drawing in 3. True or False: Dimensions may be located on the surface
compliance with ANSI standards. of a part.
2. True or False: Model dimensions are used to construct a 4. True or False: Dimensions are added to an ANSI.idw draw-
shape but do not appear on the ANSI.idw drawing. ing using the General Dimension tool located on the
Drawing Annotation Panel bar.

Figure 7-86
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 353

5. True or False: All dimensional values must be located us- 8. True or False: Metric dimensions that are less than 1.00
ing the unidirectional format. require a 0 to the left of the decimal point.
6. True or False: To edit an existing hole dimension, right- 9. True or False: Aligned dimensions must be written using
click the dimension and select the Edit Hole Note the unidirectional format.
option. 10. True or False: A counterbored hole is best dimensioned
7. True or False: Inch dimensions that are less than 1.00 re- using a note.
quire a 0 to the left of the decimal point.

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 7-1:
Measure and redraw the shapes in Figures P7-1 through P7-18. The
dotted grid background has either .50-in. or 10-mm spacing. All holes
are through holes. Specify the units and scale of the drawing. Create a
model by using the Extrude tool. Create a set of multiviews (front,
top, side, and isometric views) using the .idw format and add the ap-
propriate dimensions.
A. Measure using millimeters.
B. Measure using inches.
All dimensions are within either .25 in. or 5 mm. All fillets and
rounds are R.50 in., R.25 in. or R10 mm, R5 mm.

THICKNESS:
40 mm
1.50 in.

Figure P7-1

THICKNESS:
20 mm
.75 in.

Figure P7-2
 354 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

THICKNESS: THICKNESS:
35 mm 15 mm
1.25 in. .50 in.
Figure P7-3 Figure P7-4

THICKNESS: THICKNESS:
10 mm 5 mm
.50 in. .25 in.
Figure P7-5 Figure P7-6
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 355

THICKNESS:
10 mm
.25 in.
Figure P7-7

THICKNESS:
8 mm
.25 in.

Figure P7-8

THICKNESS:
20 mm
.75 in. Figure P7-9
 356 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

THICKNESS:
16 mm
.375 in.

Figure P7-10

THICKNESS:
THICKNESS:
20 mm
30 mm
.75 in.
1.375 in.

Figure P7-11 Figure P7-12

 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 357

THICKNESS:
12 mm
.30 in.

Figure P7-13

THICKNESS:
5 mm
.125 in.

Figure P7-14
358 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

THICKNESS:
10 mm
.25 in.
Dimension using
baseline dimensions.

Figure P7-15

THICKNESS:
15 mm
.50 in.
Dimension using
A. Baseline dimensions.
B. Ordinate dimensions.
C. Chain dimensions.
D. Hole table.

Figure P7-16
 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 359

THICKNESS:
5 mm
.19 in.

Figure P7-17

THICKNESS:
15 mm
.625 in.

Figure P7-18
 360 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Project 7-2:
Draw models of the objects shown in Figures P7-19 through P7-40.
1. Create orthographic views of the objects. Dimension the or-
thographic views.
2. Create 3D models of the objects. Dimension the 3D models.

Figure P7-19 MILLIMETERS Figure P7-20 MILLIMETERS

Figure P7-21 INCHES Figure P7-22 MILLIMETERS

Figure P7-23 MILLIMETERS Figure P7-24 INCHES

 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 361

Figure P7-25 MILLIMETERS

Figure P7-26 INCHES

Figure P7-27 MILLIMETERS

Figure P7-28 INCHES

 362 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Figure P7-29 MILLIMETERS Figure P7-30 MILLIMETERS

Figure P7-31 INCHES Figure P7-32 MILLIMETERS

Figure P7-33 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 363

Figure P7-34 MILLIMETERS

Figure P7-35 MILLIMETERS

364 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Figure P7-36 MILLIMETERS

Project 7-3:
1. Draw a 3D model from the given top orthographic and sec-
tional views in Figure P7-37.
2. Draw a top orthographic view and a sectional view of the ob-
ject and add dimensions.

Figure P7-37 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing 365

Project 7-4:
1. Draw a 3D model from the given top orthographic and sec-
tional views in Figure P7-38.
2. Draw a top orthographic view and a sectional view of the ob-
ject and add dimensions.

Figure P7-38 MILLIMETERS

Project 7-5:
1. Draw a 3D model from the given top orthographic and sec-
tional views in Figure P7-39.
2. Draw a top orthographic view and a sectional view of the ob-
ject and add dimensions.

Figure P7-39 INCHES

366 Chapter 7 Dimensioning a Drawing

Project 7-6:
1. Draw a 3D model from the given top orthographic and sec-
tional views in Figure P7-40.
2. Draw a top orthographic view and a sectional view of the ob-
ject and add dimensions.

Figure P7-40 INCHES

Tolerancing 8
Chapter
Objectives
• Understand tolerance conventions.
• Understand the meaning of tolerances.
• Understand how to apply tolerances.
• Understand geometric tolerances.
• Understand positional tolerances.

INTRODUCTION
Tolerances define the manufacturing limits for dimensions. All dimensions have tolerances tolerance: The manufacturing
either written directly on the drawing as part of the dimension or implied by a predefined set of limits for dimensions.
standard tolerances that apply to any dimension that does not have a stated tolerance.
This chapter explains general tolerance conventions and how they are applied using Inven-
tor. It includes a sample tolerance study and an explanation of standard fits and surface finishes.

DIRECT TOLERANCE METHODS

There are two methods used to include tolerances as part of a dimension: plus and minus, and bilateral tolerance: A toler-
limits. Plus and minus tolerances can be expressed in either bilateral (deviation) or unilateral ance with both a plus and
(symmetric) form. a minus value.
A bilateral tolerance has both a plus and a minus value, whereas a unilateral tolerance has unilateral tolerance: A toler-
either the plus or the minus value equal to 0. Figure 8-1 shows a horizontal dimension of 60 mm ance with either the plus or
that includes a bilateral tolerance of plus or minus 1 and another dimension of 60.00 mm that the minus value.

Note:
Bilatera
lt
Symme olerance are ca
tr
eral tole ic in inventor. d
lle
rances Unilat-
deviat are call
ion . ed

Figure 8-1
368 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

includes a bilateral tolerance of plus 0.20 or minus 0.10. Figure 8-1 also shows a dimension of 65
mm that includes a unilateral tolerance of plus 1 or minus 0.
Plus or minus tolerances define a range for manufacturing. If inspection shows that all di-
mensioned distances on an object fall within their specified tolerance range, the object is consid-
ered acceptable; that is, it has been manufactured correctly.
The dimension and tolerance of 60 0.1 means that the part must be manufactured within a
range no greater than 60.1 nor less than 59.9. The dimension and tolerance 65  1, -0 defines
the tolerance range as 65.0 to 66.0.
Figure 8-2 shows some bilateral and unilateral tolerances applied using decimal inch values.
Inch dimensions and tolerances are written using a slightly different format than millimeter di-
mensions and tolerances, but they also define manufacturing ranges for dimension values. The
horizontal bilateral dimension and tolerance 2.50± .02 defines the longest acceptable distance as
2.52 in. and the shortest as 2.48. The unilateral dimension 2.50  .02 -.00 defines the longest ac-
ceptable distance as 2.52 and the shortest as 2.50.

Figure 8-2

TOLERANCE EXPRESSIONS
Dimension and tolerance values are written differently for inch and millimeter values. See Figure 8-3.
Unilateral dimensions for millimeter values specify a zero limit with a single 0. A zero limit for inch
values must include the same number of decimal places given for the dimension value. In the exam-
ple shown in Figure 8-3, the dimension value .500 has a unilateral tolerance with minus zero tolerance.
The zero limit is written as .000, three decimal places for both the dimension and the tolerance.
Both values in a bilateral tolerance for inch values must contain the same number of decimal
places; for millimeter values the tolerance values need not include the same number of decimal
places as the dimension value. In Figure 8-3 the dimension value 32 is accompanied by tolerances
of 0.25 and -0.10. This form is not acceptable for inch dimensions and tolerances. An equiva-
lent inch dimension and tolerance would be written 32.00  .25/-.10.

Figure 8-3
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 369

Degree values must include the same number of decimal places in both the dimension value
and the tolerance values for bilateral tolerances. A single 0 may be used for unilateral tolerances.

UNDERSTANDING PLUS AND MINUS TOLERANCES

A millimeter dimension and tolerance of 12.0 0.2/-0.1 means the longest acceptable distance
is 12.2000 ... 0, and the shortest is 11.9000 ... 0. The total range is 0.3000 ... 0.
After an object is manufactured, it is inspected to ensure that the object has been manufac-
tured correctly. Each dimensioned distance is measured and, if it is within the specified tolerance,
is accepted. If the measured distance is not within the specified tolerance, the part is rejected.
Some rejected objects may be reworked to bring them into the specified tolerance range, whereas
others are simply scrapped.
Figure 8-4 shows a dimension with a tolerance. Assume that five objects were manufactured
using the same 12.0 0.2/-0.1 dimension and tolerance. The objects were then inspected and the
results were as listed. Inspected measurements are usually expressed to at least one more decimal
place than that specified in the tolerance. Which objects are acceptable and which are not? Ob-
ject 3 is too long and object 5 is too short because their measured distances are not within the
specified tolerances.
Figure 8-5 shows a dimension and tolerance of 3.50 ±.02 in. Object 3 is not acceptable be-
cause it is too short, and object 4 is too long.

Figure 8-4 Figure 8-5

CREATING PLUS AND MINUS TOLERANCES

Plus and minus tolerances may be created using Inventor using the Tolerance option associated
with existing dimensions, or by setting the plus and minus values using the Dimension Styles tool.
Create a drawing using the Metric tab and the ANSI (mm).ipt format. See Figure 8-6. Di-
mension the drawing.

Figure 8-6
370 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Exercise 8-1: Creating Plus and Minus Tolerances

1. Click the 30.00 dimension.
The dimension will change colors.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Edit option.
See Figure 8-7. The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-8.

Right-click the
dimension.

Right-click.

Click here.

Figure 8-7

Click tab

Figure 8-8

3. Click the Precision and Tolerance tab.

The Edit Dimension dialog box will change. See Figure 8-9.
4. Select the Symmetric option and enter an upper value of 0.20. Click OK.
Figure 8-10 shows the resulting symmetric tolerances.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 371

Select Symmetric

Enter value

Figure 8-9

Symmetric tolerance

Figure 8-10

Exercise 8-2: Creating Plus and Minus Tolerances Using Styles Editor
1. Click the Format heading at the top of the screen and select the Style and Standard Ed-
itor option.
The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-11.
2. Click the + sign to the left of the Dimension listing.

Click here
Click here

Click here Select method

Enter value

Figure 8-11
372 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

3. Select the appropriate standard.

The Style and Standard Editor dialog box will change.
4. Select the Tolerance tab.
See Figure 8-11.
5. Select the Symmetric Method.
6. Set the Upper tolerance value for 0.03.
Note:
Note th
at
Inventor will automatically make this a  toleranc all dimensions
ed. are
tolerance.
7. Click Save, then Close.
Figure 8-12 shows the resulting tolerances. Note that all
dimensions, except the hole value, have been changed to include a ±0.03 toler-
ance. Standard tolerances will be discussed later in the chapter.

Symmetric tolerance

This tolerance
did not change.

Figure 8-12

Exercise 8-3: Creating Unequal Plus and Minus Tolerances

1. Click on the dimension to be toleranced.
Circles will appear on the dimension, indicating that it has been selected.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Edit option.
The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-13.
3. Click the Precision and Tolerance tab and select the Deviation option, then set the
Upper value for 0.01 and the Lower value for 0.02.
4. Click OK.
Figure 8-13 shows the dimension with the unequal tolerances assigned.

LIMIT TOLERANCES
Figure 8-14 shows examples of limit tolerances. Limit tolerances replace dimension values. Two
values are given: the upper and lower limits for the dimension value. The limit tolerance 62.1 and
61.9 is mathematically equal to 62 ± 0.1, but the stated limit tolerance is considered easier to read
and understand.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 373

Dimensions with Circles indicate that the

deviation tolerance dimensions have been
selected.

Enter
values
here.

Figure 8-13

Figure 8-14

Limit tolerances define a range for manufacture. Final distances on an object must fall
within the specified range to be acceptable.

Exercise 8-4: Creating Limit Tolerances

1. Click on the dimension to be toleranced, right-click the mouse, and select the Edit option.
2. Click the Precision and Tolerance tab.
3. Select the Limits-Stacked option, then set the Upper value for 30.03 and the Lower
value for 29.96.
4. Click OK.
Figure 8-15 shows the dimension with a limit tolerance assigned.
374 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Limit tolerance

Enter
values here.

Figure 8-15

ANGULAR TOLERANCES
Figure 8-16 shows an example of an angular dimension with a symmetric tolerance. The procedures
explained for applying different types of tolerances to linear dimensions also apply to angular
dimensions.

Figure 8-16

Exercise 8-5: Creating Angular Tolerances

Figure 8-17 shows a model with a slanted surface. The model has been dimensioned, but no tol-
erances have been assigned. This example will assign a stacked limits tolerance to the angular
dimension.
1. Click the angular dimension, right-click, and select the Edit option.
The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear.
2. Click the Precision and Tolerance tab.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 375

Angular dimension Stacked limit

tolerance

Change the
precision.

Figure 8-17

3. Change the precision of both the Unit and Tolerance to 2 places (0.00).
4. Select the Limits-Stacked option and set the upper and lower values for the tolerance.
5. Click OK.
Angular tolerances also can be assigned using the Dimension Styles tool. Figure 8-18
shows the Style and Standard Editor dialog box. Click the Format heading at the top of the
screen, then click the Style Standard Editor option.

Click here.
Click here.

Click here. Select method.

Enter value.

Figure 8-18
376 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Remember that if values are defined using the Style and Standard Editor, all angular di-

TIP mensions will have the assigned tolerance.

STANDARD TOLERANCES
Most manufacturers establish a set of standard tolerances that are applied to any dimension that
does not include a specific tolerance. Figure 8-19 shows some possible standard tolerances. Stan-
dard tolerances vary from company to company. Standard tolerances are usually listed on the first
page of a drawing to the left of the title block, but this location may vary.
The X value used when specifying standard tolerances means any X stated in that format. A
dimension value of 52.00 would have an implied tolerance of ±.01 because the stated standard
tolerance is .XX. ± 01, so any dimension value with two decimal places has a standard implied
tolerance of ±.01. A dimension value of 52.000 would have an implied tolerance of ±.001.

Means that a dimension

of 52.00 has an implied
tolerance of ± .01 or
52.00 ± .01.

Standard tolerance
blocks are usually located Title block
next to the title block.
Figure 8-19

DOUBLE DIMENSIONING
double dimensioning: An It is an error to dimension the same distance twice. This mistake is called double dimensioning.
error in which the same Double dimensioning is an error because it does not allow for tolerance buildup across a distance.
distance is dimensioned twice. Figure 8-20 shows an object that has been dimensioned twice across its horizontal length,
once using three 30-mm dimensions and a second time using the 90-mm overall dimension. The
two dimensions are mathematically equal but are not equal when tolerances are considered. As-
sume that each dimension has a standard tolerance of ±1 mm. The three 30-mm dimensions could
create an acceptable distance of 90 ± 3 mm, or a maximum
distance of 93 and a minimum distance of 87. The overall di-
mension of 90 mm allows a maximum distance of 91 and a Note:
minimum distance of 89. The two dimensions yield different
Never dim
results when tolerances are considered. e
tance twic nsion the same d
The size and location of a tolerance depends on the de- e. is-
sign objectives of the object, how it will be manufactured,
and how it will be inspected. Even objects that have similar
shapes may be dimensioned and toleranced very differently.
One possible solution to the double dimensioning shown in Figure 8-20 is to remove one of the
30-mm dimensions and allow that distance to “float,” that is, absorb the cumulated tolerances. The
choice of which 30-mm dimension to eliminate depends on the design objectives of the part. For
this example the far-right dimension was eliminated to remove the double-dimensioning error.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 377

Figure 8-20

Another possible solution to the double-dimensioning error is to retain the three 30-mm
dimensions and to change the 90-mm overall dimension to a reference dimension. A refer-
ence dimension is used only for mathematical convenience. It is not used during the manu-
facturing or inspection process. A reference dimension is designated on a drawing using
parentheses: (90).
If the 90-mm dimension was referenced, then only the three 30-mm dimensions would
be used to manufacture and inspect the object. This would eliminate the double-dimensioning
error.

CHAIN DIMENSIONS AND BASELINE DIMENSIONS

There are two systems for applying dimensions and tolerances to a drawing: chain and baseline.
Figure 8-21 shows examples of both systems. Chain dimensions dimension each feature to the chain dimension: A dimen-
feature next to it. Baseline dimensions dimension all features from a single baseline or datum. sion in which each feature is
Chain and baseline dimensions may be used together. Figure 8-21 also shows two objects dimensioned to the feature
with repetitive features; one object includes two slots, and the other, three sets of three holes. In next to it.
each example, the center of the repetitive feature is dimensioned to the left side of the object, baseline dimension: A di-
which serves as a baseline. The sizes of the individual features are dimensioned using chain di- mension in which all features
mensions referenced to centerlines. are dimensioned from a single
Baseline dimensions eliminate tolerance buildup and can be related directly to the reference baseline or datum.
axis of many machines. They tend to take up much more area on a drawing than do chain
dimensions.
Chain dimensions are useful in relating one feature to another, such as the repetitive hole pat-
tern shown in Figure 8-21. In this example the distance between the holes is more important than
the individual hole’s distance from the baseline.
Figure 8-22 shows the same object dimensioned twice, once using chain dimensions and
once using baseline dimensions. All distances are assigned a tolerance range of 2 mm, stated us-
ing limit tolerances. The maximum distance for surface A is 28 mm using the chain system and
27 mm using the baseline system. The 1-mm difference comes from the elimination of the first
26–24 limit dimension found on the chain example but not on the baseline.
The total tolerance difference is 6 mm for the chain and 4 mm for the baseline. The baseline
reduces the tolerance variations for the object simply because it applies the tolerances and dimen-
sions differently. So why not always use baseline dimensions? For most applications, the baseline
system is probably better, but if the distance between the individual features is more critical than
the distance from the feature to the baseline, use the chain system.
378 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure 8-21

Figure 8-22

Baseline Dimensions Created Using Inventor

See Figure 8-23. See also Chapter 7.
Note in the example of baseline dimensioning shown in Figure 8-23 that each dimension is
independent of the other. This means that if one of the dimensions is manufactured incorrectly, it
will not affect the other dimensions.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 379

Figure 8-23

TOLERANCE STUDIES
The term tolerance study is used when analyzing the effects of a group of tolerances on one another tolerance study: An analysis
and on an object. Figure 8-24 shows an object with two horizontal dimensions. The horizontal dis- of the effects of a group of
tance A is not dimensioned. Its length depends on the tolerances of the two horizontal dimensions. tolerances on one another and
on an object.

Figure 8-24

Calculating the Maximum Length of A

Distance A will be longest when the overall distance is at its longest and the other distance is at
its shortest.
65.2
29.8
35.4
380 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Calculating the Minimum Length of A

Distance A will be shortest when the overall length is at its shortest and the other length is at its
longest.
64.9
30.1
34.8

Note:
The hole
RECTANGULAR DIMENSIONS loc
using pola ations can also be
r dimens defined
ions.
Figure 8-25 shows an example of rectangular dimen-
sions referenced to baselines. Figure 8-26 shows a cir-
cular object on which dimensions are referenced to a
circle’s centerlines. Dimensioning to a circle’s center-
line is critical to accurate hole location.

An example of rectangular
coordinate dimensions.
Figure 8-25 Figure 8-26

HOLE LOCATIONS
When rectangular dimensions are used, the location of a hole’s center point is defined by two lin-
ear dimensions. The result is a rectangular tolerance zone whose size is based on the linear di-
mension’s tolerances. The shape of the center point’s tolerance zone may be changed to circular
using positioning tolerancing as described later in the chapter.
Figure 8-27 shows the location and size dimensions for a hole. Also shown are the resulting
tolerance zone and the overall possible hole shape. The center point’s tolerance is .2 by .3 based
on the given linear locating tolerances.
The hole diameter has a tolerance of ±.05. This value must be added to the center point loca-
tion tolerances to define the maximum overall possible shape of the hole. The maximum possible
hole shape is determined by drawing the maximum radius from the four corner points of the tol-
erance zone.
This means that the left edge of the hole could be as close to the vertical baseline as 12.75 or
as far as 13.25. The 12.75 value was derived by subtracting the maximum hole diameter value
12.05 from the minimum linear distance 24.80 (24.80 - 12.05  12.75). The 13.25 value was de-
rived by subtracting the minimum hole diameter 11.95 from the maximum linear distance 25.20
(25.20 - 11.95  13.25).
Figure 8-28 shows a hole’s tolerance zone based on polar dimensions. The zone has a sector
shape, and the possible hole shape is determined by locating the maximum radius at the four cor-
ner points of the tolerance zone.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 381

Figure 8-27

Figure 8-28

CHOOSING A SHAFT FOR A TOLERANCED HOLE

Given the hole location and size shown in Figure 8-27, what is the largest diameter shaft that will
always fit into the hole?
Figure 8-29 shows the hole’s center point tolerance zone based on the given linear locating tol-
erances. Four circles have been drawn centered at the four corners on the linear tolerance zone that
represent the smallest possible hole diameter. The circles define an area that represents the maxi-
mum shaft size that will always fit into the hole, regardless of how the given dimensions are applied.

Figure 8-29
382 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

The diameter size of this circular area can be calculated by subtracting the maximum
diagonal distance across the linear tolerance zone (corner to corner) from the minimum hole
diameter.
The results can be expressed as a formula.

For Linear Dimensions and Tolerances

Smax  Hmin  DTZ
where
Smax  maximum shaft diameter
Hmin  minimum hole diamter
DTZ  diagonal distance across the tolerance zone
In the example shown the diagonal distance is determined using the Pythagorean theorem:
DTZ  21.42 2  1.62 2
 2.16  .36
DTZ  .72
This means that the maximum shaft diameter that will always fit into the given hole is 11.23.
Smax  Hmin  DTZ
 11.95  .72
Smax  11.23
This procedure represents a restricted application of the
general formula presented later in the chapter for positioning Note:
tolerances. Linear t
Once the maximum shaft size has been established, a olerance
square s
tolerance can be applied to the shaft. If the shaft had a total or recta generate a
zone. ngular t
tolerance of .25, the minimum shaft diameter would be olerance
11.23 - .25, or 10.98. Figure 8-29 shows a shaft dimen-
sioned and toleranced using these values.
The formula presented is based on the assumption
that the shaft is perfectly placed on the hole’s center point.
This assumption is reasonable if two objects are joined by a fastener and
both objects are free to move. When both objects are free to move about a common fas-
floating objects: Objects tener, they are called floating objects.
that are free to move about a
common fastener.

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP8-1

Parts A and B in Figure 8-30 are to be joined by a common shaft. The total tolerance for the shaft
is to be .05. What are the maximum and minimum shaft diameters?
Both objects have the same dimensions and tolerances and are floating relative to each
other.
Smax  Hmin  DTZ
 15.93  .85
Smax  15.08
The shaft’s minimum diameter is found by subtracting the total tolerance requirement from
the calculated maximum diameter:
15.08  .05  15.03
Therefore,
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 383

Figure 8-30

Shaft max  15.08

Shaft min  15.03

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP8-2

The procedure presented in Sample Problem SP8-1 can be worked in reverse to determine the
maximum and minimum hole size based on a given shaft size.
Objects AA and BB as shown in Figure 8-31 are to be joined using a bolt whose maximum
diameter is .248. What is the minimum hole size for objects that will always accept the bolt? What
is the maximum hole size if the total hole tolerance is .005?
Smax  Hmin  DZT
In this example Hmin is the unknown factor, so the equation is rewritten as
Hmin  Smax  DZT
 .248  .010
Hmin  2.58
This is the minimum hole diameter, so the total tolerance requirement is added to this value:
.258  .005  .263
Therefore,
Hole max  .263
Hole min  .258

Figure 8-31
384 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

NOMINAL SIZES
nominal size: The approxi- The term nominal refers to the approximate size of an object that matches a common fraction or
mate size of an object that whole number. A shaft with a dimension of 1.500+.003 is said to have a nominal size of “one and
matches a common fraction or a half inches.” A dimension of 1.500+.000/-.005 is still said to have a nominal size of one and a
whole number. half inches. In both examples 1.5 is the closest common fraction.

STANDARD FITS (METRIC VALUES)

Calculating tolerances between holes and shafts that fit together is so common in engineering de-
sign that a group of standard values and notations has been established. These values may be cal-
culated using the Limits and Fits option of the Design Accelerator tool.
There are three possible types of fits between a shaft and a hole: clearance, transitional, and
interference. There are several subclassifications within each of these categories.
clearance fit: A fit that always A clearance fit always defines the maximum shaft diameter as smaller than the minimum
defines the maximum shaft hole diameter. The difference between the two diameters is the amount of clearance. It is possi-
diameter as smaller than the ble for a clearance fit to be defined with zero clearance; that is, the maximum shaft diameter is
minimum hole diameter. equal to the minimum hole diameter.
interference fit: A fit that An interference fit always defines the minimum shaft diameter as larger than the maximum
always defines the minimum hole diameter; that is, the shaft is always bigger than the hole. This definition means that an in-
shaft diameter as larger than terference fit is the converse of a clearance fit. The difference between the diameter of the shaft
the maximum hole diameter. and the hole is the amount of interference.
An interference fit is primarily used to assemble objects together. Interference fits eliminate
the need for threads, welds, or other joining methods. Using an interference for joining two ob-
jects is generally limited to light load applications.
It is sometimes difficult to visualize how a shaft can be assembled into a hole with a diame-
ter smaller than that of the shaft. It is sometimes done using a hydraulic press that slowly forces
the two parts together. The joining process can be augmented by the use of lubricants or heat. The
hole is heated, causing it to expand, the shaft is inserted, and the hole is allowed to cool and shrink
around the shaft.
transition fit: A fit that may A transition fit may be either a clearance or an interference fit. It may have a clearance be-
be either a clearance or an tween the shaft and the hole or an interference.
interference fit. The notations are based on Standard International Tolerance values. A specific description
for each category of fit follows.

Clearance Fits
H11/c11 or C11/h11  loose running fit
H8/d8 or D8/h8  free running fit
H8/f7 or F8/h7  close running fit
H7/g6 or G7/h6  sliding fit
H7/h6  locational clearance fit

Transitional Fits
H7/k6 or K7/h6  locational transition fit
H7/n6 or N7/h6  locational transition fit

Interference Fits
H7/p6 or P7/h6  locational transition fit
H7/s6 or S7/h6  medium drive fit
H7/u6 or U7/h6  force fit
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 385

Using Inventor’s Design Accelerator

Limits and fits can be derived using Inventor’s Design Accelerator Limits and Fits calculator.
The limit values are also presented in visual form so you can better visualize the type of fit being
created.

Exercise 8-6: Accessing the Design Accelerator

1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Move the cursor into the Assembly Panel area and right-click the mouse, or click the ar-
rowhead to the right of the heading Assembly Panel.
A small dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-32.
3. Click the Design Accelerator option.
The Design Accelerator panel will appear.
See Figure 8-33.

Click here.

... or right-click the mouse

Click here.

Click here.

Figure 8-32 Figure 8-33

4. Scroll down the Design Accelerator panel and click on the flyout arrow next to the
Tolerance heading.
See Figure 8-34.
5. Click the Limits and Fits heading.
The Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-35.

HOLE AND SHAFT BASIS

The Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator shown in Figure 8-30 applies tolerances starting
with the nominal hole sizes, called hole-basis tolerances; the other option applies tolerances
starting with the shaft nominal sizes, called shaft-basis tolerances. The choice of which set of
386 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Click here.

Figure 8-34

Enter nominal diameter

Set limits here

Numerical
values

Visual presentation of clearance

Figure 8-35

values to use depends on the design application. In general, hole-basis numbers are used more
often because it is more difficult to vary hole diameters manufactured using specific drill sizes
than shaft sizes manufactured using a lathe. Shaft sizes may be used when a specific fastener
diameter is used to assemble several objects.
Figure 8-36 shows calculations done for a nominal diameter of 16 mm using the hole-basis
system. An H7/g6 fit was selected.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 387

Define Basic Size.

Hole tolerance

Figure 8-36

Exercise 8-7: Determining the Hole/Shaft Sizes

1. Access the Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator.
2. Define the Basic Size and select the condition.
In this example Ø16.00 was entered and Hole-basis system of fits was chosen.
The limit designation H7/g6 is based on an international standard for hole and shaft tolerances.
The hole’s tolerance is always first and uses an uppercase letter designation. The shaft’s tolerance is
second and uses a lowercase letter designation. The numerical values for the H7/g6 tolerance can be
found in one of two ways: by reading the values in the Results box or by moving the cursor into the
rectangular area defined by a broken line. The hole’s limits will appear. See Figure 8-36.
Note that tolerances listed in the Results box and in the Tolerance Zone area are the same.
The Holemin is 16.0000 mm in the Results box and EI  0.0000 in the Tolerance Zone area. The
16.0000 value or 0.0000 value comes from the Hole-basis designation. The nominal hole value
of 16.00 becomes the starting point for all other tolerance designations. Had the Shaft-basis con-
dition been selected for the Ø16.00 nominal size, the hole and shaft tolerances would be different.

VISUAL PRESENTATIONS OF THE HOLE AND SHAFT TOLERANCES

Figure 8-37 shows the visual presentation of the H7/g6 tolerances along with the Results box val-
ues. The clearance max value is 0.03500, as stated in the Results box. Note how the 0.035 clear-
ance max value is presented visually in the Tolerances box.

Clearance min

Clearance max

Same values
Figure 8-37
388 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure 8-38 shows the tolerances applied to a hole and a shaft.

Hole Shaft

Figure 8-38

STANDARD FITS (INCH VALUES)

Inch values are accessed in the Design Accelerator tool by selecting the ANSI standards.
Fits defined using inch values are classified as follows:
RC  running and sliding fits
LC  clearance locational fits
LT  transitional locational fits
LN  interference fits
FN  force fits
Each of these general categories has several subclassifications within it defined by a num-
ber, for example, Class RC1, Class RC2, through Class RC8. The letter designations are based on
International Tolerance Standards, as are metric designations.
Charts of tolerance values can be found in the appendix.

PREFERRED AND STANDARD SIZES

It is important that designers always consider preferred and standard sizes when selecting sizes
for designs. Most tooling is set up to match these sizes, so manufacturing is greatly simplified
when preferred and standard sizes are specified. Figure 8-39 shows a listing of preferred sizes for
metric values.
Consider the case of design calculations that call for a 42-mm-diameter hole. A 42-mm-
diameter hole is not a preferred size. A diameter of 40 mm is the closest preferred size,
and a 45-mm diameter is a second choice. A 42-mm hole could be manufactured but would
require an unusual drill size that may not be available. It would be wise to reconsider the
design to see if a 40-mm-diameter hole could be used, and if not, possibly a 45-mm-diameter
hole.
A production run of a very large quantity could possibly justify the cost of special tooling,
but for smaller runs it is probably better to use preferred sizes. Machinists will have the required
drills, and maintenance people will have the appropriate tools for these sizes.
Figure 8-40 shows a listing of standard fractional drill sizes. Most companies now specify
metric units or decimal inches; however, many standard items are still available in fractional
sizes, and many older objects may still require fractional-sized tools and replacement parts. A
more complete listing is available in the appendix.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 389

Figure 8-39 Figure 8-40

SURFACE FINISHES
The term surface finish refers to the accuracy (flatness) of a surface. Metric values are measured surface finish: The accuracy
using micrometers (μm), and inch values are measured in microinches (μin.). (flatness) of a surface
The accuracy of a surface depends on the manufacturing process used to produce the surface.
Figure 8-41 shows a listing of manufacturing processes and the quality of the surface finish they
can be expected to produce.
Surface finishes have several design applications. Datum surfaces, or surfaces used for datum surface: The surface
baseline dimensioning, should have fairly accurate surface finishes to help assure accurate meas- used for baseline
urements. Bearing surfaces should have good-quality surface finishes for better load distribution, dimensioning.
and parts that operate at high speeds should have smooth finishes to help reduce friction. Figure
8-42 shows a screw head sitting on a very wavy surface. Note that the head of the screw is actu-
ally in contact with only two wave peaks, meaning all the bearing load is concentrated on the two
peaks. This situation could cause stress cracks and greatly weaken the surface. A better-quality
surface finish would increase the bearing contact area.
Figure 8-42 also shows two very rough surfaces moving in contact with each other. The re-
sult will be excess wear to both surfaces because the surfaces touch only on the peaks, and these
peaks will tend to wear faster than flatter areas. Excess vibration can also result when interfacing
surfaces are too rough.
Surface finishes are classified into three categories: surface texture, roughness, and lay.
Surface texture is a general term that refers to the overall quality and accuracy of a surface. surface texture: The overall
Roughness is a measure of the average deviation of a surface’s peaks and valleys. See quality and accuracy of a
Figure 8-43. surface.
Lay refers to the direction of machine marks on a surface. See Figure 8-43. The lay of a sur- roughness: A measure of the
face is particularly important when two moving objects are in contact with each other, especially average deviation of a surface’s
at high speeds. peaks and valleys.
lay: The direction of machine
marks on a surface.

SURFACE CONTROL SYMBOLS

Surface finishes are indicated on a drawing using surface control symbols. See Figure 8-44. The
general surface control symbol looks like a check mark. Roughness values may be included with
the symbol to specify the required accuracy. Surface control symbols can also be used to specify
the manufacturing process that may or may not be used to produce a surface.
390 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure 8-41

Figure 8-45 shows two applications of surface control symbols. In the first example, a
0.8-μm (32 μin.) surface finish is specified on the surface that serves as a datum for several
horizontal dimensions. A 0.8-μm surface finish is generally considered the minimum acceptable
finish for datums.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 391

Figure 8-42 Figure 8-43

Figure 8-44

A second finish mark with a value of 0.4 μm is located on an extension line that refers to a
surface that will be in contact with a moving object. The extra flatness will help prevent wear be-
tween the two surfaces.
392 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure 8-45

Exercise 8-8: Applying Surface Control Symbols Using Inventor

Figure 8-47 shows a dimensioned view of a model. Surface symbols are to be added to the sides
of the slot.
1. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar and click the Surface Texture Symbol tool.
See Figure 8-46.
2. Move the cursor to the drawing area and click the lower horizontal edge of the slot.
This step locates the surface texture symbol on the drawing. See Figure 8-47.
3. Right-click the mouse, and select the Continue option.
The Surface Texture dialog box will appear.
4. Enter a surface texture value of 0.8.
5. Click OK.

Click here.

Figure 8-46
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 393

The surface symbol will be added to the drawing.

The cursor will remain in Surface Texture mode so that other symbols may be applied.
6. Add a second symbol to the upper edge of the slot.
7. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Enter finish value here.

Locate finish symbol

Completed drawing

Figure 8-47
394 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Available Lay Symbols

Inventor includes a group of lay symbols that can be added to the drawing using the Surface
Texture Symbol tool. The definition of the symbols is located on the Style and Standard Editor
dialog box.
1. Click the Format heading at the top of the screen, then the Style and Standard Editor
option.
See Figure 8-48.
2. Select the Surface Texture option.

Click here
Figure 8-48

Exercise 8-9: Adding Lay Symbols

1. Click on the Surface Texture Symbol tool, locate a symbol, then right-click the mouse.
A dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-49.
2. Scroll down the available symbols in box D and select an appropriate symbol.
In this example the symbol M for Multidirectional was selected.
3. Click OK.

Finish symbol

Figure 8-49

DESIGN PROBLEMS
Figure 8-50 shows two objects that are to be fitted together using a fastener such as a screw-
and-nut combination. For this example a cylinder will be used to represent a fastener. Only two
nominal dimensions are given. The dimensions and tolerances were derived as follows.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 395

Floating
Condition Fastener

The nominal
distance
between the
holes' centers
is 50. TOP
part

All holes are

O20 NOMINAL

BOTTOM part Figure 8-50

The distance between the centers of the holes is given as 50 nominal. The term nominal
means that the stated value is only a starting point. The final dimensions will be close to the given
value but do not have to equal it.
Assigning tolerances is an iteration process; that is, a tolerance is selected and other toler-
ance values are calculated from the selected initial values. If the results are not satisfactory, go
back and modify the initial value and calculate the other values again. As your experience grows
you will become better at selecting realistic initial values.
In the example shown in Figure 8-50, start by assigning a tolerance of ±.01 to both the top
and bottom parts for both the horizontal and vertical dimensions used to locate the holes. This
means that there is a possible center point variation of .02 for both parts. The parts must always
fit together, so tolerances must be assigned based on the worst-case condition, or when the parts
are made at the extreme ends of the assigned tolerances.
Figure 8-51 shows a greatly enlarged picture of the worst-case condition created by a toler-
ance of ±.01. The center points of the holes could be as much as .028 apart if the two center
points were located at opposite corners of the tolerance zones. This means that the minimum
hole diameter must always be at least .028 larger than the maximum stud diameter. In addition,
there should be a clearance tolerance assigned so that the hole and stud are never exactly the
same size. Figure 8-52 shows the resulting tolerances.

The 19.96 value

FASTENER includes a .01
(top view) clearance allowance
and the 19.94 value
is the result of an
Tolerance zones for the center points of
assigned feature
the holes using linear tolerances 50±.01
tolerance of .02.

O19.96
O19.94

O20 + .02/-.0

HOLE for both parts

Figure 8-51 Figure 8-52

396 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

The tolerance zones in this section are created by line dimensions that generated square

TIP tolerance zones.

Floating Condition
The top and bottom parts shown in Figure 8-50 are to be joined by two independent fasteners; that
is, the location of one fastener does not depend on the location of the other. This situation is called
floating condition: A situa- a floating condition.
tion in which the location of This means that the tolerance zones for both the top and bottom parts can be assigned the
one fastener does not depend same values and that a fastener diameter selected to fit one part will also fit the other part.
on the location of the other. The final tolerances were developed by first defining a minimum hole size of 20.00. An ar-
bitrary tolerance of .02 was assigned to the hole and was expressed as 20.00  .02/-0, so that the
hole can never be any smaller than 20.00.
The 20.00 minimum hole diameter dictates that the maximum fastener diameter can be no
greater than 19.97, or .03 (the rounded-off diagonal distance across the tolerance zone—.028)
less than the minimum hole diameter. A .01 clearance was assigned. The clearance ensures that
the hole and fastener are never exactly the same diameter. The resulting maximum allowable
diameter for the fastener is 19.96. Again, an arbitrary tolerance of .02 was assigned to the fas-
tener. The final fastener dimensions are therefore 19.96 to 19.94.
The assigned tolerances ensure that there will always be at least .01 clearance between the
fastener and the hole. The other extreme condition occurs when the hole is at its largest possible
size (20.02) and the fastener is at its smallest (19.94). This means that there could be as much as
.08 clearance between the parts. If this much clearance is not acceptable, then the assigned toler-
ances will have to be reevaluated.
Figure 8-53 shows the top and bottom parts dimensioned and toleranced. Any dimensions
that do not have assigned tolerances are assumed to have standard tolerances.
Note, in Figure 8-53, that the top edge of each part has been assigned a surface finish. This
was done to help ensure the accuracy of the 20 ± .01 dimension. If this edge surface was rough,
it could affect the tolerance measurements.
This example will be done later in the chapter using geometric tolerances. Geometric toler-
ance zones are circular rather than rectangular.

FASTENER
Holes in both parts
Fixed condition
Surface finish Fasteners are fixed to
TOP part

All holes are

O20 nominal

TOP and BOTTOM

The nominal distance

All dimensions not assigned a tolerance will between the holes'
be assumed to have a standard tolerance. centers is 50.
Figure 8-53 Figure 8-54
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 397

Fixed Condition
Figure 8-54 shows the same nominal conditions presented in Figure 8-45, but the fasteners are
now fixed to the top part. This situation is called the fixed condition. In analyzing the tolerance fixed condition: A situation
zones for the fixed condition, two position tolerances must be considered: the positional toler- in which the location of
ances for the holes in the bottom part, and the positional tolerances for the fixed fasteners in the fasteners is fixed to a part.
top part. This relationship may be expressed in an equation as follows:
Smax  DTSZ  Hmin  DTZ
where:
Smax  maximum shaft 1fastener2 diameter
Hmin  minimum hole diameter
DTSZ  diagonal distance across the shaft’s center point tolerance zone
DTZ  diagonal distance across the hole’s center point tolerance zone
If a dimension and tolerance of 50 ± .01 is assigned to both the center distance between the
holes and the center distance between the fixed fasteners, the values for DTSZ and DTZ will be
equal. The formula can then be simplified as follows.
Smax  Hmin  21DTZ2
where DTZ equals the diagonal distance across the tolerance zone. If a hole tolerance of 20.00 
.02/-0 is also defined, the resulting maximum shaft size can be determined, assuming that the
calculated distance of .028 is rounded off to .03. See Figure 8-55.
Smax  20.00  210.032
 19.94

Selected tolerances

BOTTOM part
Figure 8-55

This means that 19.94 is the largest possible shaft diameter that will just fit. If a clearance
tolerance of .01 is assumed to ensure that the shaft and hole are never exactly the same size, the
maximum shaft diameter becomes 19.93. See Figure 8-56.
A feature tolerance of .02 on the shaft will result in a minimum shaft diameter of 19.91. Note
that the .01 clearance tolerance and the .02 feature tolerance were arbitrarily chosen. Other val-
ues could have been used.
398 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

The shaft values were derived as follows:

20.00 The selected value for the mini-

mum hole diameter.
–.03 The rounded-off value for the
hole positional tolerance
–.03 The rounded-off value for the
shaft positional tolerance
–.01 The selected clearance value
19.93 The maximum shaft value
–.02 The selected tolerance value
19.91 The minimum shaft diameter

Figure 8-56 TOP part

Designing a Hole Given a Fastener Size

The previous two examples started by selecting a minimum hole diameter and then calculating
the resulting fastener size. Figure 8-57 shows a situation in which the fastener size is defined, and
the problem is to determine the appropriate hole sizes. Figure 8-58 shows the dimensions and
tolerances for both top and bottom parts.
Requirements:
Clearance, minimum  .003
Hole tolerances  .005
Positional tolerance  .002
The fasteners have
a tolerance of
O.500/.499

The nominal
distance between
the holes' centers
is 2.500.

Figure 8-57

GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES
geometric tolerancing:
A dimensioning and toleranc- Geometric tolerancing is a dimensioning and tolerancing system based on the geometric shape
ing system based on the geo- of an object. Surfaces may be defined in terms of their flatness or roundness, or in terms of how
metric shape of an object. perpendicular or parallel they are to other surfaces.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 399

Given fastener tolerances Selected positional tolerances Resulting hole tolerances

Results include
.003 clearance
.005 tolerance

.500 Maximum fastener diameter

+ .003 Rounded-off diagonal distance of tolerance zone
+ .003 Defined clearance
.506 Minimum hole diameter
+ .005 Defined hole tolerance
.511 Maximum hole diameter
Figure 8-58

Geometric tolerances allow a more exact definition of the shape of an object than do conven-
tional coordinate-type tolerances. Objects can be toleranced in a manner more closely related to
their design function or so that their features and surfaces are more directly related to each other.

TOLERANCES OF FORM
Tolerances of form are used to define the shape of a surface relative to itself. There are four clas- tolerance of form: A toler-
sifications: flatness, straightness, roundness, and cylindricity. Tolerances of form are not related ance used to define the shape
to other surfaces but apply only to an individual surface. of a surface relative to itself.

FLATNESS
Flatness tolerances are used to define the amount of variation permitted in an individual surface. flatness tolerance: A toler-
The surface is thought of as a plane not related to the rest of the object. ance used to define the
Figure 8-59 shows a rectangular object. How flat is the top surface? The given plus or minus amount of variation permitted
tolerances allow a variation of (±0.5) across the surface. Without additional tolerances the surface on an individual surface.
could look like a series of waves varying between 30.5 and 29.5.
If the example in Figure 8-59 was assigned a flatness tolerance of 0.3, the height of the
object—the feature tolerance—could continue to vary based on the 30 ±0.5 tolerance, but the
surface itself could not vary by more than 0.3. In the most extreme condition, one end of the sur-
face could be 30.5 above the bottom surface and the other end 29.5, but the surface would still be
limited to within two parallel planes 0.3 apart as shown.
To better understand the meaning of flatness, consider how the surface would be inspected. The
surface would be acceptable if a gauge could be moved all around the surface and never vary by more
than 0.3. See Figure 8-60. Every point in the plane must be within the specified tolerance.
400 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure 8-59 Figure 8-60

STRAIGHTNESS
straightness tolerance: A Straightness tolerances are used to measure the variation of an individual feature along a straight
tolerance used to measure the line in a specified direction. Figure 8-61 shows an object with a straightness tolerance applied to
variation of an individual its top surface. Straightness differs from flatness because straightness measurements are checked
feature along a straight line in by moving a gauge directly across the surface in a single direction. The gauge is not moved ran-
a specified direction. domly about the surface, as is required by flatness.
Straightness tolerances are most often applied to circular or matching objects to help ensure that
the parts are not barreled or warped within the given feature tolerance range and, therefore, do not fit
together well. Figure 8-62 shows a cylindrical object dimensioned and toleranced using a standard
feature tolerance. The surface of the cylinder may vary within the specified tolerance range as shown.

Figure 8-61 Figure 8-62

Figure 8-63 shows the same object shown in Figure 8-62 dimensioned and toleranced using
the same feature tolerance but also including a 0.05 straightness tolerance. The straightness tol-
erance limits the surface variation to 0.05 as shown.

Figure 8-63
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 401

STRAIGHTNESS (RFS AND MMC)

Figure 8-64 again shows the same cylinder shown in Figures 8-62 and 8-63. This time the
straightness tolerance is applied about the cylinder’s centerline. This type of tolerance permits the
feature tolerance and geometric tolerance to be used together to define a virtual condition. A vir-
tual condition is used to determine the maximum possible size variation of the cylinder or the
smallest diameter hole that will always accept the cylinder. See Section 8-19.
The geometric tolerance specified in Figure 8-64 is applied to any circular segment along the
cylinder, regardless of the cylinder’s diameter. This means that the 0.05 tolerance is applied
equally when the cylinder’s diameter measures 19 or when it measures 21. This application is
called RFS, regardless of feature size. RFS conditions are specified in a tolerance either by an S
with a circle around it or implied tacitly when no other symbol is used. In Figure 8-59 no symbol
is listed after the 0.05 value, so it is assumed to be applied RFS.

Figure 8-64

Figure 8-65 shows the cylinder dimensioned with an MMC condition applied to the straight-
ness tolerance. MMC stands for maximum material condition and means that the specified
straightness tolerance (0.05) is applied only at the MMC condition or when the cylinder is at its
maximum diameter size (21).

Figure 8-65

A shaft is an external feature, so its largest possible size or MMC occurs when it is at its max-
imum diameter. A hole is an internal feature. A hole’s MMC condition occurs when it is at its
smallest diameter. The MMC condition for holes will be discussed later in the chapter along with
positional tolerances.
Applying a straightness tolerance at MMC allows for a variation in the resulting tolerance
zone. Because the 0.05 flatness tolerance is applied at MMC, the virtual condition is still 21.05,
the same as with the RFS condition; however, the tolerance is applied only at MMC. As the cylin-
der’s diameter varies within the specified feature tolerance range the acceptable tolerance zone
may vary to maintain the same virtual condition.
The table in Figure 8-65 shows how the tolerance zone varies as the cylinder’s diameter
varies. When the cylinder is at its largest size or MMC, the tolerance zone equals 0.05, or the
402 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

specified flatness variation. When the cylinder is at its small-

est diameter, the tolerance zone equals 2.05, or the total fea- Note:
ture size plus the total flatness size. In all variations the vir- Geome
tual size remains the same, so at any given cylinder diameter tric
MMC a tolerances a
llo ppli
value, the size of the tolerance zone can be determined by to grow w the toleranc ed at
subtracting the cylinder’s diameter value from the virtual . e zone
condition.
Figure 8-66 shows a comparison between different
methods used to dimension and tolerance a .750 shaft.
The first example uses only a feature tolerance. This tol-
erance sets an upper limit of .755 and a lower limit of .745. Any
variations within that range are acceptable.
The second example in Figure 8-66 sets a straightness tolerance of .003 about the cylin-
der’s centerline. No conditions are defined, so the tolerance is applied RFS. This limits the varia-
tions in straightness to .003 at all feature sizes. For example, when the shaft is at its smallest pos-
sible feature size of .745, the .003 still applies. This means that a shaft measuring .745 that had a
straightness variation greater than .003 would be rejected. If the tolerance had been applied at
MMC, the part would be accepted. This does not mean that straightness tolerances should always
be applied at MMC. If straightness is critical to the design integrity or function of the part, then
straightness should be applied in the RFS condition.

The RFS condition

does not allow the
tolerance zone to
grow, as does the
same tolerance
applied at MMC.

Figure 8-66

The third example in Figure 8-66 applies the straightness tolerance about the centerline at
MMC. This tolerance creates a virtual condition of .758. The MMC condition allows the toler-
ance to vary as the feature tolerance varies, so when the shaft is at its smallest feature size, .745,
a straightness tolerance of .003 is acceptable (.005 feature tolerance  .003 straightness toler-
ance).
If the tolerance specification for the cylinder shown in Figure 8-66 was 0.000 applied at
MMC, it would mean that the shaft would have to be perfectly straight at MMC or when the shaft
was at its maximum value (.755); however, the straightness tolerance can vary as the feature size
varies, as discussed for the other tolerance conditions. A 0.000 tolerance means that the MMC
and the virtual conditions are equal.
Figure 8-67 shows a very long .750 diameter shaft. Its straightness tolerance includes a
length qualifier that serves to limit the straightness variations over each inch of the shaft length
and to prevent excess waviness over the full length. The tolerance .002/1.000 means that the total
straightness may vary over the entire length of the shaft by .003 but that the variation is limited to
.002 per 1.000 of shaft length.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 403

Figure 8-67 Figure 8-68

CIRCULARITY
A circularity tolerance is used to limit the amount of variation in the roundness of a surface of circularity tolerance: A toler-
revolution. It is measured at individual cross sections along the length of the object. The meas- ance used to limit the amount
urements are limited to the individual cross sections and are not related to other cross sections. of variation in the roundness
This means that in extreme conditions the shaft shown in Figure 8-68 could actually taper from a of a surface of revolution.
diameter of 21 to a diameter of 19 and never violate the circularity requirement. It also means that
qualifications such as MMC cannot be applied.
Figure 8-68 shows a shaft that includes a feature tolerance and a circularity tolerance of 0.07. To
understand circularity tolerances, consider an individual cross section or slice of the cylinder. The ac-
tual shape of the outside edge of the slice varies around the slice. The difference between the maxi-
mum diameter and the minimum diameter of the slice can never exceed the stated circularity tolerance.
Circularity tolerances can be applied to tapered sections and spheres, as shown in Figure
8-69. In both applications, circularity is measured around individual cross sections, as it was for
the shaft shown in Figure 8-68.

CYLINDRICITY
Cylindricity tolerances are used to define a tolerance zone both around individual circular cross sections cylindricity tolerance: A
of an object and also along its length. The resulting tolerance zone looks like two concentric cylinders. tolerance used to define a
Figure 8-70 shows a shaft that includes a cylindricity tolerance that establishes a tolerance tolerance zone both around
zone of .007. This means that if the maximum measured diameter is determined to be .755, the individual circular cross
sections of an object and
also along its length.

Figure 8-69 Figure 8-70

404 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

minimum diameter cannot be less than .748 anywhere on the cylindrical surface. Cylindricity and
circularity are somewhat analogous to flatness and straightness. Flatness and cylindricity are con-
cerned with variations across an entire surface or plane. In the case of cylindricity, the plane is
shaped like a cylinder. Straightness and circularity are concerned with variations of a single ele-
ment of a surface: a straight line across the plane in a specified direction for straightness, and a
path around a single cross section for circularity.

GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES USING INVENTOR

geometric tolerance: A toler- Geometric tolerances are tolerances that limit dimensional variations based on the geometric
ance that limits dimensional properties. Figure 8-71 shows three different ways geometric tolerance boxes can be added to a
variations based on the geo- drawing.
metric properties of an object.

Using an
extension line

As part of an
extension line. As an addition to a feature tolerance.
Figure 8-71

Figure 8-72 shows lists of geometric tolerance symbols. Figure 8-73 shows an object dimen-
sioned using geometric tolerances. The geometric tolerances were created as follows.

Figure 8-72

Exercise 8-10: Defining a Datum—Tolerance Tool

1. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
See Figure 8-74.
2. Click the Datum Identifier Symbol tool and move the cursor into the drawing area.
A datum box will appear on the cursor. See Figure 8-75.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 405

A geometric
tolerance applied
using a leader line.

Datum identifier
Positional tolerance Figure 8-73

Add slashes before and after the

letter to define a datum plane.
The Drawing
Annotation
Panel bar

Click here.

Locate the datum box.

Figure 8-74 Figure 8-75

3. Position the datum identifier and press the left mouse button, then the right button.
A dialog box will appear.
4. Click the Continue option.
The Format Text dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-76. The letter A will automatically be
selected. If another letter is required, backspace out the existing letter and type in a new one.

Datum letter will appear here.

Add dashes before and after the letter. Figure 8-76
406 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

5. Add dashes before and after the letter.

The dashes serve to define a datum place. Plain letters reference datum planes.
6. Click OK, then right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
The symbol may be moved after it is created if needed.

Exercise 8-11: Defining a Perpendicular Tolerance

1. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar.
2. Click the Feature Control Frame tool, move the cursor into the drawing area, and select
a location for the control frame.
3. Left-click the mouse, then right-click it. Select the Continue option.
The Feature Control Frame dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-77.

Click here.
Available symbols Enter values.

Figure 8-77

4. Click the Sym box and select the perpendicular symbol.

5. Set the Tolerance 1 value for .02 and the Datum 1 value for A.
Figure 8-78 shows the resulting feature control frame.

A feature control frame

defining this surface
perpendicular to datum
A within 0.02 mm

Figure 8-78

Exercise 8-12: Defining a Straightness Tolerance with a Leader Line

1. Access the Drawing Annotation Panel bar and select the Feature Control Frame tool.
See Figure 8-79.
2. Move the cursor into the drawing area.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 407

Click here

Figure 8-79
A feature control box will appear.
3. Left-click the edge line of the part, then move the frame away from the edge.
4. Select a location for the frame, left-click, then right-click the mouse and select the
Continue option.
5. Edit the Feature Control Frame dialog box as shown in Figure 8-80.
Figure 8-80 shows the resulting feature control.

Enter values.

The resulting feature

control frame.

Figure 8-80

Positional Tolerance Note: positional tolerance: A toler-

A positional tolerance is used to locate and tolerance a hole Geome ance used to locate and toler-
tric
in an object. Positional tolerances require basic locating di- creates positional tole ance a hole in an object.
a circula ra
mensions for the hole’s center point. Positional tolerances r toleran nce
ce zone
also require a feature tolerance to define the diameter tol- .
erances of the hole, and a geometric tolerance to define
the position tolerance for the hole’s center point.

Exercise 8-13: Creating a Basic Dimension

The 15 and 20 dimensions in Figure 8-73 used to locate the center posi-
tion of the hole are basic dimensions. Basic dimensions are dimensions enclosed in basic dimension: A dimen-
rectangles. sion enclosed in a rectangle.
408 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

1. Create dimensions using the General Dimension tool.

2. Right-click the existing dimension and select the Edit option.
The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-81.
3. Click the Precision and Tolerance tab.
4. Select the Basic option, then click OK.

Click here

Figure 8-81

The selected dimension will be enclosed in a rectangle. This is a basic dimension. See
Figure 8-82.

Basic dimensions are

dimensions enclosed in
rectangles. They are used
in concert with positional
tolerances.

Figure 8-82

Exercise 8-14: Adding a Positional Tolerance to a Hole’s Feature Tolerance

Figure 8-83 shows a feature tolerance for a hole. A feature tolerance defines the hole’s size limits. In
the example shown in Figure 8-83 the hole is defined as 10.2 to 9.9. These values define the toler-
ance of the hole. In addition, the location of the hole’s center point must be defined and toleranced.
1. Click the Feature Control Frame tool.
2. Move the cursor and locate the feature control frame below the hole’s feature control di-
mensions.
3. Click the left mouse button, then the right mouse button. Select the Continue option.
The Feature Control Frame dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-84.
4. Select the positional symbol, then move to the Tolerance box and locate the cursor to the
left of the 0.000 default tolerance value.
5. Select the centerline symbol, Ø.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 409

A feature tolerance A positional tolerance

Figure 8-83
Select the positional symbol. Select the centerline symbol, the
tolerance value, then the maximum
material condition symbol.

Figure 8-84

6. Create a tolerance value of 0.03, then click the maximum material condition symbol, an
M with a circle around it.
7. Click OK.
8. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.

Creating More Complex Geometric Tolerance Drawing Callouts

Figure 8-85 shows a model that has several, more complex, geometric tolerance drawing callouts.
These callouts are created using the procedure and the same Feature Control Frame dialog box

Created using the

Datum Identifier
Symbol tool

Figure 8-85
410 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

as shown in Figure 8-84, but data must be entered. The individual datum callouts are created us-
ing the Datum Identifier Symbol tool.
Figure 8-86 shows the Feature Control Frame used to create the slot dimension in Figure 8-85.
Figure 8-86 also shows the Feature Control Frame dialog box for a multilined tolerance callout.

Created using Created using

the Datum the Datum
Identifier Identifier
Symbol tool Symbol tool

Figure 8-86

TOLERANCES OF ORIENTATION
tolerance of orientation: A Tolerances of orientation are used to relate a feature or surface to another feature or surface. Tol-
tolerance used to relate a erances of orientation include perpendicularity, parallelism, and angularity. They may be applied
feature of surface to another using RFS or MMC conditions, but they cannot be applied to individual features by themselves.
feature or surface. To define a surface as parallel to another surface is very much like assigning a flatness value to
the surface. The difference is that flatness applies only within the surface; every point on the sur-
face is related to a defined set of limiting parallel planes. Parallelism defines every point in the
surface relative to another surface. The two surfaces are therefore directly related to each other,
and the condition of one affects the other.
Orientation tolerances are used with locational tolerances. A feature is first located, then it is
oriented within the locational tolerances. This means that the orientation tolerance must always
be less than the locational tolerances. The next four sections will further explain this requirement.

DATUMS
datum: A point, axis, or A datum is a point, axis, or surface used as a starting reference point for dimensions and toler-
surface used as a starting ances. Figures 8-87 and 8-88 show a rectangular object with three datum planes labeled –A–,
reference point for dimensions –B–, and –C–. The three datum planes are called the primary, secondary, and tertiary datums, re-
and tolerances. spectively. The three datum planes are, by definition, exactly 90° to one another.
Figure 8-89 shows a cylindrical datum frame that includes three datum planes. The X and Y
planes are perpendicular to each other, and the base A plane is perpendicular to the datum axis
between the X and Y planes.
Datums are defined on a drawing by letters enclosed in rectangular boxes, as shown. The
defining letters are written flanked by dashes: –A–, –B–, and –C–.

Figure 8-87
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 411

Figure 8-88

Figure 8-89

Datum planes are assumed to be perfectly flat. When assigning a datum status to a surface,
be sure that the surface is reasonably flat. This means that datum surfaces should be toleranced
using surface finishes, or created using machine techniques that produce flat surfaces.

PERPENDICULARITY
Perpendicularity tolerances are used to limit the amount of variation for a surface or feature within perpendicularity tolerance:
two planes perpendicular to a specified datum. Figure 8-90 shows a rectangular object. The bottom A tolerance used to limit the
surface is assigned as datum –A–, and the right vertical edge is toleranced so that it must be perpen- amount of variation for a sur-
face or feature with two planes
perpendicular to a specified
datum.

Figure 8-90
412 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

dicular within a limit of 0.05 to datum –A–. The perpendicularity tolerance defines a tolerance zone
0.05 wide between two parallel planes that are perpendicular to datum –A–.
The object also includes a horizontal dimension and tolerance of 40 ± 1. This tolerance is called
a locational tolerance because it serves to locate the right edge of the object. As with rectangular co-
ordinate tolerances, discussed earlier in the chapter, the 40 ± 1 controls the location of the edge—how
far away or how close it can be to the left edge—but does not directly control the shape of the edge.
Any shape that falls within the specified tolerance range is acceptable. This may in fact be sufficient
for a given design, but if a more controlled shape is required, a perpendicularity tolerance must be
added. The perpendicularity tolerance works within the locational tolerance to ensure that the edge is
not only within the locational tolerance but is also perpendicular to datum –A–.
Figure 8-90 shows the two extreme conditions for the 40 ± 1 locational tolerance. The perpen-
dicularity tolerance is applied by first measuring the surface and determining its maximum and mini-
mum lengths. The difference between these two measurements must be less than 0.05. So if the meas-
ured maximum distance is 41, then no other part of the surface may be less then 41 - 0.05  40.95.
Tolerances of perpendicularity serve to complement locational tolerances, to make the shape
more exact, so tolerances of perpendicularity must always be smaller than tolerances of location.
It would be of little use, for example, to assign a perpendicularity tolerance of 1.5 for the object
shown in Figure 8-91. The locational tolerance would prevent the variation from ever reaching the
limits specified by such a large perpendicularity tolerance.
Figure 8-92 shows a perpendicularity tolerance applied to cylindrical features: a shaft and a
hole. The figure includes examples of both RFS and MMC applications. As with straightness tol-
erances applied at MMC, perpendicularity tolerances applied about a hole or shaft’s centerline
allow the tolerance zone to vary as the feature size varies.
The inclusion of the Ø symbol in a geometric tolerance is critical to its interpretation. See
Figure 8-93. If the Ø symbol is not included, the tolerance applies only to the view in which it is

Figure 8-91 Figure 8-92

Figure 8-93
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 413

written. This means that the tolerance zone is shaped like a rectangular slice, not a cylinder, as
would be the case if the ø symbol were included. In general it is better to always include the Ø
symbol for cylindrical features because it generates a tolerance zone more like that used in posi-
tional tolerancing.
Figure 8-93 shows a perpendicularity tolerance applied to a slot, a noncylindrical feature.
Again, the MMC specification is always for variations in the tolerance zone.

PARALLELISM
Parallelism tolerances are used to ensure that all points within a plane are within two parallel planes parallelism tolerance: A tol-
that are parallel to a referenced datum plane. Figure 8-94 shows a rectangular object that is toleranced erance used to ensure that all
so that its top surface is parallel to the bottom surface within 0.02. This means that every point on the points within a plane are
top surface must be within a set of parallel planes 0.02 apart. These parallel tolerancing planes are lo- within two parallel planes that
cated by determining the maximum and minimum distances from the datum surface. The difference are parallel to a referenced
datum plane.
between the maximum and minimum values may not exceed the stated 0.02 tolerance.
In the extreme condition of maximum feature size, the top surface is located 40.5 above the
datum plane. The parallelism tolerance is then applied, meaning that no point on the surface may
be closer than 40.3 to the datum. This is an RFS condition. The MMC condition may also be ap-
plied, thereby allowing the tolerance zone to vary as the feature size varies.

Figure 8-94

ANGULARITY
Angularity tolerances are used to limit the variance of surfaces and axes that are at an angle rel- angularity tolerance: A toler-
ative to a datum. Angularity tolerances are applied like perpendicularity and parallelism toler- ance used to limit the variance
ances as a way to better control the shape of locational tolerances. of surfaces and axes that are at
Figure 8-95 shows an angularity tolerance and several ways it is interpreted at extreme conditions. an angle relative to a datum.

Figure 8-95
414 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

PROFILES
profile tolerance: A tolerance Profile tolerances are used to limit the variations of irregular surfaces. They may be assigned as
used to limit the variations of either bilateral or unilateral tolerances. There are two types of profile tolerances: surface and line.
irregular surfaces. Surface profile tolerances limit the variation of an entire surface, whereas a line profile tolerance
limits the variations along a single line across a surface.
Figure 8-96 shows an object that includes a surface profile tolerance referenced to an irreg-
ular surface. The tolerance is considered a bilateral tolerance because no other specification is
given. This means that all points on the surface must be located between two parallel planes 0.08
apart that are centered about the irregular surface. The measurements are taken perpendicular to
the surface.
Unilateral applications of surface profile tolerances must be indicated on the drawing using
phantom lines. The phantom line indicates the side of the true profile line of the irregular surface
on which the tolerance is to be applied. A phantom line above the irregular surface indicates that
the tolerance is to be applied using the true profile line as 0 and then the specified tolerance range
is to be added above that line. See Figures 8-97 and 8-98.
Profiles of line tolerances are applied to irregular surfaces, as shown in Figure 8-98. Profiles
of line tolerances are particularly helpful when tolerancing an irregular surface that is constantly
changing, such as the surface of an airplane wing.
Surface and line profile tolerances are somewhat analogous to flatness and straightness
tolerances. Flatness and surface profile tolerances are applied across an entire surface,
whereas straightness and line profile tolerances are applied only along a single line across the
surface.

Figure 8-96

Figure 8-97
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 415

Figure 8-98

RUNOUTS
A runout tolerance is used to limit the variations between features of an object and a datum. runout tolerance: A tolerance
More specifically they are applied to surfaces around a datum axis such as a cylinder or to a sur- used to limit the variations be-
face constructed perpendicular to a datum axis. There are two types of runout tolerances: circu- tween features of an object
and a datum.
lar and total.
Figure 8-99 shows a cylinder that includes a circular runout tolerance. The runout require-
ments are checked by rotating the object about its longitudinal axis or datum axis while holding
an indicator gauge in a fixed position on the object’s surface.
Runout tolerances may be either bilateral or unilateral. A runout tolerance is assumed to be
bilateral unless otherwise indicated. If a runout tolerance is to be unilateral, a phantom line is
used to indicate the side of the object’s true surface to which the tolerance is to be applied. See
Figure 8-100.
Runout tolerances may be applied to tapered areas of cylindrical objects, as shown in Figure
8-101. The tolerance is checked by rotating the object about a datum axis while holding an indi-
cator gauge in place.
A total runout tolerance limits the variation across an entire surface. See Figure 8-102. An
indicator gauge is not held in place while the object is rotated, as it is for circular runout toler-
ances, but is moved about the rotating surface.

Figure 8-99 Figure 8-100

416 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure 8-101 Figure 8-102

Figure 8-103 shows a circular runout tolerance that references two datums. The two datums
serve as one datum. The object can then be rotated about both datums simultaneously as the
runout tolerances are checked.

Figure 8-103

POSITIONAL TOLERANCES
As defined earlier, positional tolerances are used to locate and tolerance holes. Positional toler-
ances create a circular tolerance zone for hole center point locations, in contrast with the rectan-
gular tolerance zone created by linear coordinate dimensions. See Figure 8-104. The circular
tolerance zone allows for an increase in acceptable tolerance variation without compromising the
design integrity of the object. Note how some of the possible hole center points fall in an area out-
side the rectangular tolerance zone but are still within the circular tolerance zone. If the hole had
been located using linear coordinate dimensions, center points located beyond the rectangular

Figure 8-104
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 417

tolerance zone would have been rejected as beyond tolerance, and yet holes produced using these
locations would function correctly from a design standpoint. The center point locations would be
acceptable if positional tolerances had been specified. The finished hole is round, so a round tol-
erance zone is appropriate. The rectangular tolerance zone rejects some holes unnecessarily.
Holes are dimensioned and toleranced using geometric tolerances by a combination of locat-
ing dimensions, feature dimensions and tolerances, and positional tolerances. See Figure 8-105.
The locating dimensions are enclosed in rectangular boxes and are called basic dimensions. Ba-
sic dimensions are assumed to be exact.
The feature tolerances for the hole are as presented earlier in the chapter. They can be pre-
sented using plus or minus or limit-type tolerances. In the example shown in Figure 8-105 the di-
ameter of the hole is toleranced using a plus and minus 0.05 tolerance.
The basic locating dimensions of 45 and 50 are assumed to be exact. The tolerances that
would normally accompany linear locational dimensions are replaced by the positional tolerance.

Figure 8-105

The positional tolerance also specifies that the tolerance be applied at the centerline at maximum
material condition. The resulting tolerance zones are as shown in Figure 8-105.
Figure 8-106 shows an object containing two holes that are dimensioned and toleranced using
positional tolerances. There are two consecutive horizontal basic dimensions. Because basic dimen-
sions are exact, they do not have tolerances that accumulate; that is, there is no tolerance buildup.

Geometric positional tolerances must include basic dimensions.

TIP

Figure 8-106
418 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

VIRTUAL CONDITION
virtual condition: The combi- Virtual condition is a combination of a feature’s MMC and its geometric tolerance. For external
nation of a feature’s maximum features (shafts) it is the MMC plus the geometric tolerance; for internal features (holes) it is the
material condition and its geo- MMC minus the geometric tolerance.
metric tolerance. The following calculations are based on the dimensions shown in Figure 8-107.

Figure 8-107

Calculating the Virtual Condition for a Shaft

25.5 MMC for shaft — maximum diameter
 0.3 Geometric tolerance
25.8 Virtual condition

Calculating the Virtual Condition for a Hole

24.5 MMC for hole — minimum diameter
0.3 Geometric tolerance
24.8 Virtual condition

FLOATING FASTENERS
Positional tolerances are particularly helpful when dimensioning matching parts. Because basic
locating dimensions are considered exact, the sizing of mating parts is dependent only on the hole
and shaft’s MMC and the geometric tolerance between them.
The relationship for floating fasteners and holes in objects may be expressed as a formula:
HTF
where:
H  hole at MMC
T  geometric tolerance
F  shaft at MMC
floating fastener: A fastener A floating fastener is one that is free to move in either object. It is not attached to either ob-
that is free to move in either ject and it does not screw into either object. Figure 8-108 shows two objects that are to be joined
mating object. by a common floating shaft, such as a bolt or screw. The feature size and tolerance and the posi-
tional geometric tolerance are both given. The minimum size hole that will always just fit is de-
termined using the preceding formula.
HTF
11.97  .02  11.95
Therefore, the shaft’s diameter at MMC, the shaft’s maximum diameter, equals 11.95. Any
required tolerance would have to be subtracted from this shaft size.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 419

The .02 geometric tolerance is applied at the hole’s MMC, so as the hole’s size expands
within its feature tolerance, the tolerance zone for the acceptable matching parts also expands.

Figure 8-108

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP8-4

The situation presented in Figure 8-108 can be worked in reverse; that is, hole sizes can be de-
rived from given shaft sizes.
The two objects shown in Figure 8-109 are to be joined by a .250-in. bolt. The parts are float-
ing; that is, they are both free to move, and the fastener is not joined to either object. What is the
MMC of the holes if the positional tolerance is to be .030?
A manufacturer’s catalog specifies that the tolerance for .250 bolts is .2500 to .2600.
Rewriting the formula
HTF
to isolate the H yields
HFT
 .260  .030
 .290
The .290 value represents the minimum hole diameter, MMC, for all four holes that will al-
ways accept the .250 bolt. Figure 8-110 shows the resulting drawing callout.
Any clearance requirements or tolerances for the hole would have to be added to the .290 value.

Figure 8-109 Figure 8-110

420 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP8-5

Repeat the problem presented in SP8-4 but be sure that there is always a minimum clearance of
.002 between the hole and the shaft, and assign a hole tolerance of .008.
Sample problem SP8-4 determined that the maximum hole diameter that will always accept
the .250 bolt was .290 based on the .030 positioning tolerance. If the minimum clearance is to be
.002, the maximum hole diameter is found as follows:
.290 Minimum hole diameter that will always accept the bolt 10 clearance at MMC2
 .002 Minimum clearance
.292 Minimum hole diameter including clearance
Now, assign the tolerance to the hole:
.292 Minimum hole diameter
 .001 Tolerance
.293 Maximum hole diameter
See Figure 8-111 for the appropriate drawing callout. The choice of clearance size and hole
tolerance varies with the design requirements for the objects.

Figure 8-111

FIXED FASTENERS
fixed fastener: A fastener A fixed fastener is one that is attached to one of the mating objects. See Figure 8-112. Because the
that is attached to one of the fastener is fixed to one of the objects, the geometric tolerance zone must be smaller than that used
mating objects. for floating fasteners. The fixed fastener cannot move without moving the object it is attached to.
The relationship between fixed fasteners and holes in mating objects is defined by the formula
H  2T  F
The tolerance zone is cut in half. This can be demonstrated by the objects shown in Figure 8-113.
The same feature sizes that were used in Figure 8-113 are assigned, but in this example the fas-
teners are fixed. Solving for the geometric tolerance yields a value as follows:

Figure 8-112 Figure 8-113

 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 421

H  F  2T
11.97  11.95  2T
.02  2T
.01  T
The resulting positional tolerance is half that obtained for floating fasteners.

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP8-6

This problem is similar to sample problem SP8-4, but the given conditions are applied to fixed
fasteners rather than floating fasteners. Compare the resulting shaft diameters for the two prob-
lems. See Figure 8-114.
A. What is the minimum diameter hole that will always accept the fixed fasteners?
B. If the minimum clearance is .005 and the hole is to have a tolerance of .002, what
are the maximum and minimum diameters of the hole?
H  2T  F
H  F  2T
 .260  21.0302
 .260  .060
 .320 Minimum diameter that will always accept the fastener

Figure 8-114

If the minimum clearance is .005 and the hole tolerance is .002,

.320 Virtual condition
 .005 Clearance
.325 Minimum hole diameter
.325 Minimum hole diameter
 .002 Tolerance
.327 Maximum hole diameter
The maximum and minimum values for the hole’s diameter can then be added to the draw-
ing of the object that fits over the fixed fasteners. See Figure 8-115.
422 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure 8-115

DESIGN PROBLEMS
This problem was originally done on p. 395 using rectangular tolerances. It is done in this section
using positional geometric tolerances so that the two systems can be compared. It is suggested
that the previous problem be reviewed before reading this section.
Figure 8-116 shows top and bottom parts that are to be joined in the floating condition. A
nominal distance of 50 between hole centers and 20 for the holes has been assigned. In the

Floating condition
Fastener

Top

All holes are

O20 nominal.

The distance between

hole's centerpoints is
50 mm nominal

Bottom

Figure 8-116
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 423

These crescent-shaped areas account for the

increased tolerance range of the circular tolerances.

This increased area of acceptability is

the result of assigning the positional
tolerance at MMC.

Rectangular range: 49.98 to 50.02

Circular range: 49.97 to 50.03

Figure 8-117

previous solution a rectangular tolerance of .01 was selected, and there was a minimum hole di-
ameter of 20.00. Figure 8-117 shows the resulting tolerance zones.
The diagonal distance across the rectangular tolerance zone is .028 and was rounded off to
.03 to yield a maximum possible fastener diameter of 19.97. If the same .03 value is used to cal-
culate the fastener diameter using positional tolerance, the results are as follows:
HTF
20.00  .03  19.97
The results seem to be the same, but because of the circular shape of the positional tolerance
zone, the manufactured results are not the same. The minimum distance between the inside edges
of the rectangular zones is 49.98, or .01 from the center point of each hole. The minimum dis-
tance from the innermost points of the circular tolerance zones is 49.97, or .015 (half the
rounded-off .03 value) from the center point of each hole. The same value difference also occurs
for the maximum distance between center points, where 50.02 is the maximum distance for the
rectangular tolerances, and 50.03 is the maximum distance for the circular tolerances. The size of
the circular tolerance zone is larger because the hole tolerances are assigned at MMC. Figure 8-
117 shows a comparison between the tolerance zones, and Figure 8-118 shows how the positional
tolerances would be presented on a drawing of either the top or bottom part.
Figure 8-119 shows the same top and bottom parts joined together in the fixed condition. The
initial nominal values are the same. If the same .03 diagonal value is assigned as a positional tol-
erance, the results are as follows:
HTF
20.00  .06  19.94

Figure 8-118
 424 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Fixed condition

Top

Both holes are

O20 nominal.

The distance between

hole's centerpoints is
50 mm nominal.

Bottom
Figure 8-119

These results appear to be the same as those generated by the rectangular tolerance zone, but
the circular tolerance zone allows a greater variance in acceptable manufactured parts. Figure 8-120
shows how the positional tolerance would be presented on a drawing.

H – 2T = F
20.00 – .06 = 19.94

Subtracting .01 for clearance results in a

maximum shaft diameter of 19.93.

Assigning a shaft tolerance of .02 results

in a maximum shaft diameter of 19.91.

Figure 8-120

SUMMARY
Tolerances define the manufacturing limits for dimensions. applying dimensions and tolerances to a drawing—chain and
This chapter defined the various tolerance conventions and il- baseline—were illustrated. Sample problems explained the
lustrated how to create plus and minus tolerances and limit application of positional tolerances to holes and shafts in
tolerances, including angular tolerances. The two systems for determining fits.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 425

Surface finishes and the use of surface control symbols are to other surfaces. The four classifications of tolerances of
were also discussed and illustrated. form—flatness, straightness, roundness, and cylindricity—
Examples were given of the various forms of geometric were also illustrated. Sample problems involving both fixed
tolerancing—defining surfaces in terms of their flatness or and floating fasteners demonstrated the use of tolerances.
roundness or in terms of how perpendicular or parallel they

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. In what type of the fit is shaft always smaller than the hole? 6. What is a datum?
a. Interference fit a. A reference point or surface
b. Clearance fit b. The product of a series of tolerances
c. Transition fit c. A listing of data points
2. Which of the following is not a type of tolerance? 7. Positional tolerances are used to
a. Limits a. Locate a part
b. Symmetric b. Locate and tolerance a hole
c. Deviation c. Define the angle of part’s feature
d. Reference 8. The equation H - T  F is used to define the relationship
3. An RC fit is which of the following? between holes, fasteners and tolerances in which condition?
a. Running and sliding fit a. Floating
b. Clearance fit b. Fixed
c. Force fit c. Absolute
d. Interference fit d. Loose running
4. In which type of condition are fasteners assembled into a 9. Tolerances of orientation are used to.
part and then inserted through (clearance) a second part? a. Relate a feature to the XY axis
a. Floating condition b. Relate a surface to a machine mark
b. Fixed condition c. Relate a feature or surface to another feature or surface
c. Absolute condition 10. How are a primary datum, a secondary datum, and a
5. Flatness and straightness are considered tolerances of tertiary datum generally referenced on a drawing
a. Profile a. 1, 2, and 3
b. Runout b. A, B, and C
c. Form c. X, Y, and Z
d. MMC d. Front, top, and side

Matching
Figure 8-121 shows an object dimensioned and tolerance using geometric tolerances. Match the numbers with the appropriate
definitions
Column A Column B Column A Column B
1. a. Symbol for diameter 5. e. Symbol for positional tolerance
2. b. Stacked limit tolerances 6. f. Symbol for centerline
3. c. Overall dimension 7. g. Symbol for maximum material condition
4. d. Basic dimension

True or False
1. True or False: There are three types of fits: clearance, 4. True or False: For an interference fit the shaft is
location, and interference. smaller than the hole.
2. True or False: A tolerance written using the  5. True or False: Fit tolerances are listed on the Design
symbol is called either symmetrical or deviation. Accelerator panel.
3. True or False: Positional tolerances require the use of 6. True or False: English units specify surface finishes
basic dimensions. using microinches.
 426 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

7. True or False: MMC is an abbreviation for maximum 9. True or False: Chain dimensions are the same as
material condition. baseline dimensions.
8. True or False: Every dimensional value on a drawing 10. True or False: In the floating condition, fasteners
always has a tolerance. pass through clearance holes.

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 8-1:
Draw a model of the objects shown in Figures P8-1A through P8-1D
using the given dimensions and tolerances. Create a drawing layout
with a view of the model as shown. Add the specified dimensions and
tolerances.

MATL = 20 THK

Figure P8-1A MILLIMETERS

MATL = 30 THK
Figure P8-1B MILLIMETERS
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 427

MATL = .75 THK

Figure P8-1C INCHES

MATL = 10 THK
Figure P8-1D MILLIMETERS

Project 8-2:
Redraw the following object, including the given dimensions and
tolerances. Calculate and list the maximum and minimum distances
for surface A.
428 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

MATL = 25 THK
Figure P8-2 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-3:
A. Redraw the following object, including the dimensions and
tolerances. Calculate and list the maximum and minimum
distances for surface A.
B. Redraw the given object and dimension it using baseline
dimensions. Calculate and list the maximum and minimum
distances for surface A.

MATL = 1.25 THK

Figure P8-3 INCHES

Project 8-4:
Redraw the following object, including the dimensions and toler-
ances. Calculate and list the maximum and minimum distances for
surfaces D and E.

Figure P8-4 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 429

Project 8-5:
Dimension the following object twice, once using chain dimensions
and once using baseline dimensions. Calculate and list the maximum
and minimum distances for surface D for both chain and baseline
dimensions. Compare the results.

MATL = 20 THK
Figure P8-5 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-6:
Redraw the following shapes, including the dimensions and toler-
ances. Also list the required minimum and maximum values for the
specified distances.

MATL = 1.125 THK

MATL = 45 THK MATL = .625 THK

Figure P8-6 INCHES
430 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-7:
Redraw and complete the following inspection report. Under the
Results column classify each “AS MEASURED” value as OK if the
value is within the stated tolerances, REWORK if the value indicates
that the measured value is beyond the stated tolerance but can be
reworked to bring it into the acceptable range, or SCRAP if the value
is not within the tolerance range and cannot be reworked to make it
acceptable.

Figure P8-7 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-8:
Redraw the following charts and complete them based on the follow-
ing information. All values are in millimeters.
A. Nominal  16, Fit  H8/d8
B. Nominal  30, Fit  H11/c11
C. Nominal  22, Fit  H7/g6
D. Nominal  10, Fit  C11/h11
E. Nominal  25, Fit  F8/h7
F. Nominal  12, Fit  H7/k6
G. Nominal  3, Fit  H7/p6
H. Nominal  18, Fit  H7/s6
I. Nominal  27, Fit  H7/u6
J. Nominal  30, Fit  N7/h6
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 431

Figure P8-8 MILLIMETERS

432 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-9:
Redraw the following charts and complete them based on the follow-
ing information. All values are in inches.
A. Nominal  0.25, Fit  Class LC5, H7/g6
B. Nominal  1.00, Fit  Class LC7, H10/e9
C. Nominal  1.50, Fit  Class LC9, F11/h11
D. Nominal  0.75, Fit  Class RC3, H7/f6
E. Nominal  1.75, Fit  Class RC6, H9/e8
F. Nominal  .500, Fit  Class LT2, H8/js7
G. Nominal  1.25, Fit  Class LT5, H7/n6
H. Nominal  1.38, Fit  Class LN3, J7/h6
I. Nominal  1.625, Fit  Class FN, H7/s6
J. Nominal  2.00, Fit  Class FN4, H7/u6

Figure P8-9 INCHES

 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 433

Project 8-10:
Draw the chart shown and add the appropriate values based on the
dimensions and tolerances given in Figures P8-10A through P8-10D.

Figure P8-10A MILLIMETERS

Figure P8-10B MILLIMETERS Figure P8-10C MILLIMETERS Figure P8-10D MILLIMETERS

Project 8-11:
Prepare front and top views of parts 4A and 4B based on the given
dimensions. Add tolerances to produce the stated clearances.
434 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Maximum allowable mismatch

Maximum allowable
clearance

Figure P8-11 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-12:
Redraw parts A and B and dimensions and tolerances to meet the
“UPON ASSEMBLY” requirements.

BOX, TOP

Nominal dimensions
MAT'L=1.00 THK

BOX, BOTTOM

Figure P8-12 INCHES

 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 435

Project 8-13:
Draw a front and top view of both given objects. Add dimensions
and tolerances to meet the “FINAL CONDITION” requirements.

Figure P8-13 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-14:
Given the following nominal sizes, dimension and tolerance parts
AM311 and AM312 so that they always fit together regardless of
orientation. Further, dimension the overall lengths of each part so
that in the assembled condition they will always pass through a
clearance gauge with an opening of 80.00±0.02.
436 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

In the assembled condition, both parts

must always pass through the clearance
gauge.

All given dimensions, except for the

the clearance gauge, are nominal.
Figure P8-14 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-15:
Given the following rail assembly, add dimensions and tolerances so
that the parts always fit together as shown in the assembled position.

Assembled Rail, Bottom Rail, Top

Position

All dimensions are nominal.

Figure P8-15 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-16:
Given the following peg assembly, add dimensions and tolerances so
that the parts always fit together as shown in the assembled position.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 437

Plate, Pegs Plate, Holes

Assembled
Position

All dimensions
are nominal.

Figure P8-16 INCHES

Project 8-17:
Given the following collar assembly, add dimensions and tolerances so
that the parts always fit together as shown in the assembled position.

Collar Support Collar

Assembled
Position

Figure P8-17 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-18:
Given the following vee-block assembly, add dimensions and toler-
ances so that the parts always fit together as shown in the assembled
position. The total height of the assembled blocks must be between
4.45 and 4.55 in.
 438 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Block, Vee Vee, Top

Assembled
Position

All dimensions are nominal.

Figure P8-18 INCHES

Project 8-19:
Design a bracket that will support the three Ø100 wheels shown. The wheels will utilize three
Ø5.00 ± 0.01 shafts attached to the bracket. The bottom of the bracket must have a minimum of
10 mm from the ground. The wall thickness of the bracket must always be at least 5 mm, and
the minimum bracket opening must be at least 15 mm.
1. Prepare a front and a side view of the bracket.
2. Draw the wheels in their relative positions using phantom lines.
3. Add all appropriate dimensions and tolerances.

All sizes are nominal, unless otherwise stated.

Shaft O = 5.00 ± .0
3 required

Roller blade assembly

Part number Bu 110-44

Figure P8-19A MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 439

Given a TOP and a BOTTOM part in the floating condition as shown in

Figure P8-19B, satisfy the requirements given in projects P8-20 through
P8-23 so that the parts always fit together regardless of orientation. Pre-
pare drawings of each part including dimensions and tolerances.
A. Use linear tolerances.
B. Use positional tolerances.

Floating condition
Fastener

TOP

BOTTOM

Figure P8-19B

Project 8-20: Inches

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 2.00 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø.375 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of .001.
D. The holes have a tolerance of .002.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is .003.

Project 8-21: Millimeters

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 80 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø12 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of 0.05.
D. The holes have a tolerance of 0.03.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is 0.02.

Project 8-22: Inches

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 3.50 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø.625 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of .005.
D. The holes have a tolerance of .003.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is .002.

Project 8-23: Millimeters

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 65 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø16 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of 0.03.
D. The holes have a tolerance of 0.04.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is 0.03.
440 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Given a top and a bottom part in the fixed condition as shown in

Figure P8-23, satisfy the requirements given in projects P8-24
through P8-27 so that the parts fit together regardless of orientation.
Prepare drawings of each part including dimensions and tolerances.
A. Use linear tolerances
B. Use positional tolerances.

Fasteners are fixed to top part.

TOP

Fastener

BOTTOM

Fixed condition
Figure P8-23

Project 8-24: Millimeters

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 60 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø10 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of 0.04.
D. The holes have a tolerance of 0.02.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is 0.02.

Project 8-25: Inches

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 3.50 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø.563 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of .005.
D. The holes have a tolerance of .003.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is .002.

Project 8-26: Millimeters

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 100 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø18 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of 0.02.
D. The holes have a tolerance of 0.01.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is 0.03

Project 8-27: Inches

A. The distance between the holes’ center points is 1.75 nominal.
B. The holes are Ø.250 nominal.
C. The fasteners have a tolerance of .002.
D. The holes have a tolerance of .003.
E. The minimum allowable clearance between the fasteners and
the holes is .001.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 441

Project 8-28: Millimeters

Dimension and tolerance the rotator assembly shown in Figure P8-
28. Use the given dimensions as nominal and add sleeve bearings
between the LINKs and both the CROSS-LINK and the PLATE.
Create drawings of each part. Modify the dimensions as needed and
add the appropriate tolerances. Specify the selected sleeve bearing.

ROTATOR ASSEMBLY

LINK P/N AM311-1, SAE 1020

CROSS-LINK P/N AM311-2, SAE 1020

PLATE P/N AM311-3, SAE 1020

Figure P8-28
442 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-29:
Dimension and tolerance the rocker assembly shown in Figure P8-29.
Use the given dimensions as nominal, and add sleeve bearings
between all moving parts. Create drawings of each part. Modify the
dimensions as needed and add the appropriate tolerances. Specify
the selected sleeve bearing.

ROCKER ASSEMBLY
DRIVE LINK
O 10 x 15 PEG

CENTER LINK

O 10 x 10 PEG

DRIVE LINK
AM312-2
SAE 1040
5 mm THK
PLATE, WEB
ROCKER LINK

O 10 x 15 PEG

PLATE, WEB AM312-1, SAE 1040, 10 mm THK

ROCKER LINK
AM312-4
SAE 1040
5 mm THK

CENTER LINK AM312-3, SAE 1040, 5 mm THK

O 10 x 10 PEG AM 312-5 O 10 x 15 PEG AM 312-6
SAE 1020 SAE 1020

Figure P8-29
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 443

Project 8-30:
Draw the model shown in Figure P8-30, create a drawing layout
with the appropriate views, and add the specified dimensions and
tolerances.

Figure P8-30

Project 8-31:
Redraw the shaft shown in Figure P8-31, create a drawing layout
with the appropriate views, and add a feature dimension and toler-
ance of 36 ± 0.1 and a straightness tolerance of 0.07 about the
centerline at MMC.

Figure P8-31

Project 8-32:
A. Given the shaft shown in Figure P8-32, what is the minimum
hole diameter that will always accept the shaft?
B. If the minimum clearance between the shaft and a hole is
equal to 0.02, and the tolerance on the hole is to be 0.6, what
are the maximum and minimum diameters for the hole?

Figure P8-32
444 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-33:
A. Given the shaft shown in Figure P8-33, what is the minimum
hole diameter that will always accept the shaft?
B. If the minimum clearance between the shaft and a hole is
equal to .005, and the tolerance on the hole is to be .007,
what are the maximum and minimum diameters for the hole?

Figure P8-39

Project 8-34:
Draw a front and a right-side view of the object shown in
Figure P8-34 and add the appropriate dimensions and toler-
ances based on the following information. Numbers located
next to an edge line indicate the length of the edge.
A. Define surfaces A, B, and C as primary, secondary, and
tertiary datums, respectively.
B. Assign a tolerance of±0.5 to all linear dimensions.
C. Assign a feature tolerance of 12.07 - 12.00 to the pro-
truding shaft.
D. Assign a flatness tolerance of 0.01 to surface –A–.
E. Assign a straightness tolerance of 0.03 to the protrud-
ing shaft.
F. Assign a perpendicularity tolerance to the centerline
of the protruding shaft of 0.02 at MMC relative to
datum –A–.

Figure P8-34
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 445

Project 8-35:
Draw a front and a right-side view of the object shown in Figure P8-35
and add the following dimensions and tolerances.
A. Define the bottom surface as datum –A–.
B. Assign a perpendicularity tolerance of 0.4 to both sides of the
slot relative to datum –A–.
C. Assign a perpendicularity tolerance of 0.2 to the centerline of
the 30 diameter hole at MMC relative to datum –A–.
D. Assign a feature tolerance of ±0.8 to all three holes.
E. Assign a parallelism tolerance of 0.2 to the common center-
line between the two 20 diameter holes relative to datum –A–.
F. Assign a tolerance of ±0.5 to all linear dimensions.

Figure P8-35

Project 8-36:
Draw a circular front and the appropriate right-side view of the ob-
ject shown in Figure P8-36 and add the following dimensions and
tolerances.
A. Assign datum –A– as indicated.
B. Assign the object’s longitudinal axis as datum –B–.
C. Assign the object’s centerline through the slot as datum –C–.
D. Assign a tolerance of ±0.5 to all linear tolerances.
E. Assign a tolerance of ±0.5 to all circular features.
F. Assign a parallelism tolerance of 0.01 to both edges of the slot.
G. Assign a perpendicularity tolerance of 0.01 to the outside
edge of the protruding shaft.

Figure P8-39
446 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-37:
Given the two objects shown in Figure P8-37, draw a front and a side
view of each. Assign a tolerance of ±0.5 to all linear dimensions. As-
sign a feature tolerance of ±0.4 to the shaft, and also assign a
straightness tolerance of 0.2 to the shaft’s centerline at MMC.
Tolerance the hole so that it will always accept the shaft with a
minimum clearance of 0.1 and a feature tolerance of 0.2. Assign a
perpendicularity tolerance of 0.05 to the centerline of the hole
at MMC.

Figure P8-37

Project 8-38:
Given the two objects shown in Figure P8-38, draw a front and a side
view of each. Assign a tolerance of ±0.005 to all linear dimensions.
Assign a feature tolerance of ±0.004 to the shaft, and also assign a
straightness tolerance of 0.002 to the shaft’s centerline at MMC.
Tolerance the hole so that it will always accept the shaft with a mini-
mum clearance of 0.001 and a feature tolerance of 0.002.

Figure P8-38
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 447

Project 8-39:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-39, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is datum –B– and is perpendicular to datum –A–
within 0.1 mm.
C. Surface 3 is datum –C– and is parallel to datum A
within 0.3 mm.
D. Locate a 16-mm diameter hole in the center of the front sur-
face that goes completely through the object. Use positional
tolerances to locate the hole. Assign a positional tolerance of
0.02 at MMC perpendicular to datum –A–.

Figure P8-39

Project 8-40:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-40, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is datum –B– and is perpendicular to datum –A–
within .003 in.
C. Surface 3 is parallel to datum –A– within .005 in.
D. The cylinder’s longitudinal centerline is to be straight within
.001 in. at MMC.
E. Surface 2 is to have circular accuracy within .002 in.

Figure P8-40
448 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-41:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-41, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 4 is datum –B– and is perpendicular to datum A
within 0.08 mm.
C. Surface 3 is flat within 0.03 mm.
D. Surface 5 is parallel to datum A within 0.01 mm.
E. Surface 2 has a runout tolerance of 0.2 mm relative to surface 4.
F. Surface 1 is flat within 0.02 mm.
G. The longitudinal centerline is to be straight within 0.02 at
MMC and perpendicular to datum –A–.

Figure P8-41

Project 8-42:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-42, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 2 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 6 is perpendicular to datum –A– with .000 allowable
variance at MMC but with a .002 in. MAX variance limit
beyond MMC.
C. Surface 1 is parallel to datum –A– within .005.
D. Surface 4 is perpendicular to datum –A– within .004 in.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 449

Figure P8-42

Project 8-43:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-43, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is datum –B–.
C. The hole is located using a true position tolerance value of
0.13 mm at MMC. The true position tolerance is referenced
to datums –A– and –B–.
D. Surface 1 is to be straight within 0.02 mm.
E. The bottom surface is to be parallel to datum –A– within
0.03 mm.

Figure P8-43
450 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-44:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-44, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is datum –B–.
C. Surface 3 is perpendicular to surface 2 within 0.02 mm.
D. The four holes are to be located using a positional tolerance
of 0.07 mm at MMC referenced to datums –A– and –B–.
E. The centerlines of the holes are to be straight within 0.01 mm
at MMC.

Figure P8-44

Project 8-45:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-45, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 has a dimension of .378-.375 in. and is datum –A–.
The surface has a dual primary runout with datum –B– to
within .005 in. The runout is total.
B. Surface 2 has a dimension of 1.505-1.495 in. Its runout rela-
tive to the dual primary datums –A– and –B– is .008 in. The
runout is total.
C. Surface 3 has a dimension of 1.000 ± .005 and has no geo-
metric tolerance.
D. Surface 4 has no circular dimension but has a total runout
tolerance of .006 in. relative to the dual datums –A– and –B–.
E. Surface 5 has a dimension of .500-.495 in. and is datum –B–.
It has a dual primary runout with datum –A– within .005 in.
The runout is total.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 451

Figure P8-45

Project 8-46:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-46, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Hole 1 is datum –A–.
B. Hole 2 is to have its circular centerline parallel to datum –A–
within 0.2 mm at MMC when datum –A– is at MMC.
C. Assign a positional tolerance of 0.01 to each hole’s centerline
at MMC.

Figure P8-46
452 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-47:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-47, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is datum –B–.
C. The six holes have a diameter range of .502–.499 in. and are
to be located using positional tolerances so that their centerlines
are within .005 in. at MMC relative to datums –A– and –B–.
D. The back surface is to be parallel to datum –A– within .002 in.

Figure P8-47

Project 8-48:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-48, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Hole 2 is datum –B–.
C. The eight holes labeled 3 have diameters of 8.4-8.3 mm with
a positional tolerance of 0.15 mm at MMC relative to datums
–A– and –B–. Also, the eight holes are to be counterbored to
a diameter of 14.6-14.4 mm and to a depth of 5.0 mm.
D. The large center hole is to have a straightness tolerance of
0.2 at MMC about its centerline.
 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 453

Figure P8-48

Project 8-49:
Draw a model of the object shown in Figure P8-49, then create a
drawing layout including the specified dimensions. Add the follow-
ing tolerances and specifications to the drawing.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is datum –B–.
C. Surface 3 is datum –C–.
D. The four holes labeled 4 have a dimension and tolerance of
8  0.3, -0 mm. The holes are to be located using a positional
tolerance of 0.05 mm at MMC relative to datums –A–, –B–,
and –C–.
E. The six holes labeled 5 have a dimension and tolerance of
6  0.2, - 0 mm. The holes are to be located using a posi-
tional tolerance of 0.01 mm at MMC relative to datums –A–,
–B–, and –C–.

Figure P8-49
454 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Project 8-50:
The objects in Figure P8-50B labeled A and B are to be toleranced
using four different tolerances as shown. Redraw the charts shown in
Figure P8-50A and list the appropriate allowable tolerance for “as
measured” increments of 0.1 mm or .001 in. Also include the appro-
priate geometric tolerance drawing called out above each chart.

Figure P8-50A

Figure P8-50B (A) MILLIMETERS (B) INCHES[

 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 455

Project 8-51:
Assume that there are two copies of the part in Figure P8-51 and that
these parts are to be joined together using four fasteners in the float-
ing condition. Draw front and top views of the object, including di-
mensions and tolerances. Add the following tolerances and specifi-
cations to the drawing, then draw front and top views of a shaft that
can be used to join the two objects. The shaft should be able to fit
into any of the four holes.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is datum –B–.
C. Surface 3 is perpendicular to surface 2 within 0.02 mm.
D. Specify the positional tolerance for the four holes applied
at MMC.
E. The centerlines of the holes are to be straight within 0.01 mm
at MMC.
F. The clearance between the shafts and the holes is to be 0.05
minimum and 0.10 maximum.

Figure P8-51 MILLIMETERS

Project 8-52:
Dimension and tolerance parts 1 and 2 of Figure P8-52 so that part 1
always fits into part 2 with a minimum clearance of .005 in. The tol-
erance for part 1’s outer matching surface is .006 in.
456 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure P8-52 INCHES

Project 8-53:
Dimension and tolerance parts 1 and 2 of Figure P8-53 so that part 1 always fits into part 2 with
a minimum clearance of 0.03 mm. The tolerance for part 1’s diameter is 0.05 mm. Take into ac-
count the fact that the interface is long relative to the diameters.

Figure P8-53 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 8 Tolerancing 457

Project 8-54:
Assume that there are two copies of the part in Figure P8-54 and that
these parts are to be joined together using six fasteners in the float-
ing condition. Draw front and top views of the object, including
dimensions and tolerances. Add the following tolerances and specifi-
cations to the drawing, then draw front and top views of a shaft that
can be used to join the two objects. The shaft should be able to fit
into any of the six holes.
A. Surface 1 is datum –A–.
B. Surface 2 is round within .003.
C. Specify the positional tolerance for the six holes applied
at MMC.
D. The clearance between the shafts and the holes is to be .001
minimum and .003 maximum.

Figure P8-54 INCHES

Project 8-55:
The assembly shown in Figure P8-55 is made from parts defined in
Chapter 5.
1. Draw an exploded assembly drawing.
2. Draw a BOM.
3. Use the drawing layout mode and draw orthographic views of
each part. Include dimensions and geometric tolerances. The
pegs should have a minimum clearance of 0.02. Select appro-
priate tolerances and define them for each hole using posi-
tional tolerance.
458 Chapter 8 Tolerancing

Figure P8-55 MILLIMETERS

Springs 9
Chapter
Objectives
• Show how to draw springs using the Coil tool and the Design Accelerator.
• Show how to draw compression springs.
• Show how to draw extension springs.
• Show how to draw torsion springs.
• Show how to draw Belleville springs.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter shows how to draw springs. Both the Coil tool and the Design Accelerator are used
to draw springs. Compression, extension, torsion, and Belleville springs are introduced.

COMPRESSION SPRINGS
Exercise 9-1: Drawing a Compression Spring Using the Coil Command
1. Start a new Metric drawing using the Standard (mm).ipt format.
2. Create an isometric view and draw a line and a circle as shown in Figure 9-1.
The circle diameter is the wire’s diameter (5), and the distance between the line and the cen-
ter point of the circle equals the spring’s mean diameter (Ø20, R10).

Profile

Axis

Figure 9-1
460 Chapter 9 Springs

3. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.

4. Select the Coil command on the Part Features panel bar.
The Coil dialog box will appear. See Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2

5. Select the circle as the Profile and the line as the Axis.
6. Click on the Coil Size tab on the Coil dialog box.
See Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3
 Chapter 9 Springs 461

7. Set the Pitch value for 8 and the Revolution for 6.

8. Click OK.
See Figure 9-4.

Natural end

Finished spring

Figure 9-4

Coil Ends
The ends of a spring created using the Coil command can be drawn in one of two ways: natural
or flat. Figure 9-5 shows three different possible coil end configurations.

Flat End Flat End Flat End

Transition angle = 0° Transition angle = 90° Transition angle = 90°
Flat angle = 0° Flat angle = 0° Flat angle = 45°
Figure 9-5

Exercise 9-2: Changing the End of a Spring

1. Click the Coil Ends tab on the Coil dialog box.
See Figure 9-6. The spring shown in Figure 9-4 has natural ends. Springs with flat ends must
have their transition and flat angles defined, as was done in Figure 9-5.
462 Chapter 9 Springs

Define coils ends here.

Figure 9-6

Exercise 9-3: Drawing a Compression Spring Using Design Accelerator Options

1. Start a new drawing using the English tab.
2. Select the Standard (in).iam format.
The Assembly Panel will appear. See Figure 9-7.

Click here.

Click here.

Click here.

Figure 9-7

3. Access Design Accelerator by clicking the triangular arrowhead to the right of the
Assembly Panel heading.
4. Select the Compression Spring tool.
The Compression Spring Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 9-8.
5. Enter values for both the Spring Start and Spring End as follows:
Closed End Coils  2.000
Transition Coils  1.000
Ground Coils  0.750
6. Click the Calculation tab.
The dialog box will change. See Figure 9-9.
7. Set the Spring Strength Calculation for Work Forces Calculation.
 Chapter 9 Springs 463

8. Set the Dimension values as follows:

Wire Diameter  0.125
Outside Diameter  0.875
Loose Spring Length  2.00

Set end
values here.

Figure 9-8

Set for Work Forces Calculation.

Set
Enter values.

Click here, then

Set values here.

Figure 9-9
464 Chapter 9 Springs

9. Set the Assembly Dimensions values for the following.

L1,L8--> H
Min. Load Length  1.950
Max. Load Length  1.750
Working Load Length  1.900
10. Click Calculate, then click OK.
Figure 9-10 shows the finished compression spring.

The spring’s ends are square ground. Square-ground ends sit better on flat surfaces and

TIP tend not to buckle when put under a load.

A compression spring coil created

using the Coil tool
Finished
compression
spring

Figure 9-10 Figure 9-11

Exercise 9-4: Drawing a Ground End on a Compression Spring Drawn Using the Coil Command
Figure 9-11 shows a compression spring that was drawn using the Coil command.
1. Create a work plane through one of the end coils.
See Figure 9-12. In this example an XZ work plane was created offset 4.00 from the end of
the spring.
2. Create a new sketch plane on the work plane. Draw a rectangle on the new sketch plane.
Size the rectangle so that it is larger than the outside diameter of the spring.
See Figure 9-13.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Extrude command. Extrude the rectangle so that it
extends beyond the end of the spring.
In this example an extrusion value of 10 was used. See Figure 9-14.
4. Use the Cut option of the Extrude command and cut out the extruded rectangle.
Figure 9-15 shows the finished spring.
 Chapter 9 Springs 465

A 2D rectangle on
the work plane

An XZ work plane offset 4.00

Figure 9-12 Figure 9-13

Extrude the rectangle then

use the Cut option to remove
the extrusion.

Figure 9-14

Finished spring Figure 9-15

466 Chapter 9 Springs

EXTENSION SPRINGS
Exercise 9-5: Drawing an Extension Spring Using the Design Accelerator Tool
1. Start a new drawing using English units and the Standard (in).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator tool by clicking the arrow to the right of the Assembly
Panel heading.
See Figure 9-16.

Click here to
access Design
Accelerator.

Select Tension
Spring.

Figure 9-16

3. Click the Extension Spring tool.

The Extension Spring Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 9-17.
4. Set the following values and inputs:
Coil Direction  right
Wire Diameter  0.125

Click here.

Set length.

Select this option.

Enter values.

Set values.

Figure 9-17a
 Chapter 9 Springs 467

Verify values.

Figure 9-17b

Diameter, Outer  1.000

Start Hook Type  Full Loop
Start Hook Length  0.800
End Hook Type  Full Loop
End Hook Length  0.800
Length Inputs ⴝ n, o --> L0
n  12.000
t  0.25
Click the Calculation tab and verify that the values are as shown in Figure 9-17
5. Click Calculate.
6. Click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
7. Click OK.
The finished extension spring will appear. See Figure 9-18.

If an input error is made, when OK is clicked, a red line will appear across the bottom of

TIP the screen and the incorrect value will be highlighted.

Exercise 9-6: Drawing an Extension Spring Using Coil

1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).ipt format.
2. Draw a Ø5-mm circle 15 mm from a line.
See Figure 9-19.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. Select the Coil command.
The Coil dialog box will appear. See Figure 9-20.
4. Select the circle as the Profile and the line as the Axis. Click the Coil Size tab.
468 Chapter 9 Springs

Finished extension spring

Circle

Line

Figure 9-18 Figure 9-19

Figure 9-20

See Figure 9-21.

5. Set the Pitch for 15, the Revolution for 6.00, and the Taper for 0.00. Click the Coil
Ends tab.

Figure 9-21
 Chapter 9 Springs 469

See Figure 9-22.

6. Set the Start for Flat and both the Transition Angle and Flat Angle for 90°. Set the End
for Flat and the Transition Angle and Flat Angle for 0.00°. Click OK.

Figure 9-22

The finished spring will appear. See Figure 9-23.

7. Rotate the spring so that the start end is completely visible.
See Figure 9-24.
8. Create a new sketch plane aligned with the start end of the spring.
See Figure 9-25.
9. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. Create an XY work plane
aligned with the start end of the spring.

Start end

Figure 9-23 Figure 9-24

470 Chapter 9 Springs

Figure 9-25

To create an XY work plane, click on the Work Plane tool, then on the XY Plane tool lo-
cated under the Origin heading under Part name in the browser box, then click the start end’s
center point.
See Figure 9-26.
10. Add a YZ work plane through the center point of the spring’s start end.
See Figure 9-27.
11. Create a new sketch plane on the YZ work plane and draw a Ø5 circle centered on the
spring’s start end.
See Figure 9-28.

Work plane aligned with start end

Figure 9-26

O5 circle on YZ plane
XY plane

YZ work plane aligned here

Figure 9-27 Figure 9-28
 Chapter 9 Springs 471

12. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. Extrude the Ø5 circle 12 mm
away from the spring.
See Figure 9-29.
13. Rotate the spring and use the Loft command to fill in the area between the extruded cylin-
der and the spring’s start end.
See Figure 9-30.

Use Loft to fill in this area.

Figure 9-29 Figure 9-30

14. Create a new sketch plane on the end of the 12-mm extrusion created in step 12. Draw a
Ø5 circle centered about the center point of the extrusion’s end.
See Figure 9-31.
15. Create a fixed work point on the extrusion’s center point as shown. Create a new sketch
plane on the XY work plane and draw a 15-mm, 180° arc using the Center Point Arc
command, which is a flyout from the Three Point Arc command on the 2D Sketch
Panel.
See Figure 9-32. Use the background grid and visually align the arc’s center point with the
extrusion’s center point.

O5 circle

Figure 9-31
472 Chapter 9 Springs

180°

Fixed work point

Figure 9-32

16. Use the Sweep command to draw the spring’s hooked end.
See Figures 9-33 and 9-34.
17. Apply the same procedure to the other end of the spring.
See Figures 9-35 and 9-36.

Use the Sweep command Hide the work planes

Figure 9-33 Figure 9-34

Figure 9-35
 Chapter 9 Springs 473

Figure 9-36

TORSION SPRINGS
Exercise 9-7: Drawing a Torsion Spring Using Design Accelerator
1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (in).iam format.
2. Access Design Accelerator and select the Torsion Spring option.
The Torsion Spring Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 9-37.
3. Enter the following values:
Coil Direction ⴝ right
Wire Diameter ⴝ 0.125
Diameter, Outer ⴝ 1.2883
Start Arm Length ⴝ 1.25
End Arm Length ⴝ 1.00
Length Inputs  t, n --> L0
Active Coils Number ⴝ 14

Enter value. Select these inputs.

Figure 9-37
474 Chapter 9 Springs

Select here

Select a load that

coils the spring

Select

Enter angle
values here

Figure 9-38

4. Click the Calculate tab and enter the following values and options. See Figure 9-38.
Spring Strength Calculation  Work Forces Calculation
Direction of Spring Load  A Load Coils the Spring
Min. Angular Deflection of Working Arm  12.00
Angle of Working Stroke  28
Angular Deflection of Working Arm  12.00
5. Click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
6. Click OK.
Figure 9-39 shows the finished torsion spring.

Figure 9-39
 Chapter 9 Springs 475

Exercise 9-8: Drawing a Torsion Spring Using the Coil Command

1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).ipt format.
2. Define a wire diameter of 6 mm and a mean diameter of 32 mm.
See Figure 9-40.
3. Access the Coil command and set the Pitch for 10 and the Revolution for 8.
See Figure 9-41.
4. Set the Start for Flat and a Transition Angle and Flat Angle of 90°. Set the End for Flat
and the Transition Angle and Flat Angle for 45°.
See Figure 9-42.

Figure 9-40

Define the pitch and revolution.

Figure 9-41

Define the coil ends.

Figure 9-42
476 Chapter 9 Springs

5. Rotate the spring to access the start end. Create a new sketch plane on the end. Draw a
Ø6-mm circle on the end centered on the end’s center point.
See Figure 9-43.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option. Extrude the start end 50 mm.
See Figure 9-44.

7. Extrude the other spring end 50 mm.

Figure 9-45 shows the finished spring.

Draw circle
Figure 9-43

Define extrusion

Figure 9-44

Figure 9-45
 Chapter 9 Springs 477

BELLEVILLE SPRINGS
A Belleville spring is a disklike device that resists bending. Belleville springs can be stacked to- Belleville spring: A disklike
gether, all bending in the same direction, or stacked in opposition. The Design Accelerator can device that resists bending;
be used to generate either condition. springs can be stacked bending
in the same direction or in op-
Exercise 9-9: Drawing a Belleville Spring Using Design Accelerator position.

1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (in).ipt format.

2. Access Design Accelerator and click the Belleville Spring option.
The Belleville Spring Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 9-46.
3. Click on the arrow to the right of the Single-disk Spring Dimensions heading.
A list of options will cascade down.
4. Select the 3.000 in x 1.500 in x 0.100 in x 0.175 in option.
See Figure 9-47.
5. Enter the Height value.

Click here

Figure 9-46

Select here

Figure 9-47
478 Chapter 9 Springs

In this example a value of 0.16 was used. See Figure 9-48

6. Click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
7. Click OK.
The finished spring will appear. See Figure 9-49. Figure 9-50 shows orthographic views of
the spring.

Enter height value.

Figure 9-48

Finished Belleville spring Orthographic views of a Belleville spring.

Figure 9-49

Figure 9-50
 Chapter 9 Springs 479

SPRINGS IN ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS

Figure 9-51 shows five components that are to be assembled together. The drawing was created
using the Standard (in).iam format, and the springs were created using Design Accelerator.
Figure 9-52 shows dimensioned drawings of the Blocks and the Post. Figure 9-53 shows the
values used with the Compression Spring Generator located on the Design Accelerator.
The assembly procedure presented here represents one of several possible procedures.

Spring

Post
Spring

Back Block

Front Block
Figure 9-51

Back Block
Front Block

Post, Spring

Figure 9-52
480 Chapter 9 Springs

Figure 9-53a

Figure 9-53b

Exercise 9-10: Creating a Work Axis on the Front Block

1. Right-click on the Front Block and select the Edit option.
The other components will fade to a lighter color.
2. Create a work axis through the center point of the through hole.
3. Create a new sketch plane aligned with the bottom surface of the shallow hole. Click the
right mouse button and select the Finish Sketch (not Finish Edit) option. Create a work
point on the center point of the shallow hole.
 Chapter 9 Springs 481

See Figure 9-54.

4. Create an XY work plane aligned with the work point.
5. Create a work axis perpendicular to the work plane through the work point.
See Figure 9-55.
6. Right-click the mouse and select Finish Edit.

Work point

Work point
Create a plane aligned with this
surface, then create a work axis
Create a work axis. perpendicular to the surface through the work point.
Figure 9-54 Figure 9-55

Exercise 9-11: Adding a Work Axis to the Springs

1. In the browser box, click the Compression Spring heading, then click the Work Axis
heading.
See Figure 9-56.
2. Right-click on WorkAxis1 and select the Visibility option.
The work axis will appear on the spring. See Figure 9-57.
3. Repeat the procedure for the second spring.

Create a work axis

on both springs.

Figure 9-56 Figure 9-57

482 Chapter 9 Springs

Exercise 9-12: Assembling the Components

1. Insert the Post into the Front Block.
See Figure 9-58. If the front surface of the Front Block is used, offset the post ⴚ0.75 so that
it aligns with the back surface of the Front Block.
2. Rotate one of the springs so that the ground end is accessible. Use the Mate Constraint
and align the spring’s ground surface with the front surface of the Front Block.
See Figure 9-59.
3. Use the Mate Constraint to align the spring’s work axis with the work axis through the
through hole.
See Figure 9-60.
4. Repeat the procedure to position the second spring.
See Figure 9-61.
5. Add the Rear Block to the assembly.
See Figure 9-62.

Figure 9-58 Figure 9-59

Figure 9-60 Figure 9-61

 Chapter 9 Springs 483

Figure 9-62

SUMMARY
This chapter showed how to draw four types of springs— as natural ends and flat ends with different transition and flat
compression, extension, torsion, and Belleville—using both angles were illustrated.
the Coil and the Design Accelerator tools. Coil features such

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. A compression spring is one in which the forces 4. A compression spring is defined using the Coil command
a. Twist the spring by defining
b. Pull the spring apart lengthwise
a. An axis and a work plane
c. Push the spring together lengthwise
b. An axis and a profile
2. An extension spring is one in which the forces c. A work plane and a work axis
a. Twist the spring 5. Which of the following is not a type of hook for an exten-
b. Pull the spring apart lengthwise sion spring
c. Push the spring together lengthwise
a. Full loop
3. A torsion spring is one in which the forces b. Raised hook
a. Twist the spring c. Back loop
b. Pull the spring apart lengthwise d. Double twisted full loop
c. Push the spring together lengthwise

Matching
Match the following notations with their definition for creating a spring using the Design Accelerator.

Column A Column B
a. n 1. Wire diameter
b. D1 2. Outer spring diameter
c. d 3. Number of active coils
d. L0 4. Spring start ground coils
e. z01 5. Loose spring length
 484 Chapter 9 Springs

True or False
1. True or False: Springs can be drawn using either the 4. True or False: Belleville springs have coils.
Coil tool or the tools in the Design Accelerator. 5. True or False: The pitch of a spring is the distance from
2. True or False: The ends of compression springs are the center of one coil to the center of the next coil.
often ground flat. 6. True or False: The coil direction of a spring can be either
3. True or False: Extension springs have hooked ends. left or right.

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 9-1: Inches
A. Draw the following springs using the Coil command.
Mean Diameter  2.00
Wire Diameter  0.125
Pitch  0.375
Revolution  16
Ends  Natural
B. Draw a second spring from the same data that has ground ends
and a preloaded length of 5.00.

Project 9-2: Inches

A. Draw the following springs using the Coil command.
Mean Diameter  0.50
Wire Diameter  0.06
Pitch  0.12
Revolution  10
Ends  Flat, Transition angle  90°, Flat angle  0° Figure P9-1
B. Draw a second spring from the same data that has ground ends
and a preloaded length of 1.00.

Project 9-3: Millimeters

A. Draw the following springs using the Coil command.
Mean Diameter  8
Wire Diameter  3
Pitch  4
Revolution  20
Ends  Natural
B. Draw a second spring from the same data that has ground ends
and a preloaded length of 65.00.

Project 9-4: Millimeters

A. Draw the following springs using the Coil command.
Mean Diameter  24
Wire Diameter  12
Pitch  14
Revolution  6 Figure P9-2
 Chapter 9 Springs 485

Figure P9-3 Figure P9-4

Ends  Flat, Transition Angle  90°, Flat Angle  45°

B. Draw a second spring from the same data that has ground ends
and a preloaded length of 75.00.

Project 9-5: Millimeters

Draw the following springs using the Coil command.
Mean Diameter  25
Wire  5  5 square
Pitch  6
Revolution  8
Ends  Natural Figure P9-5
Draw the following compression springs using the Design
Accelerator tool.

Project 9-6: Inches

Wire Diameter  0.072
Outside Diameter  0.625
Loose Spring Length  3.15
Min. Load Length  3.00
Working Stroke  0.15
Max. Load Length  2.95
Coil Direction  right
Active Coils  16
Both coils
Closed End Coils  1.5
Transition Coils  1.0
Ground Coils  0.75

Project 9-7: Inches

Wire Diameter  0.2437
Outside Diameter  1.250
Loose Spring Length  4.1
Min. Load Length  3.825 Figure P9-6 Figure P9-7
486 Chapter 9 Springs

Working Stroke  0.20

Max. Load Length  3.82
Coil Direction  left
Active Coils  9
Both coils
Closed End Coils  1.5
Transition Coils  1.0
Ground Coils  0.75

Project 9-8: Millimeters

Wire Diameter  3.00
Outside Diameter  20.0
Loose Spring Length  81.0 Figure P9-8
Min. Load Length  80.0
Working Stroke  4.0
Max. Load Length  80.0
Coil Direction  right
Active Coils  10
Both coils
End Coils  1.5
Transition Coils  1.0
Ground Coils  0.75

Project 9-9: Millimeters

Wire Diameter  5.0
Outer Diameter  30.0
Loose Spring Length  101.0 Figure P9-9
Min. Load Length  100.0
Working Stroke  6.0
Working Load Length  94.0
Coil Direction  right
Active Coils  9
Both coils
End Coils  1.5
Transition Coils  1.0
Ground Coils  0.75
Draw the following extension springs using the Design Accelerator tool.
Note: L0 < Lc < L8. The Custom Length of the spring must be greater than
the Loose Spring Length and less then the Max. Load Length.

Project 9-10: Inches

Spring Prestress  With Prestress
Coil Direction  right
Wire Diameter  0.0938
Outer Diameter  1.000
Min. Load Length  6.00 Figure P9-10
 Chapter 9 Springs 487

Active Coils Number  12

Both hooks
Spring Hook  Half Hook
Spring Hook Height  0.50
Working Stroke  0.25
Working Load Length  6.1

Project 9-11: Inches

Spring Prestress  With Prestress
Coil Direction  Right
Wire Diameter  0.1000
Outer Diameter  1.500
Loose Spring Length  6.00
Active Coils Number  16
Both hooks
Spring Hook  Non-specified Hook Type
Max. Load Length  6.25
Working Stroke  0.300
Working Load Length  6.00
Figure P9-11
Project 9-12: Millimeters
Spring Prestress  Without Prestress
Coil Direction  right
Wire Diameter  4
Outer Diameter  22
Loose Spring Length  130
Active Coils Number  8
Both hooks
Spring Hook  Raised Hook
Hook Length  16.936
Max. Load Spring Length  138
Figure P9-12
Working Stroke  4
Working Load Length  136

Project 9-13: Millimeters

Spring Prestress  With Prestress
Coil Direction  right
Wire Diameter  3.75
Outer Diameter  40
Loose Spring Length  64.923
Active Coils Number  4.18
Both hooks
Spring Hook  Half Hook
Hook Length  22.514
Max. Load Spring Length  80
Working Stroke  6 Figure P9-13
488 Chapter 9 Springs

Working Load Length  74

Draw the following extension springs using the Coil command.

Project 9-14: Inches

Wire Diameter  0.19
Mean Diameter  1.00
Pitch  .375
Revolution  12
Taper  0
Start Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  90.0°, Flat Angle  90.0°
End Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  0.0°, Flat Angle  0.0°
Extension Distance  0.50
Arc Radius  1.00

Project 9-15: Inches

Wire Diameter  0.375
Mean Diameter  1.50 Figure P9-14
Pitch  .625
Revolution  24
Taper  0
Start Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  90.0°, Flat Angle  90.0°
End Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  0.0°, Flat Angle  0.0°
Extension Distance  1.50
Arc Radius  1.50

Project 9-16: Millimeters

Wire Diameter  16
Mean Diameter  30
Pitch  30
Revolution  10
Taper  0
Start Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  90.0°, Flat Angle  90.0°
End Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  0.0°, Flat Angle  0.0°
Extension Distance  18
Arc Radius  30 Figure P9-15

Figure P9-16
 Chapter 9 Springs 489

Project 9-17: Millimeters

Wire Diameter  8
Mean Diameter  24
Pitch  14
Revolution  16
Taper  0
Start Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  90.0°, Flat Angle  90.0°
End Coil End  Flat, Transition Angle  0.0°, Flat Angle  0.0°
Extension Distance  26
Arc Radius  24
Draw the following torsion springs using the Design Accelerator tool. Use the
default values for any values not specified.

Figure P9-18
Figure P9-17

Project 9-18: Inches

Coil Direction  right
Straight torsion arms
A Load Coils the Spring
Wire Diameter  0.1055
Outside Diameter  0.875
Start Arm Length  1.50
End Arm Length  0.75
Active Coils Number  12
Min. Angular Deflection of Working Arm  12
Angle of Working Stroke  36
Angular Deflection of Working Arm  15

Project 9-19: Inches

Coil Direction  right
Straight torsion arms
A Load Uncoils the Spring
Wire Diameter  0.072
Outside Diameter  0.500 Figure P9-19
490 Chapter 9 Springs

Start Arm Length  0.50

End Arm Length  0.50
Active Coils Number  18
Min. Angular Deflection of Working Arm  20
Angle of Working Stroke  10
Angular Deflection of Working Arm  30

Project 9-20: Millimeters

Coil Direction  left
Straight torsion arms
A Load Coils the Spring
Wire Diameter  2.00
Outside Diameter  16
Arm of Working Force  20.0
Arm of Support  20.0
Active Coils Number  10
Min. Angular Deflection of Working Arm  10
Angle of Working Stroke  40
Angular Deflection of Working Arm  10 Figure P9-20

Project 9-21: Millimeters

Coil Direction  right
Straight torsion arms
A Load Uncoils the Spring
Wire Diameter  3.0
Mean Diameter  40
Arm of Working Force  35
Arm of Support  30
Active Coils Number  20
Min. Angular Deflection of Working Arm  15
Angle of Working Stroke  50
Angular Deflection of Working Arm  15
Draw the following torsion springs using the Coil command.
Figure P9-21

Project 9-22: Inches

Create a drawing using the Standard (in).ipt format.
Wire Diameter  0.19
Mean Diameter  1.25
Pitch  0.375
Revolution  12
Start Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  90°, Flat Angle  90°
End Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  45°, Flat Angle  45°
Arm Length (both arms)  2.00
 Chapter 9 Springs 491

Figure P9-22 Figure P9-23

Project 9-23: Inches

Create a drawing using the Standard (in).ipt format.
Wire Diameter  0.06
Mean Diameter  0.50
Pitch  0.125
Revolution  20
Start Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  90°, Flat Angle  90°
End Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  45°, Flat Angle  45°
Arm Length (both arms)  1.00

Project 9-24: Millimeters

Create a drawing using the Standard (mm).ipt format.
Wire Diameter  4.0
Mean Diameter  12.0

Figure P9-24
492 Chapter 9 Springs

Pitch  6
Revolution  18
Start Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  90°, Flat Angle  90°
End Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  45°, Flat Angle  45°
Arm Length (both arms)  15

Project 9-25: Millimeters

Create a drawing using the Standard (mm).ipt format.
Wire Diameter  5
Mean Diameter  40.0
Pitch  10
Revolution  18
Start Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  90°, Flat Angle  90°
End Coil  Flat, Transition Angle  45°, Flat Angle  45°
Arm Length (both arms)  60

Figure P9-25

Project 9-26: Inches

Draw the Damper Assembly shown in Figure P9-26. This exercise is
loosely based on a damper system placed under the seat of helicopter
pilots to help minimize the amount of vibration they are subjected to.
Spring data:
Spring Strength Calculation  Work Forces Calculation
Wire Diameter  0.125
Outside Diameter  1.000
Min. Load Length  2.10
Working Stroke  0.25
Working Load Length  2.00
Both coils
Closed End Coils  1.50
Transition Coils  1.00
 Chapter 9 Springs 493

Damper Assembly

8 Holes

Figure P9-26 (Continued)

494 Chapter 9 Springs

Figure P9-26

Ground Coils  0.75

Active Coils  10
Draw the following:
A. An assembly drawing
B. A presentation drawing
C. An exploded isometric drawing
D. A parts list
 Chapter 9 Springs 495

Project 9-27: Millimeters

Draw the Circular Damper Assembly shown in Figure P9-27.
The Threaded Post is M18  530 mm.
Spring data:
Wire Diameter  3.0
Outer Diameter  28
Loose Spring Length  81

Figure P9-27 (Continued)

496 Chapter 9 Springs

Holes are
3 deep

Figure P9-27

Min. Load Length  80

Working Stroke  5
Working Load Length  78
Coil Direction  Right
Closed End Coils  1.5
Transition Coils  1.00
Ground Coils  0.75
Active Coils  16
Draw the following:
A. An assembly drawing
B. A presentation drawing
C. An exploded isometric drawing
D. A parts list
Shafts 10
Chapter
Objectives
• Show how to use Design Accelerator to draw shafts.
• Show how to add retaining ring grooves to shafts.
• Show how to add keyways to shafts.
• Show how to add O-ring grooves to a shaft
• Show how to add pin holes to a shaft.
• Show how to use the Content Center to add retaining rings, keys, O-rings, and pins to shafts.

INTRODUCTION
The Design Accelerator tool can be used to draw many different styles of shafts. Figure 10-1
shows a uniform shaft with chamfered ends that was created using Design Accelerator. Shafts
may also be created by extruding a circle, but the Design Accelerator allows features such as
keyways and retaining ring grooves to easily be added to the shaft.

A shaft created using the

Design Accelerator command

Figure 10-1

UNIFORM SHAFTS AND CHAMFERS

Exercise 10-1: Drawing a Uniform Shaft with Chamfered Ends
The shaft is to be Ø1.00 × 4.00 in.
1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (in).iam format.
2. Click the arrow to the right of the Assembly Panel heading and access the Design Accel-
erator tool.
See Figure 10-2.
498 Chapter 10 Shafts

Click here.

Figure 10-2

The Shaft Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-3.
The Shaft Component Generator dialog box shows a shaft made of four sections. These
sections can be manipulated or deleted as needed, making it easier to create a shaft than if you had
to start from scratch.

Click here to remove the

last section of the shaft.

Figure 10-3

Exercise 10-2: Deleting a Shaft Section

1. Move the cursor onto the shaft section to be deleted and click the mouse.
The section’s heading will highlight.
2. Click the X box in the lower right corner of the section’s heading.
The section will be deleted. See Figure 10-3. Repeat the procedure deleting both the Cone
and 3 ⴛ 3.5 Cylinder sections. Retain the 2 ⴛ 4 Cylinder section. See Figure 10-4.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 499

Click here to enter shaft's

diameter and length.

Other sections removed

Do not click OK.

Figure 10-4

Exercise 10-3: Defining the Cylinder’s Diameter and Length

1. Click the Section properties box.
The Cylinder dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-5.
2. Click to the right of the default diameter value. Note:
An arrowhead will appear. Do not cli
ck the OK
the cylind bu
3. Click the arrowhead. er has be tton until
defined. en comple
If y tely
A listing of standard shaft diameter values will cascade down. create a s ou do, Inventor will
econd sha
the cham ft
See Figure 10-5. f ers. If th adding
delete th is happen
e incomple s,
4. Select the appropriate diameter. te shaft.
In this example a value of 1.00 was selected.
5. Repeat the procedure for the shaft’s length.
In this example a length of 3.00 was selected.
See Figure 10-6.

To define the shaft’s diameter

Click here.

Click here.

Select
Figure 10-5
500 Chapter 10 Shafts

To define the shaft’s length

Click here.

Click here.

Select
Figure 10-6 Do not click OK.

Exercise 10-4: Creating Chamfers

1. Click the First Edge Feature box.
See Figure 10-7.
2. Select the Chamfer option.
The Chamfer dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-8.

First Edge Feature

Click here.

Enter chamfer values.

Figure 10-7 Figure 10-8

3. Enter the chamfer values. Note:

In this example a value of .200 in × 45° was entered. The prev
ie
pears on w of the shaft
4. Click the check mark box. the scre that ap-
size and en
location will show the
A preview of the chamfers will appear. of the c
hamf er
s.
5. Click the Second Edge Feature box and create a
chamfer of the same size on the right edge of the shaft.
See Figure 10-9.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 501

6. Click the check mark box.

A preview of the
chamfer will appear
on the shaft.

Second
Edge Feature

Enter
chamfer
Select
values.
Chamfer.

Figure 10-9

7. Click OK.
A preview of the chamfers will appear on the shaft.

The File Naming dialog box will appear.

8. Click OK.
A grayed picture of the shaft will appear on the screen.
9. Click the left mouse button.
Figure 10-10 shows the finished shaft.

Finished shaft

Figure 10-10

SHAFTS AND RETAINING RINGS retaining ring: Used to pre-

vent longitudinal movement of
Retaining rings are used to prevent longitudinal movement of shafts. Grooves are cut into the a shaft. The ring fits into a
shafts and the rings fitted into the groves. Both internal and external rings are available. groove cut into the shaft.
502 Chapter 10 Shafts

For this section, grooves will be cut into a Ø20 shaft to match the requirements of a BS 3673:
Part 1 – Metric external retaining ring. From the information given in the Content Center, the
shaft’s groove must have a diameter of 19.05 and a width of 2.184. The selection of a retaining ring
in a design situation is based on load and size requirements.
Exercise 10-5: Drawing a Shaft with Retaining Rings
This example will use a Ø20-mm × 80-mm shaft with two retaining rings, one located 3 mm from
each end. The shaft will be made from two Ø20 × 40 shafts. (One Ø20 × 80 shaft could also be used.)
1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator by clicking the arrow to the right of the Assembly Panel
heading.
3. Click the Shaft option.
4. Remove the middle two elements of the default shaft setup.
Exercise 10-2 explains how to remove default sections.
See Figure 10-11.

Remove other shaft elements.

Figure 10-11

5. Click the Section properties box for each section and change the existing diameter and
length values to Ø20 and 40 by clicking the existing values and entering the new values.
See Figure 10-12.
6. Click the Section Features box and select the Add Retaining Ring option.
See Figure 10-13.
A new box defining the Retaining ring 20 will appear.

Click here to define

shaft values.

Define right Enter new

half of shaft. shaft values.
Define shaft values.

Figure 10-12
 Chapter 10 Shafts 503

See Figure 10-14. Note that a preview of the retaining ring groove will appear on the shaft in
the drawing screen.

Inventor will automatically enter a diameter value for the groove diameter and the groove

TIP width. In this example values of 19.000 and 2.000 appear.

7. Click the Retaining ring 20 box.

Click here.

New box will appear.

Select here.

Figure 10-13 Figure 10-14

The Retaining Ring Groove dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-15.
8. Define the Diameter as 19.05 and the Width as 2.184.
These values were derived from the Content Center as required by the selected BS 3673:
Part 1 – Metric retaining ring.

Select
second
edge.

Enter values.

Figure 10-15
9. Define the x distance as 3 and change the ring’s position to Measure from second edge.
Remember that the shaft was made from two sections. The first edge of the second section is
located toward the center of the combined shafts.
10. Click OK.
11. Click the other section of the shaft in the Shaft Component Generator dialog box.
See Figure 10-16.
504 Chapter 10 Shafts

Click here.

Figure 10-16

12. Click the Retaining ring 20 box.

The Retaining Ring Groove dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-17.
13. Define the Diameter as 19.05 and the Width as 2.184.
14. Define the x distance as 3 and change the ring’s position to Measure from first edge.
15. Click OK.

Select
first
edge.

Enter values.

Figure 10-17

The shaft is now fitted with two grooves for retaining rings.
16. Click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
17. Click OK.
A grayed picture of the shaft will appear.
18. Left-click the mouse.
19. Save the shaft.
See Figure 10-18.

To add retaining rings to the shaft

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Place from Content Center option.
The Place from Content Center dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-19.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 505

Shaft with retaining

ring grooves

Figure 10-18

Click here.

Select here.

Click here.

Figure 10-19

2. Click Shaft Parts, Circlips, External, and select the BS 3673: Part 1 - Metric ring.
The BS 3673: Part 1 - Metric dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-20.

Select shaft
diameter.

Figure 10-20
506 Chapter 10 Shafts

3. Select the 20 Shaft Diameter.

4. Click the Table View tab and verify that the re- Note:
quired groove diameter is 19.05 and the groove Select
the
width is 2.184. edge o Measure fr
ption . om firs
t
See Figure 10-21.

Click here

Note these values

Figure 10-21

5. Click OK and add two rings to the drawing.

See Figure 10-22.
6. Use the Constraint tool to position the retaining rings in the grooves on the shaft.
See Figure 10-23.

Finished shaft with

retaining rings Shaft with retaining rings
Figure 10-22 Figure 10-23
 Chapter 10 Shafts 507

SHAFTS AND KEYS

Keys are used with shafts to transfer rotary motion and torque. Figure 10-24 shows a hub that has
been inserted onto a shaft with a square key between the hub and shaft. As the shaft turns, the mo-
tion and torque of the shaft will be transferred through the key into the hub.
There are five general types of keys: Pratt and Whitney, square, rectangular, Woodruff, and
Gib. See Figure 10-25.

Keyway

Square key
Shaft

Keyway

Hub
Figure 10-24

Keys

Woodruff

Square

Gib

Rectangular

Pratt and Whitney Figure 10-25

SQUARE KEYS
This exercise will place a keyway in a Ø30  60 shaft. A rectangular IS 2048 B key will be
used. In an actual design situation the key selected would be based on load and size
considerations.

Exercise 10-6: Drawing a Keyway on a Shaft

1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Right-click the mouse and click the Place from Content Center option.
See Figure 10-26.
508 Chapter 10 Shafts

Figure 10-26

3. Click Shaft Parts, Keys, Keys - Machine, and select the Rectangular option.
The Rectangular key options will be shown. See Figure 10-27.

Figure 10-27

4. Select the IS 2048 B key.

The IS 2048 B dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-28.
5. Select the Shaft Diameter range 22 - 30.
Note that the width × height of the key is listed as 8  7 and that the key’s nominal length is 18.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 509

Figure 10-28

6. Click the Table View tab and record the specified keyway values.
The required keyway depth is 4, and the keyway length is 24. See Figure 10-29.
7. Click OK and add a rectangular key to the drawing.
Create a Ø30  60 shaft.
1. Access the Design Accelerator, then click the Shaft option.
The previous shaft data will appear on the screen. These data could be erased and a new shaft
created, but Inventor allows you to easily modify an existing shaft using dynamic inputs.
2. Delete the retaining ring values and one of the two Ø20 × 40 shafts.

Keyway values

Figure 10-29

Assure that no chamfers or end rounds have been included on the regenerated shaft. If

TIP there are, enter a No feature option for both ends of the shaft.

See Figure 10-30. Note the brown filled circles at each end of the cylinder. These are the
dynamic inputs for changing the diameter and length of the shaft.
510 Chapter 10 Shafts

Click here for

dynamic inputs.

Remove any chamfers or rounds.

Enter the No features option.

Dynamic inputs

Figure 10-30
3. Click one of the dynamic arrows on the YZ plane and drag the shaft to a new diameter of 30.
4. Use the dynamic arrows to change the length to 60.
See Figure 10-31.

New shaft values

Figure 10-31

The dynamic inputs are preset to specific increments. If you need a shaft size that is not

TIP included in the preset list, click the Cylinder box and enter the desired values.

5. Click the Second Edge Features box and select a Plain Keyway Groove option.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 511

See Figure 10-32. A default keyway will be added to the shaft. This keyway will be modified
to fit the selected 8  7 × 18 rectangular key.

Click here.

Preview

Select here.

Figure 10-32

6. Click the Second Edge Features box again.

The Plain Keyway Groove dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-33.

Position the keyway.

Figure 10-33

7. Enter the appropriate values.

In this example T = 4.00, L = 25, and B = 8.00. The length of the keyway could be any num-
ber greater than 18. The angle value is used to position the keyway. A 1 × 45° chamfer will auto-
matically be added unless you enter a 0 value for Z.
8. Click OK.
The Shaft Component Generator dialog box will appear.
9. Click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
10. Click OK.
512 Chapter 10 Shafts

Figure 10-34 shows the shaft with a keyway and the shaft assembled with the 8 × 7 × 18 key.

Keyway

1 x 45° Chamfer
Figure 10-34

This section shows how to draw shafts and keyways using the tools on the 2D Sketch Panel
and the Part Features panel bar.

Exercise 10-7: Drawing a Keyway

Figure 10-35 shows a Ø30 × 60 shaft drawn by first drawing a Ø30 circle using the Circle tool from
the 2D Sketch Panel and then extruding to a height of 60 using the Extrude tool on the Part Fea-
tures panel bar. Draw a keyway that is 8 wide, 4 deep, and 18 long with end radius equal to 4.
1. Create a work plane tangent to the edge of the shaft.
2. Create a new sketch plane on the work plane and draw an 8 × 22 rectangle. The 22 value
includes the 4 needed to create the radius at the end of the keyway.
See Figure 10-36.

Work plane

O30 x 60 Shaft

Figure 10-35 Figure 10-36

3. Use the Cut option on the Extrude tool to cut out the keyway.
4. Draw an R4 radius at the end of the keyway.
See Figure 10-37. Figure 10-38 shows the finished keyway.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 513

R4 Fillet

Shaft with keyway

Figure 10-37 Figure 10-38

PRATT AND WHITNEY KEYS

Pratt and Whitney keys are similar to square keys but have rounded ends. See Figure 10-25. Pratt and Whitney key: A
key similar to a square key but
Exercise 10-8: Drawing a Shaft with a Pratt and Whitney Keyway with rounded ends.

1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.

2. Access the Design Accelerator and select the Shaft option.
3. Draw a Ø30 × 65 shaft with 3 × 45° chamfers at each end.
See Figure 10-39.

Create a shaft
with chamfered
ends.

Figure 10-39

4. Select Add Keyway groove.

See Figure 10-40. The Keyway dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-41.
514 Chapter 10 Shafts

Click here.
Select here.

Figure 10-40

Click here.
Click here to access the
Content Center.

Figure 10-41

5. Access the Content Center. Click Keys, Rounded, then select the ISO 2491 A key.
See Figure 10-42.
6. Return to the Keyway dialog box.
See Figure 10-43.
The grayed numbers cannot be changed; they were generated when the ISO 2491 A key was
selected. The values in black can be changed.
7. Change the distance value to 16; click OK.
Figure 10-44 shows the finished keyway.
8. Access the Place from Content Center dialog box and add the key.
See Figure 10-45.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 515

Click here.

Click here.

Select
here.

Figure 10-42

Select key from Content Center.

Click here to access the
Content Center.

Enter distance value.

Figure 10-43

Keyway
ISO 2491A Key

Keyway

Shaft

Figure 10-44 Figure 10-45

9. Use the Constraint tool and place the key into the keyway.
See Figure 10-46.
Figure 10-47 shows the shaft and key mounted into a hub.
516 Chapter 10 Shafts

Key

Hub

Figure 10-46 Shaft Figure 10-47

Exercise 10-9: Drawing a Pratt and Whitney Keyway Using the Key Connection Option on Design
Accelerator
1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator and select the Shaft option.
3. Draw a Ø30 × 65 shaft.
See Figure 10-48.
4. Click the Key Connection option on the Design Accelerator.
The Key Connection tool is a flyout from the Shaft tool.
See Figure 10-49. The Parallel Key Connection Generator box will appear. See Figure 10-50.

O30 x 65 Shaft

Click here.

Figure 10-48 Figure 10-49

Select a key. Access Content

Center here.

Figure 10-50
 Chapter 10 Shafts 517

5. Access the Content Center and select a key.

6. Click the Groove with Rounded Edges box, then click the rounded side of the shaft.
See Figure 10-51.

Preview

1. Click

5. Click
2. Click

3. Click
6. Click

4. Click
Figure 10-51
The Planar Face of Work Plane box will automatically be highlighted. A preview of the
shaft will appear on the shaft. See Figure 10-52. The arrows on the preview can be used to con-
trol the position, length, and orientation of the keyway.
7. Edit the keyway as needed, click the Insert Key box, click the Insert Hub Groove box,
then click OK.
Figure 10-53 shows the finished keyway.

This arrow controls the length of the keyway.

This arrow controls keyway orientation.

This arrow controls key location.

Figure 10-52

Finished keyway

Figure 10-53
518 Chapter 10 Shafts

Exercise 10-10: Creating a Plain Groove Keyway at the End of a Shaft

Plain grooves are used with square keys.
1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator and select the Shaft option.
3. Draw a Ø30 × 65 shaft.
4. Access the Key Connection option on the Design Accelerator.
5. Select a key.
6. Click the Plain Groove box.
See Figure 10-54.

Select key

Preview

1. Click

5. Click

2. Click
6. Click
3. Click
4. Click

Enter Radius value.

Click here to create a plain groove.
Figure 10-54

7. Click the Reference 1 box, and click the rounded side of the shaft.
The Reference 2 box will automatically be highlighted.
8. Click the end of the shaft, click the Insert Key box, click the Insert Hub Groove box,
then click OK.
Figure 10-55 shows the resulting plain groove.

Finished plain groove

Figure 10-55
 Chapter 10 Shafts 519

WOODRUFF KEYS
Woodruff keys are crescent shaped. The crescent shape allows for some slight rotation between Woodruff key: A crescent-
the shaft and hub. shaped key that allows for
some slight rotation between
Exercise 10-11: Drawing a Shaft with a Woodruff Key the shaft and hub.

1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.

2. Access the Design Center tool, click Shaft Parts, click Keys, then click Keys -
Woodruff.
See Figure 10-56.

Click
here.

Select here.

Click
here.

Figure 10-56

3. Select an IS 2294 (I) key, then a shaft diameter of 32 - 38.

See Figure 10-57. The Table View listed for the IS 2294 (I) key will be used to create the
shaft keyway.

Select here.

Figure 10-57
520 Chapter 10 Shafts

4. Click Apply.
The key will appear on the screen. We need to deter-
Note:
mine the size of the key to create an appropriate keyway in The dep
th
the shaft. Refer to the table values in Figure 10-57. The and the of the keyway
key dia is
meter is 10,
Woodruff key diameter is 32, and the shaft seat depth is 32.
10. The key itself has a height of 13.
5. Access the Design Accelerator and draw a Ø32 × 65 shaft. Create
a YZ work plane through the center of the shaft and create a new sketch plane on
the work plane.
See Figure 10-58.

O32 x 65 Shaft
YZ work plane

Figure 10-58

6. Use the Look At command to rotate the shaft into a 2D view and add lines and a circle as
shown in Figure 10-59.
The 28 distance was selected at random; all other dimensions came from the Table View val-
ues for the key.

Figure 10-59

7. Return to an isometric view and select the Extrude tool. Use the Cut and Intersection
options to create a cylinder from the circle drawn in step 6.
See Figures 10-60 and 10-61.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 521

Select here.

Figure 10-60

Key

Shaft

Figure 10-61

8. Use the Constraint command to locate the key into the shaft’s keyway.
See Figure 10-62.

Finished drawing
Figure 10-62
522 Chapter 10 Shafts

You may have to use work planes to locate the key into the shaft.

TIP
Figure 10-63 shows a hub design to fit over the shaft and Woodruff key shown in Fig-
ure 10-62. The 19.3 dimension value was derived from adding the bore hole radius of 16.0 to a
hub depth value of 3.3 listed in the Table View for the key.

Based on values from Table View

Radius of shaft = 16
Hub depth = 3.3

Finished hub with keyway

Figure 10-63

SHAFTS WITH SPLINES

splines: A series of cutouts in Splines are a series of cutouts in a shaft that are sized to match a corresponding set of cutouts in
a shaft that are sized to match a hub. Splines are used to transmit torque.
a corresponding set of cutouts
in a hub; they are used to
transmit torque.

Splines are generally used on larger shafts. Smaller shafts use setscrews or pins.

TIP
Exercise 10-12: Drawing a Spline
1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam
format. Note:
2. Access the Design Accelerator and create a Ø32 ×
The sha
65 shaft. ft
drawn d could have be
irectly o en
See Figure 10-64. drawing nt
using th he .iam
Compo
nent co Create
e
mmand
.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 523

Create a O32 x 65 shaft.

Figure 10-64

3. Access the Design Accelerator and click the Parallel Spline Connection.
See Figure 10-65.
The Parallel Splines Connection Generator dialog Note:
box will appear. See Figure 10-66. The Pa
ra
tion is llel Spline Co
from th nnec-
a flyout
tool. e Shaf
t

Note:
The seq
ue
create a nce of clicks u
spline is sed to
critical.

Access the parallel

spline tool.

Figure 10-65

4. Set the Splines Type for light, the Spline dimension for 6 × 28 × 32, the spline Length
for 12, and Radius for 4.
See Figure 10-67.

The outside diameter of the spline must equal the outside diameter of the shaft

TIP
524 Chapter 10 Shafts

Number of teeth
Inside diameter

Outside diameter

Enter length value

Select here

Figure 10-66

Set value.

1. Click

Set
value.
5. Click here

2. Click shaft
4. Click here
3. Click end surface
Figure 10-67

5. Click the Reference 1 box, click the rounded sides of the shaft (the Reference 2 box will
automatically become active), click the flat end of the shaft, click the right box in the
Select Objects to Generate box, then click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 525

7. Click OK.
Figure 10-68 shows the finished spline.

Splines are defined by N×d×D, where N is the number of teeth on the spline, d is the in-

TIP side diameter, and D is the outside diameter.

Figure 10-68

Retain the Ø32 × 65 shaft with the splined end and continue to work on the same assembly
drawing for the next exercise. A Ø90 × 10 hub will be added to the assembly. A spline will be cut
into the hub and inserted onto the Ø32 shaft.

Exercise 10-13: Drawing a Hub

1. Access the Design Accelerator and create a Ø90 × 10 shaft.
See Figures 10-69 and 10-70. The new shaft will be listed in the browser box as Shaft:2.
2. Click the Shaft:2 heading in the browser box and select the Open option.
See Figure 10-71.

Hub

Shaft from
previous section
with a 6 x 28 x 32
spline

Shaft

Enter new values.

Figure 10-69
526 Chapter 10 Shafts

O100 x 65 Hub

O32 x 65 Shaft Figure 10-70

3. Right-click the hub (Shaft:2) and select the Edit option.

See Figure 10-72.

Click here.
Right-click.

Click here.

Figure 10-71 Figure 10-72

The hole diameter must equal the inside diameter of the spline.

TIP
4. Create a new sketch plane on the front surface of the hub as shown and add a Point, Cen-
ter Point.
See Figure 10-73.
5. Right-click and select Done. Right-click again and select Finish Sketch.
See Figure 10-74.
6. Access the Hole tool on the Part Features panel bar and create a Ø28 hole through the
Ø90 shaft (hub).
7. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Edit option.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 527

Right-click.

Click here.

Create a new sketch

plane and add a Point,
Center Point.

Figure 10-73 Figure 10-74

8. Right-click the mouse and click the X box in the upper right corner of the Shaft drawing
screen.
A warning box will appear.
9. Click the Yes box.
The Save dialog box will appear.
10. Click OK.
The drawing screen will return to the assembly screen showing both the Ø32 shaft and the
Ø90 hub.
11. Click the hub.
The Ø32 will appear in the hub. See Figure 10-75.

1. Click

3. Click

Create a
O 28 hole.

5. Click here 4. Click

2. Click

6. Click
Figure 10-75
528 Chapter 10 Shafts

12. Access the Design Accelerator and click the Parallel Spline Connection.
13. Select an ISO - 14 Light serie spline with dimensions of 6 × 28.000 × 32.000 - 14.000.
14. Click the Reference 1 box in the Hub Groove box, click the surface of the hub, click the
Reference 2 box, click the edge of the Ø28 hole, click the left box in the Select Objects
to Generate box, than click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
15. Click OK.
Figure 10-76 shows the hub with a splined hole.
16. Return to the Assembly Panel and use the Constraint Insert option and mount the hub
onto the shaft.
See Figure 10-77.

Assembled Hub
and Shaft with
Hub Shaft splines
Figure 10-76 Figure 10-77

COLLARS
collar: Used to hold a shaft in Collars are used to hold shafts in position as they rotate. Collars may be mounted inside or out-
place as it rotates; may be side the support structure. See Figure 10-78.
mounted on the inside or out-
side of the support structure.

Collars

Collars are used to

hold shafts in position. Figure 10-78

Exercise 10-14: Adding Collars to a Shaft Assembly—Setscrews

1. Access the Content Center, click Shaft Parts, then Collars.
See Figure 10-79. In this example an IS 2995 B collar with a Ø16 was selected.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 529

Click here.

Click here.

Select here.

Figure 10-79

2. Click the Table View tab, then All Columns.

See Figure 10-80. Note the size specifications for the collar. In this example the Nominal
Diameter is the diameter of the small hole in the collar. The diameter of the hole is 4.

Select here. Thread hole O

Figure 10-80

This hole can be threaded and a setscrew added to hold the collar on the shaft.
5. If the hole is threaded (for this example assume the hole is threaded) and has a size of M4,
access the Content Center and select a setscrew.
530 Chapter 10 Shafts

See Figure 10-81. In this example a CSN 02 1185 Slotted Set Screw with an M4 thread and
a conical point was selected.
6. Use the Constraint tool and insert the setscrew into the hole.
The assembly sequence presented here is one of several possibilities.
7. Insert the setscrew into the drawing and position it above the hole.
See Figure 10-81.
7. Draw a work axis through the hole and use the Constraint Mate tool to align the hole’s
work axis with the setscrew’s axis.

CSN02 1185 Draw a work axis through the hole.

M4 x 6 Slotted Set Screw
with conical point

Nominal diameter M4

Use the Constraint Mate tool

to align the hole's work axis
with the setscrew's axis.

Hide the work plane

and work axis.

Insert the collar

onto the shaft.

Draw a work plane tangent to the collar as shown. Use the

Constraint Flush tool to make the top surface of the setscrew
Figure 10-81 flush with the work plane.

8. Draw a work plane tangent to the collar and hole’s edge. Use the Constraint Flush tool
to make the setscrew flush with the work plane.
9. Hide the work plane and work axis.

Adding Collars to a Shaft Assembly—Pins

A collar may be held in place using pins. Figure 10-82 shows a shaft and an IS 2995 B collar, both
with Ø4.00 holes. A pin will be inserted through the hole in the collar into the hole in the shaft.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 531

O4 Nominal

O4 Nominal

Figure 10-82

Figure 10-83 shows some of the different types of pins available in the Inventor Content
Center. For this example a spring-type cylindrical pin will be used. These type pins are squeezed
to a smaller diameter, inserted into the hole, and then released back to their original diameter.

Cylindrical Pin
Spring Type

Grooved Pin

Cotter Pin
Taper Pin

Cylindrical Pin

Figure 10-83
Clevis Pin

1. Insert the collar onto the shaft with the holes

aligned. Note:
See Figure 10-84. Conside
r
through defining a wor
the hole ka
2. Access the Content Center and select a pin. the alig s to help xis
nment. with
See Figures 10-85 and 10-86. In this example a BS
EN ISO 8572 spring-type pin with a Nominal
Diameter of 4 and a Nominal Length of 20 was
selected. The length 20 was selected because the
collar thickness is 6 and the shaft diameter is 16, for
a total of 22. There is only one hole in the collar, so the pin

Note:
Conside
r
a work a using work plan
xis whe es and
the pin n
and coll constraining
ar.

Figure 10-84
532 Chapter 10 Shafts

length cannot exceed 22 or it will extend beyond the collar. A length value of 20 allowed for
a clearance of 2. Figure 10-87 shows the selected pin with the collar and shaft.
3. Use the Constraint tool to assemble the pin into the collar and shaft.
See Figure 10-88.

Select here

Figure 10-85

BN EN 28 752
Spring-type straight pin

Select values

Use hole’s axis to align

collar’s hole with shaft hole.

Figure 10-86 Figure 10-87

 Chapter 10 Shafts 533

Insert pin into collar and shaft

Finished drawing
Use a work plane and the Constraint
Flush tool to align the pin with collar.

Figure 10-88

O-RINGS
O-rings are used to create seals. The rings are forced between two different objects, distorting the O-ring: A ring that is forced
rings and creating a seal. between two objects to create
a seal.
Exercise 10-15: Drawing an O-Ring and a Shaft
Assume the nominal diameter of the shaft is 0.500.
1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (in).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator and draw a Ø0.500 × 2.50 shaft.
3. Access the Content Center, click Shaft Parts, Sealing, O-Rings and select an AS 568
O-Ring.
See Figure 10-89.

Select here.

Figure 10-89
534 Chapter 10 Shafts

4. Click the Table View tab, then All Columns. Select a

DASH # 014 O-Ring because it has a 0.489 inside Note:
diameter. The cro
ss
See Figure 10-90. O-ring section for this
is 0.07.
5. Insert the ring into the drawing.
6. Right-click the Shaft heading in the browser box and
select the Edit using Design Accelerator option.
See Figure 10-91. The Shaft Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-92.

Select here.

For a O.500 shaft

Figure 10-90

Click here.

Select here.

Click here.

Figure 10-91 Figure 10-92

7. Select the Add Relief–D (SI Units) option.

The Relief-D option will appear on the screen.
 Chapter 10 Shafts 535

See Figure 10-93.

8. Click the Element properties box.
The Relief–D (SI Units) dialog box will appear. See Figure 10-94.

Click here

Enter values based on information Click here.

from the Content Center.

or double-click here

Click here, enter values,

unclick.
Figure 10-93 Figure 10-94

9. Enter the distance from the second edge. Click the Custom box and enter the values as
shown in Figure 10-94. (These values were derived from the Content Center.) Unclick
the Custom box. Click OK.
The Shaft Component Generator dialog box will appear.
10. Click OK.
Figure 10-95 shows the O-ring and modified shaft.

O-ring
Shaft with
O-ring groove

Figure 10-95

11. Use the Constraint tool to position the O-ring onto the shaft’s groove.
The procedure presented here is one possibility.
12. Draw an XY work plane through the O-ring.
536 Chapter 10 Shafts

See Figure 10-96.

13. Use the Constraint Mate tool and align the X axis of the O-ring with the X axis of the
shaft.
14. Use the Flush command to align the front surface of the shaft with the work plane on the
O-ring, then define a -0.25 offset.
Figure 10-96 shows the finished O-ring and shaft.

Draw an XY work plane

through the O-ring.

Use the Mate tool and align the

X axis of the O-ring with the
X axis of the shaft.

The two X axes aligned

Figure 10-96
(Continued)
 Chapter 10 Shafts 537

Use the Flush tool and align the

end of the shaft with the work plane.
Offset the flush –.25.

Finished drawing
Figure 10-96

DRAWING SHAFTS AND PINS USING DESIGN ACCELERATOR

Pins can also be drawn using Design Accelerator. Figure 10-97 shows a hub with Ø20 inside di-
ameter, a Ø40 outside diameter, a thickness of 16, and a through hole of Ø6. A work plane has
been created tangent to the hub. Figure 10-97 also shows a Ø20 × 30 shaft with a Ø6 hole and a
1 × 45° chamfer at each end. The shaft was created using Design Accelerator. The hub and the
shaft are to be assembled together and held together using a pin. The drawing was created using
the Standard (mm).iam format.

Tangent work plane

Shaft:
O20 x 30
Hole - O6 with 1 x 45° chamfer
located 9 from the edge

Hub:
O20 x 40 x 16
Hole - O6

Figure 10-97
538 Chapter 10 Shafts

Exercise 10-16: Drawing a Pin Using Design Accelerator

1. Access the Design Accelerator and select the Pin option.
See Figure 10-98.
2. Select the Radial Pin option. Note:
3. Select the Start Plane box, then the work plane on the There a
hub. Select the Existing Hole box, then the Ø6 hole re
options. four diff erent
on the hub. Click the Click to add a pin box to ac- pin
cess the Content Center.
See Figure 10-99.

Select Radial Pin

Design Accelerator

Select here.
Start plane

Figure 10-98

1. Click
2. Click

4. Click

3. Click
Click here to access
the Content Center.

Figure 10-99
 Chapter 10 Shafts 539

4. In the Place from Content Center select a BS EN ISO 8752 pin. Select a Ø6 × 40 pin.
See Figures 10-100 and 10-101. Figure 10-102 and Figure 10-103 shows the pin in the as-
sembly drawing.

Create work axes for each of the three parts to help align the assembly.

TIP

Click here.

Select pin

Figure 10-100

Select O6

Select

Figure 10-101
 540 Chapter 10 Shafts

5. Use the Constraint tool and assemble the parts.

Figure 10-103 shows the finished assembly.

Work axis

BS EN ISO 8752 Pin

O6 x 40

Work axis

Work axis

Figure 10-102

Assembled shaft, Finished assembly

Figure 10-103 hub, and pin

SUMMARY
This chapter illustrated how to use Design Accelerator to shafts. The five general types of keys were described and illus-
draw shafts, how to add retaining ring grooves to shafts, how trated, namely, Pratt and Whitney, square, rectangular,
to add keyways to shafts, how to add O-ring grooves to shafts, Woodruff, and Gib.
how to add pin holes to shafts, and how to use the Content Splines on a shaft, for transmitting torque, were also in-
Center to add retaining rings, keys, O-rings, and pins to troduced and used in a drawing.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which of the following is not a type of key? 2. Which term best describes the shape of a Woodruff key.?
a. Pratt and Whitney a. Round
b. Square b. Rectangular
c. Russell c. Square
d. Woodruff d. Crescent
 Chapter 10 Shafts 541

3. Which of the following is not a type of pin? 7. Spring pins are fitted into holes by
a. Round a. Squeezing them to a smaller diameter, inserting them
b. Cotter into a hole, then releasing them back to original size
c. Taper b. Fitting them with compression springs that are re-
d. Clevis leased once the pins are inserted into a hole
4. The dimensions needed to define a groove in a shaft for a c. Press fitting them into a hole with spring pressure
retaining ring are found in the __________. 8. Threaded holes in collars are usually fitted with
a. Design Accelerator a. Spring pins
b. Content Center b. Setscrews
c. Drawing Annotation Panel c. Rivets
5. Which type of key is crescent-shaped? d. Cotter pins
a. Pratt and Whitney 9. Splines are used to transfer which type of forces?
b. Woodruff a. Linear
c. Rounded b. Rotary
d. Machine c. Impact
6. What is a slot cut through a hub sized to accept a key d. Compression
called? 10. When a shaft is a simple cylinder, the ends are said to have
a. Keyslot a. Chamfers
b. Hubslot b. Fillets
c. Keyway c. No features
d. Slot d. Orthographic ends

Matching
1. Woodruff 6. Cotter
2. Pratt and Whitney 7. Cylindrical spring type
3. Rectangular 8. Clevis
4. Gib 9. Cylindrical
5. Square 10. Taper
11. Grooved

True or False
1. True or False: Chamfers can be added to shafts using 6. True or False: Pratt and Whitney keys have rounded ends.
Design Accelerator. 7. True or False: Woodruff keys are rectangular.
2. True or False: Shafts must always have chamfers on their 8. True or False: Splines are a series of cutouts in a shaft
ends. that are sized to match a corresponding set of cutouts in
3. True or False: Retaining rings are used to prevent longitu- a hub.
dinal movement of shafts. 9. True or False: Collars are used to hold shafts in position
4. True or False: Retaining rings can be either external or in- as they rotate.
ternal. 10. True or False: O-rings are used to create seals.
5. True or False: Keys are used with shafts to transfer rotary
motion and torque.
k
j
e
d i
c h
b g
a f

Figure 10-104 Figure 10-105

542 Chapter 10 Shafts

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Draw the following uniform shafts.

Project 10-1: Inches

Ø.50 × 3.50
0.10 × 45° chamfer, both ends

Project 10-2: Inches

Ø2.00 × 10.00
0.125 × 45° chamfer, both ends

Figure P10-1 Figure P10-2

Project 10-3: Millimeters

Ø20 × 110
3 × 45° chamfer, both ends

Project 10-4: Millimeters

Ø60 × 100
5 × 45° chamfer, both ends Figure P10-3
Draw the following shafts and retaining rings. Create the appropriate
grooves on the shaft, and position the retaining rings onto the shaft.

Project 10-5: Inches

Draw a Ø1.00 × 5.00 shaft.
Mount two BS 3673: Part 1 Inch retaining rings located 0.25 from
each end.
Draw a 0.06 × 45° chamfer on each end. Figure P10-4
 Chapter 10 Shafts 543

Figure P10-5

Project 10-6: Inches

Draw a Ø.25 × 6.00 shaft.
Mount two BS 3673: Part 1 Inch retaining rings located 0.375 from
each end.
Draw a 0.03 × 45° chamfer on each end.

Figure P10-6

Project 10-7: Millimeters

Draw a Ø20 × 50 shaft.
Mount two CSN 02 2930 Metric retaining rings located 2 from each end.
Draw a 3 × 45° chamfer on each end.

Figure P10-7
544 Chapter 10 Shafts

Project 10-8: Millimeters

Draw a Ø16 × 64 shaft.
Mount two CSN 02 2930 Metric retaining rings located 10 from each end.
Draw a 4 × 45° chamfer on each end.
Draw the shafts and keys in Figure P10-9.

Key

Shaft

Hub

Figure P10-8 Figure P10-9

Project 10-9: Inches

Draw a Ø2.00 × 5.25 shaft with 0.125 × 45° chamfers at each end.
Draw a keyway on one end on the shaft to match the size requirements
of a square key (see the Content Center) that is 1/2 × 1/2 × 1.25 long
and has a nominal diameter range of 1.75 - 2.25. Insert the key into
the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub with an inside diameter of 2.00, out-
side diameter of 3.50, and a thickness of 0.75. Add the appropriate
keyway to the hub, then insert the hub over the shaft and key.

Project 10-10: Inches

Draw a Ø3.50 × 10.00 shaft with 0.25 × 45° chamfers at each end.
Draw a keyway on one end on the shaft to match the size requirements
of a square key (see the Content Center) that is 7/8 × 7/8 × 2.50 long
and has a nominal diameter range of 3.25 - 3.75. Insert the key into
the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub with an inside diameter of 3.50, out-
side diameter of 5.00, and a thickness of 1.00. Add the appropriate
keyway to the hub, then insert the hub over the shaft and key.

Project 10-11: Millimeters

Draw a Ø26 × 72 shaft with 3 × 45° chamfers at each end. Draw a key-
way on one end on the shaft to match the size requirements of an IS
2048 B key (see the Content Center) that is 2 × 2 × 22 long and has
a nominal diameter range of 22 - 30. Insert the key into the shaft’s
keyway. Draw a hub with an inside diameter of 26, outside diameter
of 40, and a thickness of 14. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub,
then insert the hub over the shaft and key.

Project 10-12: Millimeters

Draw a Ø60 × 240 shaft with 5 × 45° chamfers at each end. Draw a
keyway on one end on the shaft to match the size requirements of an
IS 2048 B key (see the Content Center) that is 18 × 11 × 70 long and
 Chapter 10 Shafts 545

has a nominal diameter range of 58 - 65. Insert the key into the shaft’s
keyway. Draw a hub with an inside diameter of 60, outside diameter
of 80, and a thickness of 20. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub,
then insert the hub over the shaft and key.
Draw the shafts and keys in Figure P10-10.

Hub

DIN 6885 A
Key

O20 x 65
Shaft
Figure P10-10

Project 10-13: Millimeters

Draw a Ø20 × 65 shaft with 3 × 45° chamfers at each end. Draw a key-
way on the shaft to match the size requirements of a DIN 6885 A key
(see the Content Center). Locate the shaft’s keyway 24 from the end
of the shaft. Insert the key into the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub with an
inside diameter of 20, outside diameter of 35, and a thickness of 10.
Add the appropriate keyway to the hub, then insert the hub over the
shaft and key.

Project 10-14: Millimeters

Draw a Ø52 × 100 shaft with 6 × 45° chamfers at each end. Draw a
keyway on the shaft to match the size requirements of a DIN 6885 A
key (see the Content Center). Locate the shaft’s keyway 34 from the
edge of the shaft. Insert the key into the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub
with an inside diameter of 52, outside diameter of 70, and a thickness
of 16. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub, then insert the hub over
the shaft and key.

Project 10-15: Inches

Draw a Ø0.750 × 4.25 shaft with 0.125 × 45° chamfers at each end.
Draw a keyway 0.500 from the end of the shaft to match the size re-
quirements of a 0.1875 × 0.1875 × 0.74 rectangular or square parallel
key that has a nominal diameter range of 0.57 - 0.88 (see the Content
Center). Insert the key into the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub with an in-
side diameter of 0.75, outside diameter of 2.50, and a thickness of
0.625. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub, then insert the hub over
the shaft and key.

Project 10-16: Inches

Draw a Ø1.50 × 7.50 shaft with 0.19 × 45° chamfers at each end.
Draw a keyway 2.50 from the end of the shaft to match the size re-
quirements of a 0.375 × 0.375 × 0.875 rectangular or square parallel
key that has a nominal diameter range of 1.38 - 1.75. Insert the key
into the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub with an inside diameter of 1.50,
outside diameter of 2.75, and a thickness of 0.750. Add the appropri-
ate keyway to the hub, then insert the hub over the shaft and key.
546 Chapter 10 Shafts

Project 10-17: Millimeters

Draw a Ø163 × 40 shaft with 2 × 45° chamfers at each end. Draw a
keyway 10 from the end of the shaft to match the size requirements of
a CSN 30 1385 Woodruff key. Insert the key into the shaft’s keyway.
Draw a hub with an inside diameter of 16, outside diameter of 40, and
a thickness of 8. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub, then insert
the hub over the shaft and key.

Project 10-18: Millimeters

Draw a Ø40 × 105 shaft with 4 × 45° chamfers at each end. Draw a
keyway 27 from the end of the shaft to match the size requirements of
a CSN 30 1385 Woodruff key. Insert the key into the shaft’s keyway.
Draw a hub with an inside diameter of 40, outside diameter of 75, and
a thickness of 12. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub, then insert
the hub over the shaft and key.

Project 10-19: Inches

Draw a Ø0.750 × 4.25 shaft with 0.125 × 45° chamfers at each end.
Draw a keyway 0.500 from the end of the shaft to match the size re-
quirements of Full Radius No. 606 3/16 × 0.75 Woodruff key (see the
Content Center). Insert the key into the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub
with an inside diameter of 0.75, outside diameter of 2.50, and a thick-
ness of 0.625. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub, then insert the
hub over the shaft and key.

Project 10-20: Inches

Draw a Ø1.50 × 7.50 shaft with 0.19 × 45° chamfers at each end.
Draw a keyway 2.50 from the end of the shaft to match the size re-
quirements of a Full Radius No. 1422 I 7/16 × 2 Woodruff key (see the
Content Center). Insert the key into the shaft’s keyway. Draw a hub
with an inside diameter of 1.50, outside diameter of 2.75, and a thick-
ness of 0.750. Add the appropriate keyway to the hub, then insert the
hub over the shaft and key.
Draw the shafts and hubs in Figures P10-11 through P10-14.

Project 10-21: Millimeters

Draw a shaft and hub based on the following data and join them using
a spline.
Shaft: Ø120 × 30
Spline Type = Light
Spline Dimensions = 8 × 42 × 46

Figure P10-11
 Chapter 10 Shafts 547

Figure P10-12 Figure P10-13

Figure P10-14

Active Spline Length = 38

Hub: Ø46 × 100

Project 10-22: Millimeters

Draw a shaft and hub based on the following data and join them using
a spline.
Shaft: Ø78 × 200
Spline Type = Light
Spline Dimensions = 10 × 72 × 78
Active Spline Length = 60
Hub: Ø160 × 40

Project 10-23: Inches

Draw a shaft and hub based on the following data and join them using
a spline.
Shaft: Ø1.50 × 4
Fit Type = 6B To Side - No Load
Nominal Diameter = 1.50
Active Spline Length = 1.25
Hub: Ø3 × 1

Project 10-24: Inches

Draw a shaft and hub based on the following data and join them using
a spline.
Shaft: Ø2 × 6
Fit Type = 10 A Permanent Fit
548 Chapter 10 Shafts

Nominal Diameter = 2
Active Spline Length = 1.75
Hub: Ø4.5 × 1.25

Project 10-25: Millimeters

Create a 3D drawing of the Shaft Support Assembly in Figure P10-15
for each set of parameters presented below. Also include an exploded
isometric drawing with assembly numbers and a parts list.
A. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 320 with 2 × 45° chamfers
at each end. The shaft is to protrude 20 from the face of the
Holders.
B. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 320 with 2 × 45° chamfers
at each end. The shaft is to protrude 20 from the face of the
Holders. Add the appropriate grooves and insert two CNS
9074 External Retaining Rings located 17 from each end of
the shaft.
C. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 320 with 2 × 45° chamfers
at each end. The shaft is to protrude 20 from the face of the
Holders. Add the appropriate grooves and insert two E-ring -
Type - 3CM External Retaining Rings located 18 from each
end of the shaft.
D. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 320 with 2 × 45° cham- Figure P10-15a
fers at each end. The shaft is to protrude 20 from the face
of the Holders. Add two CNS - 122 Collars with Ø4 Set
Screws.
E. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 320 with 2 × 45° chamfers
at each end. The shaft is to protrude 20 from the face of the
support. Add two CNS - 122 collars with Ø4 Spring-type
Straight Pins.
F. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 280 with 2 × 45° chamfers
at each end. On one end insert a square key between the
shaft and the Holders.

Figure P10-15b
 Chapter 10 Shafts 549

BASE, CAST
MAT'L = CAST IRON
P/N = ENG-311-1

Figure P10-15c
HOLDERS
MAT'L = CAST IRON
P/N = ENG-312

Figure P10-15d
550 Chapter 10 Shafts

G. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 320 with 2 × 45° chamfers

at each end. On one end insert a UNI 7510A Key between
the shaft and the support. The shaft is to protrude 20 from
the surface of the Holders.
H. A straight uniform shaft, Ø16 × 320 with 2 × 45° chamfers
at each end. On one end insert a JIS B 1302 - Type B
Woodruff key between the shaft and the support. The shaft
is to protrude 20 from the surface of the Holders.

PINS
MAT'L = 2040 STEEL
P/N = ENG-132A

Note: consider both the pins

found in the Content Center
and those available using
Design Accelerator.

Figure P10-15e

Project 10-26: Inches

Create the drawings of the Adjustable Assembly shown in Figure P10-16.
The Grooved Pin was created using Design Accelerator. The Forged
Eyebolt, Hex Machine Screw Nut, and Hex Nut were created using
the Content Center.
A. A 3D assembly drawing
B. An exploded 3D assembly drawing
C. An exploded isometric drawing with assembly numbers
D. A parts list
 Chapter 10 Shafts 551

Adjustable Assembly

Figure P10-16a

POST, ADJUSTABLE
P/N = ENG 404
MAT'L = MILD STEEL

Figure P10-16b
552 Chapter 10 Shafts

BASE #4, CAST

P/N = ENG 311
MAT'L = CAST IRON

Figure P10-16c

YOKE
P/N = BU 1964
MAT'L = CAST IRON

Figure P10-16d
 Chapter 10 Shafts 553

SUPPORT, ROUNDED
P/N = ENG-312
MAT'L = SAE 1040 STEEL

Figure P10-16e

Figure P10-16f (Continued)

 554 Chapter 10 Shafts

Figure P10-16f
Bearings 11
Chapter
Objectives
• Understand the different types of bearings: plain, ball, and thrust.
• Show how to select bearing from the Content Center.
• Understand how tolerances are used with bearings.
• Show how to use bearings in assemblies.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter discusses three types of bearings: plain, ball, and thrust. See Figure 11-1. Plain plain bearing: A hollow cylin-
bearings are hollow cylinders that may have flanges at one end. Plain bearings are made from ny- der that may have a flange at
lon or Teflon for dry (no lubrication) applications, and impregnated bronze or other materials one end and may or may not
when lubrications are used. be lubricated; also called a
sleeve bearing or bushing.

Types of Bearings

Plain Ball Thrust

Figure 11-1

Plain bearings require less space than other types of bearings and are cheaper but have higher
friction properties.
Ball bearings are made from two cylindrical rings separated by a row of balls. Shapes other ball bearing: A bearing made
than spheres may be used (rollers), and more than one row of balls may be included. Ball bear- from two cylindrical rings sep-
ings usually take more space than plain bearings and are more expensive. They have better fric- arated by a row of balls or
tion properties than plain bearings. rollers.
Thrust bearings are used to absorb loads along the axial direction (the length of the shaft). thrust bearing: A bearing
They are similar in size and cost to ball bearings. used to absorb a load along
the axial direction of a shaft.

PLAIN BEARINGS
Figure 11-2 shows a U-bracket that will be used to support a rotating shaft. Plain bearings will be
inserted between the shaft and the U-bracket. The bearings will be obtained from the Content
Center.
556 Chapter 11 Bearings

U-bracket

Figure 11-2

The shaft has a nominal diameter of 6.00 mm and the shaft will be inserted into the bearing
and the bearing into the U-bracket.

Nomenclature
Plain bearings are also called sleeve bearings or bushings.
The terms are interchangeable Note:
When d
ra
nomina wing a shaft u
Shaft Tolerances l dimen
sions.
se the
For this example it is assumed that the shaft will be pur-
chased from a vendor. Tolerances for purchased shafts can be found in the
manufacturer’s catalogs or from listings posted on the Web. The shaft selected for this
example has a tolerance of 0.00/0.02.
Figure 11-3 shows a Ø6.0000 shaft 50.00 long. Each end has a 0.50  45° chamfer. It was
created using the Shaft tool on the Design Accelerator. See Chapter 10. The orthographic views
of the shaft include the shaft’s diametric tolerance.

Purchased parts do not require individual drawings. They are listed in the parts list by man-

TIP ufacturer and manufacturer’s part number or catalog number.

Exercise 11-1: Selecting a Plain Bearing

1. Access the Content Center, click Shaft Part, Bearings-Plain and select a CNS 9348
(Cylindrical) plain bearing.
See Figure 11-4.
2. Select the 6  10  4 nominal-sized bearing.
See Figure 11-5.
3. Click OK and add two bearings to the drawing.
See Figure 11-6.
 Chapter 11 Bearings 557

Created using the

shaft tool on the
Design Accelerator;
Shaft's nominal dimensions see Chapter 10.

O6 x 50 Shaft

Created using the

ANSI (mm).idw format;
see Chapter 4.

Shaft tolerance
Figure 11-3

Select here.

Click
here.

Figure 11-4
558 Chapter 11 Bearings

Select here.

Figure 11-5 Figure 11-6

Shaft/Bearing Interface Note:

The shaft and inside diameter of the bearing (the bore) are If the c
leara
generally fitted together using a clearance fit. The shaft has e xcessive nce is too larg
a tolerance of 0.00/0.02. From manufacturer’s specifi- at high vibrations could e,
speeds result
.
cations we know that the bearing’s inside diameter is 6.00
nominal with a tolerance of 0.02/0.00. Therefore, the
maximum clearance is 0.04, and the minimum is 0.00.
The range of clearance tolerance depends on the load and speed of the application.

The Hole in the U-Bracket

The bearing is to be inserted into the hole in the U-bracket using a force fit; that is, the outside di-
ameter of the bearing will be larger than the diameter of the hole. Fits are often defined using a
standard notation such as F7/h6, where the uppercase letter defines the hole tolerance and the low-
ercase letter defines the shaft. In this example the outside diameter of the bearing uses the shaft
values. See the tables in the appendix. For a Ø10.00 the tolerances for an F7/h6 combination are
Hole: 9.991 Shaft: 10.000 Fit: 0.000
9.976 9.991 0.024
This means that the hole in the U-bracket should be 9.991/9.976. However, a problem can
arise if the manufacturer’s specifications for the outside diameter of the bearing do not match the
stated h6 value of 10.000/9.991.
Say, for example, the given outside diameter for a bearing is 10.009/10.000. Although the
tolerance range is the same, 0.009 (10.000  9.991  0.009), the absolute values are different.
We use the fit values to determine the new hole values. The fit values are given as 0.000/0.024.
These values are the maximum and minimum interference. Applying these values to the hole we
get 10.000/9.985 (10.009  0.024  9.985). For this bearing the hole in the U-bracket would be
10.000/9.985.
Draw the hole using the nominal value of 10.00, and dimension the hole using the derived
values. See Figure 11-7.
 Chapter 11 Bearings 559

Hole tolerance
Figure 11-7

Figure 11-8 shows the finished assembly. The components were assembled using the
Constraint tool. The shaft was offset 5 from the edge of the bearing.
Figure 11-9 shows the bearing assembly along with its parts list. Note that the bearing does
not have an assigned part number but uses the manufacturer’s number assigned by the Content

CNS 9348
Plain bearings
U-bracket O6 x 60 Shaft
Created using the
Standard (mm).iam format

Finished assembly

Figure 11-8

Created using the

ANSI (mm).idw format

Figure 11-9
560 Chapter 11 Bearings

Center. The U-bracket and the shaft both have assigned part numbers and would require detail
drawings including dimensions and tolerances. Because the bearing is a purchased part, no draw-
ing is required.
Figure 11-10 shows two plain bearings that include shoulders.

Plain bearing

Shoulder

Figure 11-10

BALL BEARINGS
A bearing is to be selected for a Ø6.00 shaft. The shaft is to be mounted into the bearing and the
bearing inserted into a U-bracket.

Exercise 11-2: Selecting a Ball Bearing

1. Access the Content Center and select Shaft, click Shaft Part, Ball Bearings, Deep
Groove Ball Bearings, and select a BS 290 bearing.
See Figure 11-11. The BS 290 dialog box shows the bearings are defined by coded numbers.
2. Click the Table View tab to see the dimensions for the different BS 290 bearings.

Click here.

Select here.

Figure 11-11 (Continued)

 Chapter 11 Bearings 561

Select here.

BS 290 Ball bearing

Assume the following tolerances

Figure 11-11 Figure 11-12

In this example, a 618/6 bearing was selected. This bearing has a nominal bore of Ø6.00 and an
outside nominal diameter of Ø13.00. Assume the bearing has the tolerances shown in Figure 11-12.
3. Calculate the shaft’s diameter.
Say the clearance requirements for the shaft are
Clearance  minimum  0.00
Clearance  maximum  0.03
This means that the shaft diameter tolerances are 6.00/5.99.
562 Chapter 11 Bearings

4. Access the Design Accelerator and draw the shaft.

Use the nominal diameter of Ø6.00 and a length of 50. Add a 0.50 ⴛ 45° chamfer to each
end. Figure 11-13 shows a solid model drawing of the shaft and a dimensioned orthographic
drawing. The model was drawn using the nominal Ø6, and the orthographic views include the re-
quired tolerances.

O6 x 50 Shaft

Figure 11-13

5. Determine the size for the hole in the U-bracket.

The interface between the outside diameter of the bearing and the U-bracket is defined as
H7/s6. The values for this tolerance can be found in the tables in the appendix or by using the
Limits and Fits dialog boxes found in the Design Accelerator.
6. Access the Limits and Fits tool, which is a flyout from the Tolerance tool on the Design
Accelerator.
See Figure 11-14.
7. Select the Hole-basis condition, enter a Basic Size of 13.00, and select an Interference fit.
See Figure 11-15. The tolerance values will appear under the Results heading. The hole’s
values can also be obtained by moving the cursor to the H tolerance zone.

Default values

Click here.

Figure 11-14
 Chapter 11 Bearings 563

The terms Hole-basis and Shaft-basis refer to how the tolerance was calculated. In this

TIP example, note in the Results box that the minimum hole diameter is 13.000. This is the
starting point for the tolerance calculations, so the calculation is Hole-basis. If the mini-
mum shaft diameter had been defined as 13.000, the tolerance calculations would have
started from this value. The results would have been Shaft-basis.

Select here
Enter value

Select Values for hole

Tolerance
values

Figure 11-15

From Figure 11-15 we see that the hole has a tolerance of 13.018/13.000
8. Apply the hole tolerance to the hole in the U-bracket.
See Figure 11-16.

Hole tolerance

Figure 11-16
564 Chapter 11 Bearings

Figure 11-17 shows the finished assembly drawing with the bearings. Figure 11-18 shows
the parts list for the assembly. Note that no part number was assigned to the bearings, as they are
purchased parts. The manufacturer’s part numbers were used.

O6 x 50 Shaft Finished assembly

U-bracket
BS 290
Ball Bearings
Figure 11-17

Figure 11-18

THRUST BEARINGS
Tolerances for thrust bearings are similar to ball bearings. In general, a clearance fit is used be-
tween the shaft and the bearing’s bore (inside diameter) and an interference fit is used between
the housing and the bearing’s outside diameter.

Exercise 11-3: Selecting Thrust Bearings

1. Create a drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format and access the Content Center.
See Figure 11-19.
2. Click on Thrust Ball Bearings and select an ANSI/AFBMA 24.1 TA - Thrust Ball
Bearing.
The dialog box will appear showing the Size Designation using coded numbers. See
Figure 11-20.
3. Click the Table View tab to access the dimensions for the listed bearings.
4. Select the 10TA12 Size Designation.
Figure 11-21 shows the bearing with dimensions and tolerances.
 Chapter 11 Bearings 565

Select here.

Click here.

Figure 11-19

Select here.

Select here.

Figure 11-20
ANSI/AFBMA 24.1 TA Thrust Bearing

Assume the following tolerances.

Figure 11-21
566 Chapter 11 Bearings

5. Calculate the shaft’s diameter.

Say the clearance requirements are
Clearance  minimum  0.00
Clearance  maximum  0.02
This means the shaft diameter tolerance is 10.00/9.99.
6. Access the Design Accelerator and draw the shaft.
Use the nominal diameter of Ø10.00 and a length of 30. Add a 0.50 ⴛ 45° chamfer to each end.
Figure 11-22 shows a solid model drawing of the shaft and a dimensioned orthographic drawing. The
model was drawn using the nominal Ø10, and the orthographic views include the required tolerances.

O10 x 30 Shaft

Figure 11-22 Shaft tolerance

7. Determine the size for the hole in the T-bracket.

The interface between the outside diameter of the bearing and the T-bracket is defined as
H7/p6. The values for this tolerance can be found in the tables in the appendix or by using the
Limits and Fits dialog boxes found in the Design Accelerator.
8. Access the Limits and Fits flyout on the Tolerance tool in the Design Accelerator.
See Figure 11-23.

Click here.
Enter value.

Set limits.

Results

Figure 11-23
 Chapter 11 Bearings 567

9. Select the Hole-basis condition, enter a Basic Size of 26.00, and select an Interference fit.
The tolerance values will appear under the Results heading. The hole’s values can also be
obtained by moving the cursor to the H tolerance zone. The hole’s tolerance is Ø26.021/26.000.
In this example the hole in the T-bracket will use a counterbored hole. The bearing has a
thickness of 11.00, so the counterbored hole will have a depth of 11 and a diameter of
26.021/26.000.
10. Apply the hole tolerances to the T-bracket.
See Figure 11-24.

T-bracket

Hole tolerance

Figure 11-24

SUMMARY
This chapter explained the differences among three types of between shaft-basis and hole-basis tolerances was dis-
bearings: plain, ball, and thrust. Various bearings were selected cussed and illustrated. Shafts and bearings were used in as-
from the Content Center and used in drawings. The difference semblies utilizing both clearance and force fits.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which is a material that would not be used to make a c. Bearing diameter
sleeve bearing? d. Interference
a. Teflon 3. In the notation H7/n6 the n6 specifies a standard toler-
b. Cast iron ance for the
c. Impregnated bronze a. Hole
d. Nylon b. Shaft
2. In the notation H7/n6 the H7 specifies a standard toler- c. Bearing diameter
ance for the d. Interference
a. Hole
b. Shaft
 568 Chapter 11 Bearings

4. Hole/shaft tolerance calculations that start with a hole’s 5. In general, what type of fit is the tolerance between a
diameter are called shaft and sleeve bushing?
a. First hole consideration a. Clearance
b. Datum hole calculations b. Interference
c. Hole basis c. Transitional

Matching
Column A Column B
a. Sleeve 1. A bearing that absorbs loads along an axial direction.
b. Ball 2. A bearing that looks like a hollow cylinder
c. Thrust 3. A bearing that includes a row of spheres

True or False
1. True or False: A sleeve bearing is also called a bushing. 4. True or False: Values for limit and fit tolerances are
2. True or False: A listing of bearings is found in the located on the Design Accelerator.
Content Center. 5. True or False: The designation H7/h6 specifies a
3. True or False: In general, ball bearings are cheaper standard hole/shaft fit tolerance.
than sleeve bearings.

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Figure P11-1 shows a Bearing Assembly drawing, a parts list, and de-
tail drawings of all manufactured parts. Use the Bearing Assembly
with Projects 11-1 through 11-8.

Project 11-1: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø12 ⫻ 90 shafts with 0.50 ⫻ 45° chamfers at each
end. Insert each shaft into a CNS 02 3481 A plain bearing.
Insert the two bearing shaft subassemblies into the Bearing
Assembly shown in Figure P11-1. See Figure P11-2.
B. Assume the CNS 02 3481 A plain bearing has an inside di-
ameter of 12.01/12.00 and that the required clearance with
the shaft is 0.00 minimum and 0.02 maximum. What is the
diametric tolerance of the shafts? Create an orthographic
drawing of one of the shafts with dimensions and tolerances.
C. Assume the CNS 02 3481 A plain bearing has an outside
diameter of 16.039/16.028 and that the bearing will fit into
the Side Part of the Bearing Assembly using an H7/s6 inter-
ference fit. What is the dimension and tolerance for the holes
in the Side Part? Create an orthographic drawing of the Side
Part and include all dimensions and tolerances.
D. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing
Assembly.
E. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH07-12.
 Chapter 11 Bearings 569

Bearing Assembly

Bearing Assembly
Parts list

Base
P/N BU2007-1
SAE 1020

Figure P11-1 (Continued)

570 Chapter 11 Bearings

Part, Side
P/N BU2007-2
SAE 1020

Post, Guide
BUENG-A
SAE 1040

Post, Threaded
P/N BUENG-B
SAE 1040

Figure P11-1
 Chapter 11 Bearings 571

Project 11-2: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø16  90 shafts with 0.50  45° chamfers at each
end. Insert each shaft into a CSN 9352 plain bearing. Insert
the two bearing shaft subassemblies into the Bearing Assem-
bly shown in Figure P11-1.
B. Assume the CSN 9352 A plain bearing has an inside diameter
of 16.02/12.01 and that the required clearance with the shaft
is 0.01 minimum and 0.04 maximum. What is the diametric
tolerance of the shafts? Create an orthographic drawing of
one of the shafts with dimensions and tolerances.
C. Assume the CSN 9352 A plain bearing has an outside diame-
ter of 22.000/21.987 and that the bearing will fit into the Side
Part of the Bearing Assembly using an S7/h6 interference fit
(shaft basis). What is the dimension and tolerance for the
holes in the Side Part? Create an orthographic drawing of the
Side Part and include all dimensions and tolerances.
D. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing
Assembly.
E. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH07-16.

O12 x 90 Shaft

CNS 02 3481 A
Plain Bearing Figure P11-2

Project 11-3: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø10  130 shafts with 0.50  45° chamfers at
each end. Insert each shaft into a DIN 1850-5 P plain bear-
ing. Insert the two bearing shaft subassemblies into the Bear-
ing Assembly shown in Figure P11-1.
B. Assume the DIN 1850-5 P plain bearing has an inside diame-
ter of 10.02/12.00 and that the required clearance with the
shaft is 0.00 minimum and 0.04 maximum. What is the
diametric tolerance of the shafts? Create an orthographic
drawing of one of the shafts with dimensions and tolerances.
C. Assume the DIN 1850-5 P plain bearing has an outside diam-
eter of 16.000/15.989 and that the bearing will fit into the
Side Part of the Bearing Assembly using an S7/h6 interfer-
ence fit. What is the dimension and tolerance for the holes in
the Side Part? Create an orthographic drawing of the Side
Part and include all dimensions and tolerances.
D. Add CNS 122 collars to both ends of both shafts.
E. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing
Assembly
F. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH08-16.
572 Chapter 11 Bearings

Figure P11-3 (Continued)

 Chapter 11 Bearings 573

Handle Assembly

Figure P11-3

Project 11-4: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø20  110 shafts with 1.00  45° chamfers at
each end. Insert each shaft into a JIS B 1582 plain bearing.
Insert the two bearing shaft subassemblies into the Bearing
Assembly shown in Figure P11-1.
B. Assume the JIS B 1582 plain bearing has an inside diameter
of 20.02/20.00 and that the required clearance with the shaft
is 0.01 minimum and 0.05 maximum. What is the diametric
tolerance of the shaft? Create an orthographic drawing of the
shaft with dimensions and tolerances.
C. Assume the JIS B 1582 plain bearing has an outside diameter
of 28.039/28.028 and that the bearing will fit into the Side
Part of the Bearing Assembly using an H7/s6 interference fit.
What is the dimension and tolerance for the holes in the Side
Part? Create an orthographic drawing of the Side Part and in-
clude all dimensions and tolerances.
D. Add CNS 9074 retaining rings 5 mm from each end of both
shafts.
E. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing
Assembly.
F. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH07-12.

Project 11-5: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø10  90 shafts with 0.50  45° chamfers at each
end. Insert each shaft into a BS 290–61800 ball bearing. In-
sert the two bearing shaft subassemblies into the Bearing As-
sembly shown in Figure P11-1.
B. Assume the BS 290–61800 ball bearing has an inside diame-
ter of 10.02/10.00 and that the required clearance with the
574 Chapter 11 Bearings

shaft is 0.00 minimum and 0.04 maximum. What is the dia-

metric tolerance of the shafts? Create an orthographic draw-
ing of one of the shafts with dimensions and tolerances.
C. Assume the BS 290–61800 ball bearing has an outside diam-
eter of 16.000/15.989 and that the bearing will fit into the
Side Part of the Bearing Assembly using an U7/h6 interfer-
ence fit. What is the dimension and tolerance for the holes in
the Side Part? Create an orthographic drawing of the Side
Part and include all dimensions and tolerances.
D. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing As-
sembly.
E. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH07-12.

Project 11-6: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø15  130 Shafts with 0.50  45° chamfers at
each end. Insert each shaft into a CSN 02 4630 - 61802 ball
bearing. Insert the two bearing shaft subassemblies into the
Bearing Assembly shown in Figure P11-1.
B. Assume the CSN 02 4630–61802 ball bearing has an inside
diameter of 15.01/12.00 and that the required clearance with
the shaft is 0.00 minimum and 0.02 maximum. What is the
diametric tolerance of the shafts? Create an orthographic
drawing of one of the shafts with dimensions and tolerances.
C. Assume the CSN 02 4630–61802 ball bearing has an outside
diameter of 24.000/24.987 and that the bearing will fit into
the Side Part of the Bearing Assembly using an F7/h6 inter-
ference fit. What is the dimension and tolerance for the holes
in the Side Part? Create an orthographic drawing of the Side
Part and include all dimensions and tolerances.
D. Add a DIN 705 B collar to each end of both shafts.
E. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing
Assembly.
F. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH07-12.

Project 11-7: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø12  110 shafts with 1.00  45° chamfers at
each end. Insert each shaft into a CSN 02 4630–16103 ball
bearing. Insert the two bearing shaft subassemblies into the
Bearing Assembly shown in Figure P11-1. For this exercise
replace the through hole with a counterbored hole with a
nominal size Ø13.00 THRU, Ø30 CBORE 8.00 DEEP.
B. Assume the CSN 02 4630–16103 ball bearing has an inside
diameter of 12.01/12.00 and that the required clearance with
the shaft is 0.00 minimum and 0.02 maximum. What is the
diametric tolerance of the shafts? Create an orthographic
drawing of one of the shafts with dimensions and tolerances.
C. Assume the CSN 02 4630–16103 ball bearing has an outside
diameter of 30.000/29.987 and that the bearing will fit into
the Side Part of the Bearing Assembly using an S7/h6 inter-
ference fit. What is the dimension and tolerance for the holes
in the Side Part? Create an orthographic drawing of the Side
Part and include all dimensions and tolerances.
 Chapter 11 Bearings 575

D. Add a DIN 471 5.00 mm from each end of both shafts.

E. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing
Assembly.
F. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH07-12.

Project 11-8: Millimeters

A. Insert two Ø16  100 shafts with 0.75  45° chamfers at each
end. Insert each shaft into a GB 273.2-87–7/70 16  26  5
thrust bearing. Insert the two bearing shaft subassemblies
into the Bearing Assembly shown in Figure P11-1. For this
exercise replace the through hole with a counterbored hole
with a nominal size Ø17.00 THRU, Ø26 CBORE 5.00 DEEP.
B. Assume the GB 273.2-87–7/70 16  26  5 thrust bearing
has an inside diameter of 16.02/16.00 and that the required
clearance with the shaft is 0.00 minimum and 0.04 maxi-
mum. What is the diametric tolerance of the shafts? Create an
orthographic drawing of one of the shafts with dimensions
and tolerances.
C. Assume the GB 273.2-87–7/70 16  26  5 thrust bearing
has an outside diameter of 26.039/26.028 and that the bearing
will fit into the Side Part of the Bearing Assembly using an
H7/s6 interference fit. What is the dimension and tolerance
for the holes in the Side Part? Create an orthographic draw-
ing of the Side Part and include all dimensions and toler-
ances.
D. Create a presentation drawing of the completed Bearing
Assembly.
E. Create an exploded isometric drawing of the completed Bear-
ing Assembly. Include assembly numbers and a parts list. The
part number for the shaft is SH07-16.

Project 11-9: Inches

Figure P11-3 shows a Handle Assembly.
A. Draw an assembly drawing. The Link is offset .75 from the
support.
B. Create a presentation drawing
C. Create an exploded isometric drawing with a parts list.
D. Animate the drawing so that the Ball, Threaded Post, Link,
Rectangular Key, and Shaft rotate within the bearing.
This page intentionally left blank
Gears 12
Chapter
Objectives
• Understand the different types of gears: spur, bevel, and worm.
• Understand gear terminology.
• Show how to select gears from the Content Center.
• Show how to draw hubs on gears and to add setscrews.
• Show how to draw keyways on gears and to add keys.
• Show how to use gears in assemblies.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains how to draw gears using Design Accelerator. Three types of gears are cov-
ered: spur, bevel, and worm. See Figure 12-1. The chapter shows how to add hubs and splines to
the gears and how to combine gears to create gear trains.

Spur gears

Bevel gears Worm gear

Worm
Figure 12-1
578 Chapter 12 Gears

GEAR TERMINOLOGY
Pitch Diameter (D): The diameter used to define the spacing of gears. Ideally, gears are
exactly tangent to each other along their pitch diameters.
Diametral Pitch (P): The number of teeth per inch. Meshing gears must have the same
diametral pitch. Manufacturers’ gear charts list gears with the same diametral pitch.
Module (M): The pitch diameter divided by the number of teeth. The metric equivalent of
diametral pitch.
Number of Teeth (N): The number of teeth of a gear.
Circular Pitch (CP): The circular distance from a fixed point on one tooth to the same po-
sition on the next tooth as measured along the pitch circle. The circumference of the pitch
circle divided by the number of teeth.
Preferred Pitches: The standard sizes available from gear manufacturers. Whenever pos-
sible, use preferred gear sizes.
Center Distance (CD): The distance between the center points of two meshing gears.
Backlash: The difference between a tooth width and the engaging space on a meshing gear.
Addendum (a): The height of a tooth above the pitch diameter.
Dedendum (d): The depth of a tooth below the pitch diameter.
Whole Depth: The total depth of a tooth. The addendum plus the dedendum.
Working Depth: The depth of engagement of one gear into another. Equal to the sum of
the two gears’ addendeums.
Circular Thickness: The distance across a tooth as measured along the pitch circle.
Face Width (F): The distance from front to back along a tooth as measured perpendicular
to the pitch circle.
Outside Diameter: The largest diameter of the gear. Equal to the pitch diameter plus the
addendum.
Root Diameter: The diameter of the base of the teeth. The pitch diameter minus the dedendum.
Clearance: The distance between the addendum of the meshing gear and the dedendum of
the mating gear.
Pressure Angle: The angle between the line of action and a line tangent to the pitch circle.
Most gears have pressure angles of either 14.5° or 20°.
See Figure 12-2.

Figure 12-2
 Chapter 12 Gears 579

GEAR FORMULAS
Figure 12-3 shows a chart of formulas commonly associated with gears. The formulas are for
spur gears.

Figure 12-3

DRAWING GEARS USING DESIGN ACCELERATOR

Draw a gear with 60 teeth, a diametral pitch of 24, a pressure an-
gle of 14.5°, and a face width of 0.75 in. Note:
1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (in).iam In metr
ic u
format. called m nits diametra
odule. l pitch is
2. Access the Design Accelerator by clicking on the ar-
row on the Assembly Panel bar.
See Figure 12-4. The Design Accelerator dialog box
will appear.
3. Click the Spur Gears tool.

Click here to
access Design
Accelerator.

Figure 12-4
580 Chapter 12 Gears

The Center Distance option allows you

to enter the number of teeth for the gear.

Figure 12-5

The Spur Gears Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 12-5. There are
several options available under the Design Guide option. The Center Distance option allows you
to enter values for the number of teeth for the gear.
4. Enter the appropriate values.
Design Accelerator will draw two matching gears. Set the gear ratio for 2.000 and accept the
default values for Gear2. Set the facewidths for 0.75 and 0.50, the pressure angle for 14.5 deg,
and the dimetral pitch for 24.
5. Click OK.
This exercise is intended to create gears for drawing purposes only, so if an error message ap-
pears, click OK and proceed with the drawing of the gears.
The two gears will appear on the screen. See Figure 12-6.

120 teeth Click here.

60 teeth
Right-click here.
Figure 12-6 Figure 12-7
 Chapter 12 Gears 581

60-tooth gear
Figure 12-8

6. Right-click Spur Gear1:1 in the browser box and click the Isolate option.
See Figure 12-7. Figure 12-8 shows the finished gear.

GEAR HUBS
This section will show how to add a gear hub to a gear. The gear created and isolated in the last
section and shown in Figure 12-8 will be used. A hub will be added, a hole will be created through
the hub and gear, and a threaded hole for a setscrew will also be added.

Exercise 12-1: Adding a Hub to a Gear

1. Move the cursor into the browser area, right-click Super Gear1:1, and select the Edit
option.
See Figure 12-9.

Select here.

Right-click here.
Figure 12-9
582 Chapter 12 Gears

2. Move the cursor onto the front face of the gear, right-click the mouse, and select the New
Sketch option.
See Figure 12-10.
3. Draw a Ø1.250 circle on the gear.
See Figure 12-11.

Edit value to O1.250.

New sketch
plane

Figure 12-10 Figure 12-11

4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option. Right-click the mouse again and select
the Finish Sketch option.
See Figures 12-12 and 12-13.

Click here.

Figure 12-12 Figure 12-13

5. Click the Extrude tool and extrude the Ø1.250 circle 0.75.
See Figure 12-14.

Enter value.

Figure 12-14
 Chapter 12 Gears 583

Point, Center Point

O.500
Figure 12-15 Figure 12-16
6. Create a new sketch plane on the top surface of the extrusion and locate a Point, Center Point.
See Figure 12-15.
7. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option. Right-click the mouse again and select
the Finish Sketch option.
8. Click the Hole tool and add a Ø.500 hole through the hub and gear (Through All).
See Figure 12-16.
9. Create a work plane tangent to the hub by clicking the Work Plane tool, clicking the XZ
Plane under the Origin heading of Spur Gear1:1 in the browser box and touching the
edge of the hub’s outer surface with the cursor.
See Figure 12-17.

The tangent work plane is created by clicking the Work Plane tool then the XZ plane un-

TIP der the Origin heading in the browser box. Move the cursor to the outside surface of the
hub. A work plane will appear tangent to the hub.

Add a work plane tangent

to the hub's outer surface.

Figure 12-17
10. Create a new sketch on the work plane and locate a Point, Center Point .375 from the top
edge of the hub.
See Figure 12-18.
11. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option. Right-click the mouse again and select
the Finish Sketch option.
12. Click the Hole tool and create a 10-24 UNC threaded hole in the hub. Hide the work plane.

Do not use the Through All distance, as this will create two holes.

TIP
584 Chapter 12 Gears

Specify distance.

Point, Center Point

Enter thread
designation.

Figure 12-18 Figure 12-19

See Figure 12-19.

13. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Edit option. Return to the Assembly Panel
by clicking the arrow to the right of the Design Accelerator heading.
See Figure 12-20. Figure 12-21 shows the finished gear.

Click here.

Return to the
Assembly Panel.

Finished gear
Figure 12-20 Figure 12-21

14. Click on the Place from Content Center tool.

15. Access the Set Screws and select a Hexagon Socket Set Screw – Half Dog Point – Inch
setscrew. Click OK.
See Figure 12-22.
 Chapter 12 Gears 585

Click here.

Select

Figure 12-22

16. Select a #10 UNC thread that is 0.38 long. Click OK.
See Figure 12-23.

Select

Note:
In this e
xa
created mple a work a
to help xis was
setscre a
w and t lign the
he hole
.

Figure 12-23

17. Use the Constraint tool and position the setscrew.

See Figure 12-24.
586 Chapter 12 Gears

A work axis

Figure 12-24

GEAR RATIOS
The speed ratio between two gears is determined by the number of teeth on each gear. For example, if
gear ratio: The ratio of num- two spur gears have 60 teeth and 20 teeth, respectively, the gear ratio is 60/20 = 3/1. See Figure 12-25.
ber of teeth on the larger of Thus, if the larger gear with 60 teeth is rotating at 30 RPM, the smaller gear with 20 teeth will ro-
two meshing gears to the num- tate at 90 RPM. It is a general rule of thumb not to use spur gear ratios greater than 5:1.
ber on the smaller gear. Bevel gear ratios are also determined by the number of teeth on each gear. Again, the general
rule of thumb is not to use gear ratios greater than 5:1. See Figure 12-26.

54 teeth

Gear ratio = 60 = 3 60 teeth

20 1

Gear ratio = 54 = 3
18 1

20 teeth 18 teeth

Figure 12-25 Figure 12-26

The gear ratio for a worm and worm gear combination is determined by the number of teeth
on the worm gear. The cylinder-shaped gear is called a worm, and the round gear is called a worm
gear. The worm gear is assumed to be 1. If a worm gear is meshed with a worm, and the worm
gear has 42 teeth, the gear ratio will be 42:1. See Figure 12-27.
 Chapter 12 Gears 587

42 teeth
Gear ratio = 42
1

Counts as 1 tooth Figure 12-27

GEAR TRAINS
When more than two gears are used in a design the combination is called a gear train. Figure 12-28 gear train: The combination
shows a gear train that contains four gears: two 20-tooth gears, one 40-tooth, and one 60-tooth. of more than two meshing
The speed ratio between the input revolutions per minute (RPM) and output RPM is determined gears.
by multiplying the individual gear ratios together. Observe that the 40-tooth gear and one of the
20-tooth gears are mounted on the same shaft. There is no speed ratio between these two gears,
as they have the same angular velocity. The speed ratio is
40 60 6
a ba b 
20 20 1
For an input speed of 1750 RPM, the output speed would be
1
1750 a b  292 RPM
6

N = 60 N = 40

N = 20

N = 20

Input speed = 1,750 RPM Output speed = 292 RPM

Figure 12-28

Figure 12-29 shows another gear train that includes six gears: three 20-tooth gears and three
60-tooth gears. The speed ratio between input and output speeds is
60 60 60 27
a ba ba b 
20 20 20 1
For an input speed of 1750 RPM, the output speed would be
1750
 64.8 RPM
27
588 Chapter 12 Gears

N = 60 N = 60 N = 60

N = 20 N = 20 N = 20

Input speed = 1,750 RPM Output speed = 64.8 RPM

Figure 12-29

Gear Direction
Meshing gears always rotate in opposite directions. If gear 1 in Figure 12-29 were to rotate clock-
wise (CW), then gear 2 would rotate counterclockwise (CCW). Gear 3 would also rotate CCW,
driving gear 4 in a CW direction. Gear 5 would rotate in the CW direction and drive gear 6 in the
idler gear: A gear added to a CCW direction. A gear called an idler may be added to a gear train for the sole purpose of chang-
gear train for the sole purpose ing the direction of the final rotation. Idler gears are usually identical with one of the gears they
of changing the direction of are meshing with so as not to affect the final speed ratio. See Figure 12-30.
the final rotation.

An idler gear. An idler does not change the speed ratio

between input and output, but does affect the output
direction.

CW CCW CW CCW
Figure 12-30

GEARS WITH KEYWAYS

Figure 12-31 shows a hubless spur gear. It is to be joined to a shaft using a square key. A keyway
must be added to the gear. The gear has a bore of Ø.5000 in. and a face width of .500 in. Its pres-
sure angle is 14.5, it has 48 teeth, and a diametral pitch of 24. It was drawn using the Design
Accelerator on a Standard (in).iam format drawing.
 Chapter 12 Gears 589

48 teeth
.500 bore
24 diametral pitch
14.5° pressure angle
.50 face width

Figure 12-31

Exercise 12-2: Adding a Keyway to a Gear

First, determine the key that will be inserted into the gear. The information about the gear con-
tained in the Content Center will specify the size of the keyway.
1. Click the Place from Content Center tool.
See Figure 12-32.

Click here.

Select here.

Figure 12-32

2. Select a Square key.

See Figure 12-33.
The bore of the gear is Ø.500 so the 0.4375 - 0.5625 shaft diameter range is selected. This
yields a 1/8 × 1/8 width and height for the key. A nominal key length of 0.625 was selected.
3. Click the Table View tab and access All Columns.
See Figure 12-34. The table specifies a Parallel Key Width of 0.125 and a Parallel Key
Groove of 0.0625.
590 Chapter 12 Gears

Click here.

Select here.

Key dimensions

Figure 12-33

Key dimensions

Figure 12-34

4. Create a new sketch plane on the front surface of the gear and draw a two-point rectangle
as shown.
See Figure 12-35. The .3130 value was derived from the bore’s radius of .250 and the
Parallel Key Groove requirement of 0.063. The width of the keyway is .125 (1/8).
5. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
See Figure 12-36.
 Chapter 12 Gears 591

Dimensions for
the keyway Select

Figure 12-35 Figure 12-36

Keyway with
square key

Keyway

Figure 12-37 Figure 12-38

6. Use the Extrude tool and Cut out the rectangle, producing the
keyway.
See Figure 12-37. Figure 12-38 shows the square key inserted into
Note:
Chapter 10
the gear. s
keyway in hows how to draw
a shaft. a

GEAR ASSEMBLIES
This section shows how to draw gear assemblies. Two meshing gears will
be mounted onto a support plate using two shafts. The support plate and
gear shafts were drawn using the dimensions shown in Figure 12-39.

Exercise 12-3: Drawing a Gear Assembly

1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator and click the Spur Gear option.
3. Set the values for the dimensions of the gear in the Spur Gears Component Generator
dialog box as shown in Figure 12-40.
4. Finish the gear drawing.
Figure 12-41 shows the finished gears.
592 Chapter 12 Gears

Plate, Gear

Shaft, Gear

Figure 12-39

40 teeth

20 teeth

Enter values.

Figure 12-40 Figure 12-41

 Chapter 12 Gears 593

5. Click the ⴙ sign next to the Spur Gear1:1 heading in the

browser box, and right-click Spur Gear1:1 in the Note:
browser box, and select the Isolate option. See page
58
6. Right-click the 20-tooth gear and select the Edit option. tailed exp 1 for a more de-
lanation o
7. Create a new sketch plane and draw a Ø20.00 circle. draw gea f how to
r hubs.
Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch
option.
See Figure 12-42.

Do not select the Finish Edit option. Remember that you are working only on the 20-

TIP tooth gear, so you want to stay in that sketch mode.

Click here.

Figure 12-42

8. Extrude the Ø20 circle through a distance of 12.

See Figure 12-43.

Figure 12-43
594 Chapter 12 Gears

9. Create a new sketch plane on the new top surface.

See Figure 12-44.
10. Draw a Ø12.00 hole through the gear.
See Figure 12-45.
11. Create a new work plane tangent to the gear’s hub. Locate a center point for a hole.
See Figure 12-46.

Select center point

Figure 12-44 Figure 12-45

Figure 12-46

12. Draw a threaded hole. Use an M4 ⴛ 0.7 metric thread.

See Figure 12-47.
13. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Edit option.
The 40-tooth gear will reappear.
See Figure 12-48.
14. Create a hub, bore, and M4 ⴛ 0.7 threaded hole on the 40-tooth gear.
See Figure 12-49.
 Chapter 12 Gears 595

Figure 12-47

Add M4 x 0.7 threaded

hole in 40-tooth gear

Figure 12-48 Figure 12-49

15. Save the two gears as Gear Subassembly.

16. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.

You could have continued to work in the gear drawing and either inserted the existing com-

TIP ponents or created new components using the Create Component tool.

17. Use the Place Component command and insert a gear support plate, two shafts, and the
gear subassembly.
See Figure 12-39 for dimensional drawings of the plate and shafts.
See Figure 12-50.
596 Chapter 12 Gears

See Figure 12-39 for dimensioned

drawing of Plate and Shafts.

Gear Shafts

Gear Plate

Gear Subassembly
Figure 12-50 Figure 12-51

Click here.

Select

Figure 12-52

18. Use the Constraint tool and assemble the gears, shafts, and support plate.
See Figure 12-51.
19. Right-click the mouse and access the Content Center. Select a CNS EN 24766 Set
Screw with a point that has an M4 thread and is 4 long.
See Figures 12-52 and 12-53.
20. Click OK.
Add two setscrews to the assembly drawing. See Figure 12-54.
21. Insert the setscrews into the gear hubs.
Figure 12-55 shows the finished assembly.
 Chapter 12 Gears 597

Setscrews

Figure 12-53 Figure 12-54

Finished assembly

Figure 12-55

Use work planes and work axes if necessary to insert the setscrews into the hubs. Remem-

TIP ber to assemble in the assembly drawing and not on individual components.

BEVEL GEARS
bevel gears: Conical-shaped
Bevel gears are conical-shaped gears that have intersecting axes. Spur gears have parallel axes. gears that have intersecting
Figure 12-56 shows a set of meshing bevel gears. axes.
598 Chapter 12 Gears

30 teeth

Bevel
gears

15 teeth Figure 12-56

Exercise 12-4: Drawing Bevel Gears

Draw a set of bevel gears with 15 and 30 teeth, respectively. Define the module as 3.000, the
shaft angle as 90°, the pressure angle as 20, and the face width as 20.00.
1. Start a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator.
See Figure 12-57.

Enter here.

Enter teeth Enter teeth

value here. value here.

Figure 12-57
 Chapter 12 Gears 599

3. Click the Bevel Gears tool.

The Bevel Gears option is a flyout from the Spur Gears tool. The Bevel Gears Component
Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 12-57.
4. Enter a Module value of 3.00, 15 teeth for the small gear, and 30 teeth for the large gear.
5. Click Calculate.
6. Click OK.
The File Naming box will appear.
7. Click OK.
The gears will appear on the screen.

Exercise 12-5: Adding Hubs to Bevel Gears

1. Rotate the gears so that the bottom surface of the small gear is in view.
2. Click the ⴙ mark to the left of the Bevel Gear1:1 heading, and right-click on the Bevel
Gear1:1 heading in the browser box, and select the Edit option.
See Figure 12-58.
3. Create a new sketch plane on the bottom surface of the smaller gear.
See Figure 12-59.

Click here.

Right-click here.
Figure 12-58 Figure 12-59

4. Draw a Ø24 circle on the new sketch plane.

5. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
See Figure 12-60. Do not click the Finish Edit option. You are still working on the smaller
gear, so continue working on the sketch.
6. Extrude the circle 12 mm.
7. Right-click the mouse and create a new sketch plane on the top surface of the hub.
600 Chapter 12 Gears

8. Create a Ø12.00 hole through all.

9. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Edit option. Click the Isometric command.
See Figure 12-61.
10. Repeat the procedure for the larger gear. Make the hub 15 mm high with a Ø15 hole.
See Figure 12-62. Figure 12-63 shows the finished bevel gears.

Select here.

O12 through

Figure 12-60 Figure 12-61

O15
15 high

Figure 12-62 Figure 12-63

Exercise 12-6: Adding Keyways to the Bevel Gears

Before we can draw keyways, we must determine the size of the key. In the previous section
the gears were given bore diameters of Ø12 and Ø15, so keys must be selected to match
those diameters.
 Chapter 12 Gears 601

Select

Click here.

Figure 12-64

1. Return to the Assembly Panel and click the Place from Content Center tool.
2. Select the Shaft Parts option, Keys and Keys - Machine.
3. Select a DIN 6885 B square key.
See Figure 12-64.
4. Select the 10 - 12 shaft diameter input.
This will generate a key size of 4 ⴛ 4.
5. Select a 20 nominal length.
See Figure 12-65.

Select

Figure 12-65
602 Chapter 12 Gears

6. Click the Table View tab.

See Figure 12-66.
7. Scroll the table to determine the recommended Hub Depth.
In this example the value is 1.8.

Depth of groove in gear hub

Figure 12-66

8. Close the Content Center and return to the bevel gear drawing.
9. Select the smaller gear, right-click the mouse, and select the Edit option. Create a new
sketch plane on the top surface of the gear.
See Figure 12-67. In this example the Look At command was used to generate a 2D view of
the hub’s top surface.
10. Draw a rectangle as shown.

Figure 12-67
 Chapter 12 Gears 603

The width value of 4 matches the key width of 4 (no tolerances were factored in). The 7.8
value was derived from adding the bore’s radius (6.0) to the Hub Depth value given in the table
(1.8). The keyway depth in the shaft is 2.5, for a total key size of 4.3, or slightly larger than the
key height of 4. These values will vary when tolerances are considered.
11. Right-click the mouse, click the Extrude tool, and Cut the rectangle through the gear,
producing a keyway.
12. Repeat the procedure for the larger gear.
Figure 12-68 shows the finished keyways in the bevel gears.

SUPPORTS FOR BEVEL GEARS

Figure 12-69 shows a dimensioned drawing of the bevel gears created in the last section. The
drawing was created using the ANSI (mm).idw format. The two distances, 50.66 and 36.80, are
needed to position the holes in the support structure.

Figure 12-68 Figure 12-69

Exercise 12-7: Designing a Support Structure

1. Draw an L-shaped bracket.
In this example the horizontal portion of the bracket is 120 × 120 × 10, and the vertical por-
tion is 100 × 120 × 10.
2. Draw a Ø40 circle located as shown.
See Figure 12-70. The 55.66 value is derived from the 50.66 center distance and an addi-
tional 5 for a boss.
3. Draw a boss 5 high with a Ø15 hole.
See Figure 12-71.
604 Chapter 12 Gears

100 x 120 x 10

O15
120 x 120 x 10

Boss 5 high

Includes allowance
for 5-mm boss

Figure 12-70 Figure 12-71

Figure 12-72 Figure 12-73

4. Draw a boss 5 high with a Ø12 hole on the vertical portion of the bracket.
See Figures 12-72 and 12-73.
5. Add any fillets required.
6. Use the Constraint tool and add the bevel gears to the support bracket.
See Figure 12-74.

Figure 12-74
 Chapter 12 Gears 605

WORM GEARS Worm

gear
Figure 12-75 shows a worm and a worm gear. Worm gear ratios are based on the fact that the
worm has a value of 1. If the worm gear has 40 teeth, the gear ratio is 40 to 1.

Exercise 12-8: Drawing a Set of Worm Gears

1. Create a new drawing using the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator, then click the Worm Gears tool.
Worm
The Worm Gear tool is a flyout from the Spur Gear tool.
See Figure 12-76.
3. Enter the appropriate values and click OK. Figure 12-75

In this example the default values were accepted.

The File Naming dialog box will appear.
4. Click OK.
Figure 12-77 shows the finished worm gears.

Click here.

Figure 12-76

Finished worm gear

Figure 12-77
606 Chapter 12 Gears

4. Click the ⴙ sign to the left of the Worm Gear1:1 heading in the browser box and right-
click the Worm:1 heading.
See Figure 12-78.
5. Right-click the end plane of the worm and create a new sketch plane on the end of the
worm and draw a Ø20 circle.
See Figure 12-79.

Click here.

Right-click here.
Figure 12-78 Figure 12-79

6. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then right-click the mouse again and
select the Finish Sketch option.
7. Extrude the Ø20 circle a distance of 24 to create a hub. Create a new sketch plane on the
top surface of the hub and create a Ø12.0 hole.
8. Create a work plane tangent to the extruded hub.
See Figure 12-80.

O12.0

Figure 12-80
 Chapter 12 Gears 607

9. Add a threaded hole to the hub 10 from the top edge of the hub.
In this example an M4 thread was added.
10. Right-click the worm and select the Done option, then right-click the mouse again and
select the Finish Edit option.
11. Add a Ø40 hub with a height of 20 and a Ø20.0 hole to the worm gear using the same pro-
cedure as was used for the worm. Create an M4 hole 10 from the top edge of the hub.
See Figure 12-81.

Worm gear

M4

M4

Worm

Figure 12-81

SUPPORTS FOR WORM GEARS

Figure 12-82 shows orthographic views of a worm and worm gear drawn using the ANSI
(mm).idw format. The General Dimension tool was used to determine that the distance between
the gears’ centers is 100.00 mm. A three-sided corner bracket was drawn. Each side of the bracket
is 200 ⴛ 200 ⴛ 10, and the holes are located to match the 100.00 worm center requirement. Re-
member, the gears can be moved along the shafts to assure correct alignment.
The corner bracket shown has been created for clarity. It would be better to support the shafts
at both ends with a boxlike structure.

Two holes 100.00 apart vertically

Each side of
the bracket is
200 x 200 x 10

O20

O12

Figure 12-82 Figure 12-83

Exercise 12-9: Drawing Worm Gear Supports.

1. Draw a corner bracket with two holes 100.00 apart.
Figure 12-83 shows two plates with two holes 100.00 apart vertically. Each side of the
bracket is 200 ⴛ 200 ⴛ 10.
608 Chapter 12 Gears

2. Add the appropriate shafts.

It would be better to support the shafts at both ends with a boxlike support structure. See
Figure 12-84.
3. Use the Constraint command and insert the worm gears.
Figure 12-85 shows the finished worm gear support.

O20

O12

The front two plates

were omitted for clarity
Figure 12-84 Figure 12-85

SUMMARY
This chapter explained the differences among three types of The addition of hubs, splines, and keyways to gears was
gears: spur, bevel, and worm. Gear terminology, formulas, and illustrated, and gears were assembled into gear trains.
ratios were explained.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. What are the two gears needed to create a worm gear 4. If four gears are meshed together and the first gear is
assembly called? turning clockwise, the fourth gear is turning
a. Worm gear and spur gear a. Clockwise
b. Worm and worm gear b. Counterclockwise
c. Rack and worm gear c. Dwelling
2. If a spur gear with 20 teeth is meshed with another spur 5. The hole in the center of a gear is called the
gear with 50 teeth, what is the gear ratio? a. Center hole
a. 2:1 b. 1.75:1 c. 2.5:1 d. 3:1 b. Dedendum
3. If a worm is meshed with a worm gear that has 46 teeth, c. Bore
what is the gear ratio? d. Root diameter
a. 46:1 b. 23:1 c. 192:1 d. 11:1
 Chapter 12 Gears 609

6. The height of a tooth above the pitch diameter is called the 9. The portion of a gear that protrudes from the gear’s cen-
a. Face width ter and includes a bore is called the gear’s
b. Dedendum a. Face
c. Addendum b. Hub
d. Module c. Backlash
7. The diameter used to define the spacing of gears is called the d. Root fillet
a. Pitch diameter 10. A listing of setscrews and keys used with gears is found
b. Diametral pitch in the
c. Preferred pitches a. Design Accelerator
d. Center distance b. Assembly Panel
8. A gear train is c. Content Center
a. A group of at least six gears
b. Any group of two or more meshing gears
c. A group of gears with different pitches.

Matching
Column A Column B
a. Backlash 1. The angle between the line of action
and a line tangent to the pitch circle
b. Circular thickness 2. The pitch diameter divided by the
number of teeth
c. Module 3. The distance across a tooth as
measured along the pitch circle
d. Pressure angle 4. The distance from the front to back
along a tooth as measured
perpendicular to the pitch circle
e. Face width 5. The difference between a tooth width
and the engaging space on a meshing
gear

True or False
1. True or False: A library of gears in included in the Con- 6. True or False: The axes of beveled gears are located at 90°
tent Center. to each other.
2. True or False: Gears must have the same pitch to mesh 7. True or False: Bevel gear can mesh with spur gears.
properly. 8. True or False: Worms have a ratio value of 1 when mesh-
3. True or False: The term pitch, as used with gears manu- ing with worm gears.
factured using English units, is called module for gears 9. True or False: A boss is a turretlike shape usually added to
manufactured using metric units. castings.
4. True or False: Diametral pitch is the outside diameter of a 10. True or False: The face width of a gear is its thickness.
gear.
5. True or False: Gear ratios are determined by the number
of teeth on each gear.

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 12-1: Inches
Draw two spur gears based on the following parameters. Locate the
two threaded holes 90° apart as shown. On both gears the threaded
hole is located halfway up the hub height.
610 Chapter 12 Gears

Figure P12-1

Gear 1 Gear 2
Number of teeth 16 48
Face width .50 .50
Diametral pitch 24 24
Pressure angle 20 20
Hub Ø .50 .50
Hub height .375 .750
Bore .250 .500
Threaded hole 0.138(#6)UNC 0.164(#8)UNC

Project 12-2: Inches

A. Draw two spur gears based on the following parameters. On
both gears the threaded hole is located halfway up the hub
height.

Gear 1 Gear 2
Number of teeth 20 50
Face width 1.00 1.00
Diametral pitch 12 12
Pressure angle 20 20
Hub Ø 1.00 1.00
Hub height .375 .750
Bore .500 1.000
Threaded hole 0.216(#12)UNC 0.216(#12)UNC
Figure P12-2
 Chapter 12 Gears 611

B. Design Exercise
Create a support plate and shafts for the two gears drawn in part A of
this exercise. See the section on gear assemblies. Create two shafts,
Ø.500 and Ø1.000 with .05 chamfers at each end. The shafts should
be long enough to allow for at least .25 clearance between the gears
and the support plate. The shafts should extend from the bottom sur-
face of the plate to the top surface of the gears’ hub.
Create a plate .375 thick. Size the plate so that it extends at least
.25 beyond the edges on either gear. Mount the shafts in SKF Series
RLS ball bearings, and create holes in the plate that will accommo-
date the outside diameters of the bearings.

Project 12-3: Millimeters

Draw two spur gears based on the following parameters. On both
gears the threaded hole is located halfway up the hub height.

Gear 1 Gear 2

Number of teeth 30 90

Face width 20 20

Diametral pitch 1.5 1.5

Pressure angle 20 20

Hub Ø 30 50

Hub height 20 20

Bore 12 16

Threaded hole M3 M5

Figure P12-3

Project 12-4: Millimeters

A. Draw two spur gears based on the following parameters. On
both gears the threaded hole is located halfway up the hub
height.
612 Chapter 12 Gears

Figure P12-4

Gear 1 Gear 2

Number of teeth 36 90

Face width 10 20

Diametral pitch 0.5 1.5

Pressure angle 20 20

Hub Ø 15 30

Hub height 16 16

Bore 8 16

Threaded hole M3 M5

B. Design Exercise
Create a support plate and shafts for the two gears drawn in part A of
this project. See the section on gear assemblies. Create two shafts,
Ø8.0 and Ø16.0 with 0.50 chamfers at each end. The shafts should be
long enough to allow for at least 5.0 clearance between the gears and
the support plate. The shafts should extend from the bottom surface of
the plate to the top surface of the gears’ hub.
Create a plate 10 thick. Size the plate so that it extends at least 5.0
beyond the edges on either gear. Mount the shafts in DIN 1854-4 M
plain bearings and create holes in the plate that will accommodate the
outside diameters of the bearings.

Project 12-5: Inches

A. Draw two bevel gears based on the following parameters. On
both gears the threaded hole is located halfway up the hub
height.
 Chapter 12 Gears 613

Gear 1 Gear 2

Shaft angle 90 90

Pressure angle 20 20

Helix angle 20 20

Number of teeth 24 60

Face width .50 .50

Diametral pitch 16 16

Hub Ø 1.00 1.00

Hub height .75 .75

Bore .50 .50

Threaded hole #8-UNC #8-UNC

B. Design Exercise
Create an L-bracket support plate and shafts for the two gears drawn
in part A of this project. See the section on supports for bevel gear.
Create two shafts, Ø.50 with .05 chamfers at each end. The shafts
should be long enough to allow for at least .25 clearance between the
gears and the support plate. The shafts should extend from the bottom
surface of the plate to the top surface of the gears’ hub.
Create an L-bracket .375 thick. Size the bracket so that it extends
at least .25 beyond the edges on either gear. Make the outside diame-
ters of the bosses at least .025 greater that the outside diameter of the
bearings. Make the bosses .25 high.
Mount the shafts in SKF Series RLS ball bearings, and create
holes in the plate that will accommodate the outside diameters of the
bearings.

Project 12-6: Millimeters

A. Draw two bevel gears based on the following parameters. On
both gears the threaded hole is located halfway up the hub height.
614 Chapter 12 Gears

Gear 1 Gear 2

Shaft angle 90 90

Pressure angle 20 20

Helix angle 20 20

Number of teeth 20 40

Face width 12 12

Tangential module 2 2

Hub Ø 20 40

Hub height 16 20

Bore 12 20

Threaded hole M5 M6

B. Design Exercise
Create an L-bracket support plate and shafts for the two gears drawn in
part A of this project. See the section on supports for bevel gear. Create
two shafts, Ø12.0 and Ø20.0 with 0.50 chamfers at each end. The shafts
should be long enough to allow for at least 5.0 clearance between the
gears and the support plate. The shafts should extend from the bottom
surface of the plate to the top surface of the gears’ hub.
Create an L-bracket 10 thick. Size the plate so that it extends at
least 5.0 beyond the edges on either gear. Make the outside diameters
of the bosses at least 5 greater that the outside diameter of the bear-
ings. Make the bosses 5.00 high.
Mount the shafts in DIN 1854-4 M plain bearings, and create
holes in the plate that will accommodate the outside diameters of the
bearings.

Project 12-7: Inches

A. Draw a worm and a worm gear based on the following param-
eters. On both gears the threaded hole is located halfway up
the hub height.
 Chapter 12 Gears 615

Worm gear: Number of teeth = 48

Worm: Number of threads = 1

Worm Worm Gear

Face width .75

Diametral pitch 12 12

Pressure angle 20 20

Worm length 2.50

Hub Ø .50 .50

Hub height .500 .750

Bore .375 .500

Threaded hole 0.138(#6)UNC 0.164(#8)UNC

B. Design Exercise
Create a corner-bracket support plate and shafts for the two gears
drawn in part A of this project. See the section on worm gear supports.
Create two shafts, Ø.375 and Ø.500 with .05 chamfers at each end.
The shafts should be long enough to allow for at least .25 clearance
between the gears and the support plate. The shafts should extend
from the back surface of the plate to the top surface of the gears’ hub.
Create a corner bracket .375 thick. Size the bracket so that it ex-
tends at least .25 beyond the edges on either gear. Mount the shafts in
SKF Series RLS ball bearings and create holes in the sides that will
accommodate the outside diameters of the bearings.

Project 12-8: Inches

A. Draw a worm and a worm gear based on the following param-
eters. On both gears the threaded hole is located halfway up
the hub height.
616 Chapter 12 Gears

Worm gear: Number of teeth = 60

Worm: Number of threads = 1

Worm Worm Gear

Face width 24

Module 4 4

Pressure angle 14.5 14.5

Worm length 65

Hub Ø 16 24

Hub height 12 16

Bore 8.0 10.0

Threaded hole M4 M4

B. Design Exercise
Create a corner-bracket support plate and shafts for the two gears
drawn in part A of this project. See the section on worm gear supports.
Create two shafts, Ø8.0 and Ø10.0 with .50 chamfers at each end. The
shafts should be long enough to allow for at least 5.0 clearance be-
tween the gears and the support plate. The shafts should extend from
the back surface of the plate to the top surface of the gears’ hub.
Create a corner bracket 8.0 thick. Size the bracket so that it ex-
tends at least 6.0 beyond the edges on either gear. Mount the shafts in
DIN 1854-4 M plain bearings, and create holes in the sides that will
accommodate the outside diameters of the bearings.

Project 12-9: Inches

A. Prepare an assembly drawing of the 2-Gear Assembly shown
in Figure P12-5. The gears have the following parameters:

Center distance = 3.00

Gear 1 Gear 2

Number of teeth 48 96

Face width .50 .50

Diametral pitch 24 24

Pressure angle 20 20

Hub Ø .750 1.000

Hub height .500 .500

Bore .5.00 .625

 Chapter 12 Gears 617

B. Prepare a presentation drawing.

C. Animate the presentation drawing.
D. Prepare an exploded isometric drawing with assembly num-
bers and a parts list.
E. Prepare a detailed dimensioned drawing of each part.

2-Gear Assembly

Figure P12-5a

Figure P12-5b
618 Chapter 12 Gears

Gear, Housing
P/N ENG-453-A
Cast Iron

Figure P12-5c

Shaft, Gear O.625

P/N AM-314
Steel

Figure P12-5d
 Chapter 12 Gears 619

Shaft, Gear O.500

P/N AM-315
Steel

Figure P12-5e

Cover, Gear
P/N ENG-566-B
Cast Iron

Figure P12-5f

Bushing O.625
P/N BU-1123
Delrin, Black

Figure P12-5g
620 Chapter 12 Gears

Bushing O0.750
P/N BU-1126
Delrin, Black

Figure P12-5h
Figure P12-5i
Project 12-10: Millimeters
A. Prepare an assembly drawing of the 4-Gear Assembly shown Presentation
in Figure P12-6. The gears have the following parameters; Drawing

4-Gear Assembly

Figure P12-6a Figure P12-6b

Center distance = 3.00

Gears 1, 3 Gears 2, 4

Number of teeth 30 96

Face width 20.0 20.0

Module 2 2

Pressure angle 20 20

Hub Ø 50.0 60.0

Hub height 20.0 20.0

Bore 25.0 30.0

 Chapter 12 Gears 621

B. Prepare a presentation drawing.

C. Animate the presentation drawing.
D. Prepare an exploded isometric drawing with assembly numbers
and a parts list.
E. Prepare a detailed dimensioned drawing of each part.

Parts List

Figure P12-6c

Housing, Gear
P/N ENG-311-1
Cast Iron

Figure P12-6d
622 Chapter 12 Gears

Cover
P/N AM-311-2

Figure P12-6e

Gasket
P/N ENG-312-1
Brass, soft yellow

Figure P12-6f
 Chapter 12 Gears 623

Gear Subassembly

Gear 2
Number of teeth = 80
PD = 160
Module = 2.0
Pressure angle = 20°

Gear 1
Number of teeth = 30
PD = 60
Module = 2.0
Pressure angle = 20°

Figure P12-6g

Shaft, Output
P/N SH-4003
Steel

Figure P12-6h

Shaft, Input
P/N SH-4004-A
Steel

Figure P12-6i
624 Chapter 12 Gears

Shaft, Neutral
P/N SH-4002
Steel

Figure P12-6j

Exploded Isometric Drawing

Figure P12-6k
Sheet Metal Drawings 13
Chapter
Objectives
• Show how to create sheet metal drawings.
• Explain sheet metal gauges.
• Understand sheet metal terminology.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains how to create sheet metal drawings. Gauges for sheet metal are presented
along with bend radii, flanges, tabs, reliefs, and flat patterns.

SHEET METAL DRAWINGS

Figure 13-1 shows a 3D solid model of a sheet metal part and a dimensioned orthographic draw-
ing of that part. The orthographic drawing was created from the 3D model. The following sec-
tions explain how to create the 3D sheet metal drawing.

Figure 13-1
626 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Exercise 13-1: Creating a 3D Sheet Metal Drawing

1. Create a new drawing using the Sheet Metal (mm).ipt format.
See Figure 13-2. The 2D sketch panel will appear. See Figure 13-3. Sheet metal drawings are
initiated as 2D sketches, then developed using a combination of 2D Sketch and Sheet Metal
Features panel commands.
2. Use the Two Point rectangle command and draw a 20 × 50 rectangle.
3. Move the cursor into the area of the Viewcube and click the icon that looks like a house.
See Figure 13-3.

Click here.

Figure 13-2

Figure 13-3
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 627

Exercise 13-2: Adding Thickness

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
2. Right-click the mouse again and select the Finish Sketch option. Note:
The Shee
The Sheet Metal Features panel will appear. See Figure 13-4. Not all commands t Metal F
ea
also be ac tures
panel may
will be active at this time, but they will become active as the drawing progresses. clicking th cessed by
ea
the 2D S rrow to the right o
ketch Pa f
ing. See F nel head
igure 13-4 -
.

Click here.

Click here to
access the
Sheet Metal
Features
panel.

Figure 13-4

3. Select the Sheet Metal Defaults option from the Sheet Metal Features panel.
The Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box will appear. See Figure 13-5. The Sheet Metal
Defaults dialog box is used to define the thickness, material, and bend characteristics of the part.

Enter material.

Accept the default

thickness.

Figure 13-5
628 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Inventor has many default values already in place. Figure 13-5 shows that the default thick-
ness is 0.500 mm. Sheet metal is manufactured in standard thicknesses. Figure 13-6 is a partial
listing of available standard sheet metal thicknesses in inches, and Figure 13-7 is a partial listing
of sheet metal thicknesses in millimeters.
Figure 13-7 lists 0.500 mm as a standard thickness, so this default value will be used for this
example. Set the Material Style for Aluminum-6061.

Figure 13-6 Figure 13-7

4. Accept the 0.500 mm Thickness value and enter a material of Aluminum-6061. Click Done.
5. Select the Face tool from the Sheet Metal Features panel.
6. Select the sketch, then click OK.
See Figure 13-8.

Click here.

The thickness value and

material were defined in the
Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box.

Thickness = 0.500
Material = Aluminum-6061

The completed face

Figure 13-8
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 629

Bend Radii
As sheet metal is bent the inside surface is subjected to compression, and the outside surface to
tension. These forces cause the material to stretch slightly.
To edit the bend radius for a sheet metal part access the Style and Standard Editor dialog
box by first clicking the Edit Sheet Metal Rule box located on the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog
box. See Figure 13-9.
The Relief Depth and Minimum Remnant values shown on the Style and Standard Editor
dialog box are calculated based on the thickness value specified in the Sheet Metal Defaults
dialog box. This defines the Relief Depth as 0.25 mm.
The default values for Radius and Relief Shape will be accepted for this example.

Click here.

Thickness = 0.500

The Relief Depth

is calculated at
half the material
thickness.
Figure 13-9

Flanges

1. Select the Flange tool from the Sheet Metal Features panel. flange: A rim formed on the
edge of sheet metal for strength.
The Flange dialog box will appear. See Figure 13-10.
630 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Click here.
Select the lower edge.

Enter value.
Flip Direction box
Figure 13-10

2. Set the distance for 20 and select the lower rear edge of the sketch.
The lower edge was chosen because the flange total height is to be 20 mm. If the upper edge were
chosen, the total height would be 20.5, the flange height plus the material thickness. Figure 13-11
shows the flange orientation resulting from edge selection.

Rear lower
edge

Upper edge
Lower edge

Figure 13-11

3. Use the Flip Direction button to change the flange orientation.

4. Click OK.
Figure 13-12 shows the resulting flange.

The bend will be added automatically based on

the values defined in the Sheet Metal Defaults box.

Figure 13-12
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 631

Tabs
Tabs are similar to flanges, but tabs do not run the entire length of the edge, as flanges do. Tabs tab: A feature similar to a
are created using a new sketch plane, then the Two Point Rectangle tool on the 2D Sketch Panel. flange but that does not run
See Figure 13-13. the entire length of the edge.

1. Select the top-edge surface of the vertical flange, right-click the mouse and select the
New Sketch option.
2. Use the Two Point Rectangle tool on the 2D Sketch Panel and draw a rectangle that ex-
tends from the edge of the vertical flange as shown.
3. Use the General Dimension tool to size and locate the tab in accordance with the dimen-
sions given in Figure 13-13.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then right-click the mouse again and
select the Finish Sketch option.
5. Select the Face tool, and define the tab as the Profile.
6. Select OK.
Figure 13-13 shows the resulting tab.

Create a new sketch plane

on the edge surface.

Relief

Figure 13-13

Reliefs
Reliefs are cut out in material to allow it to be bent. If the material were not relieved, it would tear relief: An area cut out of
uncontrollably as the bend was formed. material to allow it to be bent.
Inventor’s default relief value is equal to the thickness of the sheet metal material. Figure 13-13
shows the relief that was automatically created as the tab was formed.
632 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Holes
Holes are added to sheet metal parts in the same manner as they are added to 3D models. See
Figure 13-14.
1. Create a new sketch plane on the top surface of the tab.
2. Use the Point, Center Point tool to define the hole’s center point.
3. Use the General Dimension tool to dimension the hole’s center point location.
4. Right-click the mouse, click the Done option, then click the Finish Sketch option.
5. Use the Hole tool on the Sheet Metal Features panel to create the hole.
In this example a Ø5.00 hole was created located 5 from each edge of the tab.

Create a new Use Point,

sketch plane. Center Point

Figure 13-14

Corners
Both internal and external corners are created using the Corner Round tool found on the Sheet
Metal Features panel.
1. Click the Corner Round tool on the Sheet Metal Features panel.
2. The Corner Round dialog box will appear. See Figure 13-15.
3. Set the Radius value for 5.
4. Select the two outside corners of the tab.
5. Click OK.
Figure 13-15 shows the resulting rounded corners.

Cuts
Cuts may be any shape, other than a hole, that passes through the sheet metal. In this example a
rectangular shape is used. See Figure 13-16.
1. Create a new sketch plane and sketch a rectangle as shown. Use the General Dimension
tool to size and locate the rectangle.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then select the Finish Sketch option.
The Sheet Metal Features panel will appear.
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 633

Select the corners.

Click here. Enter value.

Figure 13-15

Create a new sketch plane

and sketch a rectangle.
Use the Cut tool to remove the rectangle.

The resulting cut

Figure 13-16
634 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

3. Select the Cut tool.

The Cut dialog box will appear.
4. Select the rectangle as the Profile.
5. Ensure that the direction of the cut is correct, then click the OK box.
The rectangular area will be removed. The depth of the cut will automatically be set for the
thickness evalue.
6. Select the Corner Round tool and set the Radius value for 2 mm.
7. Select the four inside corners of the rectangular cut.
8. Click the OK button on the Corner Round dialog box.

Cuts Through Normal Surfaces

Normal surfaces are surfaces that are perpendicular to each other. Cuts in normal sufaces are
made by making intersecting cuts in both surfaces. See Figure 13-17.
1. Create a new sketch plane on the vertical flange as shown, and sketch a rectangle.

Extend rectangle beyond the lower surface.

Click the box.

Figure 13-17
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 635

Ensure that the rectangle extends beyond the rounded edge of the surface.
2. Use the General Dimension tool to locate and size the rectangle.
3. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then select the Finish Sketch option.
4. Use the Cut tool to remove the rectangle.
5. Create another new sketch plane on the horizontal flange, and use the General Dimen-
sion tool to size and locate the rectangle.
6. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option, then the Finish Sketch option.
7. Click the Cut tool.
The Cut dialog box will appear.
8. Click the Cut Across Bend box, then OK.

Hole Patterns
A hole pattern is created from an existing hole. See Figure 13-18.
1. Create a new sketch plane on the horizontal flange.
2. Use the Point, Center Point tool and create a hole on the flange.

Dimensions
Click here. from Figure 13-1

Enter values.

Flip button

Direction 1
Enter values. Direction 2

Figure 13-18
636 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

3. Use the General Dimension tool to locate the hole’s center point.
4. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
5. Right-click the mouse and click the Finish Sketch option.
6. Click the Hole tool on the Sheet Metal Features panel.
The Hole dialog box will appear.
7. Set the Termination for Through All and the hole’s diameter for 3.
8. Click OK.
The dimensions for the hole come from the dimensions given in Figure 13-1.
9. Click the Rectangular Pattern tool.
The Rectangular Pattern dialog box will appear.
10. Define the hole as the Feature.
11. Click the arrow under the Direction 1 heading, then the top front edge of the part. Use the
Flip button to change directions if necessary.
12. Set the number of holes under Direction 1 for 4 and the spacing for 8 mm.
13. Click the arrow under the Direction 2 heading, then click the left front edge of the part to
define the direction.
14. Set the number of holes for 2 and the distance for 8.
15. Click OK.

FLAT PATTERNS
Flat patterns of 3D sheet metal parts can be created using the Flat Pattern tool. See Figure 13-19.
1. Click the Flat Pattern tool.
A flat patternwill automatically be created.

Resulting flat pattern

Click here.

Figure 13-19

PUNCH TOOL
The Punch Tool is used to create various shapes in sheet metal parts. Because sheet metal parts
are thin, many shapes are created by punching through the material. Sheet metal is placed in a
press and a tool with the desired shape is inserted. The press then presses down quickly piercing
the sheet metal with the punch tool creating the desired shape.
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 637

To use the Punch Tool

1. Draw a 4-in.  6-in. rectangle using the Sheet Metal (in).ipt format. It is presented in an
isometric orientation.
See Figure 13-20.
2. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Sketch option.
3. Click the Sheet Metal Defaults tool; set the Material Style for Steel, Mild and the
Thickness for 0.1019 (#10 gauge). Click OK.
4. Click the Face tool.
There is only one shape on the screen, so the Face tool will automatically select the rectan-
gle as the profile. See Figure 13-21.
5. Click OK.

Dimensions are
in inches.

Figure 13-20

Click here.

Profile
Figure 13-21
638 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

6. Right-click the front face of the rectangular part and create a new sketch plane.
7. Use the Point, Center Point tool and the General Dimension tool and locate a center
mark 1.25 from the left edge and 2.00 from the top edge.
8. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option. Right-click the mouse again and
select the Finish Sketch option.
See Figure 13-22.
9. Click the Punch Tool on the Sheet Metal Features panel.
The Punch Tool Directory dialog box will appear. See Figure 13-23.

Center mark

Figure 13-22

Click here.

Click here.

Figure 13-23

10. Select the obround punch and click Open.

The Punch Tool dialog box will appear. See Figure 13-24.
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 639

Preview

Figure 13-24

11. Click the Geometry tab and set the angle value for 90°.
See Figure 13-25.

Click here.
Preview

Enter new
value.

Figure 13-25

12. Click the Size tab and set the length and width values for 1.25 and 0.75, respectively.
See Figure 13-26.
13. Click Finish.
See Figure 13-27.
14. Create another new sketch plane on the front surface of the rectangular part and locate a
center mark 3.00 from the left edge and 2.00 from the top edge.
15. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option. Right-click the mouse again and
select the Finish Sketch option.
640 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Click here.

Enter values.

Click here.

Figure 13-26 Figure 13-27

See Figure 13-28.

16. Click the Punch Tool and select the keyhole option. Accept the default values and click
Finish.

Figure 13-28

See Figure 13-29.

17. Create and locate a center mark 1.25 from the right edge and 2.00 from the top edge.
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 641

Preview

Click here.

Click here.

Keyhole

Figure 13-29

See Figure 13-30.

18. Access the Punch Tool and select the Square Emboss option.
The Punch Tool dialog box will appear. See Figure 13-31.

19. Change the Length value to 1.50.

642 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Figure 13-30

Preview

Enter value.

Click here.
Figure 13-31

20. Click Finish.

Figure 13-32 shows the finished rectangular part.
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 643

Finished rectangular
part

Shape created
using Punch Tool

Figure 13-32

SUMMARY
This chapter defined and illustrated how to create sheet flanges, tabs, and reliefs were presented, and flat patterns
metal drawings from 3D models and orthographic draw- were created.
ings. Features of sheet metal parts such as bend radii, The use of the Punch Tool was also illustrated.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. How thick is a piece of #12 gauge sheet metal? c. Fold
a. .4600 d. Hem
b. 0.0808 4. A small piece of bent material that does not run the entire
c. 0.0571 length of an edge is called a
d. 0.0050 a. Flange
2. How thick is a piece of #30 gauge sheet metal? b. Tab
a. 0.1443 c. Relief
b. 1/8 d. Contour
c. 0.0100 5. Which of the following materials is not available in the
d. 0.0031 Material Style of the Sheet Metal Defaults?
3. The thickness of a piece of sheet metal is defined using a. Steel, Mild
which tool? b. Aluminum-6061
a. Sheet Metal Defaults c. Brass, Soft
b. Face d. Plexiglas
644 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

True or False
1. True or False: In the English unit system the higher the 4. True or False: Normal surfaces are surfaces located 60°
sheet metal gauge number the thinner the material. apart.
2. True or False: A cut made next to a tab to allow for 5. True or False: Punch tools can be used to create slots and
smooth bending is called a relief. keyholes.
3. True or False: As sheet metal is bent the inside surface
is subjected to compression, and the outside surface to
tension.
CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 13-1:
Redraw the sheet metal parts in Figures P13-1 through P13-6 using the
given dimensions. Use the default values for all bend radii and reliefs.

Object is symmetrical
about the centerline

Figure P13-1 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 645

Figure P13-2 INCHES

646 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Figure P13-3 INCHES

 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 647

Figure P13-4 MILLIMETERS

648 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Figure P13-5 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 649

60°

Figure P13-6 MILLIMETERS

650 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings

Project 13-2: Inches

Design and draw a box similar to that shown that has a capacity of
A. 100 cubic centimeters and is a cube.
B. 4 fluid ounces.
C. 100 cubic centimeters and is rectangular with the length of
one side 2 times the length of the other.
D. 125 cubic inches and is a cube.
E. 125 cubic inches and is rectangular with the length of one
side 1.5 times the length of the other.
F. 8 fluid ounces.

Figure P13-7
 Chapter 13 Sheet Metal Drawings 651

Project 13-3: Inches

Draw the sheet metal part shown in Figure P13-8.
The part is made from #16 gauge mild steel.
Use the following values for the Punch Tool shapes.
The Round Emboss:
Height ⫽ 0.125
Diameter ⫽ 1.250
Angle ⫽ 30°
The Slot (obround):
Length ⫽ 1.50
Width ⫽ 0.50
The Curved Slot:
Outer radius = 0.625
Inner radius ⫽ 0.250
Angle = 180°

Figure P13-8
This page intentionally left blank
Weldment Drawings 14
Chapter
Objectives
• Understand how to design and draw weldments.
• Explain fillet and groove welds.
• Show how to create weld symbols.

INTRODUCTION
Weldments are assemblies made from several smaller parts that have been welded together. Weld- weldment: An assembly made
ments are often cheaper to manufacture because they save extensive machining time or replace from several smaller parts that
expensive castings. have been welded together.

FILLET WELDS
Figure 14-1 shows a simple weldment. It was created from two 0.375-in. thick plates and joined
by a fillet weld. The base plate is 2.00 × 4.00 in., and the vertical plate is 1.25 × 4.00 in. Both parts fillet weld: A weld usually cre-
are made from low-carbon steel. ated at 45° to join pieces that
are perpendicular to each
other; may be continuous or
intermittent.

Figure 14-1

Exercise 14-1: Creating the Components

1. Click the New tool, then the English tab, then Weldment (ANSI).iam.
2. Click the Create Component tool.
The Create In-Place Component dialog box will appear. See Figure 14-2.
654 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

3. Define a new component named Base, Weld.

4. Click the Browse Template box.
The Open Template dialog box will appear. See Figure 14-3.
5. Select the Standard (in).ipt format. Click OK.
The Create In-Place Component dialog box will reappear. Note that English\Standard
(in).ipt is the new template. See Figure 14-4.
6. Click OK.
The 2D Sketch Panel will appear.
7. Sketch a 2.00 × 4.00 rectangle.
8. Right-click the mouse and click Done. Right-click the mouse again and click Finish
Sketch.
The Part Features panel will appear.

Enter name. Click here.

Figure 14-2

Select here.

Figure 14-3

New template

Figure 14-4
 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 655

9. Click the Extrude tool and define a thickness of 0.375 for the rectangle.
See Figure 14-5.

Figure 14-5

Exercise 14-2: Creating a Second Plate

1. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Edit option.
See Figure 14-6.

Click here.

Figure 14-6
656 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

2. Select the Copy Components tool.

See Figure 14-7. The Copy Components: Status dialog box will appear.
3. Click the Base, Weld:1 component in the browser box.
The component file name will appear in the dialog box.
4. Click Next.
The Copy Components: File Names dialog box will appear. See Figure 14-8.
The copied component will be assigned a new file name. In this example the new name is
Base, Weld_CPY.ipt. Another name could be entered.
5. Click the Increment box and remove the check mark. Click the Apply box.
The component copy will appear on the screen. See Figure 14-9.

Click the plate.

Click here.
The name of the component
to be copied will appear here.

Click here.

Figure 14-7

File name for new component

Remove check mark.

Click here.
Figure 14-8
 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 657

The copy:
Base, Weld_cpy The original:
Base, Weld

Remove
check mark.

Right-click here. Figure 14-10

Figure 14-9

Exercise 14-3: Creating a T-Bracket:

1. Right-click Base, Weld_CPY1 in the browser box and
click the Grounded option.
See Figure 14-10. This will remove the grounded con-
straint. The pushpin icon will disappear from the browser
box.
2. Use the Constraint tool and assemble the two plates
to form a T-bracket.
See Figure 14-11.

Exercise 14-4: Creating the Welds

1. Access the Weldment Feature panel by double-
clicking the Welds tool in the browser. Click here.
See Figure 14-12.
2. Click the Fillet Weld tool on the Weldment Feature
panel.

T-bracket

Double-click here.

Figure 14-11 Figure 14-12

658 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

The Fillet Weld dialog box will appear. See Figure 14-13.
3. Set the weld size to 0.125, as shown.
4. Click the 1 box, then click the top of the part Base, Weld.
5. Click the 2 box, then click the front vertical surface of the vertical plate.
A preview of the weld will appear as small right triangles. See Figure 14-13.
6. Click OK.
Figure 14-14 shows the finished weld.

Enter value

Weld preview

Side 2

Side 1 Finished weld

Figure 14-13 Figure 14-14

Intermittent Fillet Welds

Fillet welds may be located intermittently along a weld line.
1. Rotate the T-bracket created in the previous section so that the side opposite the fillet weld
is exposed.
2. Click the Fillet Weld tool.
The Fillet Weld dialog box will appear. See Figure 14-15.
3. Enter the appropriate Intermittency values.
Note that values 1.00 and 1.50 have been entered in the Intermittency box. The 1.00 value
is the length of each weld, and the 1.50 value is the distance from the center of one weld to the
center of the next.
 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 659

Enter values.

Enter value.

Weld preview

Side 1

Side 2

Figure 14-15

Finished intermittent welds

Figure 14-16

4. Click Apply.
Figure 14-16 shows the finished intermittent welds.

Weld Symbols
Welds are defined on drawings using symbols. The symbol for a fillet weld is shown in Figure 14-17.
Note that the location of the flaglike portion of the symbol defines the location of the weld. It is
not always possible to point directly at a weld location, so the Other side symbol is very useful.
660 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

Symbols for fillet welds

Arrow side

Define the weld size here.

Other side

Both sides

Figure 14-17

The size of the weld is defined as shown. Most fillet welds are created at 45°, although other
angles are possible. A fillet weld defined by .25 indicates that the 45° weld is defined by two
sides, both .25 long. Metric values are used to define a weld size in the same manner.

Exercise 14-5: Adding a Weld Symbol to a Drawing

1. Access the Fillet Weld dialog box and click the Create Welding Symbol box or click the
Welding Symbol tool on the Weldment Feature panel.
See Figure 14-18

Click

Enter values.

Click bead.

Figure 14-18
 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 661

Weld symbol

Figure 14-19

Weld
symbol

Enter values.

Figure 14-20

2. Define the weld’s size, then add the weld-size value at the left of the fillet weld symbol.
3. Click OK.
Figure 14-19 shows a weld drawing with a weld symbol.
Figure 14-20 shows the fillet weld symbol for an intermittent fillet weld.

All Around
The addition of a circle to the fillet weld symbol indicates that the weld is to placed all around
the object. Figure 14-21 shows a cylinder welded to a plate. In this example the fillet weld was
defined using millimeters. A 5-mm × 5-mm weld is to be created all the way around the cylinder.

Exercise 14-6: Creating an All-Around Fillet Weld

1. Start a new drawing, click the Metric tab, and create a new drawing using the Weldment
ISO.iam format.
2. Create a 5 × 40 × 40-mm plate and a Ø20 × 30 cylinder.
3. Assemble the parts so that the cylinder is centered on the plate.
4. Click Weld in the browser box, then click the Fillet Weld tool.
662 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

Weld
preview

Enter values.
Click here.

Enter values.

Click here.

Face 2
Face 1

Figure 14-21

Finished all-around
weld and symbol

Figure 14-22

The Fillet Weld dialog box will appear. See Figure 14-21.
5. Set the weld size for 5 × 5 mm, then click the Create Welding Symbol box.
6. Enter a fillet weld value of 5.
7. Click the right end of the arrow symbol to create a circle around the bend in the arrow.
8. Click OK.
Figure 14-22 shows the finished weld and symbol.
 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 663

.19 x .19 Chamfer

Create two plates and
assemble them as shown.
.375 x 2.00 x 4.00 Plate

Use weldment(ANSI).
iam format.

Click here.

Face 2

Preview of
groove weld Finished groove weld
Face 1
Figure 14-23

WELDMENTS—GROOVE WELDS
Groove welds are used when two parts abut. A chamfer is cut into each part and the weld is placed groove weld: A weld used
in the resulting groove. Figure 14-23 shows an L-bracket created as a weldment. when two parts abut, placed in
It was created as follows. the groove formed when a
1. Draw a .375 ⴛ 2.00 ⴛ 4.00-in. plate and cut a .19 ⴛ .19 chamfer as shown. chamfer is cut into each part.
2. Create a weldment drawing using the Weldment (ANSI).iam format.
3. Add two plates to the drawing and assemble them as shown.
4. Double-click the word Weld in the browser box, then click the Groove Weld tool in the
Weldment Feature panel.
The Groove Weld dialog box will appear.
5. Click the Full Face Weld boxes for both Face Set 1 and Face Set 2.
6. Define Face 1 and Face 2.
7. Click OK.
664 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

Manufacture this
part as a weldment.

Figure 14-24

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP14-1

Figure 14-24 shows an object that is to be manufactured as a weldment created from three parts.
The three parts are the barrel, the center plate, and the front plate.

Exercise 14-7: Creating the Weldment

Use the Weldment (ISO).iam format. The dimensions for each part were derived from those
given in Figure 14-24.
1. Create a Metric, Weldment (ISO). iam drawing.
2. Use the Create Component tool (use the Standard (mm).ipt format) and create a 15 ×
55 × 110 plate with a 5 × 5 chamfer and a Ø15 as shown.
3. Right-click and select the Finish Edit option.
4. Use the Create Component tool and create a Ø46 × 35 barrel with a Ø16 through-all
hole. Use the Constraint tool to position the barrel.
5. Reorient the model and use the Create Component tool to create a 20 × 55 × 35 flange
with a 25 × 20 cutout as shown.
6. Add a groove weld as shown.
7. Add a 5 × 5 fillet weld as shown.
8. Add a 2 × 2 fillet weld around the barrel as shown.
Figure 14-25 shows the weldment.
 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 665

O46 x 35 Barrel
O16 Hole-through all

15 x 55 x 110 Plate
5 x 5 Chamfer
O15 Hole

Groove Weld 5 x 5 Fillet Weld

2 x 2 Fillet Weld

Figure 14-25

SUMMARY
This chapter illustrated how to create and draw weldments, were introduced; welding symbols were added to drawings;
which are assemblies of several parts welded together. Fillet and groove welds were illustrated.
welds, both continuous and intermittent as well as all around,
 666 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. What shape is the symbol for a fillet weld? 4. Access to the weld tools is gained by clicking the Welds
a. Circle tool located in the
b. Flaglike a. Weldment Assembly Panel
c. Square b. Standard toolbar
d. Hexagon c. Tools pull-down menu
2. A circle added to the fillet weld symbol means d. Browser
a. Weld all around 5. A weld symbol that has a symbol both above and below
b. Use a round weld bead the horizontal segment of the symbol indicates
c. Use a cosmetic weld a. Weld the other side
3. Groove welds are generally associated with b. Weld both sides
c. Weld all around
a. Fillets
d. Weld the closest side
b. Holes
c. Chamfers
d. Cutouts

True or False
1. True or False: A weldment is an assembly made from 4. True or False: A groove weld is used when two parts abut.
several smaller parts that have been welded together. 5. True or False: Fillet welds can be defined in two ways:
2. True or False: Inventor can draw both continuous and two edge distances or the distance from front to back.
intermittent welds.
3. True or False: The symbol for a fillet weld is a circle.

CHAPTER PROJECT
Project 14-1:
For Figures P14-1 through P14-10, redesign the given parts as weld-
ments. Use either 5-mm or .20-in. fillet welds.

Figure P14-1 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 667

Figure P14-2 MILLIMETERS

Figure P14-3 MILLIMETERS

Figure P14-4 INCHES

668 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

Figure P14-5 MILLIMETERS

Figure P14-6 MILLIMETERS

Figure P14-7 MILLIMETERS

 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings 669

Figure P14-8 MILLIMETERS

Figure P14-9 MILLIMETERS

670 Chapter 14 Weldment Drawings

Figure P14-10 MILLIMETERS

Cams 15
Chapter
Objectives
• Show how to use Design Accelerator to create cams.
• Explain how to create and use displacement diagrams.
• Show how to insert cams into assembly drawings.

INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains how to draw and design cams. Cams are eccentric objects that convert ro- cam: An eccentric object that
tary motion into linear motion. Cams are fitted onto rotating shafts and lift and lower followers converts rotary motion into
as they rotate. linear motion.
Cams can be designed and drawn using the Design Accelerator. Displacement diagrams are
defined and cams are generated from the displacement diagrams. The shape of the cam’s profile
causes the follower to rise and fall as the cam rotates. Changes in the cam’s displacement cause
the follower to accelerate. Excessive acceleration can generate excessive forces.
Figure 15-1 shows a cam drawn using Inventor. The cam bore includes a keyway.

Keyway

Figure 15-1

DISPLACEMENT DIAGRAMS
Displacement diagrams are used to define the motion of a cam using a linear diagram. The dis- displacement diagram: A
tances are then transferred to a base circle to create the required cam shape. Inventor will auto- linear diagram used to define
matically create a cam from given displacement information. the motion of a cam.
672 Chapter 15 Cams

Follower - moves up and down

Cam - rotates

Base Circle

The displacement of the cam.

Figure 15-2

Figure 15-2 shows a displacement diagram and a cam shape generated from the information
on the diagram. The displacement diagram shown is drawn using only straight lines, which is
called uniform motion. This diagram results in points of discontinuity that can result in erratic fol-
lower motion. Several different shapes can be used to smooth out these areas and create smoother
follower motion.

DRAWING A CAM USING INVENTOR

A cam is drawn using the Design Accelerator tool by first defining the physical characteristics
of the cam then defining the cam’s displacement diagram. A drawing of the cam will then auto-
matically be generated.

Exercise 15-1: Drawing a Cam

1. Start a new drawing, click the Metric tab, and use the Standard (mm).iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator and click the Disc Cam tool.
The Disc Cam tool is a flyout from the Shaft tool.
The Disc Cam Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 15-3. The first
cam position segment, the one between 0° and 90°, will have a broken line around it. The broken
line indicates that the segment is currently active.
3. Enter a Basic Radius of 15.00, Cam Width of 10.00, a Roller Radius of 5.00, and a
Roller Width of 5.00.
These values are unique to this example.
 Chapter 15 Cams 673

Set angle values here.

Enter values. Lift height

Click here to add

a segment.

Added
segment

Figure 15-3

4. Enter a Lift at End value of 10.00.

This value is noted as hmax.
5. Click the Add After box.
A third segment will appear to the right of the leftmost segment.
6. Click the rightmost of the three segments and drag the rightmost vertical line of the seg-
ment to the 360° line. This movement can also be accomplished by clicking the Motion
End Position box, entering a value of 360, and clicking the Calculate box.
7. Set the end position of the leftmost segment for 90 and the end position of the middle seg-
ment for 270.
See Figure 15-4.
8. Enter a Motion Function of Cycloidal (extended sinusoidal).
Figure 15-5 shows the Calculation portion of the Disc Cam Component Generator dialog
box. Note that the hmax value is 10.000 mm.
9. Click OK.
The File Naming dialog box will appear.
10. Click OK.
Figure 15-6 shows the resulting cam.
674 Chapter 15 Cams

End value for

middle segment

Set motion
here.

Dwell

Broken line indicates Drop 10

Rise 10
segment is active

Figure 15-4

Height Resulting cam

Calculated values

Figure 15-5 Figure 15-6

Exercise 15-2: Adding a Hole to a Cam

1. Locate the cursor on the cam, right-click the mouse, and click the Open option.
See Figure 15-7.
2. Right-click the mouse and click the Edit option.
See Figure 15-8.
3. Click the house-shaped icon above the Viewcube and create an Isometric View, then
right-click again and click the New Sketch option.
 Chapter 15 Cams 675

Right-click mouse
and click Edit.

Cam will
appear as
a front
orthographic
view.

Right-click mouse
and click Open.

Figure 15-7 Figure 15-8

See Figure 15-9.

4. Create a Point, Center Point.
Note:
Do not
click th
See Figure 15-10. option . e Finis
hE dit
5. Right-click the mouse and click the Finish Sketch
option.
6. Click the Hole tool and enter the values.

Point, Center Point

Click
here.

Figure 15-9 Figure 15-10

7. Click OK.
See Figure 15-11.
The cam will appear. See Figure 15-12.
676 Chapter 15 Cams

Enter values.

Figure 15-11

Figure 15-12

SAMPLE PROBLEM SP15-1

Design and draw a cam that meets the following specifications.
Base circle = Ø80 mm
Dwell = 45°
Rise 5 mm using harmonic motion over 90°
Dwell 45°
Rise 5 mm using harmonic motion over 90°
Drop 10 mm using parabolic with linear part motion in 90°
Bore = Ø20
Cam width = 10
Roller radius = 8
Roller width = 10
1. Create a drawing using the Standard.iam format.
2. Access the Design Accelerator.
3. Select the Disc Cam tool.
The Disc Cam Component Generator dialog box will appear. See Figure 15-13.
4. Enter the cam values.
5. Click the Add After box.
The cam will require five segments to define its motion. Segments can be added by using the
Add Before or Add After options on the Disc Cam Component Generator.
6. Complete the displacement diagram using the given specifications.
 Chapter 15 Cams 677

Enter values.

Define segments.

Figure 15-13

7. Click Calculate, then click OK.

Figure 15-14 shows the finished cam.

Finished cam Cam profile

Figure 15-14

ANIMATING CAMS AND FOLLOWERS

Cams may be animated, that is, made to rotate on the screen while their followers move linearly.
Figure 15-15 shows a cam that was previously created. A new Standard (mm).iam drawing was
created, and the Place Component tool was used to add the cam drawing to the assembly draw-
ing. The assembly drawing was saved as Cam Assembly.

Exercise 15-3: Creating a Follower

1. Click the Create Component tool and create a new component named Follower.
The Create In-Place Component dialog box will appear. See Figure 15-16.
678 Chapter 15 Cams

Figure 15-15

Enter name.

Figure 15-16

2. Click the Browse Templates box.

The Open Template dialog box will appear.
3. Click the Metric tab.
The Open Template dialog box will change.
4. Select the Standard (mm).ipt format; click OK.
The Create In-Place Component dialog box will appear.
5. Click OK.
6. Move the cursor into the drawing area and click the left mouse button.
A grid will appear on the screen. See Figure 15-17.

Create follower

Figure 15-17
 Chapter 15 Cams 679

7. Create a rectangular follower (10 × 10 × 100) as shown.

8. Click the right mouse button and select Done, then click the right mouse button again and
select Finish Sketch.
9. Extrude the follower sketch 10 mm.
10. Right-click the mouse and select Finish Edit.
See Figure 15-18.

Cam
Follower

Figure 15-18

11. Use the Constraint tool and constrain the follower tangent to the cam.
See Figure 15-19.
The Move and Rotate Component tool may have to be used to position the follower so it
can be constrained.

The Tangent
Constraint applied

Figure 15-19

Exercise 15-4: Creating a Follower Guide

1. Click the Create Component tool and create a new component named Guide. Use the
Standard (mm).ipt format.
See Figure 15-20.
2. Click the top surface of the follower to create a new sketch plane.
3. Click the Project Geometry tool on the 2D Sketch Panel, then click four lines of the top
surface of the follower. Right-click the mouse and select the Done option.
4. Sketch a rectangle around the projected top surface of the follower, then use the General
Dimension tool to define a 1-mm clearance between the guide and the follower.
5. Sketch a second rectangle around the first rectangle as shown, then right-click the mouse
and select the Done option, then the Finish Sketch option.
6. Use the Extrude tool to add a 5-mm thickness to the guide.
7. Right-click the mouse and select the Finish Edit option.
680 Chapter 15 Cams

Project Geometry tool applied

to the four lines of the top surface
of the follower
Enter name.

Figure 15-20

Exercise 15-5: Animating the Cam

Reorient the cam and follower as shown in Figure 15-21.
1. Right-click the cam in the browser box.
A dialog box will appear.
 Chapter 15 Cams 681

Figure 15-21

2. Select the Grounded option; that is, remove the check mark.
This action will unground the cam. The pushpin icon in the browser box will disappear. See
Figure 15-22.

Click here.

Pushpin indicates
part is grounded
Figure 15-22

3. Right-click the Guide heading in the browser box and select the Grounded option.
This procedure will fix the guide in place and allow the cam to rotate. The cam’s work axis
should be grounded so it will stay in place as the cam rotates.
4. Activate the cam and create a work plane through the cam’s work axis and the top surface
of the guide.
682 Chapter 15 Cams

Click here to remove

check mark.

Figure 15-23

See Figure 15-23.

5. Click the Constraint tool, Angle option, and define a 0.00 degree angle between the
work plane on the cam and the guide’s top surface.
6. Right-click the Angle (0.00 deg) listing in the browser box and select the Drive Con-
straint option.
The Drive Constraint dialog box will appear. See Figure 15-24.

Ground the guide.

Remove all grounds except for the

cam work axis and the guide. Cam will rotate and
follower will go up
and down within the
Ground the guide
work axis.

Figure 15-24

7. Set the Start angle for 0.00 deg and the End angle for 360.00 deg, then click the forward
button on the Drive Constraint dialog box.
The cam should rotate and the follower go up and down within the guide block. If the cam
does not rotate properly, check for unneeded constraints.
There are many different types of cam followers. Figure 15-25 shows four different types. As
a cam turns, the follower is pushed up and down. A spring is often used to force the follower to
stay in contact with the cam surface.
 Chapter 15 Cams 683

Knife

Sliding

Roller

Pivot with roller

Figure 15-25

SUMMARY
This chapter explained and illustrated how to draw and defined and used to generate cams with Design Accelerator.
design cams, which are eccentric objects that convert rotary A follower was created, and the cam and follower assembly
motion into linear motion. Displacement diagrams were was animated.

CHAPTER TEST QUESTIONS

Multiple Choice
1. Which of the following is not a type of cam follower? 4. Why are keys used with cams?
a. Rectangular a. To control their pressure angles
b. Knife b. To transfer rotary motion for the driving shaft
c. Sliding c. To change the effects of the Basic Radius.
d. Roller 5. Which of the following is not a standard cam material
2. The basic shape about which a cam is created is called the available in Inventor?
a. Roller radius a. Steel SAE 1030
b. Cylindrical face b. Malleable cast iron 33-8
c. Base circle c. Aluminum Alloy Alclad 7075-T6
d. Eccentricity d. #2 Pine
3. The acceleration and forces in a cam follower are
affected by
a. The cam’s material
b. The shape of the cam’s profile surface
c. Poisson’s ratio

True or False
1. True of False: Cams are eccentric objects that convert ro- 4. True or False: The part that contacts the profile surface of
tary motion into linear motion. a cam is called a follower.
2. True or False: When a cam has a constant radius it creates 5. True or False: Cams can be animated.
a dwell motion.
3. True or False: The base circle of a cam is its outside
diameter.
 684 Chapter 15 Cams

CHAPTER PROJECTS
Project 15-1: MILLIMETERS
Draw the Cam Support Assembly shown in Figure P15-1. For this
example the nominal dimensions for the bearings are as follows.
More detailed dimensions can be found in the Content Center.
DIN625—SKF 6203 (ID  OD  THK) 17  40  10
DIN625—SKF 634 4 × 13 × 4
GB 2273.2-87—7/70 8 × 18 × 5
The nominal dimensions for the rectangular key are 5 × 5 × 16.
The values for the compression spring are as follows:
Wire Diameter = 1.5
Inside Diameter = 9.0
Loose Spring Length = 24
Min. Load Length = 23
Fully Loaded = 20
Working Load Length = 21
Right Coil Direction
Active Coils = 10.125

Figure P15-1a Figure P15-1b

 Chapter 15 Cams 685

Figure P15-1c

Cast Base
P/N ENG-2008-A
MATL = Steel

Figure P15-1d
686 Chapter 15 Cams

Follower Subassembly

Figure P15-1e

Holder
P/N AM-232
MATL = Steel

Figure P15-1f

Follower Post
P/N AM-256
MATL = Steel

Figure P15-1g
 Chapter 15 Cams 687

Shaft
P/N SHF-4004-16
MATL=Steel

Detail drawing

Shaft
O 16 x 120

Keyway

See detail

Figure P15-1h Figure P15-1i

Project 15-2: MILLIMETERS

A. Draw the following cam:
Base circle = R73.0
Face width = 16.0
Rise 10.0 using harmonic motion in 90°
Dwell for 180°
Fall 10.0 using harmonic motion in 90°
Bore = Ø16.0
Keyway = 2.3 × 5 × 16 with a radius value of 2.3
Follower diameter = 16
Follower width = 4
B. Mount the cam into the Cam Support Assembly defined in
Project 15-1.
See Figure P15-2.
688 Chapter 15 Cams

Figure P15-2

Project 15-3: MILLIMETERS

A. Draw the following cam:
Base circle = Ø73.0
Face width = 16.0
Rise 8.0 using double harmonic motion—Part 1 motion in 90°
Dwell for 45°
Rise 6.0 using double harmonic motion—Part 1 motion in 90°
Dwell for 45°
Fall 14.0 using double harmonic motion—Part 1 motion in 90°
Bore = Ø16.0
Keyway = 2.3 × 5 × 16 with a radius value of 2.3
Follower diameter = 16
Follower width = 4
B. Mount the cam into the Cam Support Assembly defined in
Project 15-1.
C. Animate the cam and follower.

Project 15-4: MILLIMETERS

A. Draw the following cam and add a Ø24.0 × 16.0 hub. Place a
Ø16 hole through the hub and cam. Add an M4 hole though
the hub located 10.0 from the top surface of the hub, and insert
an M4 × 4.0 CSN 02 1181 Set Screw.
 Chapter 15 Cams 689

Base circle = Ø73.0

Face width = 16.0
Rise 6.0 using cycloidal motion in 45°
Dwell for 45°
Rise 6.0 using cycloidal motion in 90°
Dwell for 45°
Fall 12.0 using cycloidal motion in 90°
Bore = Ø16.0
Keyway = 2.3 × 5 × 16 with a radius value of 2.3
Follower diameter = 16
Follower width = 4
B. Design
Mount the cam into the Cam Support Assembly defined in
Project 15-1. Modify the shaft presented in Project 15-1 by
removing the keyway. Assign the mofified shaft a new part
number, SHT-466E.
C. Animate the cam and follower.

Project 15-5: MILLIMETERS

A. Draw the following cam:
Base circle = Ø73.0
Face width = 16.0
Rise 12.0 using harmonic motion in 90°
Dwell for 180°
Fall 12.0 using harmonic motion in 90°
Follower diameter = 16
Follower width = 4
B. Design
Make the following modifications, then mount the cam into
the Cam Support Assembly defined in Project 15-1.
Make the cam’s bore 20.0.
Modify the shaft to have a Ø20.0.
Select a new key based on the Ø20.0 shaft, and add the appro-
priate keyway to the shaft and cam.
Select a new bearing to accept the Ø20.0 shaft.
Modify the hole in the Cast Base to accept the outside diame-
ter of the selected bearing.
Consider using a counterbored hole to mount the bearing.
C. Animate the cam and follower.
This page intentionally left blank
Appendix

Figure A-1
692 Appendix

Figure A-2A

Figure A-2B
 Appendix 693

Figure A-3A

Figure A-3B
694 Appendix

Figure A-4A

Figure A-4B
 Appendix 695

Figure A-5

Figure A-6
696

Figure A-7
 Figure A-8
697
698

Figure A-9
 Figure A-10
699
This page intentionally left blank
Index

Abbreviations, 343 Patterning, 213–14

Addendum, 578 Rotating, 163
Angle, 166–67 Condition
Angle, Pressure, 578 Fixed, 397, 420–22
Animation, 174–75, 204–5 Floating, 396, 418–20
Cams, 677 Virtual, 418
ANSI, 2 Contraints
Arc Angle, 166–67
Center Point, 30 Flush, 164–66
Tangent, 29–30 Insert, 168
Assemblies Tangent, 168
Bottom–Up, 159 Mate 163
Exploded, 173 Show, 48
Gear, 591–97 Copy, 44
Top–Down, 159, 194–209 Counterbores, 259–61, 328–29
Axes Countersinks, 256–59, 328–29
Default, 89
Work, 97, 197 Datums, 410
Dedendum, 578
Backlash, 578 Delete, 5
Balloons, 177–78 Design Accelerator, 385, 497
Bearings, 555–67 Diagrams, Displacement, 671–74
Ball, 555, 560–64 Dialog box, Open, 1
Thrust, 555, 564–67 Diameter, Pitch, 578
Tolerances, 556–58 Dimensions, 309–51
Blocks 3D, 346
Title, 182–83 Adding Text, 323
Drawing, 190 Aligned, 320–22
Revision, 191–93 Baseline, 334–35, 377–79
BOM, 179–81 Centerlines, 345
Chain, 377–79
Cams, 671–83 Chamfers, 341
Animation, 677 Conventions, 310–12
Followers, 677–80, 683 Counterbore, 328–29
Center Mark, 126 Countersink, 328–29
Center, Content, 249 Creating, 312–14
Centerline, 27, 126 Diameter, 322–23
Chamfer, 32–35, 75–77, Fillets, 338
341, 500–1 -General, 309
Circle, 26 Hole Locations, 380
Coil, 102, 459 Hole tables, 335–36
Collars, 528–33 Holes, 316–18, 324
Component Irregular Shapes, 339–40
Copying, 199–200 Keys, 342
Place, 160 Keyseats, 342
Copying, 216–17 Locating, 337
Mirroring, 214–16 Model, 309
Moving, 163 Ordinate, 331–33

701
702 Index

Dimensions (Continued ) Formulas, 579

Orthographic Views, 345 Hubs, 581–86
Over Dimensioning, 330–31 Keyways, 588–91, 600–3
Overall, 315 Ratios, 586
Points, 344 Teeth, 578
Positioning, Text, 316 Terminology, 578
Radius, 322–23 Trains, 587
Rectangular, 380 Worm, 605–7
Rounds, External, 339 Worm, Supports, 607–8
Rounds, Internal, 338 Grounding, 162
Sectional Views, 344
Symbols 326–28 Holes, 11, 69–71
Terminology, 310
Vertical, 315 Insert, 168
Distance, Center, 578
Drawing, Scale, 318 Keys, 342
Drawings Pratt and Whitney, 513–18
Assembly, 159–17 Square, 507
Isometric, 175–77 Woodruff, 519–22
Presentation, 171–74 Keyseats, 342
Keyways, 507–12
ECOs, 193 Knurling, 341–42
Editing
3D Model, 86–89 Line, 21–25
Assembly Drawings, 209–13 Compound, 121
Hole Dimensions, 317 Hidden, 118–19
Sketch, 49–51 Precedence of, 120
Ellipse, 27 List, parts, 179–81
Extend, 41–42 Loft, 99–100
Extrude, 7–8, 13, 17, 66–67
Mate, 163
Face Draft, 77–78 Material, 103
Fasteners, 237–84 Menus, Pull–down, 3
Minimum length, 263–64 Mirror, 37–38, 81
Preferred Sizes, 388–89 Module, 578
Standard, 246–47 Move, 42–44
Types, 255–56
Files Notes, Drawing, 193
.iam, 2 Nuts, 251–54, 264–66
.idw, 2
.ipn, 2 Offset, 41
.ipt, 2, 12 O-Rings, 533–37
Fillet, 32, 73–75
Fits, 384–88 Panel
Fits, 562–63, 566, 692–99 2D Sketch, 4–5, 21–22
Flange, 629 Annotation, 313–14
Flush, 164–66 Part Features, 65
Flyout, 25 Part Features, 7
Followers, 677–80, 683 Presentation, 171
Freedom, Degrees of, 161–62 Sheet Metal Features, 627
Parts, Naming, 180–81
Gears, 577–608 Pattern
Assemblies, 591–97 Circular, 40, 82–83
Bevel, 597–603 Rectangular 38–39, 81–82
Bevel, Supports, 603–4 Flat, 636
Direction, 588 Pins, 530–32
 Index 703

Pins, Types, 531 Subassemblies, 183–88

Pitch, 578 Surface, Finishes, 389
Circular, 578 Surfaces, 117–22
Diametral, 578 Normal, 117
Default, 89 Oblique, 121
Sketch, 83–86 Rounded, 122
Work, 90–91 Slanted, 120–21
Work, Angled, 93–94 Sweep, 100–1
Work, Offset, 94–95 Symbols, 343
Point Symbols, Control, 389–94
Center Point, 14, 26, 70
Work, 197 Tangent, 168
Work, 95–97 Tapers, 66–67
Polygon, 35–36 Text, 51–52
Punches 636–43 Text, Unidirectional, 315, 321
Thickness, Circular, 578
Threads, 237–84
Rectangle, 30–32
Blind Holes, 242–44
Reliefs, 631
Callout, ANSI, 239–40
Revolve, 68–69
Callouts, Metric, 238–39
Ribs, 98–99
Hole Command, 244–46
Rings, Retaining, 501–6
Internal, 241–42
Rivets, 272–73
Representations, 240–41
Sizing, 247
Save As, 11 Terminology, 238
Screws, 251–52 Tolerances, 367–424
Screws, Flatheads, 256–59 Angular, 374–75
Setscrews, 269–71, 528–30, 585 Angularity, 413
Shafts, 497–540 Bearings, 556–58
Angular, 16 Circularity, 403
Collars, 528–33 Cylindricity, 403
Keys, 507–22 Direct methods, 367–68
O–Rings, 533–37 Double, 376–77
Retaining Rings, 501–6 Expressions, 368
Splines, 522–28 Flatness, 399
Uniform, 497–501 Geometric, 398–425
Sheet Metal, 625–43 limits, 372–74
Bend Radii, 629 Nominal Sizes, 384
Cuts, 632–35 Parallelism, 413
Flanges, 629 Perpendicular, 406
Gauges, 628, 691 Perpendicularity, 411–13
Holes, 632 Plus and Minus, 369–72
Reliefs, 631 Positional, 407–10, 416–19
Tabs, 631 Profiles, 414
Sheets, Drawing, 188–90 Runouts, 415–16
Shell, 71–73 Shaft/Hole, 381–82
Sketch, New, 9, 83–86 Standard Fits, 384–85
Spline, 25–26 Standard, 376
Splines, 522–28 Straightness, 400–2
Split, 78–80 Studies, 379–80
Springs Tools
Belleville, 477–78 Arc, Center Point, 30
Compression, 459–65 Arc, Tangent, 29–30
Ends, 461–65 Chamfer, 32–35
Extension, 466–72 Chamfer, 75–77
Torsion, 473–76 Circle, 26
704 Index

Tools (Continued ) Standard, 2–3

Circular Pattern, 40, 82–83 Sweep, 100–1
Coil, 102, 459 Trim, 42
Constraints, 46–47 Tweak, 173–74
Ellipse, 27 Trails, 174
Extend, 41–42 Trim, 42
Extrude 7–8, 13
Extrude, 66–67 Units, 319–20
Face Draft, 77–78 English, 12
Fillet, 32 metric, 16
Fillet, 73–75
General Dimension, 5, 9, 15, 21 Views
General Dimensions, 309 Orthographic, 117–37
Hole 11 Orthographic, Fundamentals, 117–22
Holes, 69–71 Auxiliary, 134–35
Line, 21–25 Break, 133
Loft, 99–100 Detail 132
Mirror, 37–38 Isometric, 128
Mirror, 81 Section, 128–30
Move, 42–44 Section, Aligned, 131
New Sketch, 9 Section, Multiple, 134
New, 2 Section, Offset, 130–31
Offset, 41 Viewcube, 4, 6–7, 13
Point, Center Point, 14, 26, 70
Polygon, 35–36 Washers, 266–69
Punch, 636–643 Webs, 98–99
Rectangle, 30–32 Weldments, 653–66
Rectangular Pattern, 38–39, 81–82 Welds
Revolved, 68–69 All Around, 661–62
Ribs, 98–99 Fillet, 653–58
Save As 11 Fillet, Intermittent, 658–59
Shell, 71–73 Groove, 663
Spline, 25–26 Symbols, 659–63
Split, 78–80